SOURCE OF ALL SUNS - HOLOGRAPHIC UNIVERSE
"Cosmic Oceanic Feelings of Oneness with the Universe, a Sense of
Unbroken Wholeness, a Sense of Unity with All Life, feeling a Loss of
Boundaries between themselves and others, when your thoughts are no
longer private and you are able to read the thoughts of others."
Вселенная дождалась после тысячалетий
И
вспыхнула Она
- Аквамариновой Красой
Из
Чёрных Дыр с Неистовством
и Целью,
Открыв
дорогу Переменам в ней !
Michael
Talbot's
"The Holographic Universe"
You
are not Your Physical Body; You are Not the Physical Matter: You are
White Sun Energy! And Everything what happened to You, happened for One
Good
Reason: to Merge Your Energy with the Energies of Others, with the
Energies of Earth, with the Energies of Universe!
ONLY
THOSE, WHO CAN WITHSTAND GIGANTIC LEVEL OF EMOTIONS, CAN RETURN TO THE
SOURCE OF ALL SUNS, BECAUSE SUCH LEVEL OF EMOTIONS IS CONCENTRATED IN
THERE ! EMOTIONS ARE PARTS OF SUN ENERGY !
ТОЛЬКО
ТЕ, КТО МОЖЕТ ВЫДЕРЖАТЬ ГИГАНСКИЙ УРОВЕНЬ ЭМОЦИЙ, МОЖЕТ ВЕРНУТЬСЯ В
ИСТОЧНИК ВСЕХ СОЛНЦ, ТАК КАК ТАКОЙ УРОВЕНЬ ЭМОЦИЙ СКОНЦЕНТРИРОВАН
ИМЕННО ТАМ ! ЭМОЦИИ - ЭТО ЧАСТИ СОЛНЕЧНОЙ ЭНЕРГИИ !
Announcement - this Page
has been modified to be viewable on mobile devices !
Важное Сообщение - эта Страница может быть просмотрена на
мобильных телефонах !
Link
to Site Map listing other articles, books and useful
websites: Site Map
ДОМАШНЯЯ
СТРАНИЦА - HOME PAGE
INTENT
- ИНТЭНТ (кое-что перевела на русский)
Important Announcement !
Our
(and others) Videos are not Linear, they are Holographic, they are a
part of Our Mutual Advanced Holographic Structure. Nothing really is
separated, I mean our Minds, Our Society, our videos, our website and
us,
everything we do, our lives - all of it belongs to Our Advanced
Holographic
Structure!
Our website also is not Linear, it is Holographic !
We need to mentally switch from Linear Thinking to Holographic Thinking
!
Physical Earth will be further destroyed, but
simultaneously replaced by holograms of our Everyday World. Most
of Australia is now - HOLOGRAPHIC, especially the middle of it and
areas closer to the equator (these areas are closed to the public)!
Covid 19 - Quarantines are invented for this reason as well.
Politicians prefer people to stay at home and not to discover holograms
around themselves. Most of Australians don't even know the meaning of a
hologram, though watched 2 dimensional holograms on TV for most of
their lives !
Michael Talbot's "Holographic
Universe", 1991. The full content of this book in electronic form is
now on this link!
ГОЛОГРАММА ПИРАМИДЫ - ПАРИЖ
Few thoughts from Alex Collier's
"Defending Sacred Ground":
"On
March 23, 1994 the Andromedans told me, that all the 'Black Holes' in
the known Universe began to emanate a color-sound frequency (of aquamarine color! LM).
It's
the first time, it has happened in recorded history in our 'Universe',
which the Andromedans have been taught is a 21 trillion year old
Hologram..."
Q: Could you explain further, what the Andromedans said about our
ability to project holographically with our minds?
AC:
They said, that all of our experiences are recorded holographically.
When you look at me, for instance, your brain is not only recording,
what you see, but also my energy field, the thoughts in my energy
field, and more. The mind is recording that all the time, and they say,
that we have the capability to tap into it. Moraney made reference to
the fact, that the whole Universe is changing, because thought is
changing. They are one and the same."
Q: Can the holographic camera you mentioned before just access this
incarnation, or can it go further back?
AC: It can go further back.
Q: Back to the state of our DNA prior to the removal of the 10 strands?
AC:
Yes, and we have this information about that state, recorded within our
energy field. Everything, we have ever been, is recorded there... They
(Andromedan race) say, that our Universe, in terms of our reckoning of
linear time, is a 21 trillion year-old Hologram. They also say,
that
there are 100 trillion galaxies in this Universe, including all
dimensions. One hundred trillion!
AC: I would like to share something with you, that Vasais had to say on
the subject of intention. Vasais said, "the smallest piece of
physicality, that all of you and
we build upon, is, what your science
calls the 'atom'. You are taught, that each single piece of physicality
contains electrons, protons and neutrons, which attach themselves
together to form, what you call, nature. Molecules manifest this union
to
create everything. We would like to expose a flaw in your sciences.
Your experts teach, that atoms spin unpredictably. Where is the
predictable solidity of matter? Where do the elements come from? Your
science cannot answer this. They have only theory. Your science
presupposes, that matter has its source within matter. This is the
flaw,
we want to share with you. The true
source of all elements of physical
matter is INTENT. The INTENT of the ISNESS (the Source of All Suns!
LM), that makes all things
possible, has an invisible side..."
ВЫТЯГИВАНИЕ
ГОЛОГРАММЫ
Что-то
неизвестное в буквальном смысле высасывает жизнь из галактик - 2 videos
https://hi-news.ru
Астрономы
в настоящий момент наблюдают за очень странным и одновременно пугающим
феноменом. По всей Вселенной то и дело что-то в буквальном смысле
высасывает жизнь из разбросанных по всему космосу галактик...
Атмосфера Земли по неизвестной причине теряет кислород
http://earth-chronicles.ru/news/2016-09-27-96522
С
ПОМОЩЬЮ СТИХИЙНЫХ БЕДСТВИЙ НАШ ПОВСЕДНЕВНЫЙ МИР МЕНЯЮТ НА ГОЛОГРАММЫ
ЛЮДЕЙ, РАЗНООБРАЗНЫХ ФИЗИЧЕСКИХ ОБЪЕКТОВ, ЛЕСОВ, ПОЛЕЙ, ДЕРЕВЕНЬ И
ЦЕЛЫХ ГОРОДОВ ! ГОЛОГРАММЫ ПРОНИКАЮТ К НАМ ИЗ НАШИХ НЕФИЗИЧЕСКИХ МИРОВ
И СКОРО ЗАМЕНЯТ ВСЁ ФИЗИЧЕСКОЕ НА ЗЕМЛЕ, ВКЛЮЧАЯ ДАЖЕ ТАКИЕ ОБЪЕКТЫ КАК
НАШИ ГОРЫ И ОКЕАНЫ ! НАША
ФИЗИЧЕСКАЯ ПЛАНЕТА БУДЕТ И ДАЛЬШЕ РАЗРУШАТЬСЯ И, В ТО ЖЕ
ВРЕМЯ,
ЗАМЕНЯТЬСЯ ГОЛОГРАММАМИ НАШЕГО ПОВСЕДНЕВНЕГО МИРА 4го Уровня Сознания !
В
настоящее время большая часть Австралии - голографическая, особенно её
центральные части и районы, близкие к экватору (посетители туда не
допускаются). Ковид 19 - Карантин изобрели ещё и по этой причине:
политики предпочитают всеми силами держать народ взаперти, особенно в
местах Порталов, чтобы не обнаружить голограммы.
ГОЛОГРАММА
НАШЕЙ ПЛАНЕТЫ -
HOLOGRAM OF EARTH
HOLOGRAPHIC
FABRIC OF TIME (made with laser) OVER EARTH CAN BE SEEN ON A SURFACE OF
WATER !
ГОЛОГРАФИЧЕСКАЯ
СЕТКА МАТЕРИИ
ВРЕМЕНИ (сделана спомощью лазера) ХОРОШО ВИДНА НА ПОВЕРХНОСТИ ВОДЫ ЭТИХ
ФОТО !
Вся
Вселенная может оказаться просто голограммой. Mar 22, 2021
https://earth-chronicles.ru/news/2021-03-22-149487
Новая
теория, которую в настоящее время исследуют ученые, относится ко всем
аспектам реальности и ставит под сомнение саму реальность. Физики из
Национальной ускорительной лаборатории Ферми поставили перед собой
задачу доказать, действительно ли Вселенная, которую мы наблюдаем в
телеско
пы, существует или это всего лишь двухмерная проекция. Наш
трехмерный мир не является предметом споров, и наши органы чувств
предоставляют конкретную информацию, которую мы принимаем как должное.
Исследователи утверждают, что информация обо всем в нашей наблюдаемой
Вселенной на самом деле может быть закодирована в крошечных двумерных
пакетах информации, похожих на пиксели на экране, причем их размер
намного меньше размера отдельного атома. Они признают, что существует
вероятность того, что мы живем в 2D-проекции. Подземный объект был
построен недалеко от Чикаго, чтобы проверить эту теорию. Два
интерферометра посылают лазерный луч мощностью один киловатт, который
отражается и рекомбинирует. Ученые измеряют то, что они называют
«голографическим дрожанием» пространства-времени.
Если их результаты
подтвердят эту теорию, все основы реальности будут поколеблены, и все,
что мы знаем о Вселенной, будет поставлено под сомнение.
A few thoughts from "Far
Journeys" - Robert Monroe - "Prologue: No other energy, available to
you as human, is as powerful !"
Chapter 6 -
1. Segue
(direction to proceed to the next movement without a pause).
All
humans move into the out-of-body state during sleep. Going, falling,
dropping asleep is simply a process of moving out of phase with
physical time-space. As the event takes place, the various stages of
sleep are readily interpreted, if viewed from this perspective. Thus
deep or "delta" sleep represents the point, where consciousness is
completely detached from physical reality, and the physical body is
operating on an autonomic basis with preprogrammed alert and alarm
systems to recall consciousness, if needed. The fact, that most human
consciousnesses do not or cannot recall or remember these nightly
excursions is insufficient proof, that they do not take place. A night
on booze can provide the same degree of amnesia.
(No other
precisely, as you have found in-Human physical Earth. There are many
other consciousness growth centers or schools, as you call them,
throughout, what you know, as the Physical Universe.)
106 - And the
other training centers on Planets, circling those billions of stars,
tied to us by an intelligent energy field, common to all of us. Were
they as unaware, as we? I felt very small, looking at the stars, and
beyond.
151 - Some males suspect Women secretly rule the Earth.
BB focused intently. (Do they?)
I'm male at this point, and I suspect they do.
154
- The M-Band Noise was thunderous, a cacophony of fear, anger,
and about every other human emotion, every desire, every need connected
with human physical existence. All open, naked, uncovered, up front.
(Now
we hear more and more the sounds and emotions of the M-Band Noise,
because we are coming closer and closer to it! The Vibration of the
Planet is getting faster and faster, we are getting higher and higher!
LM).
206 - (We can escort you to a Physical Earth Possibility
at a point in your time measurement beyond the year 3000. The principal
inhabitants are what we call H-plus, Humans-Plus,
to indicate
modification from those in your present time. As you are now, you will
be a visitor.)
Несколько мыслей из книги "Далёкие
Путешествия" Роберта Монро
"Пролог: Никакая другая Энергия такая же
могучая, которая
имеется в твоём распряжении, потому что ты - человек!"
Глава 6 - (Segue -
непрерываемый переход от одного движения к другому).
Глава 6 - 1 (Segue - непрерываемый переход от одного движения к
другому).
"Все
люди во время сна вылетают без тела выше вибрацией. Идти спать, упал
без сознания - это просто процесс перехода из вибрации физического мира
в вибрацию нефизического мира. Так глубокий или "дельта" сон
представляет собой точку, в которой сознание совсем отключено от
физической реальности, и физическое тело работает на автономной основе
с програмированной системой подъёма и тревоги, чтобы быть опять в
сознании, когда это необходимо. Тот факт, что, обычно, человеческое
сознание не помнит или не может вспомнить свои ночные экскурсии, ещё не
достаточное доказательство, что этого не происходит. Ночь алкоголя
может дать ту же степень амнизии..."
Стр. 106 - Ответ на вопрос Роберта о центрах развития и роста сознания:
"Нет
точно таких сложных для человека, как ты нашёл на физической Земле.
Есть много других школ для роста сознания, как ты их называешь, по
всей, как говорится, физической Вселенной..."
"И другие
тренировочные центры на Планетах, двигающихся вокруг миллиардов звёзд,
привязаны к нам интеллигентным Энергетическим Полем (M-Field - Поле
Разума), общим для всех нас. Они также об этом не знают, как и мы?"
Смотря на звёзды и дальше, я чувствовал себя таким
маленьким.
151 - Роберт: "Некоторые мужчины думают, что Женщины тайно управляют
Землёй."
ВВ сильно сфокусировался: ("Это так?")
Роберт: "В этой жизни я - мужчина и я подозреваю, что это - правда."
154
- Шум, создаваемый Полем Разума был громоподобным, какофония страха,
злости и остальных человеческих эмоций, каждое желание, каждая
потребность, связанная с физическим человеческим существованием.
Всё обнажено, открыто наружу во всей красе.
(Сейчас
мы слышим всё больше и больше звуки и эмоции Поля Разума, так как мы
приближаемся к нему ближе и ближе! Вибрация Планеты ускоряется всё
больше и больше, мы поднимаемся всё выше и выше! H-plus -
Человек с плюсом имеется ввиду Выпускник Планетарной
Игры, тот, кто прожил все формы жизни на Земле. ЛМ).
206 -
"(Мы можем проводить тебя на новую возможную физическую Землю во
временную точку, согласно вашему измерению времени, это будет выше 3000
года. Практическими жителями там являются те, кого мы называем H-plus -
Человек с плюсом. Это чтобы показать отличия от тех, кто на Старой
Земле в настоящее время. Тебе придётся быть посетителем в том виде в
каком ты находишься сейчас.)"
VR-виртуальной реальности шлемы могут стать
«медицинским инструментом»
https://www.popmech.ru/
Управление
по санитарному надзору за качеством пищевых продуктов и медикаментов
США (FDA) разрешило «лечение» виртуальной реальностью (VR). Специалисты
объясняют, что терапия в шлемах VR может облегчить хронические мышечные
боли. VR-шлемы — это не только игрушки! Эти устройства могут помочь с
хроническими болями. Новый метод лечения уже получил название EaseVRx,
его можно применять лишь по назначению врача. Смысл такой терапии
заключается в том, что человек с помощью гарнитуры VR выполняет
специальные дыхательные упражнения. Важно отметить, что терапия
направлена не на физические упражнения. В рамках лечения используются
когнитивно-поведенческие методы, которые помогают расслабиться,
переключить внимание и облегчить боль. Программа EaseVRx была
разработана компанией AppliedVR. Она включает 56 сеансов
продолжительностью от двух до 16 минут, которые должны проводиться
каждый день в течение восьми недель. Лечение может проводиться дома или
под присмотром врача. Кристофер М. Лофтус, доктор медицинских наук из
FDA, сказал: «Миллионы взрослых живут с хронической болью в пояснице,
которая может повлиять на разные аспекты их повседневной жизни.
Уменьшение боли является важным шагом на пути к комфортной и
полноценной жизни. Сегодня мы считаем, что можем помогать людям, не
используя опиоидные обезболивающие препараты». Одобрение FDA основано
на исследовании, которое проводилось с 179 пациентами, страдающими
хроническими болями в пояснице. Во время тестирования каждому участнику
была предоставлена либо иммерсивная 3D-программа EaseVRx, либо
контрольная 2D-программа, в которой не использовались методы
когнитивно-поведенческой терапии. Каждого участника попросили постоянно
«заниматься» в течение восьми с половиной месяцев и сообщать о том, как
они ощущают боль. В конце испытаний 66% участников EaseVRx сообщили об
уменьшении болей более чем на 30%.
Физик привел зрителей в недоумение необычной теорией о происхождении
людей - 11 апрель, 2021
https://earth-chronicles.ru/news/2021-04-11-150029
Британский
физик, профессор Брайан Кокс (Brian Cox) привел в недоумение зрителей
утренней передачи This Morning своим выступлением в программе. Как
сообщает Daily Mail, ученый рассказал о необычной теории происхождения
людей, указав на то, что каждый человек на самом деле может быть
голограммой. 53-летний Кокс отметил, что Вселенная может оказаться
вовсе не такой, какой ее все привыкли осознавать по учебникам. «Отвечая
на те вопросы, что Стивен Хокинг задал еще более 50 лет назад, мы
пришли к выводу — и да, я скажу это вслух и остановлюсь — что мы можем
быть голограммами», — заявил физик. Ведущая Рут Лэнгсфорд (Ruth
Langsford) отреагировала на слова ученого. «Мой разум оказался не готов
к такому. Я никогда не была сильна в научных предметах в школе и очень
стараюсь понять ваши умозаключения, но это взрывает мой мозг», —
заметила она. Далее Кокс и ведущие сменили тему общения, но в конце
интервью Лэнгсфорд вернулась к теме. «Я теперь задумалась,
действительно ли я голограмма?» Услышав ее, физик ответил: «Да,
вероятно это так». В комментариях многие изумились такому заявлению от
ученого. Некоторые также принялись шутить на эту тему. «Я голограмма,
класс. А может кто-нибудь прийти и отключить меня?» — написала
пользовательница после просмотра эфира. Были и те, кто поблагодарил
физика за то, что натолкнул их на мысль изучить новые данные о том, что
такое Вселенная.
Это
фото показывает, что мы живём в виртуальном мире!
Создано
крошечное устройство для формирования объемных голограмм
http://earth-chronicles.ru/news/2017-02-02-101060
Голограммы перестали быть фантастикой
http://earth-chronicles.ru/news/2017-02-18-101599
911:
Мир одурачили голограммой?
(Video)
http://www.youtube.com/watch?feature=player_embedded&v=PDcacB96Q9Q
НАШИ ГОЛОГРАФИЧЕСКИЕ МЫСЛИ
Я не удивлюсь если организаторы
Олимпиады
представят Миру
через Средства Массовой
Информации, Олимпиаду - в виде Электронной Голографии, заранее
изготовленной ! Я на
такой голографической конференции , посвящённой Женщинам, и
проходящей в Торонто, Канада уже
побывала в 2011 году. А сотни Женщин - участников из многих стран, так
и не догадались, что вся она
была заранее записана голографически (как фильм), а потом
продемонстрирована участникам
конференции! Нас всех посадили на такое расстояние от сцены, чтобы мы
не могли догадаться, что там
не живые люди, а голограммы людей! Это только доказывает как легко нас
всех обвести вокруг пальца! Об этой
конференции я написала в
2011 году на нашем сайте на одной из Страниц (на английском)
и поместила много
фото. Короче, нужно
болеть не за голографических "Олимпийских спортсменов"
сидя у телевизора или
компьютера, а за борцов с Андромеды, помогающих нам поменять нашу
Планету из Красной в
Белую!
Alex Collier's "Defending Sacred Ground" about holographic languages
:
"Now, when
they (Andromedans) talk to each other, they talk telepathically, and their language is
holographic,
much like the ancient Chinese language or the ancient Japanese. They're
literally holographs, but you can't literally pull them up off the
page. A
holographic language involves entire concepts at once,
so for example you can get one symbol, and perhaps in that one symbol
could be 10,000 years of a history. It's very hard to describe and it's
taken me a long time to try to figure it out. They were very very
patient in teaching me, how to understand their language."
Алекс Коллие говорит о
голографическом языке расы людей с Андромеды в своей книге "Защищая
Священную Землю":
"Когда они
(Andromedans) говорят друг с другом, они говорят телепатически, и их
язык - голографический, очень похожий на древние китайский и японский
языки. Это, в сущности, голограммы, но в действительности, вы не можете
оторвать их от страницы. Написанные символы голографического языка
сразу представляют из себя целые понятия. Например, вам дали один
символ (буква) и в одном этом символе может заключаться описание 10000
лет истории.
Это очень трудно описать, мне взяло много времени, чтобы в этом
разобраться. Они
(Andromedans) были очень терпеливы со мной, когда
учили меня понимать их язык."
Во
Вселенной в основном Телепатическое общение
ЕДИНОБОРСТВО МЕЖДУ
НАТУРАЛЬНЫМИ И ЭЛЕКТРОННЫМИ ГОЛОГРАМАМИ : КТО - КОГО? - FIGHT BETWEEN
HOLOGRAMS: WHO IS STRONGER ?
Куда
текут мысли человека, туда и течёт его энергия! Если мысли о человеке,
еде, деньгах, войне, то туда и течёт энергия человека. Если мысли
человека о Солнце, о разных мирах, о Любви, туда и течёт энергия этого
человека!
Известно
что наши Мысли - натуральные голограммы, потому что поддерживаются
Солнечной Энергией наших Душ и нашими уникальными ЭМОЦИЯМИ. Негативные
этой возможности не имеют и поэтому создают голограммы искусственно с
помощью технологий и часто своими голограммами вызывают наши ЭМОЦИИ,
чтобы придать им больше реальности (ЭМОЦИИЯМИ Негативы не обладают).
Наши ЭМОЦИИ могут быть позитивными и негативными (сильно царапающими,
как описывал их Роберт Монро). Тысячи лет Негативные aliens держат нас
в негативном страхе, заставляя нас таким образом создавать негативные
МЫСЛИ-ГОЛОГРАММЫ. А мы даже не знаем, что мы создаём и что это
служит на пользу Негативным; т.е. наши голограммы были направлены
против нас самих ! Мы должны создавать МЫСЛИ-ГОЛОГРАММЫ в своём воображении не во
вред
себе, а те, которые будут нам на пользу.
Вся наша жизнь
опирается на голограммы, исходящие от нас самих, а сюжеты к этим
голограммам создают СМИ, фильмы, видео, Интернет, семья, религия,
правительства и масса других факторов, например: Инопланетяне.
Было бы логично не создавать голографические миры, в которых редко кто
счастлив, а наоборот: разрушать их в нашем воображении. Я лично не
считаю свою жизнь особо счастливой, поэтому мне легко мысленно
полностью разрушать голографические миры, в которых счастья я не
чуствовала. В настоящее время редко найдёшь истинно счастливого
человека: мир такой. Поэтому советую всем : создавайте только те
МЫСЛИ-ГОЛОГРАММЫ в своём воображении, которые разрушат наши
несчастливые
миры, полные невидимых Негативов- aliens! Но не создавайте новые миры
здесь и в это время, не тратьте впустую вашу энергию на мысли, эмоции и
действия в этом направлении, не идите против ТЕЧЕНИЯ И ЖЕЛАНИЯ СТАРОЙ
ВСЕЛЕННОЙ, и тогда мы все освободимся от этой голографической тюрьмы!
Верьте в свои силы и в этом единоборстве с искусственными инопланетными
голограммами мы победим с помощью Мощной Единой Разрушительной Силы
наших натуральных МЫСЛЕЙ-ГОЛОГРАММ !
You
Are
a Computer
Projection
Летчики
учатся виртуальной реальности.
(Мы всю жизнь это делаем, когда летаем по ночам без тела: то есть живём
и работаем в виртуальных мирах! )
Голографические
НЛО
и нарисованные образы в небе
"Здесь,
вокруг нас, сама ВЕЧНОСТЬ.
Заниматься тем, чтобы сокращать её к размеру чепухи, это - мелочно и
даже катастрофично!"
Слова Дон Хуана из книги
Карлоса Кастанэды "Истории Могущества".
Что
же там светится в Австралии?
2012
» Декабрь » 25
http://earth-chronicles.ru/news/2012-12-25-36850
НАСА призывает не беспокоиться по поводу колоссальных световых пятен на
ночных снимках Австралии из
космоса. Наличие ярких пятен света («фантомных
городов» или просто светящиеся голограммы городов)
ночью на незаселенных территориях страны
обеспокоило многих. Эти световые пятна в пустынных районах страны
выглядят настолько огромными, что
создаваемое ими зарево существенно больше того, что отмечает на
континенте крупнейшие города
Австралии — Сидней, Мельбурн, Бризбан, Перт...
АМЕРИКАНСКИЕ
ФИЗИКИ ПРИШЛИ К
СЕНСАЦИОННОМУ ЗАКЛЮЧЕНИЮ
"Двое
американских физиков — Д. Койн из Калифорнийского
университета в Санта Крузе и Д. Ченг из
Альмаденского исследовательского центра IBM
в Сан-Хосе —
пришли к сенсационному заключению: все
известные элементарные частицы могут представлять собой миниатюрные
черные
дыры..."
'Hovering ship'
photographed off Cornish coast by walker ,
4 March 2021
https://www.bbc.com/news/uk-england-cornwall-56286719
Много
миражей снято в Китае. Все наши сны это - ГОЛОГРАММЫ ! Ниже
информация о призраках из книги Карлоса Кастанэда "Активная Сторона
Бесконечности".
This
information is from "The Active Side of Infinity" in other words from -
"Intent", by Carlos
Castaneda. All our night
Dreams are HOLOGRAMS :
193
"...The
Old Sorcerers believed, that the Awareness of this type of
Inorganic Being would last as long, as the Earth is alive. The Earth is
their Matrix..."
"Is there a possibility,
don Juan, that ghosts and apparitions really
exist?"
"Whatever you may
call a ghost or an apparition," he said, "when it is
scrutinized by a Sorcerer, boils down to one issue. It is
possible, that any of those ghostlike Apparitions may be a
conglomeratation of
Energy Fields, that have
Awareness, and which we turn into things we
know. If that's the case, then the Apparitions have Energy.
Sorcerers call them energy-generating
configurations. Or, if No Energy emanates from them, in
this case they are Phantasmagorical Creations,
usually of a very strong
person, strong in terms of
Awareness."
"Старые
Колдуны знали, что Сознание таких Неорганических Существ будет
существовать так долго, пока Земля - ещё жива. Наша Планета - их
Матрица."
"Дон Хуан, действительно ли
существуют призраки?"
"Что
бы ты не называл призраком," ответил он, "когда Колдун его осматривает,
это сводится только к одному. Возможно, что это любой из этих призраков
не что иное, как Сборище Энергетических Полей, имеющих Сознание, и то,
что мы превращаем в вещи, которые нам знакомы. Тогда в этом случае, у
призраков будет энергия. Таких Колдуны называют Голограммы,
производящие энергию. Но если энергия не идёт от них, тогда это просто
Голограмма, обычно созданная очень сильным человеком в смысле высокого
Сознания."
Обнаружены
волны, идущие по "паутине
Вселенной"
https://ria.ru/
Астрономы
впервые обнаружили своеобразные волны, идущие по нитям "паутины
Вселенной" — гигантской сети из нитей темной и видимой
материи,
объединяющей все скопления галактик и облака межгалактического газа,
говорится в статье, опубликованной в журнале Science.
Черные
дыры объединяющихся галактик
окутаны коконом из газа и пыли
http://earth-chronicles.ru/news/2017-05-11-104293
Черные
дыры снискали дурную славу в популярной культуре за их привычку
поглощать все, что попадает в их окрестности. В действительности,
звезды, газ и пыль могут двигаться по орбитам вокруг черных дыр в
течение продолжительных периодов времени, до тех пор пока гигантское
возмущение не приведет к втягиванию материала внутрь. Объединение двух
галактик является одной из разновидностей таких возмущений. Когда две
галактики объединяются, а их черные дыры приближаются друг к другу, газ
и пыль устремляются в направлении черных дыр. При этом происходит
выделение гигантского количества энергии, и материал начинает падать на
«голодную» черную дыру, формируя то, что называют
активным ядром
галактики. Новое исследование, проведенное с использованием
космического телескопа НАСА NuSTAR, демонстрирует, что на последних
стадиях слияний галактик в направлении черной дыры падает настолько
много газа и пыли, что экстремально яркое активное ядро галактики
оказывается окутанным «коконом» из газа и пыли.
Комбинированное
гравитационное влияние двух галактик приводит к уменьшению скоростей
вращения газа и пыли, которые в ином случае вращались бы вокруг черной
дыры свободно. Эта потеря энергии приводит к тому, что материал падает
на черную дыру. «Чем глубже развивается столкновение, тем
более и более
плотным облаком из газа и пыли становится окутано активное ядро
галактики, - сказал Клаудио Риччи (Claudio Ricci), главный автор нового
исследования. – Галактики, которые объединяются уже очень
давно,
оказываются почти полностью окутанными плотными облаками из газа и
пыли».
ФОТО
МИРАЖЕЙ И
ПРИЗРАКОВ ИЛИ
ГОЛОГРАММ
Вот
как человек выглядит после смерти в аварии
Вне
тела. 30 January 2020
https://zen.yandex.ru
Эту
историю давным-давно мне рассказал один знакомый. Звали его дядя Вова,
он был вор-рецидивист. Более тридцати лет он провёл в местах не столь
отдалённых, и во вранье никогда не был замечен, поэтому я ему поверил.
Где дядя Вова сейчас - понятия не имею, родни у него не было, спросить
не у кого. Если и живёт где, то ему уже за восемьдесят должно быть, он
уже тогда, в девяностых, в пенсионном возрасте был. В конце
восьмидесятых годов я отбывал срок в одной из многочисленных колоний
Красноярского края. Работали на пилораме, распускали лес, который
завозили с вольных лесоповалов, на плаху, тёс, брус. В ту зиму я сильно
заболел, простудился. А какое лечение в лагере? Естественно, простуда
дала осложнение на лёгкие и я слёг с воспалением лёгких и температурой
под сорок. Бухнулся в обморок прямо на разводе, очнулся уже на койке.
Прописали две недели стационара и шесть уколов пенициллина в сутки,
хотя во всём цивилизованном мире им уже не лечили тогда, но мы же не
мир, а зона в тайге в тысяче километрах от Красноярска. Но я на всё был
готов, лишь бы отлежаться, не пугала даже шести разовая встреча с
ужасным стеклянно-металлическим шприцем, одноразовыми пластиковыми
тогда и не пахло. В одну из ночей было особенно плохо. Температура
перевалила за сорок, меня раз за разом проверял фельдшер, даже положили
в подмышки замороженные пузырьки с водой, чтобы сбить жар. Знаете, как
чувствует себя человек с такой высокой температурой? Вот 37-38, это
плохо. А когда к сорока и выше, совсем другое дело, тебе на всё
плевать. Ничего не болит, всё в тумане, будто пьяный. Я лежал,
периодически проваливаясь в забытье. И вдруг почувствовал невыразимую
лёгкость во всём теле. Такого ощущения не до, не после,
я больше не
испытывал. Я вдруг увидел со стороны себя, лежащего на кровати. Выйдя
из палаты, я без труда пересёк вахту, и абсолютно не одетый вышел на
территорию лагеря. Меня никто не видел. Появилась шальная мысль
пересечь запретку, что я и сделал без проблем. Оказавшись за
территорией, я вдруг понял, что происходит что-то ненормальное. Что со
мной?
Как только эта мысль появилась в голове, я тут же очнулся на
кровати. Что это было? Видение? Фельдшер, наверное, в сотый за
сегодняшний день раз проверил температуру. 37,5: "Жить будешь, кризис
прошёл." - С улыбкой промолвил он.
Существует
мир невидимых фантомов и
различных существ, живых и обладающих сознанием. 19 December 2019
https://zen.yandex.ru
То,
что в природе есть невидимые разумные сущности, зафиксировали приборы.
Академик В. Б. Поляков в своей работе описывает эксперименты,
проводимые совместно петербургскими и киевскими учёными. Операторы в
Киеве мысленно создают фантом и направляют его в место над столом в
Санкт - Петербурге в назначенное время. Самое интересное, что в
назначенное время в Санкт - Петербурге этот фантом достоверно
регистрируется приборами. Этот опыт проводили множество раз и всё
повторялось. Доктор геолого - минералогических наук геофизик Л.С.
Прицкер обладает способностью фотографировать фантомы и другие сущности
Тонкого Мира. В 1990 году с ним произошёл такой случай. Он находился
дома за столом в кругу семьи и двоих друзей, когда его неожиданно
окутало горячее светлое облако. Оно было очень горячим и накрыло его
сверху, как колпаком. Его затылок как будто пронизали тысячи иголок.
Облако прошло по доктору с головы до ног и так же неожиданно исчезло,
как и появилось. Всё это происходило на глазах свидетелей, сидящих за
столом и длилось секунд 30 - 40. Плицкер после этого заболел и
находился без сознания в течение 36 часов. При этом наблюдалась высокая
температура его тела. После этого доктор быстр пошёл на поправку и у
него появился мощный прилив сил. Он изменился, как будто перешёл в
новое качество. Сейчас Плицкер обладает способностью лечить людей своей
энергетикой и является экстрасенсом. Всю свою психовосприимчивость он
направляет на изучение Тонкого Мира. Ему удаётся фотографировать мир
невидимых, летающих над головами фантомов и различных существ, которые
живы и обладают сознанием. В 1990 году на скрипичном концерте Брамса в
Алма - Ате у Плицкера возникло "чувство контакта". Он почувствовал чьё
- то присутствие и сфотографировал это место фотоаппаратом, который
всегда носил с собой. " В стороне от сцены, слева от неё, стоит,
скрестив руки на груди, во фраке, белой манишке, с галстуком "бабочка"
средних лет мужчина с длинными усами и высоким с залысинами лбом -
композитор Брамс. Он слушает исполнителей своей музыки." Когда были
сопоставлены фото настоящего Брамса и его фантома, то они оказались
одинаковыми. Это был композитор Брамс в возрасте 42 лет и именно в это
время он написал исполняющиеся произведения. До этого Доктор Плицкер не
знал, как выглядит композитор.
Роберт Монро
"Далёкие Путешествия", глава 6 "Segue", стр. 63-64
(мой перевод с английского):
"1.
Все люди отрываются от своих физических тел и улетают в своих
энергетических (эфирных) телах в виртуальные миры во время сна или
потери сознания по каким-то причинам. Заснуть, задремать, потерять
сознание - это просто процесс ухода из Пространства и Времени низкой
вибрации на более высокую вибрацию, где понятий Пространства и Времени
уже не существует. Другими словами, перехода с низкой вибрации
физического тела на более высокую вибрацию энергетического тела. Зная
это, становится легче объяснить происходящее. Таким образом глубокий
сон или "delta" сон это когда Душа (сознание) полностью отрывается от
тела и от физического мира, а физическое тело оперирует автоматически с
програмированной системой тревоги и пробуждения вернуть сознание, если
в этом есть нужда. Тот факт, что человек (человеческое сознание) не
хочет или не может вспомнить эти ночные полёты, не может служить
доказательством, что этого не происходит..." (Хочу добавить, что в
виртуальных мирах мы посещаем классы "Спящих" Невербальной Коммуникации до тех пор пока вибрация
нашего сознания не повысится от какой-нибудь боли настолько , чтобы
перейти классом выше ! ЛМ).
Robert Monroe "Far
Journeys", Chapter "Segue", Chapter 6, p. 63-64:
"1.
All humans move into the out-of-body state during sleep (and each time they lose
consciousness, LM). Going,
falling, dropping asleep is simply a process of moving out of phase
with physical Time-Space. As the event takes place, the various stages
of sleep are readily interpreted, if viewed from this perspective. Thus
deep or "delta" sleep represents the point, where Consciousness is
completely detached from physical reality, and the physical body is
operating on an autonomic basis with preprogrammed alert and alarm
systems to recall consciousness, if needed. The fact, that most Human
Consciousnesses do not or cannot recall or remember these
nightly
excursions is insufficient proof, that they do not take place..." (In addition to this, we
have been attending virtual Sleepers' NVC Classes
at night, till our consciousness grow up enough to start attending
higher NVC class - Non Verbal Communication Class! LM).
Жизнь
после смерти. Как
устроен Тот Свет. 10 марта 2019
(пришлось немного
отредактировать, то есть убрать кое-какую чушь и вставить что нужно! ЛМ)
https://zen.yandex.ru/
Мысль
о смерти вызывает у большинства людей тревогу, если не сказать больше.
Некоторых она приводит в ужас и они боятся даже представить, что могут
когда нибудь умереть. Эти люди считают смерть своим финалом, и не верят
в то, что душа и сознание могут пережить их тело. Однако, они
ошибаются. Та жизнь, которую мы проживаем, это бесконечно малая часть
нашего существования – череды жизней в физических телах и тех
периодов
когда мы находимся вне их. И смерть — всего
лишь
шаг вперёд на этом
бесконечном пути. В первой части своего рассказа о жизни после смерти я
описала что человек чувствует в тот момент когда умирает и вскоре после
него. В этой статье я расскажу о том, что происходит позже. Все то о
чем я пишу основано на личном опыте ( воспоминаниях о прошлых жизнях и
смертях), и описаниях опыта других людей которые мне довелось читать и
слышать. Если объединить все эти данные и выделить в них общие моменты,
то получится примерно то что я собираюсь рассказать. Итак, после того
как душа окончательно покинула тело она перемещается во второе, или
эфирное тело. По своему «весу» оно самое тяжёлое из
тонких тел,у него
вероятно даже есть ничтожно малая физическая плотность. У этого тела
есть доступ как в материальный мир, так и в более тонкие
«слои»
реальности, и оно некоторое время бродит между ними. После того как
второе тело несколько дней или даже недель побуждает в
«приграничных» с
нашим миром энергетических областях, оно распадается. После этого
человек остаётся в своих более лёгких телах и отправляется в те области
которые мы называем Тем Светом. Начинаются они с небольшой транзитной
зоны, которую можно назвать своеобразным «вокзалом»
(или «чистилищем»
если использовать религиозную терминологию). В эту зону есть выход из
большинства областей Того Света, там человека как правило встречают
друзья, родственники или «местные жители» чтобы
проводить его к месту
назначения. Никаких «страшных судов» в этом месте
не происходит, у
человека просто появляется время подумать о своей прошедшей жизни и
обсудить ее с другими. Хотя, откровенно говоря, большинству не до
этого, они все ещё привыкают к своему новому состоянию и задаются
вопросом что их ждёт дальше. А дальше все зависит от того куда именно
человек попадет. Вообще если подбирать к Тому Свету сравнение с
привычными нам вещами, он будет больше всего похож на
«навороченную»
компьютерную игру, с отлично прорисованной графикой, звуками и даже
восприятием телесных ощущений. Ну или осознанное сновидение, которым
можно управлять (если вам ближе такое сравнение). Отличие Того Света от
нашего мира в том, что изменять его в разы проще. Можно по желанию
создавать обстановку, пейзажи , свой облик, мгновенно перемещаться из
одного места в другое . Все это просто и реализуется силой желания и
мысли. Однако, есть одно большое Но. Как на компьютере нужно обладать
правами администратора, чтобы вносить важные изменения, так и на Том
Свете надо обладать соответствующим «разрешением»
чтобы управлять всем
вокруг. Будет ли выдано это разрешение, и на какие действия оно будет
распространяться – все это зависит от того в какую область
человек
попадет. А областей на том свете много, даже очень. Его можно сравнить
с многоэтажной, где множество квартир и самые разнообразные жильцы.
Этажи этого дома населены по принципу «подобное притягивается
к
подобному». Поскольку на том свете все соткано из гораздо
более тонкой
энергии чем в нашем мире, то мысли и желания человека неосознанно
притягивают его в соответствующие «квартиры». Люди,
близкие при жизни,
разумеется, после смерти тоже находятся вместе, так как их
привязанность друг к другу служит своего рода
«магнитом». Именно по
этой причине родные или друзья встречают вновь прибывших на Тот свет
—
в столь «пластичной» среде где мысль и действие это
одно и то же,
притяжение между душами срабатывает почти мгновенно. Как выглядят места
обитания душ на Том Свете? Как ни странно, большая часть из них
напоминает наш мир. Такая среда обитания создана для людей, чтобы им
было комфортно. Поскольку физическими телами души там не обладают, то в
большинстве вещей необходимых нам – еде, сне, материальных
благах, у
них потребности нет. Время от времени можно
«инсценировать» то или иное
знакомое событие из жизни – к примеру ту же трапезу, однако
это скорее
ритуал. От нашей жизни Тот Свет отличается несколькими основными
моментами, описываю их ниже:
Первое – это глубина «физических»
ощущений. Те кто пробовал когда нибудь управлять сном, прекрасно поймут
эту разницу. Во сне, как и после смерти, мы находимся в более тонких
телах. Мы можем делать то же самое что и в жизни – мне к
примеру
доводилось бывать в прекрасных местах, где можно потрогать листья на
деревьях и вдохнуть аромат цветов. Однако, во сне и после смерти эти
ощущения гораздо слабее, как раз за счёт отсутствия нижних тел. Наше
тело хоть и накладывают на нас множество ограничений, тем не менее
дарит яркость и глубину восприятия. Следовательно, чем больше у
человека тел, тем больше он «погружен» в
реальность. Единственное, что
остается неизменным — это сила эмоций. Поскольку за эмоции
отвечают
более тонкие тела (состояние более высокой вибрации! ЛМ), которые после
смерти не разрушаются, то мыслительный процесс, привязанности и чувства
не меняются. Тот Свет во многом похож на компьютерную игру или
управляемый сон. Второе, после смерти время для человека идёт
абсолютно по другому. Знакомое нам «линейное» время
действует только в
нашей физической реальности, как только человек отдаляется от нее почти
сразу начинаются искажения. К примеру, те же призраки (люди у которых
по разным причинам не распалось второе или энергетическое тело), уже
плохо ощущают движения нашего времени, они часто
«застревают» в одном
моменте, а на Том Свете разрыв с нами ещё больше. Это происходит потому
что само ощущение времени абстрактно. Когда человек является частью
определенного энергетического потока, то есть нашего мира, он ощущает
течение времени наравне с другими своими «соседями»
по этому потоку.
Когда человек умирает, то есть перемещается в другой – менее
насыщенный
поток, то там время идёт иначе. Когда идёшь по улицам города, то у тебя
одни представления о расстояниях, а когда пролетаешь над этим же
городом на самолёте – уже совсем другие. Люди после смерти
как будто
садятся в этот самый самолёт – с одной стороны их время идёт
быстрее, с
другой – им открывается более широкий
«обзор» в отношении нашей
реальности – то есть прошлого и будущего.
Третье- на Том Свете все
построено на обмене энергиями, (причем вибрационно гораздо более
высокими! ЛМ) чем наша, и это важно. К примеру, общение происходит
через мысли, передвижения – через намерение двигаться,
изменения
обстановки – через желание и энергию. Поскольку плотная
физическая
материя отсутствует (низкой вибрации! ЛМ), то все становится проще и
быстрее, и намерение почти сразу превращается в результат.
«Многоэтажка» Того Света интересна тем, что нижние
этажи весьма
отличаются от верхних. Можно сказать что нижние уровни выше по
плотности (но ниже вибрацией! ЛМ), и в наибольшей степени копируют наш
мир. Там как правило «обитают» те кто в скором
времени собирается вновь
родиться, поэтому для них обустроена похожая на нашу реальность
обстановка. Обитатели этих этажей (а они самые густогаселенные) после
смерти не сильно меняются. Большинство из них помнит только свою
последнюю жизнь, и принимает тот облик из своего прошлого который им
нравился больше всего (как правило внешность из молодости). Как и у
всех после смерти, у них есть способность к телепатии и воздействие
намерением на окружающую обстановку, а также частично развито
ясновидение. В остальном их существование не сильно отличается от жизни
на земле – они так же общаются с близкими людьми, которые
находятся
рядом, большинство из них даже выполняют определенную работу.
Поскольку человек такое существо, которому нужно занятие, то и после
смерти люди продолжают заниматься тем, что им интересно – там
можно
встретить дома, школы, университеты, иногда даже церкви и больницы.
Хотя, казалось бы, во всем этом нет нужды, но для обитателей нижних
этажей гораздо интереснее и комфортнее заниматься интересными им делами
и после смерти – обмениваться опытом, рассуждать о жизни и
делиться
своими знаниями. Чем ближе к «верхушке» Того Света,
тем более (высокая
вибраця тех энергий! !) и тем меньше тотУровень напоминает нашу
реальность. Туда попадают, вернее направляются, люди более высокой
степени развития (более высокой вибрации! ЛМ), и там уже гораздо больше
«местных жителей» — то есть душ которые
проживают на Том Свете уже
какое-то время..."
Holographic cities of non-physical worlds
Holograms Stretching
http://earth-chronicles.ru/news/2015-07-10-81778
Группа исследователей, финансируемых Европейским Союзом, разработала
новый тип дисплея, который позволяет пальцами рук буквально вытягивать
изображение с плоского сенсорного экрана и манипулировать им в
пространстве. Меняющий форму дисплей является частью проекта под
названием GHOST — Generic, Highly-Organic Shape-Changing
Interfaces. На исследования и разработку было потрачено три года. В
работе принимали участие университеты Копенгагена, Бристоля, Ланкастера
и Эйндховена. Вместо стекла в новом дисплее используется лайкра –
эластичный синтетический материал. Камера глубины регистрирует
положение пальцев и степень нажатия на экран. Специально созданные
компьютерные алгоритмы обнаруживают и интерпретируют данные глубины в
момент, когда рука тянется к дисплею. К изображению на эластичном
экране можно прикоснуться пальцами, схватить его и вытянуть за пределы
экрана. Это возможно благодаря технологии ультразвуковой левитации.
Исследователи говорят о широкой области применения созданной ими
технологии. Сейчас ученые работают над реализацией этой технологии в
смартфонах. Всего в рамках программы было создано несколько прототипов
дисплеев непостоянной формы. Один из них способен генерировать
тактильные голограммы. Our reality is projected illusion ceated by a
consciousness 'program'. It is a virtual reality experiment in linear
time and emotion created by a consciousness source, through which our
souls experience in many dimensions simultaneously. This is not unlike
the films 'The Matrix', 'The 13th Floor', the Holodeck in the TV series
Star Trek, among others. The program is composed of grids and brought
into Awareness by electromagnetic energy at the physical level.
Awareness of the program is created as one's consciousness spirals
lower, hence slower, to experience emotions and linear time.
HOLOGRAPHIC
UNIVERSE, book by Michael Talbot
"N.
David Mermin, a physicist at Cornell University, points out, physicists
fall into three categories: a small minority is troubled by the
philosophical implications;
a second group has elaborate reasons,
why they are not troubled, but their explanations tend "to miss the
point entirely"; and a third group has no elaborate explanations, but
also refuses to say, why they aren't troubled. Their position
is
unassailable (not able to be challenged)," says Mermin."
"The Holographic Universe" by Michael Talbot, p. 140.
Michael
Coleman Talbot (September
29, 1953
– May
27, 1992)
was an American author of a number of books highlighting parallels
between ancient mysticism and quantum mechanics, and
espousing a theoretical model of reality, that suggests the Physical
Universe
is akin to a Giant Hologram.
According to
Talbot ESP, telepathy,
and other paranormal
phenomena
are real and are a product of his holographic model of reality.
Writing
and influences
"THE
HOLOGRAPHIC UNIVERSE" - MICHAEL TALBOT
Michael Talbot was
born in Grand Rapids, Michigan, in 1953. He is the author of Mysticism
and the New Physics, Beyond the Quantum and Your Past Lives: A
Reincarnation Handbook, as well, as three novels. This book is written
in 1991. The new data are of such far-reaching relevance, that they
could revolutionize our understanding of the human psyche, of
psychopathology, and of the therapeutic process. Some of the
observations transcend in their significance the framework of
psychology and psychiatry, and represent a serious challenge to the
current Newtonian-Cartesian paradigm of Westem science. They could
change drastically our image of human nature, of culture and history,
and of reality. Dr. Stanislav Grof on holographic phenomena in The
Adventure of Self-Discovery.
Born
in Grand Rapids, Michigan, Michael Talbot's (non-fiction) books include
Mysticism And The New Physics, Beyond The Quantum, and (arguably his
most notable work) The Holographic Universe. In The Holographic
Universe, Talbot made many references to the work of David Bohm and
Karl H. Pribram, and it is quite apparent, that the combined work of
Bohm and Pribram is largely the cornerstone, upon which Talbot built
his ideas. Michael Talbot attempted to use the holographic perspective
to explain paranormal activity and extrasensory perception. Talbot also
ties in elements of Carl Jung's "collective unconscious" theory, as
well, as the synchronicity phenomenon, to suggest the existence of an
underlying Unified Field (M-Field), that ties all things in the
Universe
together. Talbot also often referenced Stanislav Grof, whose work on
Holotropic Breathwork was also of obvious influence. It is said, that
Talbot has made the often esoteric concepts of Bohm, Pribram, et al,
accessible to the general public. This may be in some part due to his
earlier work as a science fiction author. Talbot attempted to
incorporate psychology, religion, anthropology, spirituality and
science to shed light on truly profound questions, that we have
struggled with since the genesis of humanity.
After
reading "Holographic Universe" twice I must add: most of us have less
vivid memories, because we don't have enough personal energy, left in
us to remember our memories and our dreams. Sorcerers restore all their
memories to perfection by doing RECAPITULATION for many years, it means
returning their lost energies and getting rid of unwanted emotions and
memories! Carlos Castaneda and Taisha Abelar
describe this method in their books and I posted some extracts about
this technique on our website! By the way, Don Juan's team of Sorcerers
were All Experts on Practical Use of Holography! Below are some
important points from this book by Michael Talbot :
"...Creating
the illusion, that things are located, where they are not, is the
quintessential (pure, highly concentrated essence of something) feature
of a Hologram...
if you look at a Hologram, it seems to have extension in
Space, but if you pass your hand through it, you will discover: there
is
nothing there. Despite what your senses tell you, no instrument will
pick up the presence of any abnormal energy or substance, where the
Hologram appears to be hovering. This is because a Hologram is a
Virtual Image, an image, that appears to be where it is not, and
possesses no more extension in Space, than does the three-dimensional
image you see of yourself, when you look in a mirror. Just as the image
in the mirror is located in the silvering on the mirror's back surface,
the actual location of a Hologram is always in the photographic
emulsion on the surface of the film, recording it...the visual cortex
(outer layer or cerebrum, kidneys, adrenal gland) was responding not to
patterns, but to the frequencies of various waveforms, he began to
reassess the role frequency played in the other senses...the ear was a
frequency analyzer...our sense of smell seems to be based on, what are
called osmic frequencies...our skin is sensitive to frequencies of
vibration...taste may involve frequency analysis...our physical
movements may be encoded in our brains in a language of Fourier wave
forms...
Pribram realized, that if the Holographic Brain Model was
taken to its logical conclusions, it opened the door on the
possibility, that objective Reality (of Objects)—
the World of
coffee cups, mountain vistas, elm trees, and table lamps—might not even
exist, or at least not exist in the way, we believe, it exists. Was it
possible,
he wondered, that what the mystics had been saying for
centuries, was true, reality was maya, an illusion, and what was out
there was really a vast, resonating symphony of waveforms, a
"frequency domain", that was transformed into the World, as we know it,
only after it entered our senses? Realizing, that the solution,
he
was seeking, might lie outside his own field, he went to his physicist
son for advice. His son recommended he look into the work of a
physicist named David Bohm. When Pribram did, he was electrified. He not
only found the answer to his question, but also discovered, that
according to Bohm, the Entire Universe was a Hologram
...The
path,
that led Bohm to the conviction, that the Universe is structured like a
Hologram, began at the very edge of matter, in the world of subatomic
particles...
Although
an electron can sometimes behave, as if it were a compact little
particle, physicists have found, that it literally possesses no
dimension. This is difficult for most of us to imagine, because
everything at our own level of existence possesses dimension. And yet,
if you try to measure the width of an electron, you will
discover it's an impossible task. An electron is simply not an
object, as we know it.
Another
discovery physicists made is, that an electron can manifest as either a
Particle or a Wave! If you shoot an electron at the screen of a
television, that's been turned off, a tiny point of light will appear
when it strikes the phosphorescent chemicals, that coat the glass. The
single point of impact the electron leaves on the screen clearly
reveals the Particle-like side of its nature. But this is not the only
form the electron can assume. It can also dissolve into a blurry cloud
of energy and behave, as if it were a Wave, spread out over Space. When
an electron manifests as a Wave it can do things no Particle can. If it
is fired at a barrier, in which two slits have been cut, it can go
through both slits simultaneously. When wavelike electrons collide with
each other, they even create Interference Patterns. The electron, like
some shape-shifter out of folklore, can manifest as either a Particle
or a Wave. This chameleon-like ability is common to all subatomic
particles. It is also common to all things, once thought to manifest
exclusively as Waves. Light, Gamma Rays, Radio Waves, X Rays—all can
change from Waves to Particles and back again. Today physicists
believe, that Subatomic Phenomena should not be classified solely as
either Waves or Particles, but as a single category of somethings, that
are always somehow both. These somethings are called Quanta, and
physicists believe they are the basic stuff, from which the Entire
Universe is made. Recall
Bohm's assertion, that there is no such thing as disorder, only orders
of indefinitely high degree!
Contents.
Introduction
PART
1: A REMARKABLE NEW VIEW OF REALITY
1 The Brain as Hologram 11
2 The Cosmos as Hologram 32
PART II: MIND AND BODY
3 The Holographic Model and Psychology 59
4 I Sing the Body Holographic 82
5 A Pocketful of Miracles 119
6 Seeing Holographically 162
PART III: SPACE AND TIME
7 Time Out of Mind 197
8 Traveling in the Superhologram 229
9 Return to the Dreamtime 286
Introduction
In
the movie Star Wars, Luke Skywalker's adventure begins, when a beam of
light shoots out of the robot Artoo Detoo and projects a miniature
three-dimensional image of Princess Leia. Luke watches spellbound as
the ghostly sculpture of light begs for someone named Obi-wan Kenobi to
come to her assistance. The image is a hologram, a three-dimensional
picture, made with the aid of a laser, and the technological magic,
required to make such images, is remarkable. But what is even more
astounding is, that some scientists are
beginning to believe the Universe itself is a kind of Giant Hologram, a
splendidly detailed illusion
no more or less real, than the image of Princess Leia, that starts Luke
on his quest. Put another way, there is evidence to suggest, that our
world and everything in it—from snowflakes to maple trees to falling
stars and spinning electrons—are also only ghostly images, projections
from a level of reality so beyond our own, it is literally beyond both
space and time. The main architects of this astonishing idea are two of
the world's most eminent thinkers: University of London physicist David
Bohm, ... one of the world's most respected quantum physicists; and
Karl Pribram, a neurophysiologist at Stanford University and author of
the classic neuropsychological textbook "Languages of the Brain".
Intriguingly, Bohm and Pribram arrived at their conclusions
independently and while working from two very different directions.
Bohm became convinced of the Universe's Holographic Nature only after
years of dissatisfaction with standard theories' inability to explain
all of the phenomena, encountered in quantum physics. Pribram became
convinced, because of the failure of standard theories of the brain to
explain various neurophysiological puzzles. However, after arriving at
their views, Bohm and Pribram quickly realized: the Holographic Model
explained a number of other mysteries as well, including the apparent
inability of any theory, no matter how comprehensive, ever to account
for all the phenomena, encountered in nature; the ability of
individuals
with hearing in only one ear to determine the direction, from which a
sound originates; and our ability to recognize the face of someone we
have not seen for many years, even if that person has changed
considerably. But the most staggering thing about the Holographic Model
was, that it suddenly made sense of a wide range of phenomena so
elusive, they generally have been categorized outside the
province of scientific understanding. These include telepathy,
precognition, mystical feelings of Oneness with the Universe, and even
psychokinesis, or the ability of the mind to move physical objects,
without anyone touching them. Indeed, it quickly became apparent to the
ever growing number of scientists, who came to embrace the Holographic
Model, that it helped explain virtually all paranormal and mystical
experiences, and in the last half-dozen years or so it has continued to
galvanize researchers and shed light on an increasing number of
previously inexplicable phenomena.
For example.
In 1980 University
of Connecticut psychologist Dr. Kenneth Ring proposed, that near-death
experiences could be explained by the Holographic model. Ring, who is
president of the International Association for Near-Death Studies,
believes such experiences, as well, as death itself, are really nothing
more, than the shifting of a person's consciousness from one level
(frequency) of
the Hologram of Reality to another. In 1985 Dr. Stanislav Grof, chief
of psychiatric research at the Maryland Psychiatric Research Center and
an assistant professor of psychiatry at the Johns Hopkins University
School of Medicine, published a book, in which he concluded, that
existing neurophysiological models of the brain are inadequate and only
a Holographic model can explain such things, as unusual phenomena,
experienced during altered states of consciousness.
At the 1987
annual meeting of the Association for the Study of Dreams held in
Washington, D.C., physicist Fred Alan Wolf delivered a talk, in which
he asserted, that the Holographic model explains lucid dreams
(unusually vivid dreams, in which the dreamer realizes he or she is
awake). Wolf believes such dreams are actually visits to parallel
realities, and the Holographic model will ultimately allow us to
develop a "physics of consciousness", which will enable us to begin to
explore more fully these other-dimensional levels of existence. In his
1987 book entitled Synchronicity: The Bridge Between Matter and Mind,
Dr. F. David Peat, a physicist at Queen's University in Canada,
asserted, that synchronicities (coincidences, that are so unusual and
so psychologically meaningful, they don't seem to be the result of
chance alone) can be explained by the Holographic model. Peat believes
such coincidences are actually "flaws in the fabric of reality." They
reveal, that our thoughts: are much more intimately connected
to the Physical World, than has been hitherto suspected. These are only
a few of the thought-provoking ideas, that will be explored in this
book. Many of these ideas are extremely controversial. Indeed, the
Holographic model itself is highly controversial and is by no means
accepted by a majority of scientists. Nonetheless, and as we shall see,
many important and impressive thinkers do support it and believe: it
may
be the most accurate picture of reality, we have to date. The
Holographic model has also received some dramatic experimental support.
In the field of neurophysiology numerous studies have corroborated
Pribram's various predictions about the Holographic Nature of Memory
and Perception.
Similarly, in 1982 a landmark experiment, performed
by a research team, led by physicist Alain Aspect at the Institute of
Theoretical and Applied Optics, in Paris, demonstrated, that the web of
subatomic particles, that compose our Physical Universe - the very
fabric of reality itself - possesses, what appears to be, an undeniable
"holographic" property. These findings will also be discussed in the
book. In addition to the experimental evidence, several other things
add weight to the holographic hypothesis. Perhaps the most important
considerations are the character and achievements of the two men, who
originated the idea. Early in their careers, and before the holographic
model was even a glimmer in their thoughts, each amassed
accomplishments, that would inspire most researchers to spend the rest
of their academic lives, resting on their laurels. In the 1940s Pribram
did pioneering work on the limbic system, a region of the brain
involved in emotions and behavior. Bohm's work in Plasma Physics in the
1950s is also considered landmark. But even more significantly, each
has distinguished himself in another way. It is a way even the most
accomplished men and women can seldom call their own, for it is
measured not by mere Intelligence or even alent (?). It is measured by
Courage, the tremendous resolve it takes to stand up for one's
convictions, even in the face of overwhelming opposition. While he was
a
graduate student, Bohm did doctoral work with Robert Oppenheimer.
Later, in 1951, when Oppenheimer came under the perilous scrutiny of
Senator Joseph McCarthy's Committee on Un-American Activities, Bohm was
called to testify against him and refused. As a result, he lost his job
at Princeton and never again taught in the United States, moving first
to Brazil and then to London. Early in his career Pribram faced a
similar test of mettle. In 1935 a Portuguese neurologist named Egas
Moniz devised, what he believed was, the perfect treatment for mental
illness. He discovered, that by boring into an individual's skull with
a surgical pick and severing the prefrontal cortex from the rest of the
brain, he could make the most troublesome patients docile. He called
the procedure a prefrontal lobotomy, and by the 1940s it had become
such a popular medical technique, that Moniz was awarded the Nobel
Prize. In the 1950s the procedure's popularity continued and it became
a tool, like the McCarthy hearings, to stamp out cultural undesirables.
So accepted was its use for this purpose, that the surgeon Walter
Freeman, the most outspoken advocate for the procedure in the United
States, wrote unashamedly, that lobotomies "made good American
citizens" out of society's misfits, "schizophrenics, homosexuals, and
radicals." During this time Pribram came on the medical scene. However,
unlike many of his peers, Pribram felt it was wrong to tamper so
recklessly with the brain of another. So deep were his convictions,
that while working as a young neurosurgeon in Jacksonville, Florida, he
opposed the accepted medical wisdom of the day and refused to allow any
lobotomies to be performed in the ward, he was overseeing. Later at
Yale
he maintained his controversial stance, and his then radical views very
nearly lost him his job. Bohm and Pribram's commitment to stand up for
what they believe in, regardless of the consequences, is also evident
in the holographic model. As we shall see, placing their, not
inconsiderable, reputations behind such a controversial idea is not the
easiest path either could have taken. Both their courage and the
vision, they have demonstrated in the past, again add weight to the
Holographic Idea. One final piece of evidence in favor of the
Holographic Model is the paranormal itself. This is no small point, for
in the last several decades a remarkable body of evidence has accrued
(increased) suggesting, that our current understanding of Reality, the
solid and comforting sticks-
and-stones picture of the World, we all
learned about in high-school science class, is wrong. Because these
findings cannot be explained by any of our standard scientific models,
science has in the main ignored them. However, the volume of evidence
has reached the point, where this is no longer a tenable situation. To
give just one example, in 1987, physicist Robert G. Jahn and clinical
psychologist Brenda J. Dunne, both at Princeton University, announced,
that after a decade of rigorous experimentation by their Princeton
Engineering Anomalies Research Laboratory, they had accumulated
unequivocal (determinate, certain) evidence, that the mind can
psychically interact with physical reality.
More
specifically, Jahn and Dunne found, that through mental concentration
alone, Human Beings are able to affect the way certain kinds of
machines operate. This is an astounding finding and one, that cannot be
accounted for in terms of our standard picture of reality. It can be
explained by the holographic view, however. Conversely,
because
paranormal events cannot be accounted for by our current scientific
understandings, they cry out for a new way of looking at the Universe,
a new scientific paradigm (standard). In addition to showing how the
Holographic Model can account for the paranormal, the book will also
examine how mounting evidence, in favor of the paranormal, in turn
actually seems to necessitate the existence of such a model. The fact,
that the paranormal cannot be explained by our current scientific
worldview is only one of the reasons it remains so controversial.
Another is, that psychic functioning is often very difficult to pin
down in the lab, and this has caused many scientists to conclude: it
therefore does not exist. This apparent elusiveness will also be
discussed in the book. An even more important reason is, that contrary
to what many of us have come to believe, science is not prejudice-free.
I first learned this a number of years ago, when I asked a well-known
physicist, what he thought about a particular parapsychological
experiment. The physicist (who had a reputation for being skeptical of
the paranormal) looked at me and with great authority said: the results
revealed "no evidence of any psychic functioning whatsoever."
I had
not yet seen the results, but because I respected the physicist's
intelligence and reputation, I accepted his judgment without question.
Later, when I examined the results for myself, I was stunned to
discover the experiment had produced very striking evidence of psychic
ability. I realized then, that even well-known scientists can possess
biases and blind spots. Unfortunately this is a situation, that occurs
often in the investigation of the Paranormal. In a recent article in
American Psychologist, Yale psychologist Irvin L. Child examined how a
well-known series of ESP dream experiments, conducted at the Maimonides
Medical Center in Brooklyn, New York, had been treated by the
scientific establishment. Despite the dramatic evidence, supportive of
ESP, uncovered by the experimenters, Child found their work had been
almost completely ignored by the scientific community. Even more
distressing, in the handful of scientific publications, that had
bothered to comment on the experiments, he found the research had been
so "severely distorted", that its importance was completely
obscured. How is this possible?
One reason is: science is not
always as objective, as we would like to believe. We view scientists
with a bit of awe, and when they tell us something, we are convinced,
it must be true. We forget, they are only human and subject to the same
religious, philosophical, and cultural prejudices, as the rest of us.
This is unfortunate, for as this book will show, there is a great deal
of evidence, that the Universe encompasses considerably more, than our
current worldview allows.
But why is science so resistant to the
paranormal in particular?
This is a more difficult question. In
commenting on the resistance, he experienced to his own unorthodox
views on health, Yale surgeon Dr. Bernie S. Siegel, author of the
best-selling book Love, Medicine, and Miracles, asserts, that it is
because people are addicted to their beliefs. Siegel says, this is why,
when you try to change someone's belief, they act like an addict. There
seems to be a good deal of truth to Siegel's observation, which perhaps
is why so many of civilization's greatest insights and advances have at
first been greeted with such passionate denial. We are addicted to our
beliefs and we do act like addicts, when someone tries to wrest from us
the powerful opium of our dogmas. And since Western science has devoted
several centuries to not believing in the paranormal, it is not going
to surrender its addiction lightly. I am lucky. I have always known
there was more to the World, than is generally accepted. I grew up in a
psychic family, and from an early age
I experienced firsthand many
of the phenomena, that will be talked about in this book. Occasionally,
and when it is relevant to the topic, being discussed, I will relate a
few of my own experiences. Although they can only be viewed as
anecedotal evidence, for me they have provided the most compelling
proof of all, that we live in a Universe, we are only just beginning to
fathom (understand), and I include them, because of the insight they
offer. Lastly, because the holographic concept is still very much an
idea in the making and is a mosaic of many different points of view and
pieces of evidence, some have argued, that it should not be called a
model or theory, until these disparate points of view are integrated
into a more Unified Whole. As a result, some researchers refer to the
ideas, as the Holographic Paradigm (Paradigm - any example or model,
used
as a standard). Others prefer Holographic Analogy, Holographic
metaphor, and so on. In this book and for the sake of diversity I have
employed all of these expressions, including Holographic Model and
Holographic Theory, but do not mean to imply, that the Holographic Idea
has achieved the status of a model or theory in the strictest sense of
these terms. In this same vein it is important to note, that although
Bohm and Pribram are the originators of the Holographic Idea, they do
not embrace all of the views and conclusions, put forward in this book.
Rather, this is a book, that looks not only at Bohm and Pribram's
theories, but at the ideas and conclusions of numerous researchers, who
have been influenced by the Holographic Model and who have interpreted
it in their own sometimes controversial ways. Throughout this book I
also discuss various ideas from quantum physics, the branch of physics,
that studies subatomic particles (electrons, protons, and so on).
Because I have written on this subject before, I am aware, that some
people are intimidated by the term quantum, physics and are afraid they
will not be able to understand its concepts. My experience has taught
me, that even those, who do not know any mathematics, are able to
understand the kinds of ideas from physics, that are touched upon in
this book. You do not even need a background in science. All you need
is an Open Mind, if you happen to glance at a page and see a scientific
term, you do not know. I have kept such terms down to a minimum, and on
those occasions, when it was necessary to use one, I always explain it,
before continuing on with the text. So don't be afraid. Once you have
overcome your "fear of the water," I think you'll find swimming, among
quantum physics' strange and fascinating ideas, much easier, than you
thought. I think, you'll also find, that pondering a few of these ideas
might even change the way you look at the World. In fact, it is my
hope, that the ideas, contained in the following chapters, will change
the way you look at the World. It is with this humble desire, that I
offer this book.
PART 1 - A REMARKABLE NEW VIEW OF
REALITY - The Brain as Hologram
11
"It
isn't, that the World of appearances is wrong; it isn't, that there
aren't objects out there, at one level of reality. It's, that if you
penetrate through and look at the Universe with a Holographic System,
you arrive at a different view, a different Reality. And that Other
Reality can explain things, that have hitherto remained inexplicable
scientifically: paranormal phenomena, synchronicities, the apparently
meaningful coincidence of events."
Karl Pribram, interview in
Psychology Today. "Sit down before fact like a little child, and be
prepared to give up every preconceived notion, follow humbly, wherever
and to whatever abyss Nature leads, or you shall learn nothing." T. H.
Huxley.
The puzzle, that first started Pribram on the road to
formulating his Holographic Model, was the question of, how and where
memories are stored in the brain. In the early 1940s, when he first
became interested in this mystery, it was generally believed, that
memories were localized in the brain. Each memory a person had, such as
the memory of the last time you saw your grandmother, or the memory of
the fragrance of a gardenia you sniffed, when you were sixteen, was
believed to have a specific location somewhere in the brain cells. Such
memory traces were called engrams, and although noone knew, what an
engram was made of — whether it was a neuron or perhaps even a special
kind of molecule — most scientists were confident: it was only a matter
of time, before one would be found. There were reasons for this
confidence.
12-13
Research conducted by Canadian neurosurgeon Wilder Penfield
in the 1920s had offered convincing evidence, that specific memories
did have specific locations in the brain. One of the most unusual
features of the brain is, that the object (the brain) itself doesn't
sense pain directly. As long, as the scalp and skull have been deadened
with a local anesthetic, surgery can be performed on the brain of a
fully conscious person without causing any pain. In a series of
landmark experiments, Penfield used this fact to his advantage. While
operating on the brains of epileptics, he would electrically stimulate
various areas of their brain cells. To his amazement he found, that
when he stimulated the temporal lobes (the region of the brain behind
the temples) of one of his fully conscious patients, they reexperienced
memories of past episodes from their lives in vivid detail. One man
suddenly relived a conversation, he had with friends in South
Africa; a boy heard his mother talking on the telephone and, after
several touches from Penfield's electrode, was able to repeat her
entire
conversation; a woman found herself in her kitchen and could hear her
son playing outside. Even when Penfield tried to mislead his patients,
by telling them, he was stimulating a different area, when he was not,
he
found, that when
he touched the same spot, it always evoked the same
memory.
In his book "The Mystery of the Mind", published in 1975, just
shortly before his death, he wrote: "It was evident at once, that these
were not dreams. They were electrical activations of the sequential
record of consciousness, a record, that had been laid down during the
patient's earlier experience. The patient 're-lived' all, that he had
been aware of in that earlier period of time, as in a moving-picture
'flashback"!
From his
research Penfield concluded, that everything,
we have ever experienced, is
recorded in our brain,
from every
stranger's face, we have glanced at in a crowd, to every spider web, we
gazed at as a child. He reasoned, that this was why memories of so many
insignificant events kept cropping up in his sampling. If our memory is
a complete record of even the most mundane of our day-to-day
experiences, it is reasonable to assume, that dipping randomly into
such a massive chronicle would produce a good deal of trifling
information.
Wrong!
Everything is recorded not in the brain, but in various places of our
Point of Perception or Assamblage Point (the brightest point) in our
Luminous Ball !
As a young neurosurgery resident, Pribram had no reason to
doubt Penfield's engram theory. But then something happened, that was
to change his thinking forever.
In 1946 he went to work with the great
neuropsychologist Karl Lashley at the Yerkes Laboratory of Primate
Biology, then in Orange Park, Florida. For over thirty years Lashley
had been involved in his own ongoing search for the elusive mechanisms
responsible for memory, and there Pribram was able to witness the
fruits of Lashley's labors firsthand. What was startling was, that not
only had Lashley failed to produce any evidence of the engram, but his
research actually seemed to pull the rug out from under all of
Penfield's findings. What Lashley had done was to train rats to perform
a variety of tasks, such as run a maze. Then he surgically removed
various portions of their brains and retested them. His aim was
literally to cut out the area of the rats' brains, containing the
memory
of their maze-running ability.
To his surprise he found, that no matter
what portion of their brains he cut out, he could not eradicate their
memories. Often the rats' motor skills were impaired and they stumbled
clumsily through the mazes, but even with massive portions of their
brains removed, their memories remained stubbornly intact. For Pribram
these were incredible findings. If memories possessed specific
locations in the brain in the same way, that books possess specific
locations on library shelves, why didn't Lashley's surgical plunderings
have any effect on them? For Pribram the only answer seemed to be, that
memories were not localized at specific brain sites, but were somehow
spread out or distributed throughout the brain, as a whole. The problem
was, that he knew of no mechanism or process, that could account for
such a state of affairs. Lashley was even less certain and later wrote,
"I sometimes feel, in reviewing the evidence on the localization of the
memory trace, that the necessary conclusion is, that learning just is
not possible at all. Nevertheless, in spite of such evidence against
it, learning does sometimes occur."
If
we start considering holographically the Sun, existing in the ceiling
of
my room (and do not consider it lineally, as we used to), then it is
all make sense !
Everything in the Universe is made of White
wavelike Sun Energy, which we, in our physical world, call electrons.
Sun Energy is also represented in
particles-electrons
(they jump up and down on the same spot, we call them boiling AC-DC)
and our Inorganic Beings-Relatives' Twin World is based on these
particles-electrons of Sun energy.
Everything
in the Universe is made out of White Sun Energy of Balance. Our Original
World is based on a wave form, moving along, but still Sun energy.
The
Energy,
represented in particle form exists in our Twin-World ! And now both
Worlds are merging together! When
wave-electrons collide with each other, they create particles-electrons,
which can do things, that waves-electrones can't do. Our TV or Computer
screens are based on these particles-electrons of Red-Blue-Green
colours.
Particles-electrons have
an ability to magnetise everything.
Inorganic Beings, means our 'Relatives' in our Twin World have this
ability to magnitise themselves in our Everyday World and also
magnitise people/animals/Earth's crust etc. When they magnitise
themselves together in one bunch, they are unbeatable (according to
Carlos Castaneda). In order to mix with our wavy Everyday World, Inorganic Beings have to
electrically charge with their people/animals/water/soil with
their boiling energy.
Magnetic Belts around Earth, magnetic ore and numerous bunches of stone
columns of Inorganic Beings everywhere in/on the surface of our Planet
are made from particles-electrons, glued to each other (below is
one of many pictures of stone
columns of Inorganic Beings on the
surface of every country).
What also is interesting, that both: particles-electrons and
waves-electrones can have the same ability to change into their
opposites. Particles-electrons can become waves-electrones and
waves-electrones can become particles-electrons. In this case they
would be called Quanta. Physicists found that
"Light,
Gamma Rays, Radio Waves, X Rays—all can change from Waves to Particles
and back again...they should not be classified solely as either Waves
or Particles, but always both." When
a person drinks a lot of alcohol, he or she can have a double vision,
means everything in front of their eyes would be in two's: a person/a landscape/an animal/
a
building etc. Or if you cross your eyes and look at some tree or
some
person, you will see a double image of that tree/person. Only that
other person or tree is not physical ! This
way Seers-Sorcerers deliberatory and permanently separate our two
Worlds for their purposes (without ill effect for their eyes or their
eye-sight). That
proves the existence of our Twin-World and also of our non physical
twin-person in that Twin-World. These two Worlds (ours and theirs) have
been holographically superimposed on each other. I suspect, that people
like me, without
being aware
of it, have been
used to
create a New Twin-World around our New Planet Earth, because old Twin-World
is falling
apart !
Because
of dual ability of an electron, Inorganic
Beings from our Twin-World have been mixing holographically with us and
our Earth for thousands of years !
Photo
of Inorganic
Beings' ancient
stone tubes in Chehya.
And now
about: WHERE WE HAVE BEEN STORING OUR MEMORIES HOLOGRAPHICALLY ? What
I've read about it in Michael Talbot's "The Holographic Universe" did
not satisfied my curiosity. But I found answer in books of Carlos
Castaneda, Taisha Abelar and Florinda Donner-Grau. Memories/experiences
of our physical Everyday World we store in our legs (that part of legs,
on which you are sitting). But our nightly journeys without physical
bodies, that experience/memories we store in various positions of
our
brilliant Point of Perception (the Assemblage Point) in our Luminous
White Balls. Seers learnt how to move their Points
of Perception to those positions, when they need
to remember something. Here is some info
from Carlos Castaneda's "The Art of
Dreaming" about, where our memories are really
stored (not in the brain).
And how Seers-Sorcerers withdrawing their memories back, when they need
it :
"Ordinarily,
apprentices do not remember these explanations at all, yet they somehow
store them, faithfully intact, in their memories. Sorcerers have used
this seeming peculiarity of memory and have turned remembering
everything, that happens to them in the Second Attention, into one of
the most difficult and complex traditional tasks of Sorcery. Sorcerers
explain this seeming peculiarity of memory, and the task of
remembering, saying, that every time anyone enters into the Second
Attention, the Assemblage Point is on a different position. To
remember, then, means to relocate the Assemblage Point on the exact
position it occupied at the time those entrances into the Second
Attention occurred. Don Juan assured me not only, that sorcerers have
Total and Absolute Recall, but that they relive every experience they
had in the Second Attention by this Act of returning their Assemblage
Point to each of those specific positions. He also assured me, that
Sorcerers dedicate a lifetime to fulfilling this task of
Remembering. In the Second Attention, don Juan gave me very detailed
explanations of Sorcery, knowing, that the Accuracy and Fidelity
(Loyalty) of such instruction will remain with me, faithfully intact,
for the duration of my life. About this quality of faithfulness he
said, "Learning something in the Second Attention is just like
learning, when we were children. What we learn remains with us for
life. "It's second nature with me," we say when it comes to something
we've learned very early in life... Lack of Energy is what has put a
tight lid on Your Memory," Don Juan said. "When you have sufficient
Energy, your Memory will work fine...Energy tends to be cumulative; if
you follow the Warrior's Way impeccably, a Moment will come when Your
Memory Opens Up...
"It just happens, that the presence of the Nagual
induces a Shift of the Assemblage Point," he said. He guided me then
into one of the display rooms of the museum
(of
Anthropology and History in Mexico City) and said, that my
question was apropos (appropriate) to what he had been planning to tell
me.
"My
intention was to explain to you, that the Position of the Assemblage
Point is like a Vault (chamber), where Sorcerers keep their records,"
Don Juan said.
"I
was tickled pink, when your Energy Body felt my Intent and you asked me
about it. The Energy Body knows immensities (boundless). Let me show
you how much it knows."
He instructed me to enter into Total Silence.
He reminded me, that I was already in a special State of Awareness,
because my Assemblage Point had been made to Shift by his presence. He
assured me, that entering into Total Silence was going to allow the
sculptures in that room to make me See and Hear inconceivable
(unbelievable) things. He added, apparently to increase my confusion,
that some of the archaeological pieces in that room had the capacity to
produce, by themselves, a Shift of the Assemblage Point, and that,
if I
reached a state of Total Silence, I would be actually witnessing scenes
pertaining to the lives of the people, who made those pieces. He then
began the strangest tour of a museum I have ever taken. He went around
the room, describing and interpreting astounding details of every one
of the large pieces. According to him, every archaeological piece in
that room was a purposeful record, left by the People of Antiquity, a
record, that don Juan, as a Sorcerer, was reading to me, as one would
read a book. "Every piece here is designed to make the Assemblage Point
Shift," he went on. "Fix your gaze on any of them, Silence Your Mind,
and find out whether or not your Assemblage Point can be made to Shift."
"How
would I
know, that it has shifted?"
"Because
you
would See and Feel things, that are beyond your normal reach."
I
gazed at the sculptures and Saw and Heard things, that I would be at a
loss to explain. In the past, I had examined all those pieces with the
bias of anthropology, always bearing in mind the descriptions of
scholars in the field. Their descriptions of the functions of those
pieces, rooted in modern man's cognition of the World, appeared to me,
for the first time, to be utterly prejudiced, if not asinine (utterly
stupid). What don Juan said about those pieces and what I heard and saw
myself, gazing at them, was the farthest thing from what I had always
read about them. My discomfort was so great, that I felt obliged to
apologize to don Juan for, what
I
thought, was my suggestibility. He did not laugh or make fun of me. He
patiently explained, that Sorcerers were capable of leaving accurate
records of their findings in the Position of the Assemblage Point. He
maintained, that when it comes to getting to the essence of a written
account, we have to use our sense of sympathetic or imaginative
participation to go beyond the mere page, into the experience itself.
However, in the Sorcerers' World, since there are no written pages,
total records, which can be relived, instead of read, are left in the
Position of the Assemblage Point. To illustrate his argument, don Juan
talked about the Sorcerers' Teachings for the Second Attention. He
said, that they are given, when the apprentice's Assemblage Point is on
a place, other, than the normal one. The Position of the Assemblage
Point becomes, in this manner, the Record of the Lesson.
146-147
In
order to play the Lesson back, the apprentice has to Return his/her
Assemblage Point to the Position it occupied, when the Lesson was
given. Don Juan concluded his remarks by reiterating, that to Return
the Assemblage Point to All the Positions it Occupied, when the Lessons
were Given, is an Accomplishment of the Highest Magnitude."
The
Breakthrough
In 1948 Pribram was offered
a position at Yale, and before leaving, he helped write up thirty years
of Lashley's monumental research. At
Yale, Pribram continued to ponder the idea, that memories were
distributed throughout the brain, and the more he thought about it, the
more convinced he became. After all, patients, who had had portions of
their brains removed for medical reasons, never suffered the loss of
specific memories. Removal of a large section of the brain might cause
a patient's memory to become generally hazy, but no one ever came out
of surgery with any selective memory loss.
14-15
Similarly, individuals, who
had received head injuries in car collisions and other accidents, never
forgot half of their family, or half of a novel, they had read. Even
removal of sections of the temporal lobes, the area of the brain, that
had figured so prominently in Penfield's research, didn't create any
gaps in a person's memories. Pribram's thinking was further solidified
by his and other researchers' inability to duplicate Penfield's
findings, when stimulating brains other, than those of epileptics.
Even
Penfield himself was unable to duplicate his results in non-epileptic
patients. Despite the growing evidence, that memories were distributed,
Pribram was still at a loss, as to how the brain might accomplish such
a
seemingly magical feat. Then in the mid-1960s an article, he read in
Scientific American, describing the first construction of a Hologram,
hit
him like a thunderbolt. Not only was the concept of Holography
dazzling, but it provided a solution to the puzzle, with which he had
been wrestling. To understand why Pribram was so excited, it is
necessary to understand a little more about Holograms. One of the
things, that makes Holography possible, is a phenomenon, known as
Interference. Interference is the criss-crossing pattern, that occurs,
when two or more waves, such as waves of water, ripple through each
other (like in the Fabric of Time, LM). For example, if you drop a
pebble
into a pond, it will produce a series of concentric waves, that expands
outward. If you drop two pebbles into a pond, you will get two sets of
waves, that expand and pass through one another. The complex
arrangement of crests and troughs, that results from such collisions,
is known as an interference pattern. Any wavelike phenomena can create
an interference pattern, including light and radio waves. Because laser
light is an extremely pure, coherent (stuck together) form of light, it
is especially good at creating interference patterns. It provides, in
essence, the perfect pebble and the perfect pond. As a result, it
wasn't until the invention of the laser, that Holograms, as we know
them today, became possible. A Hologram is produced, when a single
laser
light is split into two separate beams. The first beam is bounced off
the object to be photographed (in this case an apple). Then the
second beam is allowed to collide with the reflected light of the
first. When this happens they create an Interference Pattern, which is
then recorded on a piece of film. To the naked eye the image on the
film looks nothing at all like the object photographed. In fact, it
even looks a little like the concentric rings, that form, when a
handful
of pebbles is tossed into a pond. But as soon, as another laser beam
(or in some instances just a bright light source) is shined through the
film, a three-dimensional image of the original object reappears. The
three-dimensionality of such images is often eerily convincing. You
can actually walk around a Holographic Projection and view it from
different angles, as you would a real object. However, if you reach out
and try to touch it, your hand will waft (drift, float easily) right
through it and you will discover: there is really nothing there.
16-17
Three-dimensionality
is not the only remarkable aspect of Holograms. If
a piece of Holographic film containing the image of an apple is cut in
half and then illuminated by a laser, each half will still be found to
contain the entire image of the apple! Even if the halves are divided
again and then again, an entire apple can still be reconstructed from
each small portion of the film (although the images will get hazier as
the portions get smaller). Unlike normal photographs, every
small
fragment of a piece of Holographic film contains all the information
recorded in the Whole. This was precisely the feature, that got Pribram
so excited, for it offered at last a way of understanding how memories
could be distributed, rather than localized in the brain. If it was
possible for every portion of a piece of holographic film to contain
all the information, necessary to create a whole image, then it seemed
equally possible for every part of the brain to contain all of the
information necessary to recall a whole memory. It should be noted,
that this astounding trait is common only to pieces of holographic
film, whose images are invisible to the naked eye. If you buy a piece
of Holographic film (or an object containing a piece of Holographic
film) in a store and can see a three-dimensional image in it without
any special kind of illumination, do not cut it in half. You will only
end up with pieces of the original image.
Unlike
normal photographs,
every portion of a piece of Holographic film contains all of the
information of the whole. Thus if a Holographic plate is broken into
fragments, each piece can still be used to reconstruct the entire
image.
Vision
Also Is Holographic
18-19
Memory
is not the only thing the brain may process Holographically. Another of
Lashley's discoveries was, that the visual centers of the brain were
also surprisingly resistant to surgical excision. Even after removing
as much, as 90 percent of a rat's visual cortex (the part of the brain,
that receives and interprets, what the eye sees), he found: it could
still perform tasks, requiring complex visual skills. Similarly,
research conducted by Pribram revealed, that as much, as 98 percent of
a cat's optic nerves can be severed, without seriously impairing its
ability to perform complex visual tasks. Such a situation was
tantamount to believing, that a movie audience could still enjoy a
motion picture, even after 90 percent of the movie screen was missing,
and his experiments presented once again a serious challenge to the
standard understanding of how vision works. According to the leading
theory of the day, there was a one-to-one correspondence between the
image the eye sees and the way, that image is represented in the brain.
In other words, when we look at a square, it was believed the
electrical activity in our visual cortex also possesses the form of a
square. Although findings, such as Lashley's, seemed to give a
deathblow to this idea, Pribram was not satisfied. While he was at
Yale,
he devised a series of experiments to resolve the matter and spent the
next seven years, carefully measuring the electrical activity in the
brains of monkeys, while they performed various visual tasks. He
discovered, that not only did no such one-to-one correspondence exist,
but there wasn't even a discernible pattern to the sequence, in which
the electrodes fired. He wrote of his findings:
"These experimental
results are incompatible with a view, that a photographic-like image
becomes projected onto the cortical surface. Vision theorists once
believed: there was a one-to-one correspondence between an image the
eye
sees and how that image is represented in the brain. Pribram discovered
this is not true. Once again the resistance, the visual cortex
displayed
toward surgical excision, suggested that, like memory, vision was also
distributed, and after Pribram became aware of Holography, he began to
wonder, if it, too, was Holographic. The "whole in every part" nature
of
a Hologram certainly seemed to explain, how so much of the visual
cortex
could be removed, without affecting the ability to perform visual
tasks.
If the brain was processing images, by employing some kind of internal
Hologram, even a very small piece of the Hologram could still
reconstruct the Whole of, what the eyes were seeing. It also explained
the lack of any one-to-one correspondence between the external World
and the brain's electrical activity. Again, if the brain was using
Holographic Principles to process visual information, there would be no
more one-to-one correspondence between electrical activity and images
seen, than there was between the meaningless swirl of interference
patterns on a piece of Holographic film and the image the film encoded.
The only question, that remained, was: what Wavelike Phenomenon the
Brain might be using to create such internal Holograms? As soon, as
Pribram considered the question, he thought of a possible answer. It
was known, that the electrical communications, that take place between
the brain's nerve cells, or neurons, do not occur alone. Neurons
possess branches like little trees, and when an electrical message
reaches the end of one of these branches, it radiates outward, as does
the ripple in a pond. Because neurons are packed together so densely,
these expanding ripples of electricity—also a Wavelike Phenomenon — are
constantly criss-crossing one another. When Pribram remembered this, he
realized, that they were most assuredly creating an almost endless and
kaleidoscopic array of Interference Patterns, and these, in turn, might
be what give the brain its Holographic Properties. "The Hologram was
there all the time in the wave-front nature of brain-cell connectivity,
" observed Pribram. "We simply hadn't had the wit to realize it."
Other
Puzzles, Explained by the Holographic Brain Model
Pribram
published his first article on the possible Holographic Nature of the
Brain in 1966, and continued to expand and refine his ideas during the
next several years. As he did, and as other researchers became aware of
his theory, it was quickly realized, that the distributed nature of
Memory and Vision is not the only neurophysiological puzzle the
Holographic Model can explain.
THE
VASTNESS OF OUR MEMORY
Holography
also explains how our brains can store so many memories in so little
space. The brilliant Hungarian-born physicist and mathematician John
von Neumann once calculated, that over the course of the average human
lifetime, the brain stores something on the order of 2. 8 x 1020 (280,
000, 000, 000, 000, 000, 000) bits of information. This is a staggering
amount of information, and brain researchers have long struggled to
come up with a mechanism, that explains such a vast capability.
Interestingly, Holograms also possess a fantastic capacity for
information storage. By changing the angle, at which the two lasers
strike a piece of photographic film,
it is possible to record many
different images on the same surface. Any image thus recorded can be
retrieved simply by illuminating the film with a laser beam,
possessing
the same angle, as the original two beams. By employing this method
researchers have calculated, that a one-inch-square of film can store
the same amount of information contained in fifty dictionaries!
OUR
ABILITY TO BOTH RECALL AND FORGET
Pieces
of Holographic film containing multiple images, such as those,
described
above, also provide a way of understanding our ability to both recall
and forget. When such a piece of film is held in a laser beam and
tilted back and forth, the various images it contains appear and
disappear in a glittering stream. It has been suggested, that our
ability to remember is analogous to shining a laser beam on such a
piece of film and calling up a particular image. Similarly, when we are
unable to recall something, this may be equivalent to shining various
beams on a piece of multiple-image film, but failing to find the right
angle to call up the image/memory, for which we are searching (Sorcerers
of Castaneda and Don Juan groups had totally different explanation to
this. Besides, most Women and Men create holographic images with
the help of their emotions without laser or any
kind of technology for thousands of years ! LM).
ASSOCIATIVE
MEMORY
In
Proust's Swann's Way a sip of tea and a bite of a small, scallop shaped
cake, known as a petite madeleine, cause the narrator to find himself
suddenly flooded with memories from his past. At first he is puzzled,
but then, slowly, after much effort on his part, he remembers, that his
aunt used to give him tea and madeleines, when he was a little boy, and
it is this association, that has stirred his memory. We have all had
similar experiences—a whiff of a particular food being prepared, or a
glimpse of some long-forgotten object—that suddenly evoke some scene
out of our past. The Holographic Idea offers a further analogy for the
associative tendencies of memory. This is illustrated by yet another
kind of Holographic Recording Technique. First, the light of a single
laser beam is bounced off two objects simultaneously, say an easy chair
and a smoking pipe. The light bounced off each object is then allowed
to collide, and the resulting interference pattern is captured on film.
Then, whenever the easy chair is illuminated with laser light and the
light, that reflects off the easy chair is passed through the film, a
three-dimensional image of the pipe will appear. Conversely, whenever
the same is done with the pipe, a Hologram of the easy chair appears.
So, if our Brains function Holographically, a similar process may be
responsible for the way certain objects evoke specific memories from
our past.
OUR
ABILITY TO RECOGNIZE FAMILIAR THINGS
At
first glance our ability to recognize familiar things may not seem so
unusual, but brain researchers have long realized it is quite a complex
ability. For example, the absolute certainty we feel when, we spot a
familiar face in a crowd of several hundred people, is not just a
subjective emotion, but appears to be caused by an extremely fast and
reliable form of information processing in our brain. In a 1970 article
in the British science magazine Nature, physicist Pieter van Heerden
proposed, that a type of Holography, known as Recognition Holography,
offers a way of understanding this ability. In Recognition Holography a
Holographic Image of an object is recorded in the usual manner, save
that the laser beam is bounced off a special kind of mirror, known as a
focusing mirror, before it is allowed to strike the unexposed film. If
a second object, similar, but not identical to the first, is bathed in
laser light and the light is bounced off the mirror and onto the film,
after it has been developed, a bright point of light will appear on the
film. The brighter and sharper the point of light, the greater the
degree of similarity between the first and second objects. If the two
objects are completely dissimilar, no point of light will appear. By
placing a light-sensitive photocell behind the holographic film, one
can actually use the setup, as a mechanical recognition system. Van
Heerden, a researcher at the Polaroid Research Laboratories in
Cambridge, Massachusetts, actually proposed his own version of a
Holographic Theory of Memory in 1963, but his work went relatively
unnoticed. A similar technique, known as Interference Holography, may
also explain how
we can recognize both the familiar and unfamiliar
features of an image, such as the face of someone we have not seen for
many years. In this technique an object is viewed through a piece of
holographic film, containing its image. When this is done, any feature
of the object, that has changed since its image was originally
recorded, will reflect light differently. An individual, looking
through
the film, is instantly aware of both: how the object has changed and
how
it has remained the same. The technique is so sensitive, that even the
pressure of a finger on a block of granite shows up immediately, and
the process has been found to have practical applications in the
materials testing industry.
PHOTOGRAPHIC
MEMORY
In
1972, Harvard vision researchers Daniel Pollen and Michael Tractenberg
proposed, that the Holographic Brain Theory may explain why some people
possess photographic memories (also known as eidetic memories).
Typically, individuals with photographic memories will spend a few
moments scanning the scene they wish to memorize. When they want to see
the scene again, they "project" a mental image of it, either with their
eyes closed or as they gaze at a blank wall or screen. In a study of
one such individual, a Harvard art history professor named Elizabeth,
Pollen and Tractenberg found, that the mental images she projected,
were so real to her, that when she read an image of a page from
Goethe's Faust her eyes moved as if she were reading a real page.
Noting, that the image stored in a fragment of Holographic Film gets
hazier, as the fragment gets smaller, Pollen and Tractenberg suggest,
that perhaps such individuals have more vivid memories, because they
somehow have access to very large regions of their Memory Holograms.
Conversely, perhaps most of us have memories, that are much less vivid,
because our access is limited to smaller regions of the Memory
Holograms.
(I must add: most
of us have less vivid memories, because we don't have enough personal
energy, left in us to remember. Sorcerers restore all their memories to
perfection by doing RECAPITULATION and Magical Passes for many years,
means returning
their lost energies! Carlos Castaneda and Taisha Abelar describe this
method in their books and I posted some extracts about this technique
on our website! By the way, Don Juan's team of Sorcerers were All
experts on Practical Use of Holography! LM).
THE
TRANSFERENCE OF LEARNED SKILLS
Pribram
believes the Holographic Model also sheds light on our ability to
transfer learned skills from one part of our body to another. As you
sit reading this book, take a moment and trace your first name in the
air with your left elbow. You will probably discover, that this is a
relatively easy thing to do, and yet in all likelihood it is something
you have never done before. It may not seem a surprising ability to
you, but in the classic view, that various areas of the brain (such as
the area controlling the movements of the elbow) are "hard-wired, " or
able to perform tasks only after repetitive learning has caused the
proper neural connections to become established between brain cells,
this is something of a puzzle. Pribram points out, that the problem
becomes much more tractable if the brain were to convert all of its
memories, including memories of learned abilities such as writing, into
a language of Interfering Wave Forms. Such a Brain would be much more
flexible and could shift its stored information around with the same
ease, that a skilled pianist transposes a song from one musical key to
another. This same flexibility may explain how we are able to recognize
a familiar face regardless of the angle, from which we are viewing it.
Again, once the brain has memorized a face (or any other object or
scene) and converted it into a language of wave forms, it can, in a
sense, tumble this Internal Hologram around and examine it from any
perspective it wants.
PHANTOM
LIMB SENSATIONS AND HOW WE CONSTRUCT A "WORLD-OUT-THERE"
To
most of us it is obvious, that our feelings of love, hunger, anger, and
so on, are internal realities, and the sound of an orchestra playing,
the heat of the Sun, the smell of bread baking, and so on, are external
realities. But it is not so clear how our brains enable us to
distinguish between the two. For example, Pribram points out, that when
we look at a person, the image of the person is really on the surface
of our retinas. Yet we do not perceive the person as being on our
retinas.
We perceive them as being in the "world-out-there".
Similarly, when we stub our toe we experience the pain in our toe. But
the pain is not really in our toe. It is actually a neurophysiological
process taking place somewhere in our brain. How then is our brain able
to take the multitude of neurophysiological processes that manifest as
our experience, all of which are internal, and fool us into thinking,
that some are internal and some are located beyond the confines of our
gray matter?
Creating the illusion, that things are located where
they are not, is the quintessential (pure, highly concentrated essence
of something) feature of a Hologram.
As mentioned, if you look at a
Hologram it seems to have extension in Space, but if you pass your hand
through it, you will discover there is nothing there. Despite what your
senses tell you, no instrument will pick up the presence of any
abnormal energy or substance, where the Hologram appears to be
hovering. This is because a Hologram is a Virtual Image, an image, that
appears to be where it is not, and possesses no more extension in
Space, than does the three-dimensional image you see of yourself, when
you look in a mirror. Just as the image in the mirror is located in the
silvering on the mirror's back surface, the actual location of a
Hologram is always in the photographic emulsion on the surface of the
film recording it. Further evidence, that the brain is able to fool us
into thinking, that inner processes are located outside the body, comes
from the Nobel Prize-winning physiologist Georg von Bekesy. In a series
of experiments conducted in the late 1960s Bekesy placed vibrators on
the knees of blindfolded test subjects. Then he varied the rates at
which the instruments vibrated. By doing so he discovered, that he
could make his test subjects experience the sensation, that a point
source of vibration was jumping from one knee to the other. He found,
that he could even make his subjects feel the point source of vibration
in the space between their knees. In short, he demonstrated, that
humans have the ability to seemingly experience sensation in spatial
locations, where they have absolutely no sense receptors. Pribram
believes, that Bekesy's work is compatible with the Holographic view
and sheds additional light on how interfering wave fronts—or in
Bekesy's case, interfering sources of physical vibration— enable the
brain to localize some of its experiences beyond the physical
boundaries of the body. He feels this process might also explain the
Phantom Limb Phenomenon, or the sensation experienced by some amputees,
that a missing arm or leg is still present. Such individuals often feel
eerily realistic cramps, pains, and tinglings in these phantom
appendages, but maybe what they are experiencing is the holographic
memory of the limb, that is still recorded in the Interference Patterns
in their brains.
Experimental
Support for the Holographic Brain
For
Pribram the many similarities between Brains and Holograms were
tantalizing, but he knew his theory didn't mean anything unless it was
backed up by more solid evidence. One researcher, who provided such
evidence was Indiana University biologist Paul Pietsch. Intriguingly,
Pietsch began as an ardent disbeliever in Pribram's theory. He was
especially skeptical of Pribram's claim, that memories do not possess
any specific location in the brain. To prove Pribram wrong, Pietsch
devised a series of experiments, and as the test subjects of his
experiments he chose salamanders. In previous studies he had
discovered, that he could remove the brain of a salamander without
killing it, and although it remained in a stupor (daze, trance inertia)
as long, as its brain was missing, its behavior completely returned to
normal as soon, as its brain was restored. Pietsch reasoned, that if a
salamander's feeding behavior is not confined to any specific location
in the brain, then it should not matter how its brain is positioned in
its head. If it did matter, Pribram's theory would be disproven. He
then flip-flopped the left and right hemispheres of a salamander's
brain, but to his dismay, as soon, as it recovered, the salamander
quickly resumed normal feeding. He took another salamander and turned
its brain upside down. When salamander recovered it, too, fed
normally. Growing increasingly frustrated, he decided to resort to more
drastic measures. In a series of over 700 operations he sliced,
flipped, shuffled, subtracted, and even minced the brains of his
hapless subjects, but always when he replaced what was left of their
brains, their behavior returned to normal. These findings and others
turned Pietsch into a believer and attracted enough attention, that his
research became the subject of a segment on the television show 60
Minutes. He writes about this experience as well, as giving detailed
accounts of his experiments in his insightful book Shufflebrain.
The
Mathematical Language of the Hologram
While
the theories, that enabled the development of the Hologram, were first
formulated in 1947 by Dennis Gabor (who later won a Nobel Prize for his
efforts), in the late 1960s and early 1970s Pribram's theory received
even more persuasive experimental support. When Gabor first conceived
the idea of Holography, he wasn't thinking about lasers. His goal was
to improve the electron microscope, then a primitive and imperfect
device. His approach was a mathematical one, and the mathematics he
used was a type of calculus invented by an eighteenth century Frenchman
named Jean B. J. Fourier. Roughly speaking what Fourier developed was a
mathematical way of converting any pattern, no matter how complex, into
a language of simple waves. He also showed how these wave forms could
be converted back into the original pattern. In other words, just as a
television camera converts an image into electromagnetic frequencies
and a television set converts those frequencies back into the original
image, Fourier showed how a similar process could be achieved
mathematically. The equations he developed to convert images into wave
forms and back again are known as Fourier transforms. Fourier
transforms enabled Gabor to convert a picture of an object into the
blur of Interference Patterns on a piece of Holographic film. They also
enabled him to devise a way of converting those Interference Patterns
back into an image of the original object. In fact the special Whole in
every part of a Hologram is one of the by-products, that occurs when an
image or pattern is translated into the Fourier language of wave forms.
Throughout the late 1960s and early 1970s various researchers contacted
Pribram and told him they had uncovered evidence, that the visual
system worked as a kind of frequency analyzer. Since frequency is a
measure of the number of oscillations a wave undergoes per second, this
strongly suggested, that the brain might be functioning as a Hologram
does. But it wasn't until 1979, that Berkeley neurophysiologists
Russell and Karen DeValoises made the discovery, that settled the
matter. Research in the 1960s had shown, that each brain cell in the
visual cortex is geared to respond to a different pattern—some brain
cells fire when the eyes see a horizontal line, others fire when the
eyes see a vertical line, and so on. As a result, many researchers
concluded, that the brain takes input from these highly specialized
cells called feature detectors, and somehow fits them together to
provide us with our visual perceptions of the World. Despite the
popularity of this view, the DeValoises felt it was only a partial
truth. To test their assumption they used Fourier's equations to
convert plaid and checkerboard patterns into simple wave forms. Then
they tested to see how the brain cells in the visual cortex responded
to these new wave-form images. What they found was, that the brain
cells responded not to the original patterns, but to the Fourier
translations of the patterns. Only one conclusion could be drawn. The
Brain was using Fourier mathematics, the same mathematics Holography
employed—to convert visual images into the Fourier language of wave
forms. The DeValoises' discovery was subsequently confirmed by numerous
other laboratories around the World, and although it did not provide
absolute proof, that the Brain was a Hologram, it supplied enough
evidence to convince Pribram his theory was correct. Spurred on by the
idea, that the visual cortex was responding not to patterns, but to the
frequencies of various waveforms, he began to reassess the role
frequency played in the other senses. It didn't take long for him to
realize, that the importance of this role had perhaps been overlooked
by twentieth-century scientists. Over a century before the DeValoises'
discovery, the German physiologist and physicist Hermann von Helmholtz
had shown, that the ear was a frequency analyzer. More recent research
revealed, that our sense of smell seems to be based on what are called
osmic frequencies. Bekesy's work had clearly demonstrated that our skin
is sensitive to frequencies of vibration, and he even produced some
evidence that taste may involve frequency analysis. Interestingly,
Bekesy also discovered that the mathematical equations, that enabled
him to predict how his subjects would respond to various frequencies of
vibration were also of the Fourier genre.
The
Dancer, as a Wave Form
But perhaps the most
startling finding Pribram uncovered was Russian scientist Nikolai
Bernstein's discovery that even our physical movements may be encoded
in our brains in a language of Fourier wave forms. In the 1930s
Bernstein dressed people in black leotards and painted white dots on
their elbows, knees, and other joints. Then he placed them against
black backgrounds and took movies of them doing various physical
activities such as dancing, walking, jumping, hammering, and typing.
When he developed the film, only the white dots appeared, moving up and
down and across the screen in various complex and flowing movements. To
quantify his findings he Fourier-analyzed the various lines the dots
traced out and converted them, their movements, into a language of wave
forms. He discovered they could be analyzed using Fourier
mathematics, the same mathematics Gabor used to invent the
Hologram. To his surprise, he discovered the wave forms contained
hidden patterns, that allowed him to predict his subjects' next
movement to within a fraction of an inch. When Pribram encountered
Bernstein's work he immediately recognized its implications. Maybe the
reason hidden patterns surfaced after Bernstein Fourier-analyzed his
subject's movements was, because that was how movements are stored in
the brain. This was an exciting possibility, for if the brain analyzed
movements by breaking them down into their frequency components, it
explained the rapidity, with which we learn many complex physical
tasks. For instance, we do not learn to ride a bicycle by painstakingly
memorizing every tiny feature of the process. We learn by grasping the
whole flowing movement. The fluid Wholeness, that typifies how we learn
so many physical activities, is difficult to explain if our brains are
storing information in a bit-by-bit manner. But it becomes much easier
to understand if the brain is Fourier-analyzing such tasks and
absorbing them as a whole.
The Reaction of the Scientific
Community
Despite such
evidence, Pribram's Holographic Model remains extremely controversial.
Part of the problem is, that there are many popular theories of how the
brain works and there is evidence to support them all. Some researchers
believe the distributed nature of Memory can be explained by the ebb
and flow of various brain chemicals. Others hold, that electrical
fluctuations among large groups of neurons can account for memory and
learning. Each school of thought has its ardent supporters, and it is
probably safe to say, that most scientists remain unpersuaded by
Pribram's arguments. For example, neuropsychologist Frank Wood of the
Bowman Gray School of Medicine in Winston-Salem, North Carolina, feels,
that "there are precious few experimental findings, for which
Holography is the necessary, or even preferable, explanation. " Pribram
is puzzled by statements such as Wood's and counters by noting, that he
currently has a book in press with well over 500 references to such
data. Other researchers agree with Pribram. Dr. Larry Dossey, former
chief of staff at Medical City Dallas Hospital, admits, that Pribram's
theory challenges many long-held assumptions about the Brain, but
points out, that "many specialists in brain function are attracted to
the idea, if for no other reason, than the glaring inadequacies of the
present orthodox views."
Neurologist Richard Restak, author of the PBS series The Brain, shares
Dossey's opinion. He notes, that in spite of overwhelming evidence,
that human abilities are holistically dispersed throughout the Brain,
most researchers continue to cling to the idea, that function car be
located in the brain in the same way that cities can be located on a
map. Restak believes, that theories based on this premise, are not only
"oversimplistic, " but actually function as "conceptual straitjackets",
that keep us from recognizing the brain's true complexities. He feels,
that "a Hologram is not only possible but, at this moment, represents
probably our best 'Model' for Brain functioning."
As for Pribram, by
the 1970s enough evidence had accumulated to convince him his theory
was correct. In addition, he had taken his ideas into the laboratory
and discovered, that single neurons in the motor cortex respond
selectively to a limited bandwidth of frequencies, a finding, that
further supported his conclusions. The question, that began to bother
him was, if the picture of reality in our brains is not a picture at
all, but a Hologram, what is it a Hologram of? The dilemma, posed by
this question, is analogous to taking a Polaroid picture of a group of
people sitting around a table and, after the picture develops, finding
that, instead of people, there are only blurry clouds of interference
patterns, positioned around the table. In both cases one could
rightfully ask. Which is the true reality, the seemingly objective
World, experienced by the observer/photographer or the blur of
Interference Patterns, recorded by the camera/brain?
Pribram realized, that if the Holographic Brain Model was taken to its
logical conclusions, it opened the door on the possibility, that
objective Reality (of Objects)—the World of coffee cups, mountain
vistas, elm trees, and table lamps—might not even exist, or at
least not exist in the way we believe it exists. Was it possible, he
wondered, that what the mystics had been saying for centuries was true,
reality was maya, an illusion, and what was out there was really a
vast, resonating symphony of wave forms, a "frequency domain", that was
transformed into the World as we know it, only after it entered our
senses?
Realizing, that the solution he was seeking might lie outside the
province of his own field, he went to his physicist son for advice. His
son recommended he look into the work of a physicist named David Bohm.
When Pribram did he was electrified. He not only found the answer to
his question, but also discovered, that according to Bohm, the Entire
Universe was a Hologram.
The Cosmos as Hologram
One can't help, but be astonished at the degree, to which [Bohm] has
been able to break out of the tight molds of scientific conditioning
and stand alone with a completely new and literally vast Idea, one
which has both internal consistency and the logical power to explain
widely diverging phenomena of physical experience from an entirely
unexpected point of view. . . "It is a theory, which is so intuitively
satisfying, that many people have felt, that if the Universe is not the
way Bohm describes it, it ought to be." John P. Briggs and F. David
Peat Looking Glass Universe. The path, that led Bohm to the conviction,
that the Universe is structured like a Hologram, began at the very edge
of matter, in the world of subatomic particles. His interest in science
and the way things work blossomed early. As a young boy growing up in
Wilkes-Barre, Pennsylvania, he invented a dripless tea kettle, and his
father, a successful businessman, urged him to try to turn a profit on
the idea. But after learning, that the first step in such a venture was
to conduct a door-to-door survey to test-market his invention, Bohm's
interest in business waned. His interest in science did not, however,
and his prodigious curiosity forced him to look for new heights to
conquer. He found the most challenging height of all in the 1930s when
he attended Pennsylvania State College, for it was there, that he first
became fascinated by quantum physics. It is an easy fascination to
understand. The strange new land, that physicists had found lurking in
the heart of the atom, contained things more wondrous, than anything
Cortes or Marco Polo ever encountered. What made this new world so
intriguing was, that everything about it appeared to be so contrary to
common sense. It seemed more like a land ruled by Sorcery than an
extension of the natural World, an Alice-in-Wonderland Realm, in which
mystifying forces were the norm and everything logical had been turned
on its ear. One startling discovery made by quantum physicists was,
that if you break matter into smaller and smaller pieces you eventually
reach a point, where those pieces—electrons, protons, and so
on—no longer possess the traits of objects. For example, most of
us tend to think of an electron as a tiny sphere or a BB whizzing
around, but nothing could be further from the truth. Although an
electron can sometimes behave as if it were a compact little Particle,
physicists have found, that it literally possesses no dimension. This
is difficult for most of us to imagine, because everything at our own
level of existence possesses dimension. And yet if you try to measure
the width of an electron, you will discover it's an impossible task. An
electron is simply not an object, as we know it.
Pribram Encounters Bohm
Another discovery physicists made is, that an electron can manifest as
either a Particle or a Wave! If you shoot an electron at the screen of
a television, that's been turned off, a tiny point of light will appear
when it strikes the phosphorescent chemicals, that coat the glass. The
single point of impact the electron leaves on the screen clearly
reveals the Particle-like side of its nature. But this is not the only
form the electron can assume. It can also dissolve into a blurry cloud
of energy and behave as if it were a Wave, spread out over Space. When
an electron manifests as a Wave it can do things no Particle can. If it
is fired at a barrier, in which two slits have been cut, it can go
through both slits simultaneously. When wavelike electrons collide with
each other, they even create Interference Patterns. The electron, like
some shape-shifter out of folklore, can manifest as either a Particle
or a Wave. This chameleon-like ability is common to all subatomic
particles. It is also common to all things once thought to manifest
exclusively as Waves. Light, Gamma Rays, Radio Waves, X Rays—all
can change from Waves to Particles and back again. Today physicists
believe, that Subatomic Phenomena should not be classified solely as
either Waves or Particles, but as a single category of somethings, that
are always somehow both. These somethings are called Quanta, and
physicists believe they are the basic stuff, from which the Entire
Universe is made.
(The Universe is made of White
Sun Energy of Balance to give it life, which can be a Particle or a
Wave electron, physicists called these Particles-Waves: Quanta. Robert
Monroe called it: M-Field or Mind-Field ! Carlos Castaneda called it
White Luminous Fibers! LM).
Perhaps most astonishing of all is, that there is compelling evidence,
that the only time quanta ever manifest as Particles, is when we are
looking at them. For instance, when an electron isn't being looked at,
experimental findings suggest that it is always a Wave. Physicists are
able to draw this conclusion because they have devised clever
strategies for deducing how an electron behaves when it is not being
observed (it should be noted that this is only one interpretation of
the evidence and is not the conclusion of all physicists; as we will
see, Bohm himself has a different interpretation). Once again this
seems more like magic, than the kind of behavior we are accustomed to
expect from the natural World. Imagine owning a bowling ball, that was
only a bowling ball when you looked at it. If you sprinkled talcum
powder all over a bowling lane and rolled such a "quantum" bowling ball
toward the pins, it would trace a single line through the talcum powder
while you were watching it. But if you blinked while it was in transit,
you would find, that for the second or two you were not looking at it
the bowling ball stopped tracing a line and instead left a broad wavy
strip, like the undulating swath of a desert snake as it moves sideways
over the sand. Such a situation is comparable to the one quantum
physicists encountered, when they first uncovered evidence, that quanta
coalesce (turn) into particles only when they are being observed.
Physicist Nick Herbert, a supporter of this interpretation, says this
has sometimes caused him to imagine, that behind his back the World is
always "a radically ambiguous and ceaselessly flowing quantum soup."
But whenever he turns around and tries to see the soup, his glance
instantly freezes it and turns it back into ordinary reality. He
believes this makes us all a little like Midas, the legendary king, who
never knew the feel of silk or the caress of a human hand, because
everything he touched turned to gold. "Likewise humans can never
experience the true texture of quantum reality, " says Herbert,
"because everything we touch turns to matter." 'Quanta is the plural of
quantum. One electron is a quantum. Several electrons are a group of
quanta. The word quantum is also synonymous with wave-particle, a term,
that is also used to refer to something, that possesses both particle
and wave aspects.
Bohm and
Inter-connectedness
An aspect of quantum reality, that Bohm found especially interesting,
was the strange state of interconnectedness, that seemed to exist
between apparently unrelated subatomic events. What was equally
perplexing was, that most physicists tended to attach little importance
to the phenomenon. In fact, so little was made of it, that one of the
most famous examples of interconnectedness lay hidden in one of quantum
physics's basic assumptions for a number of years, before anyone
noticed it was there. That assumption was made by one of the founding
fathers of Quantum Physics, the Danish physicist Niels Bohr. Bohr
pointed out, that if subatomic particles only come into existence in
the presence of an observer, then it is also meaningless to speak of a
particle's properties and characteristics as existing, before they are
observed. This was disturbing to many physicists, for much of science
was based on discovering the properties of phenomena. But if the act of
observation actually helped create such properties, what did that imply
about the future of science?
One physicist, who was troubled by Bohr's assertions was Einstein (a
Jew). Despite the role Einstein had played in the founding of quantum
theory, he was not at all happy with the course the fledgling science
had taken. He found Bohr's conclusion, that a particle's properties
don't exist until they are observed, particularly objectionable
because, when combined with another of quantum physics's findings, it
implied, that subatomic particles were interconnected in a way Einstein
simply didn't believe was possible. That finding was the discovery,
that some subatomic processes result in the creation of a pair of
particles with identical or closely related properties. Consider an
extremely unstable atom physicists call positronium. The positronium
atom is composed of an electron and a positron (a positron is an
electron with a positive charge). Because a positron is the electron's
antiparticle opposite, the two eventually annihilate each other and
decay (decay is not a good word for Light, 'turn into' is a better
word. LM) into two quanta of Light (or the Energy of Balance) or
"photons", traveling in opposite directions (the capacity to
shape-shift from one kind of particle to another is just another of a
quantum's abilities). According to quantum physics no matter how far
apart the photons travel, when they are measured they will always be
found to have identical angles of polarization. (Polarization is the
spatial orientation of the photon's wavelike aspect as it travels away
from its point of origin.)
In 1935 Einstein and his colleagues Boris Podolsky and Nathan Rosen
published a now famous paper entitled "Can Quantum-Mechanical
Description of Physical Reality Be Considered Complete?" (3 Jews can
only create rubbish! LM). In it they explained, why the existence of
such twin particles proved, that Bohr could not possibly be correct. As
they pointed out, two such particles, say, the photons emitted when
positronium decays, could be produced and allowed to travel a
significant distance apart. Then they could be intercepted and their
angles of polarization measured. If the polarizations are measured at
precisely the same moment and are found to be identical, as quantum
physics predicts, and if Bohr was correct and properties such as
polarization do not coalesce into existence, until they are observed or
measured. This suggests, that somehow the two photons must be
instantaneously communicating with each other so they know which angle
of polarization to agree upon. The problem is that according to
Einstein's special theory of relativity, nothing can travel faster,
than the speed of light, let alone travel instantaneously, for that
would be tantamount to breaking the time barrier and would open the
door on all kinds of unacceptable paradoxes. ('Positronium decay is not
the subatomic process Einstein and his colleagues employed in their
thought experiment, but is used here, because it is easy to visualize.)
Einstein and his colleagues were convinced, that no "reasonable
definition" of reality would permit such faster-than-light
interconnections to exist, and therefore Bohr had to be wrong. Their
argument is now known as the Einstein-Podolsky-Rosen paradox, or EPR
paradox for short. Bohr remained unperturbed by Einstein's argument.
Rather, than believing, that some kind of faster-than-light
communication was taking place, he offered another explanation. If
subatomic particles do not exist until they are observed, then one
could no longer think of them as independent "things". Thus Einstein
was basing his argument on an error when he viewed twin particles as
separate. They were part of an indivisible (incapable of being divided)
system, and it was meaningless to think of them otherwise. In time most
physicists sided with Bohr and became content, that his interpretation
was correct. One factor, that contributed to Bohr's triumph was, that
quantum physics had proved so spectacularly successful in predicting
phenomena, few physicists were willing even to consider the
possibility, that it might be faulty in some way. In addition, when
Einstein and his colleagues first made their proposal about twin
particles, technical and other reasons prevented such an experiment
from actually being performed. This made it even easier to put out of
mind. This was curious, for although Bohr had designed his argument to
counter Einstein's attack on quantum theory, as we will see, Bohr's
view, that subatomic systems are indivisible has equally profound
implications for the nature of reality. Ironically, these implications
were also ignored, and once again the potential importance of
interconnectedness was swept under the carpet.
A Living Sea of Electrons
During his early years as a physicist Bohm also accepted Bohr's
position, but he remained puzzled by the lack of interest Bohr and his
followers displayed toward interconnectedness. After graduating from
Pennsylvania State College, he attended the University of California at
Berkeley, and before receiving his doctorate there in 1943, he worked
at the Lawrence Berkeley Radiation Laboratory. There he encountered
another striking example of quantum interconnectedness. At the Berkeley
Radiation Laboratory Bohm began what was to become his landmark work on
Plasmas. A Plasma is a gas containing a high density of electrons and
positive ions, atoms, that have a positive charge. To his amazement he
found, that once they were in a Plasma, electrons stopped behaving like
individuals and started behaving as if they were part of a larger and
Interconnected Whole. Although their individual movements appeared
random, vast numbers of electrons were able to produce effects, that
were surprisingly well-organized. Like some Amoeboid Creature, the
Plasma constantly regenerated itself and enclosed all impurities in a
wall in the same way, that a biological organism might encase a foreign
substance in a cyst. So struck was Bohm by these organic qualities,
that he later remarked he'd frequently had the impression the Electron
Sea was "Alive."
In 1947 Bohm accepted an assistant professorship at Princeton
University, an indication of how highly he was regarded, and there he
extended his Berkeley research to the study of electrons in metals.
Once again he found, that the seemingly haphazard movements of
individual electrons managed to produce highly organized overall
effects. Like the Plasmas he had studied at Berkeley, these were no
longer situations involving two particles, each behaving as if it knew
what the other was doing, but entire oceans of particles, each behaving
as if it knew what untold trillions of others were doing. Bohm called
such collective movements of electrons plasmons, and their discovery
established his reputation as a physicist.
Bohm's Disillusionment
Both his sense of the importance of interconnectedness as well, as his
growing dissatisfaction with several of the other prevailing views in
physics, caused Bohm to become increasingly troubled by Bohr's
interpretation of quantum theory. After three years of teaching the
subject at Princeton he decided to improve his understanding by writing
a textbook. When he finished he found he still wasn't comfortable with
what quantum physics was saying and sent copies of the book to both
Bohr and Einstein to ask for their opinions. He got no answer from
Bohr, but Einstein contacted him and said, that since they were both at
Princeton they should meet and discuss the book. In the first of what
was to turn into a six-month series of spirited conversations, Einstein
enthusiastically told Bohm, that he had never seen quantum theory
presented so clearly. Nonetheless, he admitted he was still every bit
as dissatisfied with the theory as was Bohm. During their conversations
the two men discovered they each had nothing, but admiration for the
theory's ability to predict phenomena. What bothered them was, that it
provided no real way of conceiving of the basic structure of the World.
Bohr and his followers also claimed, that quantum theory was complete
and it was not possible to arrive at any clearer understanding of what
was going on in the Quantum Realm. This was the same as saying there
was no deeper reality beyond the subatomic landscape, no further
answers to be found, and this, too, grated on both Bohm and Einstein's
philosophical sensibilities. Over the course of their meetings they
discussed many other things, but these points in particular gained new
prominence in Bohm's thoughts. Inspired by his interactions with
Einstein, he accepted the validity of his misgivings about quantum
physics and decided there had to be an alternative view. When his
textbook Quantum Theory was published in 1951 it was hailed as a
classic, but it was a classic about a subject, to which Bohm no longer
gave his full allegiance. His mind, ever active and always looking for
deeper explanations, was already searching for a better way of
describing reality.
A New Kind of Field and
the Bullet, That Killed Lincoln
After his talks with Einstein, Bohm tried to find a workable
alternative to Bohr's interpretation. He began by assuming, that
particles such as electrons do exist in the absence of observers. He
also assumed, that there was a deeper reality beneath Bohr's inviolable
wall, a subquantum level, that still awaited discovery by science.
Building on these premises he discovered, that simply by proposing the
existence of a new kind of field on this subquantum level he was able
to explain the findings of quantum physics as well, as Bohr could. Bohm
called his proposed new field the quantum potential and theorized that,
like gravity, it pervaded all of space. However, unlike gravitational
fields, magnetic fields, and so on, its influence did not diminish with
distance. Its effects were subtle, but it was equally powerful
everywhere. Bohm published his alternative interpretation of quantum
theory in 1952. Reaction to his new approach was mainly negative. Some
physicists were so convinced such alternatives were impossible that
they dismissed his ideas out of hand. Others launched passionate
attacks against his reasoning. In the end virtually all such arguments
were based primarily on philosophical differences, but it did not
matter. Bohr's point of view had become so entrenched in physics that
Bohm's alternative was looked upon as little more, than a heresy.
Despite the harshness of these attacks Bohm remained unswerving in his
conviction, that there was more to reality, than Bohr's view allowed.
He also felt, that science was much too limited in its outlook when it
came to assessing new ideas such as his own, and in a 1957 book
entitled Causality and Chance in Modern Physics, he examined several of
the philosophical suppositions responsible for this attitude. One was
the widely held assumption, that it was possible for any single theory,
such as quantum theory, to be complete. Bohm criticized this assumption
by pointing out, that Nature may be Infinite. Because it would not be
possible for any theory to completely explain something, that is
Infinite, Bohm suggested, that open scientific inquiry might be better
served, if researchers refrained from making this assumption. In the
book he argued, that the way science viewed causality, was also much
too limited. Most effects were thought of as having only one or several
causes. However, Bohm felt, that an Effect could have an Infinite
Number of Causes. For example, if you asked someone what caused Abraham
Lincoln's death, they might answer, that it was the bullet in John
Wilkes Booth's gun. But a complete list of all the causes, that
contributed to Lincoln's death, would have to include all of the
events, that led to the development of the gun, all of the factors,
that caused Booth to want to kill Lincoln, all of the steps in the
evolution of the human race, that allowed for the development of a hand
capable of holding a gun, and so on, and so on. Bohm conceded, that
most of the time one could ignore the vast cascade of Causes, that had
led to any given Effect, but he still felt it was important for
scientists to remember, that no single Cause-and-Effect relationship
was ever really separate from the Universe as a whole.
If You Want to Know, Where You Are, Ask the Nonlocals
41
During this same period of his life Bohm also continued to refine his
alternative approach to quantum physics. As he looked more carefully
into the meaning of the quantum potential he discovered: it had a
number of features, that implied an even more radical departure from
orthodox thinking. One was the importance of wholeness. Classical
science had always viewed the state of a system as a whole, as merely
the result of the interaction of its parts. However, the quantum
potential stood this view on its ear and indicated, that the behavior
of the parts was actually organized by the whole. This not only took
Bohr's assertion, that subatomic particles are not independent
"things", but are part of an indivisible system one step further, but
even suggested, that wholeness was in some ways the more primary
reality. It also explained how electrons in plasmas (and other
specialized states such as superconductivity) could behave like
interconnected wholes. As Bohm states, such "electrons are not
scattered because, through the action of the quantum potential, the
whole system is undergoing a co-ordinated movement more like a ballet
dance than like a crowd of unorganized people. " Once again he notes
that "such quantum wholeness of activity is closer to the organized
unity of functioning of the parts of a living being than it is to the
kind of unity that is obtained by putting together the parts of a
machine."
An even more surprising feature of the quantum potential was its
implications for the nature of location. At the level of our everyday
lives things have very specific locations, but Bohm's interpretation of
quantum physics indicated that at the subquantum level, the level in
which the quantum potential operated, location ceased to exist. All
points in space became equal to all other points in space, and it was
meaningless to speak of anything as being separate from anything else.
Physicists call this property "nonlocality." The nonlocal aspect of the
quantum potential enabled Bohm to explain the connection between twin
particles without violating special relativity's ban against anything
traveling faster than the speed of light. To illustrate how, he offers
the following analogy: Imagine a fish swimming in an aquarium. Imagine
also that you have never seen a fish or an aquarium before and your
only knowledge about them comes from two television cameras, one
directed at the aquarium's front and the other at its side. When you
look at the two television monitors you might mistakenly assume that
the fish on the screens are separate entities. After all, because the
cameras are set at different angles, each of the images will be
slightly different. But as you continue to watch you will eventually
realize there is a relationship between the two fish. When one turns,
the other makes a slightly different but corresponding turn. When one
faces the front, the other faces the side, and so on. If you are
unaware of the full scope of the situation, you might wrongly conclude
that the fish are instantaneously communicating with one another, but
this is not the case. No communication is taking place because at a
deeper level of reality, the reality of the aquarium, the two fish are
actually one and the same. This, says Bohm, is precisely what is going
on between particles such as the two photons emitted when a positronium
atom decays. Indeed, because the quantum potential permeates all of
space, all particles are nonlocally interconnected. Bohm believes
subatomic particles are connected in the same way as the images of the
fish on the two television monitors. Although particles such as
electrons appear to be separate from one another, on a deeper level of
reality—a level analogous to the aquarium—they are actually
just different aspects of a deeper cosmic unity. More and more the
picture of reality Bohm was developing was not one in which subatomic
particles were separate from one another and moving through the void of
space, but one in which all things were part of an unbroken web and
embedded in a space that was as real and rich with process as the
matter that moved through it. Bohm's ideas still left most physicists
unpersuaded, but did stir the interest of a few. One of these was John
Stewart Bell, a theoretical physicist at CERN, a center for peaceful
atomic research near Geneva, Switzerland. Like Bohm, Bell had also
become discontented with quantum theory and felt there must be some
alternative. As he later said: "Then in 1952 I saw Bohm's paper. His
idea was to complete quantum mechanics by saying there are certain
variables in addition to those, which everybody knew about. That
impressed me very much."
Bell also realized that Bohm's theory implied the existence of
nonlocality and wondered if there was any way of experimentally
verifying its existence. The question remained in the back of his mind
for years until a sabbatical in 1964 provided him with the freedom to
focus his full attention on the matter. Then he quickly came up with an
elegant mathematical proof, that revealed how such an experiment could
be performed. The only problem was that it required a level of
technological precision that was not yet available. To be certain that
particles, such as those in the EPR paradox, were not using some normal
means of communication, the basic operations of the experiment had to
be performed in such an infinitesimally brief instant that there
wouldn't even be enough time for a ray of light to cross the distance
separating the two particles. This meant that the instruments used in
the experiment had to perform all of the necessary operations within a
few thousand-millionths of a second.
Enter the Hologram
By the late 1950s
Bohm had already had his run-in with McCarthyism and had become a
research fellow at Bristol University, England. There, along with a
young research student named Yakir Aharonov, he discovered another
important example of nonlocal interconnectedness. Bohm and Aharonov
found that under the right circumstances an electron is able to "feel"
the presence of a magnetic field that is in a region where there is
zero probability of finding the electron. This phenomenon is now known
as the Aharonov-Bohm effect, and when the two men first published their
discovery, many physicists did not believe such an effect was possible.
Even today there is enough residual skepticism that, despite
confirmation of the effect in numerous experiments, occasionally papers
still appear arguing that it doesn't exist. As always, Bohm
stoically accepted his continuing role as the voice in the crowd that
bravely notes the emperor has no clothes. In an interview conducted
some years later he offered a simple summation of the philosophy
underlying his courage: "In the long run it is far more dangerous to
adhere to illusion than to face what the actual fact is."
Nevertheless, the limited response to his ideas about wholeness and
nonlocality and his own inability to see how to proceed further caused
him to focus his attention in other directions. In the 1960s this led
him to take a closer look at order. Classical science generally divides
things into two categories: those that possess order in the arrangement
of their parts and those whose parts are disordered, or random, in
arrangement. Snowflakes, computers, and living things are all ordered.
The pattern a handful of spilled coffee beans makes on the floor, the
debris left by an explosion, and a series of numbers generated by a
roulette wheel are all disordered. As Bohm delved more deeply into the
matter he realized there were also different degrees of order. Some
things were much more ordered than other things, and this implied that
there was, perhaps, no end to the hierarchies of order that existed in
the universe. From this it occurred to Bohm that maybe things that we
perceive as disordered aren't disordered at all. Perhaps their order is
of such an "indefinitely high degree" that they only appear to us as
random (interestingly, mathematicians are unable to prove randomness,
and although some sequences of numbers are categorized as random, these
are only educated guesses).
While immersed in these thoughts, Bohm saw a device on a BBC television
program that helped him develop his ideas even further. The device was
a specially designed jar containing a large rotating cylinder. The
narrow space between the cylinder and the jar was filled with
glycerine—a thick, clear liquid—and floating motionlessly
in the glycerine was a drop of ink. What interested Bohm was that when
the handle on the cylinder was turned, the drop of ink spread out
through
45-46
the syrupy glycerine and seemed to disappear. But as soon as the handle
was turned back in the opposite direction, the faint tracing of ink
slowly collapsed upon itself and once again formed a droplet. Bohm
writes, "This immediately struck me as very relevant to the question of
order, since, when the ink drop was spread out, it still had a 'hidden'
(i. e., nonmanifest) order that was revealed when it was reconstituted.
On the other hand, in our usual language, we would say that the ink was
in a state of 'disorder' when it was diffused through the glycerine.
This led me to see that new notions of order must be involved here."
When a drop of ink is placed in a jar full of glycerine and a cylinder
inside the jar is turned, the drop appears to spread out and disappear.
But when the cylinder is turned in the opposite direction, the drop
comes back together. Bohm uses this phenomenon as an example of how
order can be either manifest (explicit) or hidden (implicit). This
discovery excited Bohm greatly, for it provided him with a new way of
looking at many of the problems he had been contemplating. Soon after
coming across the ink-in-glycerine device he encountered an even better
metaphor for understanding order, one that enabled him not only to
bring together all the various strands of his years of thinking, but
did so with such force and explanatory power it seemed almost
tailor-made for the purpose. That metaphor was the hologram. As soon as
Bohm began to reflect on the hologram he saw that it too provided a new
way of understanding order. Like the ink drop in its dispersed state,
the interference patterns recorded on a piece of holographic film also
appear disordered to the naked eye. Both possess orders that are hidden
or enfolded in much the same way that the order in a plasma is enfolded
in the seemingly random behavior of each of its electrons. But this was
not the only insight the hologram provided. The more Bohm thought about
it the more convinced he became that the universe actually employed
holographic principles in its operations, was itself a kind of giant,
flouring hologram, and this realization allowed him to crystallize all
of his various insights into a sweeping and cohesive whole. He
published his first papers on his holographic view of the universe in
the early 1970s, and in 1980 he presented a mature distillation of his
thoughts in a book entitled Wholeness and the Implicate Order. In it he
did more than just link his myriad ideas together. He transfigured them
into a new way of looking at reality that was as breathtaking as it was
radical.
Enfolded (wrapped up,
implicate) Orders and Unfolded
Realities One of
Bohm's most startling assertions is that the tangible reality of our
everyday lives is really a kind of illusion, like a holographic image.
Underlying it is a deeper order of existence, a vast and more primary
level of reality that gives birth to all the objects and appearances of
our physical world in much the same way that a piece of holographic
film gives birth to a hologram. Bohm calls this deeper level of reality
the implicate (which means "enfolded") order, and he refers to our own
level of existence as the explicate, or unfolded, order. He uses these
terms because he sees the manifestation of all forms in the universe as
the result of countless enfoldings and unfoldings between these two
orders. For example, Bohm believes an electron is not one thing, but a
totality or ensemble enfolded throughout the whole of space. When an
instrument detects the presence of a single electron it is simply
because one aspect of the electron's ensemble has unfolded, similar to
the way an ink drop unfolds out of the glycerine, at that particular
location. When an electron appears to be moving it is due to a
continuous series of such unfoldments and enfoldments. Put another way,
electrons and all other particles are no more substantive or permanent
than the form a geyser of water takes as it gushes out of a fountain.
They are sustained by a constant influx from the implicate order, and
when a particle appears to be destroyed, it is not lost. It has merely
enfolded back into the deeper order from which it sprang. A piece of
holographic film and the image it generates are also an example of an
implicate and explicate order. The film is an implicate order because
the image encoded in its interference patterns is a hidden totality
enfolded throughout the whole. The hologram projected from the film is
an explicate order because it represents the unfolded and perceptible
version of the image. The constant and flowing exchange between the two
orders explains how particles, such as the electron in the positronium
atom, can shapeshift from one kind of particle to another. Such
shiftings can be viewed as one particle, say an electron, enfolding
back into the implicate order while another, a photon, unfolds and
takes its place. It also explains how a quantum can manifest as either
a particle or a wave. According to Bohm, both aspects are always
enfolded in a quantum's ensemble, but the way an observer interacts
with the ensemble determines which aspect unfolds and which remains
hidden. As such, the role an observer plays in determining the form a
quantum takes may be no more mysterious than the fact that the way a
jeweler manipulates a gem determines which of its facets become visible
and which do not. Because the term hologram usually refers to an image
that is static and does not convey the dynamic and ever active nature
of the incalculable enfoldings and unfoldings that moment by moment
create our universe, Bohm prefers to describe the universe not as a
hologram, but as a "holomovement". The existence of a deeper and
holographically organized order also explains why reality becomes
nonlocal at the subquantum level. As we have seen, when something is
organized holographically, all semblance of location breaks down.
Saying that every part of a piece of holographic film contains all the
information possessed by the whole is really just another way of saying
that the information is distributed nonlocally. Hence, if the universe
is organized according to holographic principles, it, too, would be
expected to have nonlocal properties.
The Undivided Wholeness
of All Things
Most mind-boggling
of all are Bohm's fully developed ideas about wholeness. Because
everything in the cosmos is made out of the seamless holographic fabric
of the implicate order, he believes it is as meaningless to view the
universe as composed of "parts, " as it is to view the different
geysers in a fountain as separate from the water out of which they
flow. An electron is not an "elementary particle. " It is just a name
given to a certain aspect of the holomovement. Dividing reality up into
parts and then naming those parts is always arbitrary, a product of
convention, because subatomic particles, and everything else in the
universe, are no more separate from one another than different patterns
in an ornate carpet. This is a profound suggestion. In his general
theory of relativity Einstein astounded the world when he said that
space and time are not separate entities, but are smoothly linked and
part of a larger whole he called the space-time continuum.
(Time and Space do not exist and Einstein's 'space-time continuum'
doesn't exist either, LM)
Bohm takes this idea a giant step further. He says that everything in
the universe is part of a continuum. Despite the apparent separateness
of things at the explicate level, everything is a seamless extension of
everything else, and ultimately even the implicate and explicate orders
blend into each other. Take a moment to consider this. Look at your
hand. Now look at the light streaming from the lamp beside you. And at
the dog resting at your feet. You are not merely made of the same
things. You are the same thing. One thing. Unbroken. One enormous
something that has extended its uncountable arms and appendages into
all the apparent objects, atoms, restless oceans, and twinkling stars
in the cosmos. Bohm cautions that this does not mean the universe is a
giant undifferentiated mass. Things can be part of an undivided whole
and still possess their own unique qualities.
49
To illustrate what he means he points to the little eddies and
whirlpools that often form in a river. At a glance such eddies appear
to be separate things and possess many individual characteristics such
as size, rate, and direction of rotation, et cetera. But careful
scrutiny reveals that it is impossible to determine where any given
whirlpool ends and the river begins. Thus, Bohm is not suggesting that
the differences between "things" is meaningless. He merely wants us to
be aware constantly that dividing various aspects of the holomovement
into "things" is always an abstraction, a way of making those aspects
stand out in our perception by our way of thinking. In attempts to
correct this, instead of calling different aspects of the holomovement
"things, " he prefers to call them "relatively independent
subtotalities. " Indeed, Bohm believes that our almost universal
tendency to fragment the world and ignore the dynamic
interconnectedness of all things is responsible for many of our
problems, not only in science but in our lives and our society as well.
For instance, we believe we can extract the valuable parts of the earth
without affecting the whole. We believe it is possible to treat parts
of our body and not be concerned with the whole. We believe we can deal
with various problems in our society, such as crime, poverty, and drug
addiction, without addressing the problems in our society as a whole,
and so on. In his writings Bohm argues passionately that our current
way of fragmenting the world into parts not only doesn't work, but may
even lead to our extinction.
Consciousness as a More Subtle Form of Matter
In addition to
explaining why quantum physicists find so many examples of
interconnectedness when they plumb the depths of matter, Bohm's
holographic universe explains many other puzzles. One is the effect
consciousness seems to have on the subatomic world. As we have seen,
Bohm rejects the idea that particles don't exist until they are
observed. But he is not in principle against trying to bring
consciousness and physics together. He simply feels that most
physicists go about it the wrong way, by once again trying to fragment
reality and saying that one separate thing, consciousness, interacts
with another separate thing, a subatomic particle. Because all such
things are aspects of the holomovement, he feels it has no meaning to
speak of consciousness and matter as interacting. In a sense, the
observer is the observed. The observer is also the measuring device,
the experimental results, the laboratory, and the breeze that blows
outside the laboratory. In fact, Bohm believes that consciousness is a
more subtle form of matter, and the basis for any relationship between
the two lies not in our own level of reality, but deep in the implicate
order. Consciousness is present in various degrees of enfoldment and
unfoldment in all matter, which is perhaps why plasmas possess some of
the traits of living things. As Bohm puts it, "The ability of form to
be active is the most characteristic feature of mind, and we have
something that is mindlike already with the electron." Similarly, he
believes that dividing the universe up into living and nonliving things
also has no meaning. Animate and inanimate matter are inseparably
interwoven, and life, too, is enfolded throughout the totality of the
universe. Even a rock is in some way alive, says Bohm, for life and
intelligence are present not only in all of matter, but in "energy, "
... "the fabric of the entire universe, " and everything else we
abstract out of the holomovement and mistakenly view as separate
things. The idea that consciousness and life (and indeed all things)
are ensembles enfolded throughout the universe has an equally dazzling
flip side. Just as every portion of a hologram contains the image of
the whole, every portion of the universe enfolds the whole.
This means that if we knew how to access it we could find the Andromeda
galaxy in the thumbnail of our left hand. We could also find Cleopatra
meeting Caesar for the first time, for in principle the whole past and
implications for the whole future are also enfolded in each small
region of space and time. Every cell in our body enfolds the entire
cosmos. So does every leaf, every raindrop, and every dust mote, which
gives new meaning to William Blake's famous poem:
To see a World in a Grain of Sand
And a Heaven in a Wild Flower,
Hold Infinity in the palm of your hand
And Eternity in an hour.
51
The Energy of a Trillion
Atomic Bombs in Every Cubic Centimeter of Space
If our universe is
only a pale shadow of a deeper order, what else lies hidden, enfolded
in the warp and weft of our reality? Bohm has a suggestion. According
to our current understanding of physics, every region of space is awash
with different kinds of fields composed of waves of varying lengths.
Each wave always has at least some energy. When physicists calculate
the minimum amount of energy a wave can possess, they find that every
cubic centimeter of empty space contains more energy than the total
energy of all the matter in the known universe! Some physicists refuse
to take this calculation seriously and believe it must somehow be in
error. Bohm thinks this infinite ocean of energy does exist and tells
us at least a little about the vast and hidden nature of the implicate
order. He feels most physicists ignore the existence of this enormous
ocean of energy because, like fish who are unaware of the water in
which they swim, they have been taught to focus primarily on objects
embedded in the ocean, on matter. Bohm's view that space is as real and
rich with process as the matter that moves through it reaches full
maturity in his ideas about the implicate sea of energy. Matter does
not exist independently from the sea, from so-called empty space. It is
a part of space. To explain what he means, Bohm offers the following
analogy: A crystal cooled to absolute zero will allow a stream of
electrons to pass through it without scattering them. If the
temperature is raised, various flaws in the crystal will lose their
transparency, so to speak, and begin to scatter electrons. From an
electron's point of view such flaws would appear as pieces of "matter"
floating in a sea of nothingness, but this is not really the case. The
nothingness and the pieces of matter do not exist independently from
one another. They are both part of the same fabric, the deeper order of
the crystal. Bohm believes the same is true at our own level of
existence. Space is not empty. It is full, a plenum (fullness) as
opposed to a vacuum, and is the ground for the existence of everything,
including ourselves. The universe is not separate from this cosmic sea
of energy, it is a ripple on its surface, a comparatively small
"pattern of excitation" in the midst of an unimaginably vast ocean.
"This excitation pattern is relatively autonomous and gives rise to
approximately recurrent, stable and separable projections into a
three-dimensional explicate order of manifestation," states Bohm. In
other words, despite its apparent materiality and enormous size, the
universe does not exist in and of itself, but is the stepchild of
something far vaster and more ineffable. More than that, it is not even
a major production of this vaster something, but is only a passing
shadow, a mere hiccup in the greater scheme of things. This infinite
sea of energy is not all that is enfolded in the implicate order.
Because the implicate order is the foundation that has given birth to
everything in our universe, at the very least it also contains every
subatomic particle that has been or will be; every configuration of
matter, energy, life, and consciousness that is possible, from quasars
to the brain of Shakespeare, from the double helix, to the forces that
control the sizes and shapes of galaxies. And even this is not all it
may contain. Bohm concedes that there is no reason to believe the
implicate order is the end of things. There may be other undreamed of
orders beyond it, infinite stages of further development.
Experimental Support for
Bohm's Holographic Universe
A number of
tantalizing findings in physics suggest that Bohm may be correct. Even
disregarding the implicate sea of energy, space is filled with light
and other electromagnetic waves that constantly crisscross and
interfere with one another. As we have seen, all particles are also
waves. This means that physical objects and everything else we perceive
in reality are composed of interference patterns, a fact that has
undeniable holographic implications. Another compelling piece of
evidence comes from a recent experimental finding. In the 1970s the
technology became available to actually perform the two-particle
experiment outlined by Bell, and a number of different researchers
attempted the task. Although the findings were promising, none was able
to produce conclusive results. Then in 1982 physicists Alain Aspect,
Jean Dalibard and Gerard Roger of the Institute of Optics at the
University of Paris succeeded. First they produced a series of twin
photons by heating calcium atoms with lasers. Then they allowed each
photon to travel in opposite directions through 6. 5 meters of pipe and
pass through special filters that directed them toward one of two
possible polarization analyzers. It took each filter 10 billionths of a
second to switch between one analyzer or the other, about 30 billionths
of a second less than it took for light to travel the entire 13 meters
separating each set of photons. In this way Aspect and his colleagues
were able to rule out any possibility of the photons communicating
through any known physical process. Aspect and his team discovered
that, as quantum theory predicted, each photon was still able to
correlate its angle of polarization with that of its twin. This meant
that either Einstein's ban against faster- than-light communication was
being violated, or the two photons were nonlocally connected. Because
most physicists are opposed to admitting faster-than-light processes
into physics, Aspect's experiment is generally viewed as virtual proof
that the connection between the two photons is nonlocal. Furthermore,
as physicist Paul Davis of the University of Newcastle upon Tyne,
England, observes, since all particles are continually interacting and
separating, "the nonlocal aspects of quantum systems is therefore a
general property of nature." Aspect's findings do not prove that Bohm's
model of the universe is correct, but they do provide it with
tremendous support. Indeed, as mentioned, Bohm does not believe any
theory is correct in an absolute sense, including his own. All are only
approximations of the truth, finite maps we use to try to chart
territory that is both infinite and indivisible. This does not mean he
feels his theory is not testable. He is confident that at some point in
the future techniques will be developed which will allow his ideas to
be tested (when Bohm is criticized on this point he notes that there
are a number of theories in physics, such as "superstring
theory", which will probably not be testable for several decades).
The Reaction of the
Physics Community
Most physicists are
skeptical of Bohm's ideas. For example, Yale physicist Lee Smolin
simply does not find Bohm's theory "very compelling, physically."
Nonetheless, there is an almost universal respect for Bohm's
intelligence. The opinion of Boston University physicist Abner Shimony
is representative of this view. "I'm afraid I just don't understand his
theory. It is certainly a metaphor and the question is how literally to
take the metaphor. Still, he has really thought very deeply about the
matter and I think he's done a tremendous service by bringing these
questions to the forefront of physics's research instead of just having
them swept under the rug. He's been a courageous, daring, and
imaginative man." Such skepticism notwithstanding, there are also
physicists who are sympathetic to Bohm's ideas, including such big guns
as Roger Penrose of Oxford, the creator of the modern theory of the
black hole; Bernard d'Espagnat of the University of Paris, one of the
world's leading authorities on the conceptual foundations of quantum
theory; and Cambridge's Brian Josephson, winner of the 1973 Nobel Prize
in physics. Josephson believes Bohm's implicate order may someday even
lead to the inclusion of ... Mind within the framework of science, an
idea Josephson supports.
Pribram and Bohm Together
Considered together,
Bohm and Pribram's theories provide a profound new way of looking at
the world. Our brains mathematically construct objective reality by
interpreting frequencies that are ultimately projections from another
dimension, a deeper order of existence that is beyond both space and
time. The brain is a hologram enfolded in a holographic universe. For
Pribram, this synthesis made him realize that the objective world does
not exist, at least not in the way we are accustomed to believing. What
is "out there" is a vast ocean of waves and frequencies, and reality
looks concrete to us only because our brains are able to take this
holographic blur and convert it into the sticks and stones and other
familiar objects that make up our world. How is the brain (which itself
is composed of frequencies of matter) able to take something as
insubstantial as a blur of frequencies and make it seem solid to the
touch?
"The kind of mathematical process that Bekesy simulated with his
vibrators is basic to how our brains construct our image of a world out
there, " Pribram states. In other words, the smoothness of a piece of
fine china and the feel of beach sand beneath our feet are really just
elaborate versions of the phantom limb syndrome.
55
According to Pribram this does not mean there aren't china cups and
grains of beach sand out there. It simply means that a china cup has
two very different aspects to its reality. When it is filtered through
the lens of our brain it manifests as a cup. But if we could get rid of
our lenses, we'd experience it as an interference pattern. Which one is
real and which is illusion? "Both are real to me, " says Pribram, "or,
if you want to say, neither of them are real." This state of affairs is
not limited to china cups. We, too, have two very different aspects to
our reality. We can view ourselves as physical bodies moving through
space. Or we can view ourselves as a blur of interference patterns
enfolded throughout the cosmic hologram. Bohm believes this second
point of view might even be the more correct, for to think of ourselves
as a holographic mind/brain looking at a holographic universe is again
an abstraction, an attempt to separate two things that ultimately
cannot be separated. Do not be troubled if this is difficult to grasp.
It is relatively easy to understand the idea of holism in something
that is external to us, like an apple in a hologram. What makes it
difficult is that in this case we are not looking at the hologram. We
are part of the hologram. The difficulty is also another indication of
how radical a revision Bohm and Pribram are trying to make in our way
of thinking. But it is not the only radical revision. Pribram's
assertion that our brains construct objects pales beside another of
Bohm's conclusions: that we even construct space and time. The
implications of this view are just one of the subjects that will be
examined as we explore the effect Bohm and Pribram's ideas have had on
the work of researchers in other fields.
Part 2: MIND AND BODY
If we were to look
closely at an individual human being, we would immediately notice that
it is a unique hologram onto itself; self-contained, selfgenerating,
and self-knowledgeable. Yet if we were to remove this being from its
planetary context, we would quickly realize that the human form is not
unlike a mandala or symbolic poem, for within its form and flow lives
comprehensive information about various physical, social,
psychological, and evolutionary contexts within which it was created.
—Dr. Ken Dychtwald in The Holographic Paradigm (Ken Wilber,
editor)
The Holographic Model
and Psychology
While the
traditional model of psychiatry and psychoanalysis is strictly
personalistic and biographical, modern consciousness research has added
new levels, realms, and dimensions and shows the human psyche as being
essentially commensurate with the whole universe and all of existence.
— Stanislav Grof "Beyond the Brain". One area of research on
which the holographic model has had an impact is psychology. This is
not surprising, for, as Bohm has pointed out, consciousness itself
provides a perfect example of what he means by undivided and flowing
movement. The ebb and flow of our consciousness is not precisely
definable but can be seen as a deeper and more fundamental reality out
of which our thoughts and ideas unfold. In turn, these thoughts and
ideas are not unlike the ripples, eddies, and whirlpools that form in a
flowing stream, and like the whirlpools in a stream some can recur and
persist in a more or less stable way, while others are evanescent and
vanish almost as quickly as they appear. The holographic idea also
sheds light on the unexplainable linkages that can sometimes occur
between the consciousnesses of two or more individuals. One of the most
famous examples of such linkage is embodied in Swiss psychiatrist Carl
Jung's concept of a collective unconscious. Early in his career Jung
became convinced that the dreams, artwork, fantasies, and
hallucinations of his patients often contained symbols and ideas that
could not be explained entirely as products of their personal history.
Instead, such symbols more closely resembled the images and themes of
the world's great mythologies and religions. Jung concluded that myths,
dreams, hallucinations, and religious visions all spring from the same
source, a collective unconscious that is shared by all people. One
experience that led Jung to this conclusion took place in 1906 and
involved the hallucination of a young man suffering from paranoid
schizophrenia. One day while making his rounds Jung found the young man
standing at a window and staring up at the sun. The man was also moving
his head from side to side in a curious manner. When Jung asked him
what he was doing he explained that he was looking at the sun's penis,
and when he moved his head from side to side, the sun's penis moved and
caused the wind to blow. At the time Jung viewed the man's assertion as
the product of a hallucination. But several years later he came across
a translation of a two-thousand year-old Persian religious text that
changed his mind. The text consisted of a series of rituals and
invocations designed to bring on visions. It described one of the
visions and said that if the participant looked at the sun he would see
a tube hanging down from it, and when the tube moved from side to side
it would cause the wind to blow. Since circumstances made it extremely
unlikely that the man had had contact with the text containing the
ritual, Jung concluded that the man's vision was not simply a product
of his unconscious mind, but had bubbled up from a deeper level, from
the collective unconscious of the human race itself. Jung called such
images archetypes and believed they were so ancient it's as if each of
us has the memory of a two-million-year-old man lurking somewhere in
the depths of our unconscious minds. Although Jung's concept of a
collective unconscious has had an enormous impact on psychology and is
now embraced by untold thousands of psychologists and psychiatrists,
our current understanding of the universe provides no mechanism for
explaining its existence. The interconnectedness of all things
predicted by the holographic model, however, does offer an explanation.
In a universe in which all things are infinitely interconnected, all
consciousnesses are also interconnected. Despite appearances, we are
beings without borders. Or as Bohm puts it, "Deep down the
consciousness of mankind is one." If each of us has access to the
unconscious knowledge of the entire human race, why aren't we all
walking encyclopedias?
Psychologist Robert M. Anderson, Jr., of the Rensselaer Polytechnic
Institute in Troy, New York, believes it is because we are only able to
tap into information in the implicate order that is directly relevant
to our memories. Anderson calls this selective process personal
resonance and likens it to the fact that a vibrating tuning fork will
resonate with (or set up a vibration in) another tuning fork only if
the second tuning fork possesses a similar structure, shape, and size.
"Due to personal resonance, relatively few of the almost infinite
variety of 'images' in the implicate holographic structure of the
universe are available to an individual's personal consciousness, "
says Anderson. "Thus, when enlightened persons glimpsed this unitive
consciousness centuries ago, they did not write out relativity theory
because they were not studying physics in a context similar to that, in
which Einstein studied physics."
Dreams and the Holographic Universe
Page 62
Another researcher
who believes Bohm's implicate order has applications in psychology is
psychiatrist Montague Ullman, the founder of the Dream Laboratory at
the Maimonides Medical Center in Brooklyn, New York, and a professor
emeritus of clinical psychiatry at the Albert Einstein College of
Medicine, also in New York.
Ullman's initial interest in the holographic concept stemmed also from
its suggestion that all people are interconnected in the holographic
order. He has good reason for his interest. Throughout the 1960s and
1970s he was responsible for many of the ESP dream experiments
mentioned in the introduction. Even today the ESP dream studies
conducted at Maimonides stand as some of the best empirical evidence
that, in our dreams at least, we are able to communicate with one
another in ways that cannot presently be explained. In a typical
experiment a paid volunteer who claimed to possess no psychic ability
was asked to sleep in a room in the lab while a person in another room
concentrated on a randomly selected painting and tried to get the
volunteer to dream of the image it contained. Sometimes the results
were inconclusive. But other times the volunteers had dreams that were
clearly influenced by the paintings. For exampie, when the target
painting was Tamayo's Animals, a picture depicting two dogs flashing
their teeth and howling over a pile of bones, the test subject dreamed
she was at a banquet where there was not enough meat and everyone was
warily eyeing one another as they greedily ate their allotted portions.
In another experiment the target picture was Chagall's Paris from a
Window, a brightly colored painting depicting a man looking out a
window at the Paris skyline. The painting also contained several other
unusual features, including a cat with a human face, several small
figures of men flying through the air, and a chair covered with
flowers. Over the course of several nights the test subject dreamed
repeatedly about things French, French architecture, a French
policeman's hat, and a man in French attire gazing at various "layers"
of a French village. Some of the images in these dreams also appeared
to be specific references to the painting's vibrant colors and unusual
features, such as the image of a group of bees flying around flowers,
and a brightly colored Mardi Gras-type celebration in which the people
were wearing costumes and masks. Although Ullman believes such findings
are evidence of the underlying state of interconnectedness Bohm is
talking about, he feels that an even more profound example of
holographic wholeness can be found in another aspect of dreaming. That
is the ability of our dreaming selves often to be far wiser than we
ourselves are in our waking state. For instance, Ullman says, that in
his psychoanalytic practice he could have a patient, who seemed
completely unenlightened, when he was awake. Mean, selfish,
arrogant, exploitative, and manipulative; a person, who had fragmented
and dehumanized all of his interpersonal relationships. But no matter
how spiritually blind a person may be, or unwilling to recognize his or
her own shortcomings, dreams invariably depict their failings honestly
and contain metaphors, that seem designed to prod him or her gently
into a state of greater self-awareness. Moreover, such dreams were not
one-time occurrences. During the course of his practice Ullman noticed
that when one of his patients failed to recognize or accept some truth
about himself, that truth would surface again and again in his dreams,
in different metaphorical guises and linked with different related
experiences from his past, but always in an apparent attempt to offer
him new opportunities to come to terms with the truth. Because a man
can ignore the counsel of his dreams and still live to be a hundred,
Ullman believes this self-monitoring process is striving for more than
just the welfare of the individual.
63
He believes that nature is concerned with the survival of the species.
He also agrees with Bohm on the importance of wholeness and feels that
dreams are nature's way of trying to counteract our seemingly unending
compulsion to fragment the world. "An individual can disconnect from
all that's cooperative, meaningful, and loving and still survive, but
nations don't have that luxury. Unless we learn how to overcome all the
ways we've fragmented the human race, nationally, religiously,
economically, or whatever, we are going to continue to find ourselves
in a position where we can accidentally destroy the whole picture, "
says Ullman. "The only way we can do that is to look at how we fragment
our existence as individuals. Dreams reflect our individual experience,
but I think that's because there's a greater underlying need to
preserve the species, to maintain species-connectedness." What is the
source of the unending flow of wisdom that bubbles up in our dreams?
Ullman admits that he doesn't know, but he offers a suggestion. Given
that the implicate order represents in a sense an infinite information
source, perhaps it is the origin of this greater fund of knowledge.
Perhaps dreams are a bridge between the perceptual and nonmanifest
orders and represent a "natural transformation of the implicate into
the explicate." If Ullman is correct in this supposition it stands the
traditional psychoanalytic view of dreams on its ear, for instead of
dream content being something that ascends into consciousness from a
primitive substratum of the personality, quite the opposite would be
true.
Psychosis
and the Implicate Order
Ullman
believes, that some aspects of psychosis can also be explained by the
holographic idea. Both Bohm and Pribram have noted, that the
experiences mystics have reported throughout the ages—such as feelings
of Cosmic Oneness with the Universe, a Sense of Unity with All Life,
and so forth—sound very much like descriptions of the Implicate Order.
They suggest, that perhaps mystics are somehow able to peer beyond
ordinary explicate reality and glimpse its deeper, more holographic
qualities. Ullman believes, that psychotics are also able to experience
certain aspects of the holographic level of reality. But because they
are unable to order their experiences rationally, these glimpses are
only tragic parodies of the ones reported by mystics. For example,
schizophrenics often report Oceanic feelings of Oneness with the
Universe, but in a magic, delusional way. They describe feeling a loss
of boundaries between themselves and others, a belief, that leads them
to think their thoughts are no longer private. They believe, they are
able to read the thoughts of others. And instead of viewing people,
objects, and concepts as indivi-
dual things, they often view them
as members of larger and larger subclasses, a tendency, that seems to
be a way of expressing the holographic quality of the reality, in which
they find themselves. Ullman believes, that schizophrenics try to
convey their Sense of Unbroken Wholeness in the way they view Space and
Time. Studies have shown, that schizophrenics often treat the converse
of any relation as identical to the relation. For instance, according
to the schizophrenic's way of thinking, saying, that "event A follows
event B" is the same as saying "event B follows event A." The idea of
one event following another in any kind of time sequence is
meaningless, for all points in time are viewed equal. The same is true
of spatial relations. If a man's head is above his shoulders, then his
shoulders are also above his head. Like the image in a piece of
holographic film, things no longer have precise locations, and spatial
relationships cease to have meaning. Ullman believes, that certain
aspects of holographic thinking are even more pronounced in
manic-depressives. Whereas the schizophrenic only gets whiffs of the
holographic order, the manic is deeply involved in it and grandiosely
identifies with its infinite potential: "He can't keep up with all the
thoughts and ideas, that come at him in so overwhelm-
ing a way,"
states Ullman. "He has to lie, dissemble, and manipulate those about
him, so as to accommodate to his expansive vista. The end result, of
course, is mostly chaos and confusion, mixed with occasional outbursts
of creativity and success in consensual reality. In turn, the manic
becomes depressed after he returns from this surreal vacation and once
again faces the hazards and chance occurrences of everyday life. If it
is true, that we all encounter aspects of the implicate order when we
dream, why don't these encounters have the same effect on us as they do
on psychotics? One reason, says Ullman, is that we leave the unique and
challenging logic of the dream behind when we wake. Because of his
condition the psychotic is forced to contend with it while
simultaneously trying to function in everyday reality. Ullman also
theorizes, that when we dream, most of us have a natural protective
mechanism, that keeps us from coming into contact with more of the
implicate order, than we can cope with.
65
Lucid
Dreams and Parallel Universes
In
recent years psychologists have become increasingly interested in lucid
dreams, a type of dream, in which the dreamer maintains full waking
consciousness and is aware, that he or she is Dreaming. In addition to
the consciousness factor, Lucid Dreams are unique in several other
ways. Unlike normal dreams, in which the dreamer is primarily a passive
participant, in a lucid dream the dreamer is often able to control the
dream in various ways—turn nightmares into pleasant experiences, change
the setting of the dream, and/or summon up particular individuals or
situations. Lucid dreams are also much more vivid and suffused with
vitality, than normal dreams. In a lucid dream marble floors seem
eerily solid and real, flowers, dazzlingly colorful and fragrant, and
everything is vibrant and strangely energized.
Researchers
studying lucid dreams believe, they may lead to new ways to stimulate
personal growth, enhance self-confidence, promote mental and physical
health, and facilitate creative problem solving. At the 1987 annual
meeting of the Association for the Study of Dreams held in Washington,
D. C., physicist Fred Alan Wolf delivered a talk, in which he asserted,
that the holographic model may help explain this unusual phenomenon.
Wolf, an occasional lucid dreamer himself, points out that a piece of
holographic film actually generates two images, a virtual image, that
appears to be in the space behind the film, and a real image, that
comes into focus in the space in front of the film. One difference
between the two is, that the light waves, that compose a virtual image,
seem to be diverging from an apparent focus or source. As we have seen,
this is an illusion, for the virtual image of a hologram has no more
extension in space, than does the image in a mirror. But the real image
of a hologram is formed by light waves, that are coming to a focus, and
this is not an illusion. The real image does possess extension in
space. Unfortunately, little attention is paid to this real image in
the usual applications of holography, because an image, that comes into
focus in empty air, is invisible and can only be seen when dust
particles pass through it, or when someone blows a puff of smoke
through it. Wolf
believes,
that all dreams are internal holograms, and ordinary dreams
are less vivid, because they are virtual images. However, he thinks the
brain also has the ability to generate real images, and that is
exactly, what it does, when we are dreaming lucidly. The unusual
vibrancy of the lucid dream is due to the fact, that the waves are
converging and not diverging :
"If there is a Viewer', where
these waves focus, that viewer will be bathed in the scene, and the
scene, coming to a focus, will 'contain' him. In this way the dream
experience will appear 'lucid,'". Like Pribram, Wolf believes our minds
create the illusion of reality "out there" through the same kind of
processes studied by Bekesy. He believes these processes are also what
allows the lucid dreamer to create subjective realities, in which
things, like marble floors and flowers, are as tangible and real, as
their so-called objective counterparts. In fact, he thinks our ability
to be lucid in our dreams suggests, that there may not be much
difference between the world at large and the world inside our heads. (Lucid
Dreams are generated by our Higher Selves, but ordinary dreams are
artificial Holographic Imprints, imprinted into our Mind by someone
else, LM).
"When
the observer and the observed can separate and say, this is the
observed and this is the observer, which is an effect one seems to be
having when lucid, then,
I think, it's questionable whether [lucid dreams] should be considered
subjective," says Wolf.
Wolf postulates, that
lucid dreams (and perhaps all dreams) are actually visits to Parallel
Universes.
They are just smaller holograms within the larger and more inclusive
Cosmic Hologram. He even suggests, that the ability to lucid-dream
might better be called Parallel Universe Awareness. "I call it
parallel universe awareness, because I believe, that parallel universes
arise, as other images in the hologram," Wolf states. This and other
similar ideas about the ultimate nature of dreaming will be explored in
greater depth later in the book.
Hitching
a Ride on the Infinite Subway
The idea, that we are able to
access images from the collective unconscious, or even visit parallel
dream universes, pales beside the conclusions of another prominent
researcher who has been influenced by the holographic model. He is
Stanislav Grof, chief of psychiatric research at the Maryland
Psychiatric Research Center and an assistant professor of psychiatry at
the Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine.
67
After more than thirty years of studying nonordinary states of
consciousness, Grof has concluded that the avenues of exploration
available to our psyches via holographic interconnectedness are more
than vast. They are virtually endless. Grof first became interested in
nonordinary states of consciousness in the 1950s while investigating
the clinical uses of the hallucinogen LSD at the Psychiatric Research
Institute in his native Prague, Czechoslovakia. The purpose of his
research was to determine whether LSD had any therapeutic applications.
When Grof began his research, most scientists viewed the LSD experience
as little more than a stress reaction, the brain's way of responding to
a noxious chemical. But when Grof studied the records of his patient's
experiences he did not find evidence of any recurring stress reaction.
Instead, there was a definite continuity running through each of the
patient's sessions. "Rather than being unrelated and random, the
experiential content seemed to represent a successive unfolding of
deeper and deeper levels of the unconscious, " says Grof. This
suggested that repeated LSD sessions had important ramifications for
the practice and theory of psychotherapy, and provided Grof and his
colleagues with the impetus they needed to continue the research. The
results were striking. It quickly became clear that serial LSD sessions
were able to expedite the psychotherapeutic process and shorten the
time necessary for the treatment of many disorders. Traumatic memories
that had haunted individuals for years were unearthed and dealt with,
and sometimes even serious conditions, such as schizophrenia, were
cured. But what was even more startling was that many of the patients
rapidly moved beyond issues involving their illnesses and into areas
that were uncharted by Western psychology. One common experience was
the reliving of what it was like to be in the womb. At first Grof
thought these were just imagined experiences, but as the evidence
continued to amass he realized that the knowledge of embryology
inherent in the descriptions was often far superior to the patients'
previous education in the area. Patients accurately described certain
characteristics of the heart sounds of their mother, the nature of
acoustic phenomena in the peritoneal cavity, specific details
concerning blood circulation in the placenta, and even details about
the various cellular and biochemical processes taking place. They also
described important thoughts and feelings their mother had had during
pregnancy and events such as physical traumas she had experienced.
Whenever possible Grof investigated these assertions, and on several
occasions was able to verify them by questioning the mother and other
individuals involved. Psychiatrists, psychologists, and biologists who
experienced prebirth memories during their training for the program
(all the therapists who participated in the study also had to undergo
several sessions of LSD psychotherapy) expressed similar astonishment
at the apparent authenticity of the experiences. Most disconcerting of
all were those experiences in which the patient's consciousness
appeared to expand beyond the usual boundaries of the ego and explore
what it was like to be other living things and even other objects. For
example, Grof had one female patient who suddenly became convinced she
had assumed the identity of a female prehistoric reptile.
She not only gave a richly detailed description of what it felt like to
be encapsuled in such a form, but noted that the portion of the male of
the species' anatomy she found most sexually arousing was a patch of
colored scales on the side of its head. Although the woman had no prior
knowledge of such things, a conversation Grof had with a zoologist
later confirmed that in certain species of reptiles, colored areas on
the head do indeed play an important role as triggers of sexual
arousal. Patients were also able to tap into the consciousness of their
relatives and ancestors. One woman experienced what it was like to be
her mother at the age of three and accurately described a frightening
event that had befallen her mother at the time. The woman also gave a
precise description of the house her mother had lived in as well as the
white pinafore she had been wearing—all details her mother later
confirmed and admitted she had never talked about before. Other
patients gave equally accurate descriptions of events that had befallen
ancestors who had lived decades and even centuries before. Other
experiences included the accessing of racial and collective memories.
Individuals of Slavic origin experienced what it was like to
participate in the conquests of Genghis Khan's Mongolian hordes, to
dance in trance with the Kalahari bushmen, to undergo the initiation
rites of the Australian aborigines, and to die as sacrificial victims
of the Aztecs. And again the descriptions frequently contained obscure
historical facts and a degree of knowledge that was often completely at
odds with the patient's education, race, and previous exposure to the
subject. For instance, one uneducated patient gave a richly detailed
account of the techniques involved in the Egyptian practice of
embalming and mummification, including the form and meaning of various
amulets and sepulchral boxes, a list of the materials used in the
fixing of the mummy cloth, the size and shape of the mummy bandages,
and other esoteric facets of Egyptian funeral services.
69
Other individuals tuned into the cultures of the Far East and not only
gave impressive descriptions of what it was like to have a Japanese,
Chinese, or Tibetan psyche, but also related various Taoist or Buddhist
teachings. In fact, there did not seem to be any limit to what Grof's
LSD subjects could tap into. They seemed capable of knowing what it was
like to be every animal, and even plant, on the tree of evolution. They
could experience what it was like to be a blood cell, an atom, a
thermonuclear process inside the sun, the consciousness of the entire
planet, and even the consciousness of the entire cosmos. More than
that, they displayed the ability to transcend space and time, and
occasionally they related uncannily accurate precognitive information.
In an even stranger vein they sometimes encountered nonhuman
intelligences during their cerebral travels, discarnate beings, spirit
guides from "higher planes of consciousness, " and other suprahuman
entities. On occasion subjects also traveled to what appeared to be
other universes and other levels of reality. In one particularly
unnerving session a young man suffering from depression found himself
in what seemed to be another dimension. It had an eerie luminescence,
and although he could not see anyone he sensed that it was crowded with
discarnate beings. Suddenly he sensed a presence very close to him, and
to his surprise it began to communicate with him telepathically. It
asked him to please contact a couple who lived in the Moravian city of
Kromeriz and let them know that their son Ladislav was well taken care
of and doing all right. It then gave him the couple's name, street
address, and telephone number. The information meant nothing to either
Grof or the young man and seemed totally unrelated to the young man's
problems and treatment. Still, Grof could not put it out of his mind.
"After some hesitation and with mixed feelings, I finally decided to do
what certainly would have made me the target of my colleagues' jokes,
had they found out, " says Grof. "I went to the telephone, dialed the
number in Kromeriz, and asked if I could speak with Ladislav. To my
astonishment, the woman on the other side of the line started to cry.
When she calmed down, she told me with a broken voice: 'Our son is not
with us any more; he passed away, we lost him three weeks ago.' In the
1960s Grof was offered a position at the Maryland Psychiatric. Research
Center and moved to the United States. The center was also doing
controlled studies of the psychotherapeutic applications of LSD, and
this allowed Grof to continue his research. In addition to examining
the effects of repeated LSD sessions on individuals with various mental
disorders, the center also studied its effects on "normal"
volunteers— doctors, nurses, painters, musicians, philosophers,
scientists, priests, and theologians. Again Grof found the same kind of
phenomena occurring again and again. It was almost as if LSD provided
the human consciousness with access to a kind of infinite subway
system, a labyrinth of tunnels and byways that existed in the
subterranean reaches of the unconscious, and one that literally
connected everything in the universe with everything else. After
personally guiding over three thousand LSD sessions (each lasting at
least five hours) and studying the records of more than two thousand
sessions conducted by colleagues, Grof became unalterably convinced
that something extraordinary was going on. "After years of conceptual
struggle and confusion, I have concluded that the data from LSD
research indicate an urgent need for a drastic revision of the existing
paradigms for psychology, psychiatry, medicine, and possibly science in
general, " he states. "There is at present little doubt in my mind that
our current understanding of the universe, of the nature of reality,
and particularly of human beings, is superficial, incorrect, and
incomplete. " Grof coined the term transpersonal to describe such
phenomena, experiences in which the consciousness transcends the
customary boundaries of the personality, and in the late 1960s he
joined with several other like-minded professionals, including the
psychologist and educator Abraham Maslow, to found a new branch of
psychology called transpersonal psychology. If our current way of
looking at reality cannot account for transpersonal events, what new
understanding might take its place?
Grof believes it is the holographic model. As he points out, the
essential characteristics of transpersonal experiences—the
feeling that all boundaries are illusory, the lack of distinction
between part and whole, and the interconnectedness of all
things—are all qualities one would expect to find in a
holographic universe. In addition, he feels the enfolded nature of
space and time in the holographic domain explains why transpersonal
experiences are not bound by the usual spatial or temporal limitations.
Grof thinks that the almost endless capacity holograms have for
information storage and retrieval also accounts for the fact that
visions, fantasies, and other "psychological gestalts, " all contain an
enormous amount of information about an individual's personality. A
single image experienced during an LSD session might contain
information about a person's attitude toward life in general, a trauma
he experienced during childhood, how much self-esteem he has, how he
feels about his parents, and how he feels about his marriage—all
embodied in the overall metaphor of the scene. Such experiences are
holographic in another way, in that each small part of the scene can
also contain an entire constellation of information. Thus, free
association and other analytical techniques performed on the scene's
miniscule details can call forth an additional flood of data about the
individual involved. The composite nature of archetypal images can be
modeled by the holographic idea. As Grof observes, holography makes it
possible to build up a sequence of exposures, such as pictures of every
member of a large family, on the same piece of film. When this is done
the developed piece of film will contain the image of an individual
that represents not one member of the family, but all of them at the
same time. "These genuinely composite images represent an exquisite
model of a certain type of transpersonal experience, such as the
archetypal images of the Cosmic Man, Woman, Mother, Father, Lover,
Trickster, Fool, or Martyr (sufferer), " says Grof. If each exposure is
taken at a slightly different angle, instead of resulting in a
composite picture, the piece of film can be used to create a series of
holographic images that appear to flow into one another. Grof believes
this illustrates another aspect of the visionary experience, namely,
the tendency of countless images to unfold in rapid sequence, each one
appearing and then dissolving into the next as if by magic. He thinks
holography's success at modeling so many different aspects of the
archetypal experience suggests that there is a deep link between
holographic processes and the way archetypes are produced. Indeed, Grof
feels that evidence of a hidden, holographic order surfaces virtually
every time one experiences a nonordinary state of consciousness. Bohm's
concept of the unfolded and enfolded orders and the idea that certain
important aspects of reality are not accessible to experience and study
under ordinary circumstances are of direct relevance for the
understanding of unusual states of consciousness. Individuals who have
experienced various nonordinary states of consciousness, including well
educated and sophisticated scientists from various disciplines,
frequently report that they entered hidden domains of reality that
seemed to be authentic and in some sense implicit in (meant, unspoken),
and supraordinated to, everyday reality.
Holotropic
Therapy
Perhaps Grof's most remarkable
discovery is that the same phenomena reported by individuals who have
taken LSD can also be experienced without resorting to drugs of any
kind. To this end, Grof and his wife, Christina, have developed a
simple, nondrug technique for inducing these holotropic, or
nonordinary, states of consciousness. They define a holotropic state of
consciousness as one in which it is possible to access the holographic
labyrinth that connects all aspects of existence. These include one's
biological, psychological, racial, and spiritual history, the past,
present, and future of the world, other levels of reality, and all the
other experiences already discussed in the context of the LSD
experience. The Grofs call their technique holotropic therapy and use
only rapid and controlled breathing, evocative music, and massage and
body work, to induce altered states of consciousness. To date,
thousands of individuals have attended their workshops and report
experiences that are every bit as spectacular and emotionally profound
as those described by subjects of Grofs previous work on LSD. Grof
describes his current work and gives a detailed account of his methods
in his book "The Adventure of Self-Discovery."
Vortices
of Thought and Multiple Personalities
A number of researchers have used
the holographic model to explain various aspects of the thinking
process itself. For example, New York psychiatrist Edgar A. Levenson
believes the hologram provides a valuable model for understanding the
sudden and transformative changes individuals often experience during
psychotherapy.
73
He bases his conclusion on the fact that such changes take place no
matter what technique or psychoanalytic approach the therapist uses.
Hence, he feels all psychoanalytic approaches are purely ceremonial,
and change is due to something else entirely. Levenson believes that
something is resonance. A therapist always knows when therapy is going
well, he observes. There is a strong feeling that the pieces of an
elusive pattern are all about to come together. The therapist is not
saying anything new to the patient, but instead seems to be resonating
with something the patient already unconsciously knows: "It is as
though a huge, three-dimensional, spatially coded representation of the
patient's experience develops in the therapy, running through every
aspect of his life, his history and his participation with the
therapist. At some point there is a kind of 'overload' and everything
falls into place." Levenson believes these three-dimensional
representations of experience are holograms buried deep in the
patient's psyche, and a resonance of feeling between the therapist and
patient causes them to emerge in a process similar to the way a laser
of a certain frequency causes an image made with a laser of the same
frequency to emerge from a multiple image hologram." The holographic
model suggests a radically new paradigm which might give us a fresh way
of perceiving and connecting clinical phenomena which have always been
known to be important, but were relegated to the 'art' of
psychotherapy" says Levenson. "It offers a possible theoretical
template for change and a practical hope of clarifying
psychotherapeutic technique."
Psychiatrist David Shainberg, associate dean of the Postgraduate
Psychoanalytic Program at the William Alanson White Institute of
Psychiatry in New York, feels
Bohm's assertion that thoughts are like vortices in a river should be
taken literally and explains why our attitudes and beliefs sometimes
become fixed and resistant to change. Studies have shown that vortices
are often remarkably stable (whirlwinds, whirls of mass or air). The
Great Red Spot of Jupiter, a giant vortex of gas over 25, 000 miles
wide, has remained intact since it was first discovered 300 years ago.
Shainberg believes this same tendency toward stability is what causes
certain vortices of thought (our ideas and opinions) to become
occasionally cemented in our consciousness. He feels the virtual
permanence of some vortices is often detrimental to our growth as
human beings. A particularly powerful vortex can dominate our behavior
and inhibit our ability to assimilate new ideas and information. It can
cause us to become repetitious, create blockages in the creative flow
of our consciousness, keep us from seeing the wholeness of ourselves,
and make us feel disconnected from our species. Shainberg believes that
vortices may even explain things like the nuclear arms race: "Look at
the nuclear arms race as a vortex arising out of the greed of human
beings who are isolated in their separate selves and do not feel the
connection to other human beings. They are also feeling a peculiar
emptiness and become greedy for everything they can get to fill
themselves. Hence nuclear industries proliferate because they provide
large amounts of money and the greed is so extensive that such people
do not care what might happen from their actions."
Like Bohm, Shainberg believes our consciousness is constantly unfolding
out of the implicate order, and when we allow the same vortices to take
form repeatedly he feels we are erecting a barrier between ourselves
and the endless positive and novel interactions we could be having with
this infinite source of all being.
To catch a glimmer of what we are missing, he suggests we look at a
child. Children have not yet had the time to form vortices, and this is
reflected in the open and flexible way they interact with the world.
According to Shainberg the sparkling aliveness of a child expresses the
very essence of the unfolding-enfolding nature of consciousness when it
is unimpeded. If you want to become aware of your own frozen vortices
of thought, Shainberg recommends you pay close attention to the way you
behave in conversation. When people with set beliefs converse with
others, they try to justify their identities by espousing and defending
their opinions. Their judgments seldom change as a result of any new
information they encounter, and they show little interest in allowing
any real conversational interaction to take place. A person who is open
to the flowing nature of consciousness is more willing to see the
frozen condition of the relationships imposed by such vortices of
thought. They are committed to exploring conversational interactions,
rather than endlessly repeating a static litany of opinions.
"Human response and articulation of that response, feedback of
reactions to that response and the clarifying of the relationships
between different responses, are the way human beings participate in
the flow of the implicate order, " says Shainberg. Another
psychological phenomena that bears several earmarks of the implicate is
multiple personality disorder, or MPD. MPD is a bizarre syndrome in
which two or more distinct personalities inhabit a single body. Victims
of the disorder, or "multiples, " often have no awareness of their
condition. They do not realize that control of their body is being
passed back and forth between different personalities and instead feel
they are suffering from some kind of amnesia, confusion, or black-out
spells. Most multiples average between eight to thirteen personalities,
although so-called super-multiples may have more than a hundred
subpersonalities. One of the most telling statistics regarding
multiples is that 97 percent of them have had a history of severe
childhood trauma, often in the form of monstrous psychological,
physical, and sexual abuse. This has led many researchers to conclude
that becoming a multiple is the psyche's way of coping with
extraordinary and soul-crushing pain. By dividing up into one or more
personalities the psyche is able to parcel out the pain, in a way, and
have several personalities bear what would be too much for just one
personality to withstand. In this sense becoming a multiple may be the
ultimate example of what Bohm means by fragmentation. It is interesting
to note that when the psyche fragments itself, it does not become a
collection of broken and jagged-edged shards (pieces), but a collection
of smaller wholes, complete and self-sustaining with their own traits,
motives, and desires. Although these wholes are not identical copies of
the original personality, they are related to the dynamics of the
original personality, and this in itself suggests that some kind of
holographic process is involved. Bohm's assertion that fragmentation
always eventually proves destructive is also apparent in the syndrome.
Although becoming a multiple allows a person to survive an otherwise
unendurable childhood, it brings with it a host of unpleasant side
effects. These may include depression, anxiety and panic attacks,
phobias, heart and respiratory problems, unexplained nausea,
migrainelike headaches, tendencies toward self-mutilation, and many
other mental and physical disorders. Startlingly, but regular as
clockwork, most multiples are diagnosed when they are between the ages
of twenty-eight and thirty-five, a "coincidence" that suggests that
some inner alarm system may be going off at that age, warning them that
it is imperative they are diagnosed and thus obtain the help they need.
This idea seems borne out by the fact that multiples who reach their
forties before they are diagnosed frequently report having the sense
that if they did not seek help soon, any chance of recovery would be
lost. Despite the temporary advantages the tortured psyche gains by
fragmenting itself, it is clear that mental and physical well-being,
and perhaps even survival, still depend on wholeness. Another unusual
feature of MPD is that each of a multiple's personalities possesses a
different brain-wave pattern. This is surprising, for as Frank Putnam,
a National Institutes of Health psychiatrist who has studied this
phenomenon, points out, normally a person's brain-wave pattern does not
change even in states of extreme emotion. Brainwave patterns are not
the only thing that varies from personality to personality. Blood flow
patterns, muscle tone, heart rate, posture, and even allergies can all
change as a multiple shifts from one self to the next. Since brain-wave
patterns are not confined to any single neuron or group of neurons, but
are a global property of the brain, this too suggests that some kind of
holographic process may be at work. Just as a multiple-image hologram
can store and project dozens of whole scenes, perhaps the brain
hologram can store and call forth a similar multitude of whole
personalities. In other words, perhaps what we call "self" is also a
hologram, and when the brain of a multiple clicks from one holographic
self to the next, these slide-projector like shuttlings are reflected
in the global changes that take place in brain-wave activity as well as
in the body in general. The physiological changes that occur as a
multiple shifts from one personality to the next also have profound
implications for the relationship between mind and health, and will be
discussed at greater length in the next chapter.
A
Flaw in the Fabric of Reality
Another of Jung's great
contributions was defining the concept of synchronicity. As mentioned
in the introduction, synchronicities are coincidences that are so
unusual and so meaningful they could hardly be attributed to chance
alone. Each of us has experienced a synchronicity at some point in our
lives, such as when we learn a strange new word and then hear it used
in a news broadcast a few hours later, or when we think about an
obscure subject and then notice other
people talking about it.
77
The brain-wave patterns of four subpersonalities in an individual
suffering from multiple personality disorder. Is it possible that the
brain uses holographic principles to store the vast amount of
information necessary to house dozens and even hundreds of
personalities in a single body? A few years back I experienced a series
of synchronicities involving the rodeo showman Buffalo Bill.
Occasionally, while doing a modest workout in the morning before I
start writing, I turn on the television.
One morning in January 1983, I was doing push-ups while a game show was
on, and I suddenly found myself shouting out the name "Buffalo Bill!"
At first I was puzzled by my outburst, but then I realized the
game-show host had asked the question "What other name was William
Frederick Cody known by?" Although I had not been paying conscious
attention to the show, for some reason my unconscious mind had zeroed
in on this question and had answered it. At the time I did not think
much of the occurrence and went about my day. A few hours later a
friend telephoned and asked me if I could settle a friendly argument he
was having concerning a piece of theater trivia. I offered to try,
whereupon my friend asked, "Is it true that John Barrymore's dying
words were, 'Aren't you the illegitimate son of Buffalo Bill?'"
I thought this second encounter with Buffalo Bill was odd but still
chalked it up to coincidence until later that day when a Smithsonian
magazine arrived in the mail, and I opened it. One of the lead articles
was titled "The Last of the Great Scouts Is Back Again. " It was
about... you guessed it: Buffalo Bill. (Incidentally, I was unable to
answer my friend's trivia question and still have no idea whether they
were Barrymore's dying words or not.) As incredible as this experience
was, the only thing that seemed meaningful about it was its improbable
nature. There is, however, another kind of synchronicity that is
noteworthy not only because of its improbability, but because of its
apparent relationship to events taking place deep in the human psyche.
The classic example of this is Jung's scarab story. Jung was treating a
woman whose staunchly rational approach to life made it difficult for
her to benefit from therapy. After a number of frustrating sessions the
woman told Jung about a dream involving a scarab beetle. Jung knew that
in Egyptian mythology the scarab represented rebirth and wondered if
the woman's unconscious mind was symbolically announcing that she was
about to undergo some kind of psychological rebirth. He was just about
to tell her this when something tapped on the window, and he looked up
to see a gold-green scarab on the other side of the glass (it was the
only time a scarab beetle had ever appeared at Jung's window). He
opened the window and allowed the scarab to fly into the room as he
presented his interpretation of the dream. The woman was so stunned
that she tempered her excessive rationality, and from that point on her
response to therapy improved. Jung encountered many such meaningful
coincidences during his psychotherapeutic work and noticed that they
almost always accompanied periods of emotional intensity and
transformation: fundamental changes in belief, sudden and new insights,
deaths, births, even changes in profession. He also noticed that they
tended to peak when the new realization or insight was just about to
surface in a patient's consciousness. As his ideas became more widely
known, other therapists began reporting their own experiences with
synchronicity. For example, Zurich-based psychiatrist Carl Alfred
Meier, a longtime associate of Jung's, tells of a synchronicity that
spanned many years. An American woman suffering from serious depression
traveled all the way from Wuchang, China, to be treated by Meier. She
was a surgeon and had headed a mission hospital in Wuchang for twenty
years. She had also become involved in the culture and was an expert in
Chinese philosophy. During the course of her therapy she told Meier of
a dream in which she had seen the hospital with one of its wings
destroyed. Because her identity was so intertwined with the hospital,
Meier felt her dream was telling her she was losing her sense of self,
her American identity, and that was the cause of her depression.
79
He advised her to return to the States, and when she did her depression
quickly vanished, just as he had predicted. Before she departed he also
had her do a detailed sketch of the crumbling hospital. Years later the
Japanese attacked China and bombed Wuchang Hospital. The woman sent
Meier a copy of Life magazine containing a double-page photograph of
the partially destroyed hospital, and it was identical to the drawing
she had produced nine years earlier. The symbolic and highly personal
message of her dream had somehow spilled beyond the boundaries of her
psyche and into physical reality. Because of their striking nature,
Jung became convinced that such synchronicities were not chance
occurrences, but were in fact related to the psychological processes of
the individuals who experienced them. Since he could not conceive how
an occurrence deep in the psyche could cause an event or series of
events in the physical world, at least in the classical sense, he
proposed that some new principle must be involved, an acausal
connecting principle hitherto unknown to science. When Jung first
advanced this idea, most physicists did not take it seriously (although
one eminent physicist of the time, Wolfgang Pauli, felt it was
important enough to coauthor a book with Jung on the subject entitled
"The Interpretation and Nature of the Psyche"). But now that the
existence of nonlocal connections has been established, some physicists
are giving Jung's idea another look. * Physicist Paul Davies states,
"These non-local quantum effects are indeed a form of synchronicity in
the sense that they establish a connection—more precisely a
correlation—between events for which any form of causal linkage
is forbidden." As has been mentioned, nonlocal effects are not due to a
cause-and-effect relationship and are therefore acausal. Another
physicist who takes synchronicity seriously is F. David Peat. Peat
believes that Jungian-type synchronicities are not only real, but offer
further evidence of the implicate order. As we have seen, according to
Bohm the apparent separateness of consciousness and matter is an
illusion, an artifact that occurs only after both have unfolded into
the explicate world of objects and sequential time. If there is no
division between mind and matter in the implicate, the ground from
which all things spring, then it is not unusual to expect that reality
might still be shot through with traces of this deep connectivity. Peat
believes that synchronicities are therefore "flaws" in the fabric of
reality, momentary fissures that allow us a brief glimpse of the
immense and unitary order underlying all of nature. Put another way,
Peat thinks that synchronicities reveal the absence of division between
the physical world and our inner psychological reality. Thus the
relative scarcity of synchronous experiences in our lives shows not
only the extent to which we have fragmented ourselves from the general
field of consciousness, but also the degree to which we have sealed
ourselves off from the infinite and dazzling potential of the deeper
orders of mind and reality. According to Peat, when we experience a
synchronicity, what we are really experiencing "is the human mind
operating, for a moment, in its true order and extending throughout
society and nature, moving through orders of increasing subtlety,
reaching past the source of mind and matter into creativity itself.
This is an astounding notion. Virtually all of our commonsense
prejudices about the world are based on the premise that subjective and
objective reality are very much separate. That is why synchronicities
seem so baffling and inexplicable to us. But if there is ultimately no
division between the physical world and our inner psychological
processes, then we must be prepared to change more than just our
commonsense understanding of the universe, for the implications are
staggering. One implication is that objective (imparial, unbiased,
detached) reality is more like a dream than we have previously
suspected. For example, imagine dreaming that you are sitting at a
table and having an evening meal with your boss and his wife. As you
know from experience, all the various props in the dream—the
table, the chairs, the plates, and salt and pepper shakers—
appear to be separate objects. Imagine also that you experience a
synchronicity in the dream; perhaps you are served a particularly
unpleasant dish, and when you ask the waiter what it is, he tells you
that the name of the dish is Your Boss. Realizing that the
unpleasantness of the dish betrays your true feelings about your boss,
you become embarrassed and wonder how an aspect of your "inner" self
has managed to spill over into the "outer" reality of the scene you are
dreaming. Of course, as soon as you wake up you realize the
synchronicity was not so strange at all, for there was really no
division between your "inner" self and the "outer" reality of the
dream. Similarly, you realize that the apparent separateness of the
various objects in the dream was also an illusion, for everything was
produced by a deeper and more fundamental order—the unbroken
wholeness of your own unconscious mind. If there is no division between
the mental and physical worlds, these same qualities are also true of
objective reality. According to Peat, this does not mean the material
universe is an illusion, because both the implicate and the explicate
play a role in creating reality. Nor does it mean that individuality is
lost, any more than the image of a rose is lost once it is recorded in
a piece of holographic film. It simply means that we are again like
vortices in a river, unique but inseparable from the flow of nature
(Bohm's assertion that thoughts are like vortices in a river). Or as
Peat puts it, "the self lives on but as one aspect of the more subtle
movement that involves the order of the whole of consciousness."
And so we have come full circle, from the discovery that consciousness
contains the whole of objective (unbiased) reality—the entire
history of biological life on the planet, the world's religions and
mythologies, and the dynamics of both blood cells and stars—to
the discovery that the material universe can also contain within its
warp (distortion) and weft the innermost processes of consciousness.
Such is the nature of the deep connectivity that exists between all
things in a holographic universe. In the next chapter we will explore
how this connectivity, as well as other aspects of the holographic
idea, affect our current understanding of health.
I Sing the Body Holographic. You will hardly know, who I am or what I
mean. But I shall be good health to you nevertheless. . .
Walt
Whitman, "Song of Myself"
A sixty-one-year-old man we'll
call Frank was diagnosed as having an almost always fatal form of
throat cancer and told he had less than a 5 percent chance of
surviving. His weight had dropped from 130 to 98 pounds. He was
extremely weak, could barely swallow his own saliva, and was having
trouble breathing. Indeed, his doctors had debated whether to give him
radiation therapy at all, because there was a distinct possibility the
treatment would only add to his discomfort
without significantly increasing his chances for survival. They decided
to proceed anyway. Then, to Frank's great good fortune, Dr. 0. Carl
Simonton, a radiation oncologist and medical director of the Cancer
Counseling and Research Center in Dallas, Texas, was asked to
participate in his treatment. Simonton suggested that Frank himself
could influence the course of his own disease. Simonton then taught
Frank a number of relaxation and mental-imagery techniques he and his
colleagues had developed. From that point on, three times a day, Frank
pictured the radiation he received as consisting of millions of tiny
bullets of energy bombarding his cells. He also visualized his cancer
cells as weaker and more confused than his normal cells, and thus
unable to repair the damage they suffered.
82-83
Then he visualized his body's white blood cells, the soldiers of the
immune system, coming in, swarming over the dead and dying cancer
cells, and carrying them to his liver and kidneys to be flushed out of
his body. The results were dramatic and far exceeded what usually
happened in such cases when patients were treated solely with
radiation. The radiation treatments worked like magic. Frank
experienced almost none of the negative side effects—damage to
skin and mucous membranes— that normally accompanied such
therapy. He regained his lost weight and his strength, and in a mere
two months all signs of his cancer had vanished. Simonton believes
Prank's remarkable recovery was due in large part to his daily regimen
of visualization exercises. In a follow-up study, Simonton and his
colleagues taught their mental-imagery techniques to 159 patients with
cancers considered medically incurable. The expected survival time for
such a patient is twelve months. Four years later 63 of the patients
were still alive. Of those, 14 showed no evidence of disease, the
cancers were regressing in 12, and in 17 the disease was stable. The
average survival time of the group as a whole was 24.4 months, over
twice as long as the national norm. Simonton has since conducted a
number of similar studies, all with positive results. Despite such
promising findings, his work is still considered controversial. For
instance, critics argue that the individuals who participate in
Simonton's studies are not "average" patients. Many of them have sought
Simonton out for the express purpose of learning his techniques, and
this shows that they already have an extraordinary fighting spirit.
Nonetheless, many researchers find Simonton's results compelling enough
to support his work, and Simonton himself has set up the Simonton
Cancer Center, a successful research and treatment facility in Pacific
Palisades, California, devoted to teaching imagery techniques to
patients who are fighting various illnesses. The therapeutic use of
imagery has also captured the imagination of the public, and a recent
survey revealed that it was the fourth most frequently used alternative
treatment for cancer. How is it that an image formed in the mind can
have an effect on something as formidable as an incurable cancer? Not
surprisingly the holographic theory of the brain can be used to explain
this phenomenon as well. Psychologist Jeanne Achterberg, director of
research and rehabilitation science at the University of Texas Health
Science Center in Dallas, Texas, and one of the scientists who
helped develop the imagery techniques Simonton uses, believes it is the
holographic imaging capabilities of the brain that provide the key. As
has been noted, all experiences are ultimately just neurophysiological
processes taking place in the brain. According to the holographic model
the reason we experience some things, such as emotions, as internal
realities and others, such as the songs of birds and the barking of
dogs, as external realities is because that is where the brain
localizes them when it creates the internal hologram that we experience
as reality. However, as we have also seen, the brain cannot always
distinguish between what is "out there" and what it believes to be "out
there, " and that is why amputees sometimes have phantom limb
sensations. Put another way, in a brain that operates holographically,
the remembered image of a thing can have as much impact on the senses
as the thing itself. It can also have an equally powerful effect on the
body's physiology, a state of affairs that has been experienced
firsthand by anyone who has ever felt their heart race after imagining
hugging a loved one. Or anyone who has ever felt their palms grow
sweaty after conjuring up the memory of some unusually frightening
experience. At first glance the fact that the body cannot always
distinguish between an imagined event and a real one may seem strange,
but when one takes the holographic model into account—a model
that asserts that all experiences, whether real or imagined, are
reduced to the same common language of holographically organized wave
forms—the situation becomes much less puzzling. Or as Achterberg
puts it, "When images are regarded in the holographic manner, their
omnipotent influence on physical function logically follows. The image,
the behavior, and the physiological concomitants are a unified aspect
of the same phenomenon. Bohm uses his idea of the implicate order, the
deeper and nonlocal level of existence from which our entire universe
springs, to echo the sentiment: "Every action starts from an intention
in the implicate order. The imagination is already the creation of the
form; it already has the intention and the germs of all the movements
needed to carry it out. And it affects the body and so on, so that as
creation takes place in that way from the subtler levels of the
implicate order, it goes through them until it manifests in the
explicate. " In other words, in the implicate order, as in the brain
itself, imagination and reality are ultimately indistinguishable, and
it should therefore come as no surprise to us that images in the mind
can ultimately manifest as realities in the physical body.
85
Achterberg found that the physiological effects produced through the
use of imagery are not only powerful, but can also be extremely
specific. For example, the term white blood cell actually refers to a
number of different kinds of cell. In one study, Achterberg decided to
see if she could train individuals to increase the number of only one
particular type of white blood cell in their body. To do this she
taught one group of college students how to image a cell known as a
neutrophil, the major constituent of the white blood cell population.
She trained a second group to image T-cells, a more specialized kind of
white blood cell. At the end of the study the group that learned the
neutrophil imagery had a significant increase in the number of
neutrophils in their body, but no change in the number of T-cells. The
group that learned to image T-cells had a significant increase in the
number of that kind of cell, but the number of neutrophils in their
body remained the same. Achterberg says that belief is also critical to
a person's health. As she points out, virtually everyone who has had
contact with the medical world knows at least one story of a patient
who was sent home to die, but because they "believed" otherwise, they
astounded their doctors by completely recovering. In her fascinating
book "Imagery in Healing" she describes several of her own encounters
with such cases. In one, a woman was comatose on admission, paralyzed,
and diagnosed with a massive brain tumor. She underwent surgery to
"debulk" her tumor (remove as much as is safely possible), but because
she was considered close to death, she was sent home without receiving
either radiation or chemotherapy. Instead of promptly dying, the woman
became stronger by the day. As her biofeedback therapist, Achterberg
was able to monitor the woman's progress, and by the end of sixteen
months the woman showed no evidence of cancer. Why? Although the woman
was intelligent in a worldly sense, she was only moderately educated
and did not really know the meaning of the word tumor—or the
death sentence it imparted. Hence, she did not believe she was going to
die and overcame her cancer with the same confidence and determination
she'd used to overcome every other illness in her life, says
Achterberg. When Achterberg saw her last, the woman no longer had any
traces of paralysis, had thrown away her leg braces and her cane, and
had even been out dancing a couple of times. Achterberg backs up her
claim by noting that the mentally retarded and the emotionally
disturbed - individuals who cannot comprehend the death sentence
society attaches to cancer - also have a significantly lower cancer
rate. Over a 4-year period in Texas, only about 4 % of the deaths in
these 2 groups were from cancer, compared to the state norm, which was
15 to 18 %. Intriguingly, there was not one recorded case of leukemia
the years 1925 and 1978 in these 2 groups. Studies have reported
similar results in the United States as a whole, as well as in various
other countries including England, Greece and Romania. Because of these
and other findings Achterberg thinks that a person with an illness,
even a common cold, should recruit as many "neural holograms" of health
as possible - in the form of beliefs, images of well-being and harmony,
and images of specific immune functions being activated. She feels we
must also exorcise (drive away) any beliefs and images that have
negative consequences for our health, and realize that our body
holograms are more than just pictures. They contain a host of other
kinds of information including intellectual understandings and
interpretations, prejudices both conscious and unconscious, fears,
hopes, worries, and so on. Achterberg's recommendation that we
rid ourselves of negative images is well taken, for there is evidence
that imagery can cause illness as well as cure it. In "Love, Medicine
and Miracles" Bernie Siegel says he often incounters instances where
the mental pictures patients use to describe themselves or their lives
seem to play a role in the creation of their conditions. Examples
include a mastectomy patient who told him she "needed to get something
off her chest"; a patient with multiple myeloma in his backbone he said
he "was always considered spineless"; and a man with carcinoma of the
larynx whose farther punished him as a child by constantly squeezing
his throat and telling him to "shut up!" Sometimes the relationship
between the image and the ilness is so striking it is difficult to
understand why it is not apparent to the individual involved, as in the
case of a psychotherapist who had emergency surgery to remove several
feet of dead intestine and then told Siegel, "I'm glad you're my
surgeon. I've been undergoing teaching analysis. I couldn't handle all
the shit that was coming up, or digest the crap in my life." Incidents
such as these have convinced Siegel that nearly all diseases originate
at least to some degree in the mind, but he doesn't think this makes
them psychosomatic or unreal. He prefers to say they are
soma-significant, a term coined by Bohm to sum up better the
relationship, and derived from the Greek word soma meaning "body". That
all diseases might have their origin in the mind doesn't disturb
Siegel. He sees it rather as a sign of a tremendous hope, an indicator
that if one has the power to create sickness, one also has the power to
create wellness! The connection between image and illness is so potent,
imagery even can be used to predict a patient's prospects for
survival. In another landmark experiment, Simonton, his wife,
psychologist Stephanie Matthews-Simonton, Achterberg, and psychologist
G. Frank Lawlis performed a battery of blood tests on 126 patients with
advanced cancer. Then they subjected the patients to an equally
intensive array of psychological tests, including exercises in which
the patients were asked to draw images of themselves, their cancer,
their treatment, and their immune systems. The blood tests offered some
information about the patients' condition, but provided no major
revelations. However, the results of the psychological tests,
particularly the drawings, were encyclopedias of information about the
status of the patient's health. Indeed, simply by analyzing patient's
drawings, Achterberg later achieved a 95% rate of accuracy in
predicting who would die in within a few months and who will beat their
illness and go into remission.
Basketball
Games of the Mind
As incredible as the evidence culled by the above-mentioned researchers
is, it is just the tip of the iceberg, when it comes to the control the
holographic mindhas over the physical body. And the practical
applications of such control are not limited strictly to matters of
health. Numerous studies conducted around the world have shown that
imagery also has an enormous on physical and athletic performance. In a
recent experiment, psychologist Shlomo Breznitz at Hebrew University,
Jerusalem, had several groups of Israeli soldiers march 40 km, but gave
each group different information. He had some groups march 30 km and
then told them they had another 10 to go. He told others they were
going to march 60 km, but in reality only marched them 40. He allowed
some to see distance markers, and provided no clues to others as to how
far they had walked. At the end of the study Breznitz found that the
stress hormone levels in the soldiers' blood always reflected their
estimates and not the actual distance they had marched. In other words,
their bodies responded not to reality, but to what they were imaging as
reality. According to Dr. Charles A. Garfield, a former National
Aeronautics and Space Administration (NASA) researcher and current
president of the Performance Sciences Institute in Berkeley,
California, the Soviets have extensively researched the relationship
between imagery and physical performance. In one study a phalanx of
world-class Soviet athletes was divided into four groups. The first
group spent 100 percent of their training time in training. The second
spent 75 percent of their time training and 25 percent of their time
visualizing the exact movements and accomplishments they wanted to
achieve in their sport. The third spent 50 percent of their time
training and 50 percent visualizing, and the fourth spent 25 percent
training and 75 percent visualizing. Unbelievably, at the 1980 Winter
Games in Lake Placid, New York, the fourth group showed the greatest
improvement in performance, followed by groups three, two, and one, in
that order. Garfield, who has spent hundreds of hours interviewing
athletes and sports researchers around the world, says that the Soviets
have incorporated sophisticated imagery techniques into many of their
athletic programs and that they believe mental images act as precursors
in the process of generating neuromuscular impulses. Garfield believes
imagery works because movement is recorded holographically in the
brain. In his book Peak Performance: Mental Training Techniques of the
World's Greatest Athletes, he states, "These images are holographic and
function primarily at the subliminal level. The holographic imaging
mechanism enables you to quickly solve spatial problems such as
assembling a complex machine, choreographing a dance routine, or
running visual images of plays through your mind." Australian
psychologist Alan Richardson has obtained similar results with
basketball players. He took three groups of basketball players and
tested their ability to make free throws. Then he instructed the first
group to spend twenty minutes a day practicing free throws. He told the
second group not to practice, and had the third group spend twenty
minutes a day visualizing that they were shooting perfect baskets. As
might be expected, the group that did nothing showed no improvement.
The first group improved 24 percent, but through the power of imagery
alone, the third group improved an astonishing 23 percent, almost as
much as the group that practiced.
89
The
Lack of Division Between Health and Illness
Physician Larry Dossey believes that imagery is not the only tool the
holographic mind can use to effect changes in the body. Another is
simply the recognition of the unbroken wholeness of all things. As
Dossey observes, we have a tendency to view illness as external to us.
Disease comes from without and besieges us, upsetting our wellbeing.
But if space and time, and all other things in the universe, are truly
inseparable, then we cannot make a distinction between health and
disease. How can we put this knowledge to practical use in our lives?
When we stop seeing illness as something separate and instead view it
as part of a larger whole, as a milieu of behavior, diet, sleep,
exercise patterns, and various other relationships with the world at
large, we often get better, says Dossey. As evidence he calls attention
to a study in which chronic headache sufferers were asked to keep a
diary of the frequency and severity of their headaches. Although the
record was intended to be a first step in preparing the headache
sufferers for further treatment, most of the subjects found that when
they began to keep a diary, their headaches disappeared!
In another experiment cited by Dossey, a group of epileptic children
and their families were videotaped as they interacted with one another.
Occasionally, there were emotional outbursts during the sessions, which
were often followed by actual seizures. When the children were shown
the tapes and saw the relationship between these emotional events and
their seizures, they became almost seizure-free. Why? By keeping a
diary or watching a videotape, the subjects were able to see their
condition in relationship to the larger pattern of their lives. When
this happens, illness can no longer be viewed "as an intruding disease
originating elsewhere, but as part of a process of living which can
accurately be described as an unbroken whole, " says Dossey. "When our
focus is toward a principle of relatedness and oneness, and away from
fragmentation and isolation, health ensues (follow, succeed)." Dossey
feels the word patient is as misleading as the word particle. Instead
of being separate and fundamentally isolated biological units, we are
essentially dynamic processes and patterns that are no more analyzable
into parts than are electrons. More than this, we are connected,
connected to the forces that create both sickness and health, to the
beliefs of our society, to the attitudes of our friends, our family,
and our doctors, and to the images, beliefs, and even the very words we
use to apprehend the universe. In a holographic universe we are also
connected to our bodies, and in the preceding pages we have seen some
of the ways these connections manifest themselves. But there are
others, perhaps even an infinity of others.
As Pribram states, "If indeed every part of our body is a reflection of
the whole, then there must be all kinds of mechanisms to control what's
going on. Nothing is firm at this point." Given our ignorance in the
matter, instead of asking how the mind controls the body holographic,
perhaps a more important question is, What is the extent of this
control? Are there any limitations on it, and if so, what are they?
That is the question to which we now turn our attention.
The
Healing Power of Nothing at All
Another medical phenomenon that provides us with a tantalizing glimpse
of the control the mind has over the body is the placebo effect. A
placebo is any medical treatment that has no specific action on the
body but is given either to humor a patient, or as a control in a
double-blind experiment, that is, a study in which one group of
individuals is given a real treatment and another group is given a fake
treatment. In such experiments neither the researchers nor the
individuals being tested know which group they are in so that the
effects of the real treatment can be assessed more accurately. Sugar
pills are often used as placebos in drug studies. So is saline solution
(distilled water with salt in it), although placebos need not always be
drugs. Many believe that any medical benefit derived from crystals,
copper bracelets, and other nontraditional remedies is also due to the
placebon effect. Even surgery has been used as a placebo. In the 1950s,
angina pectoris, recurrent pain in the chest and left arm due to
decreased blood flow to the heart, was commonly treated with surgery.
Then some resourceful doctors decided to conduct an experiment. Rather
than perform the customary surgery, which involved tying off the
mammary artery, they cut patients open and then simply sewed them back
up again. The patients who received the sham surgery reported just as
much relief as the patients who had the full surgery.
91
The full surgery, as it turned out, was only producing a placebo
effect. Nonetheless, the success of the sham surgery indicates that
somewhere deep in all of us we have the ability to control angina
pectoris. And that is not all. In the last half century the placebo
effect has been extensively researched in hundreds of different studies
around the world. We now know that on average 35 percent of all people
who receive a given placebo will experience a significant effect,
although this number can vary greatly from situation to situation. In
addition to angina pectoris, conditions that have proved responsive to
placebo treatment include migraine headaches, allergies, fever, the
common cold, acne, asthma, warts, various kinds of pain, nausea and
seasickness, peptic ulcers, psychiatric syndromes such as depression
and anxiety, rheumatoid and degenerative arthritis, diabetes, radiation
sickness, Parkinsonism, multiple sclerosis, and cancer. Clearly these
range from the not so serious to the life threatening, but placebo
effects on even the mildest conditions may involve physiological
changes that are near miraculous. Take, for example, the lowly wart.
Warts are a small tumorous growth on the skin caused by a virus. They
are also extremely easy to cure through the use of placebos, as is
evidenced by the nearly endless folk rituals—ritual itself being
a kind of placebo—that are used by various cultures to get rid of
them. Lewis Thomas, president emeritus of Memorial Sloan- Kettering
Cancer Center in New York, tells of one physician who regularly rid his
patients of warts simply by painting a harmless purple dye on them.
Thomas feels that explaining this small miracle by saying it's just the
unconscious mind at work doesn't begin to do the placebo effect
justice. "If my unconscious can figure out how to manipulate the
mechanisms needed for getting around that virus, and for deploying all
the various cells in the correct order for tissue rejection, then all I
have to say is that my unconscious is a lot further along than I am, "
he states. The effectiveness of a placebo in any given circumstance
also varies greatly. In nine double-blind studies comparing placebos to
aspirin, placebos proved to be 54 percent as effective as the actual
analgesic. From this one might expect that placebos would be even less
effective when compared to a much stronger painkiller such as morphine,
but this is not the case. In six double-blind studies placebos were
found to be 56 percent as effective as morphine in relieving pain! Why?
One factor that can affect the effectiveness of a placebo is the method
in which it is given. Injections are generally perceived as more
potent than pills, and hence giving a placebo in an injection can
enhance its effectiveness. Similarly, capsules are often seen as more
effective than tablets, and even the size, shape, and color of a pill
can play a role. In a study designed to determine the suggestive value
of a pill's color, researchers found that people tend to view yellow or
orange pills as mood manipulators, either stimulants or depressants.
Dark red pills are assumed to be sedatives; lavender pills,
hallucinogens; and white pills, painkillers. Another factor is the
attitude the doctor conveys when he prescribes the placebo. Dr. David
Sobel, a placebo specialist at Kaiser Hospital, California, relates the
story of a doctor treating an asthma patient who was having an
unusually difficult time keeping his bronchial tubes open. The doctor
ordered a sample of a potent new medicine from a pharmaceutical company
and gave it to the man. Within minutes the man showed spectacular
improvement and breathed more easily. However, the next time he had an
attack, the doctor decided to see what would happen if he gave the man
a placebo. This time the man complained, that there must be something
wrong with the prescription because it didn't completely eliminate his
breathing difficulty. This convinced the doctor that the sample drug
was indeed a potent new asthma medication—until he received a
letter from the pharmaceutical company informing him that instead of
the new drug, they had accidentally sent him a placebo! Apparently it
was the doctor's unwitting enthusiasm for the first placebo, and not
the second, that accounted for the discrepancy. In terms of the
holographic model, the man's remarkable response to the placebo asthma
medication can again be explained by the mind/ body's ultimate
inability to distinguish between an imagined reality and a real one.
The man believed he was being given a powerful new asthma drug, and
this belief had as dramatic a physiological effect on his lungs as if
he had been given a real drug. Achterberg's warning that the neural
holograms that impact on our health are varied and multifaceted is also
underscored by the fact that even something as subtle as the doctor's
slightly different attitude (and perhaps body language) while
administering the two placebos was enough to cause one to work and the
other to fail. It is clear from this that even information received
subliminally can contribute greatly to the beliefs and mental images
that impact on our health. One wonders how many drugs have worked (or
not worked) because of the attitude the doctor conveyed while
administering them.
93
Tumors
That Melt Like Snowballs on a Hot Stove
Understanding the role such factors play in a placebo's effectiveness
is important, for it shows how our ability to control the body
holographic is molded by our beliefs. Our minds have the power to get
rid of warts, to clear our bronchial tubes, and to mimic the
painkilling ability of morphine, but because we are unaware that we
possess the power, we must be fooled into using it. This might almost
be comic if it were not for the tragedies that often result from our
ignorance of our own power. No incident better illustrates this than a
now famous case reported by psychologist Bruno Klopfer. Klopfer was
treating a man named Wright who had advanced cancer of the lymph nodes.
All standard treatments had been exhausted, and Wright appeared to have
little time left. His neck, armpits, chest, abdomen, and groin were
filled with tumors the size of oranges, and his spleen and liver were
so enlarged that two quarts of milky fluid had to be drained out of his
chest every day. But Wright did not want to die. He had heard about an
exciting new drug called Krebiozen, and he begged his doctor to let him
try it. At first his doctor refused because the drug was only being
tried on people with a life expectancy of at least three months. But
Wright was so unrelenting in his entreaties, his doctor finally gave
in. He gave Wright an injection of Krebiozen on Friday, but in his
heart of hearts he did not expect Wright to last the weekend. Then the
doctor went home. To his surprise, on the following Monday he found
Wright out of bed and walking around. Klopfer reported that his tumors
had "melted like snowballs on a hot stove" and were half their original
size. This was a far more rapid decrease in size than even the
strongest X-ray treatments could have accomplished. Ten days after
Wright's first Krebiozen treatment, he left the hospital and was, as
far as his doctors could tell, cancer free. When he had entered the
hospital he had needed an oxygen mask to breathe, but when he left he
was well enough to fly his own plane at 12, 000 feet with no
discomfort. Wright remained well for about two months, but then
articles began to appear asserting that Krebiozen actually had no
effect on cancer of the lymph nodes. Wright, who was rigidly logical
and scientific in his thinking, became very depressed, suffered a
relapse, and was readmitted to the hospital. This time his physician
decided to try an experiment. He told Wright that Krebiozen was every
bit as effective as it had seemed, but that some of the initial
supplies of the drug had deteriorated during shipping. He explained,
however, that he had a new highly concentrated version of the drug and
could treat Wright with this. Of course the physician did not have a
new version of the drug and intended to inject Wright with plain water.
To create the proper atmosphere he even went through an elaborate
procedure before injecting Wright with the placebo. Again the results
were dramatic. Tumor masses melted, chest fluid vanished, and Wright
was quickly back on his feet and feeling great. He remained
symptom-free for another two months, but then the American Medical
Association announced that a nationwide study of Krebiozen had found
the drug worthless in the treatment of cancer. This time Wright's faith
was completely shattered. His cancer blossomed anew and he died two
days later. Wright's story is tragic, but it contains a powerful
message: When we are fortunate enough to bypass our disbelief and tap
the healing forces within us, we can cause tumors to melt away
overnight. In the case of Krebiozen only one person was involved, but
there are similar cases involving many more people. Take a
chemotherapeutic agent called cis-platinum. When cis-platinum first
became available it, too, was touted as a wonder drug, and 75 percent
of the people who received it benefited from the treatment. But after
the initial wave of excitement and the use of cis-platinum became more
routine, its rate of effectiveness dropped to about 25 to 30 percent.
Apparently most of the benefit obtained from cis-platinum was due to
the placebo effect.
Do
Any Drugs Really Work?
Such incidents raise an important question. If drugs such as Krebiozen
and cis-platinum work when we believe in them and stop working when we
stop believing in them, what does this imply about the nature of drugs
in general? This is a difficult question to answer, but we do have some
clues. For instance, physician Herbert Benson of Harvard Medical School
points out that the vast majority of treatments prescribed prior to
this century, from leeching to consuming lizard's blood, were useless,
but because of the placebo effect, they were no doubt helpful at least
some of the time.
95
Benson, along with Dr. David P. McCallie, Jr., of Harvard's Thorndike
Laboratory, reviewed studies of various treatments for angina pectoris
that have been prescribed over the years and discovered that although
remedies have come and gone, the success rates—even for
treatments that are now discredited—have always remained high.
From these two observations it is evident that the placebo effect has
played an important role in medicine in the past, but does it still
play a role today? The answer, it seems, is yes. The federal Office of
Technology Assessment estimates that more than 75 % of all current
medical treatments have not been subjected to sufficient scientific
scrutiny, a figure that suggests that doctors may still be giving
placebos and not know it (Benson, for one, believes that, at the very
least, many over-the-counter medications act primarily as placebos).
Given the evidence we have looked at so far, one might almost wonder if
all drugs are placebos. Clearly the answer is no. Many drugs are
effective whether we believe in them or not: Vitamin C gets rid of
scurvy, and insulin makes diabetics better even when they are
skeptical. But still the issue is not quite as clear-cut as it may
seem. Consider the following. In a 1962 experiment Drs. Harriet Linton
and Robert Langs told test subjects they were going to participate in a
study of the effects of LSD, but then gave them a placebo instead.
Nonetheless, half an hour after taking the placebo, the subjects began
to experience the classic symptoms of the actual drug, loss of control,
supposed insight into the meaning of existence, and so on. These
"placebo trips" lasted several hours. A few years later, in 1966, the
now infamous Harvard psychologist Richard Alpert journeyed to the East
to look for holy men who could offer him insight into the LSD
experience. He found several who were willing to sample the drug and,
interestingly, received a variety of reactions. One pundit told him it
was good, but not as good as meditation. Another, a Tibetan lama,
complained that it only gave him a headache. But the reaction that
fascinated Alpert most came from a wizened little holy man in the
foothills of the Himalayas. Because the man was over sixty, Alpert's
first inclination was to give him a gentle dose of 50 to 75 micrograms.
But the man was much more interested in one of the 305 microgram pills
Alpert had brought with him, a relatively sizable dose. Reluctantly,
Alpert gave him one of the pills, but still the man was not satisfied.
With a twinkle in his eye he requested another and then another and
placed all 915 micrograms of LSD on his tongue, a massive dose by any
standard, and swallowed them (in comparison, the average dose Grof used
in his studies was about 200 micrograms). Aghast, Alpert watched
intently, expecting the man to start waving his arms and whooping like
a banshee, but instead he behaved as if nothing had happened. He
remained that way for the rest of the day, his demeanor as serene and
unperturbed as it always was, save for the twinkling glances he
occasionally tossed Alpert. The LSD apparently had little or no effect
on him. Alpert was so moved by the experience he gave up LSD, changed
his name to Ram Dass, and converted to mysticism. And so taking a
placebo may well produce the same effect as taking the real drug, and
taking the real drug might produce no effect. This topsy-turvy state of
affairs has also been demonstrated in experiments involving
amphetamines. In one study, ten subjects were placed in each of two
rooms. In the first room, nine were given a stimulating amphetamine and
the tenth a sleep-producing barbiturate. In the second room the
situation was reversed. In both instances, the person singled out
behaved exactly as his companions did. In the first room instead of
falling asleep the lone barbiturate taker became animated and speedy,
and in the second room the lone amphetamine taker fell asleep. There is
also a case on record of a man addicted to the stimulant Ritalin, whose
addiction is then transferred to a placebo. In other words, the man's
doctor enabled him to avoid all the usual unpleasantries of Ritalin
withdrawal by secretly replacing his prescription with sugar pills.
Unfortunately the man then went on to display an addiction to the
placebo! Such events are not limited to experimental situations.
Placebos also play a role in our everyday lives. Does caffeine keep you
awake at night? Research has shown that even an injection of caffeine
won't keep caffeine-sensitive individuals awake if they believe they
are receiving a sedative. Has an antibiotic ever helped you get over a
cold or sore throat? If so, you were experiencing the placebo effect.
All colds are caused by viruses, as are several types of sore throat,
and antibiotics are only effective against bacterial infections, not
viral infections. Have you ever experienced an unpleasant side effect
after taking a medication? In a study of a tranquilizer called
mephenesin, researchers found that 10 to 20 percent of the test
subjects experienced negative side effects—including nausea,
itchy rash, and heart palpitations—regardless of whether they
were given the actual drug or a placebo.
97
Similarly, in a recent study of a new kind of chemotherapy, 30 percent
of the individuals in the control group, the group, given placebos,
lost their hair. So if you know someone who is taking chemotherapy,
tell them to try to be optimistic in their expectations.
The
mind is a powerful thing.
In addition to offering us a
glimpse of this power, placebos also support a more holographic
approach to understanding the mind/body relationship. As health and
nutrition columnist Jane Brody observes in an article in the New York
Times, "The effectiveness of placebos provides dramatic support for a
'holistic' view of the human organism, a view that is receiving
increasing attention in medical research. This view holds that the mind
and body continually interact and are too closely interwoven to be
treated as independent entities." The placebo effect may also be
affecting us in far vaster ways than we realize, as is evidenced by a
recent and extremely puzzling medical mystery. If you have watched any
television at all in the last year or so, you have no doubt seen a
blitzkrieg of commercials promoting aspirin's ability to decrease the
risk of heart attack. There is a good deal of convincing evidence to
back this up, otherwise television censors, who are real sticklers for
accuracy when it comes to medical claims in commercials, wouldn't allow
such copy on the air. This is all well and good. The only problem is
that aspirin doesn't seem to have the same effect on people in England.
A six-year study of 5, 139 British doctors revealed no evidence that
aspirin reduces the risk of heart attack. Is there a flaw in somebody's
research, or is it possible that some kind of massive placebo effect is
to blame? Whatever the case, don't stop believing in the prophylactic
benefits of aspirin. It still may save your life.
The
Health Implications of Multiple Personality
Another condition that graphically illustrates the mind's power to
affect the body is Multiple Personality Disorder (MPD). In addition to
possessing different brain-wave patterns, the subpersonalities of a
multiple have a strong psychological separation from one another. 'Of
course I am by no means suggesting that all drug side effects are the
result of the placebo effect. Should you experience a negative reaction
to a drug, always consult a physician. Each has his own name, age,
memories, and abilities. Often each also has his own style of
handwriting, announced gender, cultural and racial background, artistic
talents, foreign language fluency, and IQ. Even more noteworthy are the
biological changes that take place in a multiple's body when they
switch personalities. Frequently a medical condition possessed by one
personality will mysteriously vanish when another personality takes
over. Dr. Bennett Braun of the International Society for the Study of
Multiple Personality, in Chicago, has documented a case in which all of
a patient's subpersonalities were allergic to orange juice, except one.
If the man drank orange juice when one of his allergic personalities
was in control, he would break out in a terrible rash. But if he
switched to his nonallergic personality, the rash would instantly start
to fade and he could drink orange juice freely. Dr. Francine Rowland, a
Yale psychiatrist who specializes in treating multiples, relates an
even more striking incident concerning one multiple's reaction to a
wasp sting. On the occasion in question, the man showed up for his
scheduled appointment with Rowland with his eye completely swollen shut
from a wasp sting. Realizing he needed medical attention, Rowland
called an ophthalmologist. Unfortunately, the soonest the
opthalmologist could see the man was an hour later, and because the man
was in severe pain, Rowland decided to try something. As it turned out,
one of the man's alternates was an "anesthetic personality" who felt
absolutely no pain. Rowland had the anesthetic personality take control
of the body, and the pain ended. But something else also happened. By
the time the man arrived at his appointment with the ophthalmologist,
the swelling was gone and his eye had returned to normal. Seeing no
need to treat him, the ophthalmologist sent him home. After a while,
however, the anesthetic personality relinquished control of the body,
and the man's original personality returned, along with all the pain
and swelling of the wasp sting. The next day he went back to the
ophthalmologist to at last be treated. Neither Rowland nor her patient
had told the ophthalmologist that the man was a multiple, and after
treating him, the ophthalmologist telephoned Rowland. "He thought time
was playing tricks on him. " Rowland laughed. "He just wanted to make
sure that I had actually called him the day before and he had not
imagined it."
99
Allergies are not the only thing multiples can switch on and off. If
there was any doubt as to the control the unconscious mind has over
drug effects, it is banished by the pharmacological wizardry of the
multiple. By changing personalities, a multiple who is drunk can
instantly become sober. Different personalities also respond
differently to different drugs. Braun records a case in which 5
milligrams of diazepam, a tranquilizer, sedated one personality, while
100 milligrams had little or no effect on another. Often one or several
of a multiple's personalities are children, and if an adult personality
is given a drug and then a child's personality takes over, the adult
dosage may be too much for the child and result in an overdose. It is
also difficult to anesthetize some multiples, and there are accounts of
multiples waking up on the operating table after one of their
"unanesthetizable" subpersonalities has taken over. Other conditions
that can vary from personality to personality include scars, burn
marks, cysts, and left- and right-handedness. Visual acuity can differ,
and some multiples have to carry two or three different pairs of
eyeglasses to accommodate their alternating personalities. One
personality can be color-blind and another not, and even eye color can
change. There are cases of women who have two or three menstrual
periods each month because each of their subpersonalities has its own
cycle. Speech pathologist Christy Ludlow has found that the voice
pattern for each of a multiple's personalities is different, a feat
that requires such a deep physiological change that even the most
accomplished actor cannot alter his voice enough to disguise his voice
pattern. One multiple, admitted to a hospital for diabetes, baffled her
doctors by showing no symptoms when one of her nondiabetic
personalities was in control. There are accounts of epilepsy coming and
going with changes in personality, and psychologist Robert A. Phillips,
Jr., reports that even tumors can appear and disappear (although he
does not specify what kind of tumors). Multiples also tend to heal
faster than normal individuals. For example, there are several cases on
record of third-degree burns healing with extraordinary rapidity. Most
eerie of all, at least one researcher— Dr. Cornelia Wilbur, the
therapist whose pioneering treatment of Sybil Dorsett was portrayed in
the book Sybil—is convinced that multiples don't age as fast as
other people. How could such things be? At a recent symposium on the
multiple personality syndrome, a multiple named Cassandra provided a
possible answer, Cassandra attributes her own rapid healing ability
both to the visualization techniques she practices and to something she
calls parallel processing. As she explained, even when her alternate
personalities are not in control of her body, they are still aware.
This enables her to "think" on a multitude of different channels at
once, to do things like work on several different term papers
simultaneously, and even "sleep" while other personalities prepare her
dinner and clean her house. Hence, whereas normal people only do
healing imagery exercises two or three times a day, Cassandra does them
around the clock. She even has a subpersonality named Celese who
possesses a thorough knowledge of anatomy and physiology, and whose
sole function is to spend twenty-four hours a day meditating and
imaging the body's well-being. According to Cassandra, it is this
full-time attention to her health that gives her an edge over normal
people. Other multiples have made similar claims. We are deeply
attached to the inevitability of things. If we have bad vision, we
believe we will have bad vision for life, and if we suffer from
diabetes, we do not for a moment think our condition might vanish with
a change in mood or thought. But the phenomenon of multiple personality
challenges this belief and offers further evidence of just how much our
psychological states can affect the body's biology. If the psyche of an
individual with MPD is a kind of multiple image hologram, it appears
that the body is one as well, and can switch from one biological state
to another as rapidly as the flutter of a deck of cards. The systems of
control that must be in place to account for such capacities is
mind-boggling and makes our ability to will away a wart look pale.
Allergic reaction to a wasp sting is a complex and multifaceted process
and involves the organized activity of antibodies, the production of
histamine, the dilation and rupture of blood vessels, the excessive
release of immune substances, and so on. What unknown pathways of
influence enable the mind of a multiple to freeze all these processes
in their tracks? Or what allows them to suspend the effects of alcohol
and other drugs in the blood, or turn diabetes on and off? At the
moment we don't know and must console ourselves with one simple fact.
Once a multiple has undergone therapy and in some way becomes whole
again, he or she can still make these switches at will. This suggests
that somewhere in our psyches we all have the ability to control these
things. And still this is not all we can do.
101
Pregnancy,
Organ Transplants, and Tapping the Genetic Level
As we have seen, simple everyday belief can also have a powerful effect
on the body. Of course most of us do not have the mental discipline to
completely control our beliefs (which is why doctors must use placebos
to fool us into tapping the healing forces within us). To regain that
control we must first understand the different types of belief that can
affect us, for these too offer their own unique window on the
plasticity of the mind/body relationship.
CULTURAL
BELIEFS
One type of belief is imposed on
us by our society. For example, the people of the Trobriand Islands
engage freely in sexual relations before marriage, but premarital
pregnancy is strongly frowned upon. They use no form of contraception,
and seldom if ever resort to abortion. Yet premarital pregnancy is
virtually unknown. This suggests that, because of their cultural
beliefs, the unmarried women are unconsciously preventing themselves
from getting pregnant (I have
to disagree. I personally didn't want to get pregnant for 17 years of
my life and all those years I was pregnant and had numerous abortions,
probably more than 30, LM).
There is evidence that something similar may be going on in our own
culture. Almost everyone knows of a couple who have tried
unsuccessfully for years to have a child. They finally adopt, and
shortly thereafter the woman gets pregnant. Again this suggests that
finally having a child enabled the woman and/or her husband to overcome
some sort of inhibition that was blocking the effects of her and/or his
fertility. The fears we share with the other members of our culture can
also affect us greatly. In the nineteenth century, tuberculosis killed
tens of thousands of people, but starting in the 1880s, death rates
began to plummet. Why? Previous to that decade no one knew what caused
TB, which gave it an aura of terrifying mystery. But in 1882 Dr. Robert
Koch made the momentous discovery that TB was caused by a bacterium.
Once this knowledge reached the general public, death rates fell from
600 per 100, 000 to 200 per 100, 000, despite the fact that it would be
nearly half a century before an effective drug treatment could be
found. Fear apparently has been an important factor in the success
rates of organ transplants as well. In the 1950s kidney transplants
were only a tantalizing possibility. Then a doctor in Chicago made
what seemed to be a successful transplant. He published his
findings, and soon after other successful transplants took place around
the world. Then the first transplant failed. In fact, the doctor
discovered that the kidney had actually been rejected from the start.
But it did not matter. Once transplant recipients believed they could
survive, they did, and success rates soared beyond all expectations.
THE
BELIEFS WE EMBODY IN OUR ATTITUDES
Another way belief manifests in
our lives is through our attitudes. Studies have shown that the
attitude an expectant mother has toward her baby, and pregnancy in
general, has a direct correlation with the complications she will
experience during childbirth, as well as with the medical problems her
newborn infant will have after it is born. Indeed, in the past decade
an avalanche of studies has poured in demonstrating the effect our
attitudes have on a host of medical conditions. People who score high
on tests designed to measure hostility and aggression are seven times
more likely to die from heart problems than people who receive low
scores. Married women have stronger immune systems than separated or
divorced women, and happily married women have even stronger immune
systems. People with AIDS who display a fighting spirit live longer
than AIDS-infected individuals who have a passive attitude. People with
cancer also live longer if they maintain a fighting spirit. Pessimists
get more colds than optimists. Stress lowers the immune response;
people who have just lost their spouse have an increased incidence of
illness and disease, and on and on.
THE
BELIEFS WE EXPRESS THROUGH THE POWER OF OUR WILL
The types of belief we have
examined so far can be viewed largely as passive beliefs, beliefs we
allow our culture or the normal state of our thoughts to impose upon
us. Conscious belief in the form of a steely and unswerving will can
also be used to sculpt and control the body holographic. In the 1970s,
Jack Schwarz, a Dutch-born author and lecturer, astounded researchers
in laboratories across the United States with his ability to willfully
control his body's internal biological processes. In studies conducted
at the Menninger Foundation, the University of California's Langley
Porter Neuropsychiatric Institute, and others Schwarz astonished
doctors by sticking mammoth six-inch sailmaker's needles completely
through his arms without bleeding, without flinching, and without
producing beta brain waves (the type of brain waves normally produced
when a person is in pain).
103
Even when the needles were removed, Schwarz still did not bleed, and
the puncture holes closed tightly. In addition, Schwarz altered his
brain-wave rhythms at will, held burning cigarettes against his flesh
without harming himself, and even carried live coals around in his
hands. He claims he acquired these abilities when he was in a Nazi
concentration camp and had to learn how to control pain in order to
withstand the terrible beatings he endured. He believes anyone can
learn voluntary control of their body and thus gain responsibility for
his or her own health. Oddly enough, in 1947 another Dutchman
demonstrated similar abilities. The man's name was Mirin Dajo, and in
public performances at the Corso Theater in Zurich, he left audiences
stunned. In plain view Dajo would have an assistant stick a fencing
foil completely through his body, clearly piercing vital organs but
causing Dajo no harm or pain. Like Schwarz, when the foil was removed,
Dajo did not bleed and only a faint red line marked the spot where the
foil had entered and exited. Dajo's performance proved so nerve-racking
to his audiences that eventually one spectator suffered a heart attack,
and Dajo was legally banned from performing in public. However, a Swiss
doctor named Hans Naegeli-Osjord learned of Dajo's alleged abilities
and asked him if he would submit to scientific scrutiny. Dajo agreed,
and on May 31, 1947, he entered the Zurich cantonal hospital. In
addition to Dr. Naegeli-Osjord, Dr. Werner Brunner, the chief of
surgery at the hospital, was also present, as were numerous other
doctors, students, and journalists. Dajo bared his chest and
concentrated, and then, in full view of the assemblage, he had his
assistant plunge the foil through his body. As always, no blood flowed
and Dajo remained completely at ease. But he was the only one smiling.
The rest of the crowd had turned to stone. By all rights, Dajo's vital
organs should have been severely damaged, and his seeming good health
was almost too much for the doctors to bear. Filled with disbelief,
they asked Dajo if he would submit to an X ray. He agreed and without
apparent effort accompanied them up the stairs to the X-ray room, the
foil still through his abdomen. The X ray was taken and the result was
undeniable. Dajo was indeed impaled. Finally, a full twenty minutes
after he had been pierced, the foil was removed, leaving only two faint
scars. Later, Dajo was tested by scientists in Basel, and even let the
doctors themselves run him through with the foil. Dr. Naegeli-Osjord
later related the entire case to the German physicist Alfred Stelter,
and Stelter reports it in his book Psi-Healing. Such supernormal feats
of control are not limited to the Dutch. In the 1960s Gilbert
Grosvenor, the president of the National Geographic Society, his wife,
Donna, and a team of Geographic photographers visited a village in
Ceylon to witness the alleged miracles of a local wonderworker named
Mohotty. It seems that as a young boy Mohotty prayed to a Ceylonese
divinity named Kataragama and told the god, that if he cleared
Mohotty's father of a murder charge, he, Mohotty, would do yearly
penance in Kataragama's honor. Mohotty's father was cleared, and true
to his word, every year Mohotty did his penance. This consisted of
walking through fire and hot coals, piercing his cheeks with skewers,
driving skewers into his arms from shoulder to wrist, sinking large
hooks deep into his back, and dragging an enormous sledge around a
courtyard with ropes attached to the hooks. As the Grosvenors later
reported, the hooks pulled the flesh in Mohotty's back quite taut, and
again there was no sign of blood. When Mohotty was finished and the
hooks were removed, there weren't even any traces of wounds. The
Geographic team photographed this unnerving display and published both
pictures and an account of the incident in the April 1966 issue of
National Geographic. In 1967 Scientific American published a report
about a similar annual ritual in India. In that instance a different
person was chosen each year by the local community, and after a
generous amount of ceremony, two hooks large enough to hang a side of
beef on were buried in the victim's back. Ropes that were pulled
through the eyes of the hooks were tied to the boom of an ox cart, and
the victim was then swung in huge arcs over the fields as a sacramental
offering to the fertility gods. When the hooks were removed the victim
was completely unharmed, there was no blood, and literally no sign of
any punctures in the flesh itself.
OUR
UNCONSCIOUS BELIEFS
As we have seen, if we are not
fortunate enough to have the selfmastery of a Dajo or a Mohotty,
another way of accessing the healing force within us is to bypass the
thick armor of doubt and skepticism that exists in our conscious minds.
105
Being tricked with a placebo is one way of accomplishing this. Hypnosis
is another. Like a surgeon reaching in and altering the condition of an
internal organ, a skilled hypnotherapist can reach into our psyche and
help us change the most important type of belief of all, our
unconscious beliefs. Numerous studies have demonstrated irrefutably
that under hypnosis a person can influence processes usually considered
unconscious. For instance, like a multiple, deeply hypnotized persons
can control allergic reactions, blood flow patterns, and
nearsightedness. In addition, they can control heart rate, pain, body
temperature, and even will away some kinds of birthmarks. Hypnosis can
also be used to accomplish something that, in its own way, is every bit
as remarkable as suffering no injury after a foil has been stuck
through one's abdomen. That something involves a horribly disfiguring
hereditary condition known as Brocq's disease. Victims of Brocq's
disease develop a thick, horny covering over their skin that resembles
the scales of a reptile. The skin can become so hardened and rigid that
even the slightest movement will cause it to crack and bleed. Many of
the so- called alligator-skinned people in circus sideshows were
actually individuals with Brocq's disease, and because of the risk of
infection, victims of Brocq's disease used to have relatively short
lifespans. Brocq's disease was incurable until 1951 when a
sixteen-year-old boy with an advanced case of the affliction was
referred as a last resort to a hypnotherapist named A. A. Mason at the
Queen Victoria Hospital in London. Mason discovered that the boy was a
good hypnotic subject and could easily be put into a deep state of
trance. While the boy was in trance, Mason told him that his Brocq's
disease was healing and would soon be gone. Five days later the scaly
layer covering the boy's left arm fell off, revealing soft, healthy
flesh beneath. By the end of ten days the arm was completely normal.
Mason and the boy continued to work on different body areas until all
of the scaly skin was gone. The boy remained symptom-free for at least
five years, at which point Mason lost touch with him. This is
extraordinary because Brocq's disease is a genetic condition, and
getting rid of it involves more than just controlling autonomic
processes such as blood flow patterns and various cells of the immune
system. It means tapping into the masterplan, our DNA programming
itself. So, it would appear that when we access the right strata of our
beliefs, our minds can override even our genetic makeup. 1962 X ray
showing the degree to which Vittorio Michelli's hip bone had
disintegrated as a result of his malignant sarcoma. So little bone was
left that the ball of his upper leg was free-floating in a mass of soft
tissue, rendered as gray mist in the X ray. After a series of baths in
the spring at Lourdes, Michelli experienced a miraculous healing. His
hip bone completely regenerated over the course of several months, a
feat currently considered impossible by medical science. This 1965 X
ray shows his miraculously restored hip joint. Source: Michel-Marie
Salmon, The Extraordinary Cure of Vittorio Michelli.
107
THE
BELIEFS EMBODIED IN OUR FAITH
Perhaps the most powerful types
of belief of all are those we express through spiritual faith. In 1962
a man named Vittorio Michelli was admitted to the Military Hospital of
Verona, Italy, with a large cancerous tumor on his left hip. So dire
was his prognosis that he was sent home without treatment, and within
ten months his hip had completely disintegrated, leaving the bone of
his upper leg floating in nothing more than a mass of soft tissue. He
was, quite literally, falling apart. As a last resort he traveled to
Lourdes and had himself bathed in the spring (by this time he was in a
plaster cast, and his movements were quite restricted). Immediately on
entering the water he had a sensation of heat moving through his body.
After the bath his appetite returned and he felt renewed energy. He had
several more baths and then returned home. Over the course of the next
month he felt such an increasing sense of well-being he insisted his
doctors X-ray him again. They discovered his tumor was smaller. They
were so intrigued they documented every step in this improvement. It
was a good thing because after Michelli's tumor disappeared, his bone
began to regenerate, and the medical community generally views this as
an impossibility. Within two months he was up and walking again, and
over the course of the next
several years his bone completely reconstructed itself. A dossier on
Michelli's case was sent to the Vatican's Medical Commission, an
international panel of doctors set up to investigate such matters, and
after examining the evidence the commission decided Michelli had indeed
experienced a miracle. As the commission stated in its official report,
"A remarkable reconstruction of the iliac bone and cavity has taken
place. The X rays made in 1964, 1965, 1968 and 1969 confirm
categorically and without doubt that an unforeseen and even
overwhelming bone reconstruction has taken place of a type unknown in
the annals of world medicine." Was Michelli's healing a miracle in the
sense that it violated any of the known laws of physics? Although the
jury remains out on this question, there seems no clear-cut reason to
believe any laws were violated".
In a truly stunning example of synchronicity, while I was in the middle
of writing these very words a letter arrived in the mail informing me
that a friend who lives in Kauai, Hawaii, and whose hip had
disintegrated due to cancer has also experienced an "inexplicable" and
complete regeneration of her bone. The tools she employed to effect her
recovery were chemotherapy, extensive meditation, and imagery
exercises. The story of her healing has been reported in the Hawaiian
newspapers.
108 Rather, Michelli's healing may simply be due to natural processes
we do not yet understand. Given the phenomenal range of healing
capacities we have looked at so far, it is clear there are many
pathways of interaction between the mind and body that we do not yet
understand. If Michelli's healing was attributable to an undiscovered
natural process, we might better ask, Why is the regeneration of bone
so rare and what triggered it in Michelli's case? It may be that bone
regeneration is rare because achieving it requires the accessing of
very deep levels of the psyche, levels usually not reached through the
normal activities of consciousness. This appears to be why hypnosis is
needed to bring about a remission of Brocq's disease. As for what
triggered Michelli's healing, given the role belief plays in so many
examples of mind/body plasticity it is certainly a primary suspect.
Could it be that through his faith in the healing power of Lourdes,
Michelli somehow, either consciously or serendipitously, effected his
own cure? There is strong evidence that belief, not divine
intervention, is the prime mover in at least some so-called miraculous
occurrences. Recall that Mohotty attained his supernormal self-control
by praying to Kataragama, and unless we are willing to accept the
existence of Kataragama, Mohotty's abilities seem better explained by
his deep and abiding belief that was divinely protected. The same seems
to be true of many miracles produced by Christian wonder-workers and
saints. One Christian miracle that appears to be generated by the power
of the mind is stigmata. Most church scholars agree that St. Francis of
Assisi was the first person to manifest spontaneously the wounds of the
crucifixion, but since his death there have been literally hundreds of
other stigmatists. Although no two ascetics exhibit the stigmata in
quite the same way, all have one thing in common... Nails inserted
through the hands cannot support the weight of a body hanging on a
cross. Why did St. Francis and all the other stigmatists who came after
him believe the nail holes passed through the hands? Because that is
the way the wounds have been depicted by artists since the eighth
century.
109
That the position and even size and shape of stigmata have been
influenced by art is especially apparent in the case of an Italian
stigmatist named Gemma Galgani, who died in 1903. Gemma's wounds
precisely mirrored the stigmata on her own favorite crucifix. Another
researcher who believed stigmata are self-induced was Herbert Thurston,
an English priest who wrote several volumes on miracles. In his tour de
force "The Physical Phenomena of Mysticism", published posthumously in
1952, he listed several reasons why he thought stigmata were a product
of autosuggestion. The size, shape, and location of the wounds varies
from stigmatist to stigmatist, an inconsistency that indicates they are
not derived from a common source... A comparison of the visions
experienced by various stigmatists also shows little consistency,
suggesting that they are not re-enactments of the historical
crucifixion, but are instead products of the stigmatists' own minds.
And perhaps most significant of all, a surprisingly large percentage of
stigmatists also suffered from hysteria, a fact Thurston interpreted as
a further indication that stigmata are the side effect of a volatile
and abnormally emotional psyche, and not necessarily the product of an
enlightened one. In view of such evidence it is small wonder that even
some of the more liberal members of the Catholic leadership believe
stigmata are the product of "mystical contemplation, " that is, that
they are created by the mind during periods of intense meditation. If
stigmata are products of autosuggestion, the range of control the mind
has over the body holographic must be expanded even further. Like
Mohotty's wounds, stigmata can also heal with disconcerting speed. The
almost limitless plasticity of the body is further evidenced in the
ability of some stigmatists to grow nail-like protuberances in the
middle of their wounds. Again, St. Francis was the first to display
this phenomenon. According to Thomas of Celano, an eyewitness to St.
Francis's stigmata and also his biographer: "His hands and feet seemed
pierced in the midst by nails. These marks were round on the inner side
of the hands and elongated on the outer side, and certain small pieces
of flesh were seen like the ends of nails bent and driven back,
projecting from the rest of the flesh." Another contemporary of St.
Francis's, St. Bonaventura, also witnessed the saint's stigmata and
said that the nails were so clearly defined one could slip a finger
under them and into the wounds. Although St. Francis's nails appeared
to be composed of blackened and hardened flesh, they possessed another
nail-like quality.
110
According to Thomas of Celano, if a nail were pressed on one side, it
instantly projected on the other side, just as it would if it were a
real nail being slid back and forth through the middle of the hand!
Therese Neumann, the well-known Bavarian stigmatist who died in 1962,
also had such nail-like protuberances. Like St. Francis's they were
apparently formed of hardened skin. They were thoroughly examined by
several doctors and found to be structures that passed completely
through her hands and feet. Unlike St. Francis's wounds, which were
open continuously, Neumann's opened only periodically, and when they
stopped bleeding, a soft, membrane-like tissue quickly grew over them.
Other stigmatists have displayed similarly profound alterations in
their bodies. Padre Pio, the famous Italian stigmatist who died in
1968, had stigmata wounds that passed completely through his hands. A
wound in his side was so deep that doctors who examined it were afraid
to measure it for fear of damaging his internal organs. Venerable
Giovanna Maria Solimani, an eighteenth-century Italian stigmatist, had
wounds in her hands deep enough to stick a key into. As with all
stigmatists' wounds, hers never became decayed, infected, or even
inflamed. And another eighteenth-century stigmatist, St. Veronica
Giuliani, an abbess at a convent in Citta di Castello in Umbria, Italy,
had a large wound in her side that would open and close on command.
Images Projected Outside the Brain
The holographic model has aroused the interest of researchers in the
Soviet Union, and two Soviet psychologists, Dr. Alexander P. Dubrov and
Dr. Veniamin N. Pushkin, have written extensively on the idea. They
believe that the frequency processing capabilities of the brain do not
in and of themselves prove the holographic nature of the images and
thoughts in the human mind. They have, however, suggested what might
constitute such proof. Dubrov and Pushkin believe that if an example
could be found where the brain projected an image outside of itself,
the holographic nature of the mind would be convincingly demonstrated.
Or to use their own words, "Records of ejection of psychophysical
structures outside the brain would provide direct evidence of brain
holograms."
In fact, St. Veronica Giuliani seems to supply such evidence.
111
During the last years of her life she became convinced that the images
of the Passion—a crown of thorns, three nails, a cross, and a
sword—had become emblazoned on her heart. She drew pictures of
these and even noted where they were located. After she died an autopsy
revealed that the symbols were indeed impressed on her heart exactly as
she had depicted them. The two doctors who performed the autopsy signed
sworn statements attesting to their finding. Other stigmatists have had
similar experiences. St. Teresa of Avila had a vision of an angel
piercing her heart with a sword, and after she died a deep fissure was
found in her heart. Her heart, with the miraculous sword wound still
clearly visible, is now on display as a relic in Alba de Tormes, Spain.
A nineteenth-century French stigmatist named Marie-Julie Jahenny kept
seeing the image of a flower in her mind, and eventually a picture of
the flower appeared on her breast. It remained there twenty years." Nor
are such abilities limited to stigmatists. In 1913 a twelve-year-old
girl from the village of Bussus-Bus-Suel, near Abbeville, France, made
headlines when it was discovered that she could consciously command
images, such as pictures of dogs and horses, to appear on her arms,
legs, and shoulders. She could also produce words, and when someone
asked her a question the answer would instantly appear on her skin.
Surely such demonstrations are examples of the ejection of
psychophysical structures outside the brain. In fact, in a way stigmata
themselves, especially those in which the flesh has formed into
nail-like protrusions, are examples of the brain projecting images
outside itself and impressing them in the soft clay of the body
holographic. Dr. Michael Grosso, a philosopher at Jersey City State
College who has written extensively on the subject of miracles, has
also arrived at this conclusion. Grosso, who traveled to Italy to study
Padre Pio's stigmata firsthand, states, "One of the categories in my
attempt to analyze Padre Pio is to say that he had an ability to
symbolically transform physical reality. In other words, the level of
consciousness he was operating at enabled him to transform physical
reality in the light of certain symbolic ideas. For example, he
identified with the wounds of the crucifixion and his body became
permeable to those psychic symbols, gradually assuming their form."
So it appears that through the use of images, the brain can tell the
body what to do, including telling it to make more images. Images
making images. Two mirrors reflecting each other infinitely. Such is
the nature of the mind/body relationship in a holographic universe.
112
Laws
Both Known and Unknown
At the beginning of this chapter,
I said that instead of examining the various mechanisms the mind uses
to control the body, the chapter would be devoted primarily to
exploring the range of this control. In doing so I did not mean to deny
or diminish the importance of such mechanisms. They are crucial to our
understanding of the mind/body relationship, and new discoveries in
this area seem to appear every day. For example, at a recent conference
on psychoneuroimmu-nology—a new science, that studies the way the
mind (psycho), the nervous system (neuro), and the immune system
(immunology) interact—Candace Pert, chief of brain biochemistry
at the National Institute of Mental Health, announced that immune cells
have neuropeptide receptors. Neuropeptides are molecules the brain uses
to communicate, the brain's telegrams, if you will. There was a time
when it was believed that neuropeptides could only be found in the
brain. But the existence of receptors (telegram receivers) on the cells
in our immune system implies that the immune system is not separate
from but is an extension of the brain. Neuropeptides have also been
found in various other parts of the body, leading Pert to admit that
she can no longer tell where the brain leaves off and the body begins.
I have excluded such particulars, not only because I felt examining the
extent to which the mind can shape and control the body was more
relevant to the discussion at hand, but also because the biological
processes responsible for mind/body interactions are too vast a subject
for this book. At the beginning of the section on miracles I said there
was no clear-cut reason to believe Michelli's bone regeneration could
not be explained by our current understanding of physics. This is less
true of stigmata.
It also appears to be very much not true of various paranormal
phenomena reported by credible individuals throughout history, and in
recent times by various biologists, physicists, and other researchers.
In this chapter we have looked at astounding things the mind can do
that, although not fully understood, do not seem to violate any of the
known laws of physics. In the next chapter we will look at some of the
things the mind can do that cannot be explained by our current
scientific understandings. As we will see, the holographic idea may
shed light in these areas as well.
113
Venturing into these territories will occasionally involve treading on
what might at first seem to be shaky ground and examining phenomena
even more dizzying and incredible than Mohotty's rapidly healing wounds
and the images on St. Veronica Giuliani's heart. But again we will find
that, despite their daunting nature, science is also beginning to make
inroads into these territories.
Acupuncture Microsystems and the Little Man in the Ear
Before closing, one last piece of evidence of the body's holographic
nature deserves to be mentioned. The ancient Chinese art of acupuncture
is based on the idea that every organ and bone in the body is connected
to specific points on the body's surface. By activating these
acupuncture points, with either needles or some other form of
stimulation, it is believed that diseases and imbalances affecting the
parts of the body connected to the points can be alleviated and even
cured. There are over a thousand acupuncture points organized in
imaginary lines called meridians on the body's surface. Although still
controversial, acupuncture is gaining acceptance in the medical
community and has even been used successfully to treat chronic back
pain in racehorses. In 1957 a French physician and acupuncturist named
Paul Nogier published a book called "Treatise of Auriculotherapy", in
which he announced his discovery that in addition to the major
acupuncture system, there are two smaller acupuncture systems on both
ears. He dubbed these acupuncture microsystems and noted that when one
played a kind of connect-the-dots game with them, they formed an
anatomical map of a miniature human inverted like a fetus. Unbeknownst
to Nogier, the Chinese had discovered the "little man in the ear"
nearly 4, 000 years earlier, but a map of the Chinese ear system wasn't
published until after Nogier had already laid claim to the idea. The
little man in the ear is not just a charming aside in the history of
acupuncture. Dr. Terry Oleson, a psychobiologist at the Pain Management
Clinic at the University of California at Los Angeles School of
Medicine, has discovered that the ear microsystem can be used to
diagnose accurately what's going on in the body.
114
For instance, Oleson has discovered that increased electrical activity
in one of the acupuncture points in the ear generally indicates a
pathological condition (either past or present) in the corresponding
area of the body. In one study, forty patients were examined to
determine areas of their body where they experienced chronic pain.
Following the examination, each patient was draped in a sheet to
conceal any visible problems.
C • Chinese Ear Acupuncture System
E • European Auriculotherapy System
The Little Man in the Ear. Acupuncturists have found that the
acupuncture points in the ear form the outline of a miniature human
being. Dr. Terry Oleson, a psychobiologist at UCLA's School of
Medicine, believes it is because the body is a hologram and each of its
portions contains an image of the whole.
115
Then an acupuncturist with no knowledge of the results examined only
their ears. When the results were tallied it was discovered that the
ear examinations were in agreement with the established medical
diagnoses 2 % of the time. Ear examinations can also reveal problems
with the bones and internal organs. Once when Oleson was out boating
with an acquaintance he noticed an abnormally flaky patch of skin in
one of the man's ears. From his research Oleson knew the spot
corresponded to the heart, and he suggested to the man that he might
want to get his heart checked. The man went to his doctor the next day
and discovered he had a cardiac problem which required immediate
open-heart surgery. Oleson also uses electrical stimulation of the
acupuncture points in the ear to treat chronic pain, weight problems,
hearing loss, and virtually all kinds of addiction. In one study of 14
narcotic-addicted individuals, Oleson and his colleagues used ear
acupuncture to eliminate the drug requirements of 12 of them in an
average of 5 days and with only minimal withdrawal symptoms. Indeed,
ear acupuncture has proved so successful in bringing about rapid
narcotic detoxification that clinics in both Los Angeles and New York
are now using the technique to treat street addicts. Why would the
acupuncture points in the ear be aligned in the shape of a miniature
human? Oleson believes it is because of the holographic nature of the
mind and body. Just as every portion of a hologram contains the image
of the whole, every portion of the body may also contain the image of
the whole. "The ear holograph is, logically, connected to the brain
holograph which itself is connected to the whole body," he states."The
way we use the ear to affect the rest of the body is by working through
the brain holograph."
Oleson believes there are probably acupuncture microsystems in other
parts of the body as well. Dr. Ralph Alan Dale, the director of the
Acupuncture Education Center in North Miami Beach, Florida, agrees.
After spending the last two decades tracking down clinical and research
data from China, Japan, and Germany, he has accumulated evidence of
eighteen different microacupuncture holograms in the body, including
ones in the hands, feet, arms, neck, tongue, and even the gums. Like
Oleson, Dale feels these microsystems are "holographic reiterations of
the gross anatomy, " and believes there are still other such systems
waiting to be discovered. In a notion reminiscent of Bohm's assertion
that every electron in some way contains the cosmos, Dale hypothesizes
that every finger, and even every cell, may contain its own acupuncture
microsystem. Richard Leviton, a contributing editor at East West
magazine, who has written about the holographic implications of
acupuncture microsystems, thinks that alternative medical
techniques—such as reflexology, a type of massage therapy that
involves accessing all points of the body through stimulation of the
feet, and iridology, a diagnostic technique that involves examining the
iris of the eye in order to determine the condition of the
body—may also be indications of the body's holographic nature.
Leviton concedes, that neither field has been experimentally vindicated
(studies of iridology, in particular, have produced extremely
conflicting results) but feels the holographic idea offers a way of
understanding them if their legitimacy is established. Leviton thinks
there may even be something to palmistry. By this he does not mean the
type of hand reading practiced by fortune-tellers who sit in glass
storefronts and beckon people in, but the 4, 500-year old Indian
version of the science. He bases this suggestion on his own profound
encounter with an Indian hand reader living in Montreal, who
possessed a doctorate in the subject from Agra University, India." The
holographic paradigm provides palmistry's more esoteric and
controversial claims a context for validation, " says Leviton. It is
difficult to assess the type of palmistry practiced by Leviton's Indian
hand reader in the absence of double-blind studies, but science is
beginning to accept that at least some information about our body is
contained in the lines and whorls of our hand. Herman Weinreb, a
neurologist at New York University, has discovered that a fingerprint
pattern called an ulnar loop occurs more frequently in Alzheimer's
patients than in nonsufferers. Neurologists have found that
Alzheimer's patients have a more than average chance of having a
distinctive fingerprint pattern known as an ulnar loop. At least ten
other common genetic disabilities are also associated with various
patterns in the hand. Such findings may provide evidence of the
holographic model's assertion, that every portion of the body contains
information about the whole.
117
In a study of 50 Alzheimer's patients and 50 normal individuals, 72
percent of the Alzheimer's group had the pattern on at least 8 of their
fingertips, compared to only 26 percent in the control group. Of those
with ulnar loops on all 10 fingertips, 14 were Alzheimer's sufferers,
but only 4 members of the control group had the pattern. It is now
known that 10 common genetic disabilities, including Down's syndrome,
are also associated with various patterns in the hand. Doctors in West
Germany are now using this information to analyze parents' hand prints
and help determine whether expectant mothers should undergo
arnniocentesis, a potentially dangerous genetic screening procedure in
which a needle is inserted into the womb to draw off amniotic fluid for
laboratory testing. Researchers at West Germany's Institute of Dermato
glyphics in Hamburg have even developed a computer system that uses an
optoelectric scanner to take a digitized "photo" of a patient's hand.
It then compares the hand to the 10, 000 other prints in its memory,
scans it for the nearly 50 distinctive patterns now known to be
associated with various hereditary disabilities, and quickly calculates
the patient's risk factors. So perhaps we should not be so quick to
dismiss palmistry out of hand. The lines and whorls in our palms may
contain more about our whole self than we realize.
Harnessing
the Powers of the Holographic Brain
Throughout this chapter two broad messages come through loud and clear.
According to the holographic model, the mind/body ultimately cannot
distinguish the difference between the neural holograms the brain uses
to experience reality and the ones it conjures up while imagining
reality. Both have a dramatic effect on the human organism, an effect
so powerful that it can modulate the immune system, duplicate and/or
negate the effects of potent drugs, heal wounds with
amazing rapidity, melt tumors, override our genetic programming, and
reshape our living flesh in ways that almost defy belief. This then is
the first message: that each of us possesses the ability, at least at
some level, to influence our health and control our physical form in
ways that are nothing short of dazzling. We are all potential
wonderworkers, dormant yogis, and it is clear from the evidence
presented in the preceding pages that it would behoove us both as
individuals and as a species to devote a good deal more effort into
exploring an harnessing these talents. The second message is that
elements that go into the making of these neural holograms are many and
subtle. They include the images upon which we meditate, our hopes and
fears, the attitudes of our doctors, our unconscious prejudices, our
individual and cultural beliefs, and our faith in things both spiritual
and technological. More than just facts, these are important clues,
signposts that point toward those things that
we must become aware of and acquire mastery over if we are to learn how
to unleash and manipulate these talents. There are, no doubt, other
factors involved, other influences that shape and circumscribe these
abilities, for one thing should now be obvious. In a holographic
universe, a universe in which a slight change in attitude can mean the
difference between life and death, in which things are so subtly
interconnected that a dream can call forth the inexplicable appearance
of a scarab beetle, and the factors responsible for an illness can also
evoke a certain pattern in the lines and whorls of the hand, we have
reason to suspect that each effect has multitudinous causes. Each
linkage is the starting point of a dozen more, for in the words of Walt
Whitman, "A vast similitude interlocks all."
119
A
Pocketful of Miracles
Miracles happen, not in opposition to Nature, but in opposition to what
we know of Nature. —St. Augustine. Every year in September and
May a huge crowd gathers at the Duomo San Gennaro, the principal
cathedral of Naples, to witness a miracle. The miracle involves a small
vial containing a brown crusty substance alleged to be the blood of San
Gennaro, or St. Januarius, who was beheaded by the Roman emperor
Diocletian in A.D. 305. According to legend, after the saint was
martyred a serving woman collected some of his blood as a relic. No one
knows precisely what happened after that, save that the blood didn't
turn up again until the end of the thirteenth century when it was
ensconced in a silver reliquary in the cathedral. The miracle is that
twice yearly, when the crowd shouts at the vial, the brown crusty
substance changes into a bubbling, bright red liquid. There is little
doubt that the liquid is real blood. In 1902 a group of scientists from
the University of Naples made a spectroscopic analysis of the liquid by
passing a beam of light through it, verifying that it was blood.
Unfortunately, because the reliquary containing the blood is so old and
fragile, the church will not allow it to be cracked open so that other
tests can be done, and so the phenomenon has never been thoroughly
studied. But there is further evidence that the transformation is a
more than ordinary event. Occasionally throughout history (the first
written account of the public performance of the miracle dates back to
1389) when the vial is brought out, the blood refuses to liquefy.
Although rare, this is considered a very bad omen by the citizens of
Naples. In the past, the failure of the miracle has directly preceded
the eruption of Vesuvius and the Napoleonic invasion of Naples. More
recently, in 1976 and 1978, it presaged the worst earthquake in Italian
history and the election of a communist city government in Naples,
respectively. Is the liquefaction of San Gennaro's blood a miracle? It
appears to be, at least in the sense that it seems impossible to
explain by known scientific laws. Is the liquefaction caused by San
Gennaro himself? My own feeling is that its more likely cause is the
intense devotion and belief of the people witnessing the miracle. I say
this because nearly all of the miracles performed by saints and
wonder-workers of the world's great religions have also been duplicated
by psychics. This suggests that, as with stigmata, miracles are
produced by forces lying deep in the human mind, forces that are latent
in all of us. Herbert Thurston, the priest who wrote "The Physical
Phenomena of Mysticism", himself was aware of this similarity and was
reluctant to attribute any miracle to a truly supernatural cause (as
opposed to a psychic or paranormal cause). Another piece of evidence
supportive of this idea is that many stigmatists, including Padre Pio
and Therese Neumann, were also renowned for their psychic abilities.
One psychic ability that appears to play a role in miracles is
psychokinesis or PK. Since the miracle of San Gennaro involves a
physical alteration of matter, PK is certainly a likely suspect. Rogo
believes PK is also responsible for some of the more dramatic aspects
of stigmata. He feels, that it is well within the normal biological
capabilities of the body to cause small blood vessels under the skin to
break and produce superficial bleeding, but only PK can account for the
rapid appearance of large wounds. Whether this is true or not remains
to be seen, but PK is clearly a factor in some of the phenomena that
accompany stigmata. When blood flowed from the wounds in Therese
Neumann's feet, it always flowed toward her toes—exactly as it
would have flowedfrom Christ's wounds when he was on the
cross—regardless of how her feet were positioned. This meant that
when she was sitting upright in bed, the blood actually flowed upward
and counter to the force of gravity.
121
This was observed by numerous witnesses, including many U. S.
servicemen stationed in Germany after the war who visited Neumann to
witness her miraculous abilities. Gravity-defy ing flows of blood have
been reported in other cases of stigmata as well. Such events leave us
agog because our current worldview does not provide us with a context
with which to understand PK. Bohm believes viewing the universe as a
holomovement does provide us with a context. To explain what he means
he asks us to consider the following situation. Imagine you are walking
down a street late one night and a shadow suddenly looms up out of
nowhere. Your first thought might be that the shadow is an assailant
and you are in danger. The information contained in this thought will
in turn give rise to a range of imagined activities, such as running,
being hurt, and fighting. The presence of these imagined activities in
your mind, however, is not a purely "mental" process, for they are
inseparable from a host of related biological processes, such as
excitation of nerves, rapid heart beat, release of adrenaline and other
hormones, tensing of the muscles, and so on. Conversely, if your first
thought is that the shadow, a different set of mental and biological
responses will follow. Moreover, a little reflection will reveal that
we react both mentally and biologically to everything we experience.
According to Bohm, the important point, to be gleaned from this is,
that consciousness is not the only thing that can respond to meaning.
The body can also respond, and this reveals that meaning is
simultaneously both mental and physical in nature. This is odd, for we
normally think of meaning as something that can only have an active
effect on subjective reality, on the thoughts inside our heads, not
something that can engender a response in the physical world of things
and objects. Meaning "can thus serve as the link or 'bridge' between
these two sides of reality, " Bohm states. "This link is indivisible
(not separated) in the sense that information contained in thought,
which we feel to be on the 'mental' side, is at the same time a
neurophysiological, chemical, and physical activity, which is clearly
what is meant by this thought on the 'material' side."
Bohm feels that examples of objectively active meaning can be found in
other physical processes. One is the functioning of a computer chip. A
computer chip contains information, and the meaning of the information
is active in the sense that it determines how electrical currents flow
through the computer. Another is the behavior of subatomic particles.
The orthodox view in physics is that quantum waves act mechanically on
a particle, controlling its movement in much the same way that the
waves of the ocean might control a Ping-Pong ball floating on its
surface. But Bohm does not feel that this view can explain, for
example, the coordinated dance of electrons in a plasma any more than
the wave motion of water could explain a similarly well-choreographed
movement of Ping-Pong balls if such a movement were discovered on the
ocean's surface. He believes the relationship between particle and
quantum wave is more like a ship on automatic pilot guided by radar
waves.
A quantum wave does not push an electron about any more than a radar
wave pushes a ship. Rather, it provides the electron with information
about its environment which the electron then uses to maneuver on its
own. In other words, Bohm believes that an electron is not only
mindlike, but is a highly complex entity, a far cry from the standard
view that an electron is a simple, structureless point. The active use
of information by electrons, and indeed by all subatomic particles,
indicates that the ability to respond to meaning is a characteristic
not only of consciousness but of all matter. It is this intrinsic
commonality, says Bohm, that offers a possible explanation for PK. He
states, "On this basis, psychokinesis could arise if the mental
processes of one or more people were focused on meanings that were in
harmony with those guiding the basic processes of the material systems
in which this psychokinesis was to be brought about."
It is important to note that this kind of psychokinesis would not be
due to a causal process, that is, a cause-and-effect relationship
involving any of the known forces in physics. Instead, it would be the
result of a kind of nonlocal "resonance of meanings, " or a kind of
nonlocal interaction similar to, but not the same as, the nonlocal
interconnection that allows a pair of twin photons to manifest the same
angle of polarization which we saw in chapter 2 (for technical reasons
Bohm believes mere quantum nonlocality cannot account for either PK or
telepathy, and only a deeper form of nonlocality, a kind of "super"
nonlocality, would offer such an explanation).
The
Gremlin in the Machine
123
Another researcher whose ideas about PK are similar to Bohm's, but who
has taken them one step further, is Robert G. Jahn, a professor of
aerospace sciences and dean emeritus of the School of Engineering and
Applied Science at Princeton University. Jahn's involvement in the
study of PK happened quite by accident. A former consultant for both
NASA and the Department of Defense, his original field of interest was
deep space propulsion. In fact, he is the author of Physics of Electric
Propulsion, the leading textbook in the field, and didn't even believe
in the paranormal when a student first approached him and asked him to
oversee a PK experiment she wanted to do as an independent study
project. Jahn reluctantly agreed, and the results were so provocative
they inspired him to found the Princeton Engineering Anomalies Research
(PEAR) lab in 1979. Since then PEAR researchers have not only produced
compelling evidence of the existence of PK, but have gathered more data
on the subject than anyone else in the country. In one series of
experiments Jahn and his associate, clinical psychologist Brenda Dunne,
employed a device called a random event generator, or REG. By relying
on an unpredictable natural process such as radioactive decay, a REG is
able to produce a string of random binary numbers. Such a string might
look something like this: 1, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 1, 2, 1, 1, 1, 2, 1. In
other words, a REG is a kind of automatic coinflipper capable of
producing an enormous number of coin flips in a very short time. As
everyone knows, if you flip a perfectly weighted coin 1, 000 times, the
odds are you will get a 50/50 split between heads and tails. In
reality, out of any 1, 000 such flips, the split may vary a little in
one direction or the other, but the greater the number of flips, the
closer to 50/50 the split will become. What Jahn and Dunne did was have
volunteers sit in front of the REG and concentrate on having it produce
an abnormally large number of either heads or tails. Over the course of
literally hundreds of thousands of trials they discovered that, through
concentration alone, the volunteers did indeed have a small but
statistically significant effect on the REG's output. They discovered
two other things as well. The ability to produce PK effects was not
limited to a few gifted individuals but was present in the majority of
volunteers they tested. This suggests that most of us possess some
degree of PK. They also discovered that different volunteers produced
different and consistently distinctive results, results that were so
idiosyncratic that Jahn and Dunne started calling them "signatures." In
another series of experiments Jahn and Dunne employed a pinball-like
device that allows 9, 000 three-quarter-inch marbles to circulate
around 330 nylon pegs and distribute themselves into 19 collecting bins
at the bottom. The device is contained in a shallow vertical frame ten
feet high and six feet wide with a clear glass front so that volunteers
can see the marbles as they fall and collect in the bins. Normally,
more balls fall in the center bins than in the outer ones, and the
overall distribution looks like a bell-shaped curve. As with the REG,
Jahn and Dunne had volunteers sit in front of the machine and try to
make more balls land in the outer bins than in the center ones. Again,
over the course of a large number of runs, the operators were able to
create a small but measurable shift in where the balls landed. In the
REG experiments the volunteers only exerted a PK effect on microscopic
processes, the decay of a radioactive substance, but the pinball
experiments revealed that test subjects could use PK to influence
objects in the everyday world as well. What's more, the "signatures" of
individuals who had participated in the REG experiments surfaced again
in the pinball experiments, suggesting that the PK abilities of any
given individual remain the same from experiment to experiment, but
vary from individual to individual just as other talents vary. Jahn and
Dunne state, "While small segments of these results might reasonably be
discounted as falling too close to chance behavior to justify revision
of prevailing scientific tenets, taken in concert the entire ensemble
establishes an incontrovertible aberration of substantial proportions."
Jahn and Dunne think their findings may explain the propensity some
individuals seem to have for jinxing machinery and causing equipment to
malfunction. One such individual was physicist Wolfgang Pauli, whose
talents in this area are so legendary that physicists have jokingly
dubbed it the "Pauli effect. " It is said that Pauli's mere presence in
a laboratory would cause a glass apparatus to explode, or a sensitive
measuring device to crack in half. In one particularly famous incident
a physicist wrote Pauli to say that at least he couldn't blame Pauli
for the recent and mysterious disintegration of a complicated piece of
equipment since Pauli had not been present, only to find that Pauli had
been passing by the laboratory in a train at the precise moment of the
mishap! Jahn and Dunne think the famous "Gremlin effect, " the tendency
of carefully tested pieces of equipment to undergo inexplicable
malfunctions at the most absurdly inopportune moments, often reported
by pilots, aircrew, and military operators, may also be an example of
unconscious PK activity. If our minds can reach out and alter the
movement of a cascade of marbles or the operation of a machine, what
strange alchemy might account for such an ability?
Jahn and Dunne believe that since all known physical processes possess
a wave/particle duality, it is not unreasonable to assume that
consciousness does as well. When it is particlelike, consciousness
would appear to be localized in our heads, but in its wavelike aspect,
consciousness, like all wave phenomena, could also produce remote
influence effects. They believe one of these remote influence effects
is PK. But Jahn and Dunne do not stop here. They believe that reality
is itself the result of the interface Boundary) between the wavelike
aspects of consciousness and the wave patterns of matter. However, like
Bohm, they do not believe, that consciousness or the material world can
be productively represented in isolation, or even that PK can be
thought of as the transmission of some kind of force. "The message may
be more subtle than that, " says Jahn. "It may be that such concepts
are simply unviable, that we cannot talk profitably about an abstract
environment or an abstract consciousness. The only thing we can
experience is the interpenetration of the two in some way." If PK
cannot be thought of as the transmission of some kind of force, what
terminology might better sum up the interaction of mind and matter?
In thinking that is again similar to Bohm's, Jahn and Dunne propose
that PK actually involves an exchange of information between
consciousness and physical reality, an exchange that should be thought
of less as a flow between the mental and the material, and more as a
resonance between the two. The importance of resonance was even sensed
and commented on by the volunteers in the PK experiments, in that the
most frequently mentioned factor associated with a successful
performance was the attainment of a feeling of "resonance" with the
machine. One volunteer described the feeling as "a state of immersion
in the process which leads to a loss of awareness of myself. I don't
feel any direct control over the device, more like a marginal influence
when I'm in resonance with the machine. It's like being in a canoe;
when it goes where I want, I flow with it. When it doesn't I try to
break the flow and give it a chance to get back in resonance with me."
Jahn and Dunne's ideas are similar to Bohm's in several other key ways.
Like Bohm, they believe that the concepts we use to describe
reality—electron, wavelength, consciousness, time,
frequency—are useful only as "information- organizing categories"
and possess no independent status. They also believe that all theories,
including their own, are only metaphors. Although they do not identify
themselves with the holographic model (and their theory does in fact
differ from Bohm's thinking in several significant ways), they do
recognize the overlap.
"To the extent that we're talking about a rather basic reliance on wave
mechanical behavior, there is some commonality between what we're
postulating and the holographic idea, " says Jahn. "It gives to
consciousness the capacity to function in a wave mechanical sense and
thereby to avail itself (take advantage of it), one way or another, of
all of space and time." Dunne agrees: "In some sense the holographic
model could be perceived as addressing the mechanism whereby the
consciousness interacts with that wave mechanical, aboriginal, sensible
muchness, and somehow manages to convert it into usable information. In
another sense, if you imagine that the individual consciousness has its
own characteristic wave patterns, you could view
it—metaphorically, of course—as the laser of a particular
frequency that intersects with a specific pattern in the cosmic
hologram."
As might be expected, Jahn and Dunne's work has been greeted with
considerable resistance by the scientific orthodox community, but it is
gaining acceptance in some quarters. A good deal of PEAR's funding
comes from the McDonnell Foundation, created by James S. McDonnell III,
of the McDonnell Douglas Corporation, and the New York Times Magazine
recently devoted an article to Jahn and Dunne's work. Jahn and Dunne
themselves remain undaunted by the fact that they are devoting so much
time and effort to exploring the parameters of a phenomenon considered
nonexistent by most other scientists. As Jahn states, "My sense of the
importance of this topic is much higher than anything else I've ever
worked on."
Psychokinesis
on a Grander Scale
So far, PK effects produced in the lab have been limited to relatively
small objects, but the evidence suggests that some individuals at least
can use PK to bring about even greater changes in the physical world.
Biologist Lyall Watson, author of the bestselling book "Supernature"
and a scientist who has studied paranormal events all over the world,
encountered one such individual while visiting the Philippines.
127
The man was one of the so-called Philippine psychic healers, but
instead of touching a patient, all he did was hold his hand about ten
inches over the person's body, point at his or her skin, and an
incision would appear instantaneously. Watson not only witnessed
several displays of the man's psychokinetic surgical skills, but once,
when the man made a broader sweep with his finger than usual, Watson
received an incision on the back of his own hand. He bears the scar to
this day. There is evidence that PK abilities can also be used to heal
bones. Several examples of such healings have been reported by Dr. Rex
Gardner, a physician at Sunderland District General Hospital in
England. One interesting aspect of a 1983 article in the British
Medical Journal is that Gardner, an avid investigator of miracles,
presents contemporary miraculous healings side by side with examples of
virtually identical healings collected by seventh-century English
historian and theologian the Venerable Bede. The present-day healing
involved a group of Lutheran nuns living in Darmstadt, Germany. The
nuns were building a chapel when one of the sisters broke through a
freshly cemented floor and fell onto a wooden beam below. She was
rushed to the hospital where X rays revealed that she had a compound
pelvic fracture. Instead of relying on standard medical techniques, the
nuns held an all-night prayer vigil. Despite the doctors' insistence
that the sister should remain in traction for many weeks, the nuns took
her home two days later and continued to pray and perform a laying on
of hands. To their surprise, immediately following the laying on of
hands, the sister stood up from her bed, free of the excruciating pain
of the fracture and apparently healed. It took her only two weeks to
achieve a full recovery, whereupon she returned to the hospital and
presented herself to her astonished doctor. Although Gardner does not
try to account for this or any of the other healings he discusses in
his article, PK seems a likely explanation. Given that the natural
healing of a fracture is a lengthy process, and even the miraculous
regeneration of Michelli's pelvis took several months, it is suggested
that perhaps the unconscious PK abilities of the nuns performing the
laying on of hands accomplished the task. Gardner describes a similar
healing that occurred in the seventh century during the building of the
church at Hexham, England, and involving St. Wilfrid, then the bishop
of Hexham. During the construction of the church a mason named Bothelm
fell from a great height, breaking both his arms and legs. As he lay
dying, Wilfrid prayed over him and asked the other workmen to join him.
They did, "the breath of life returned" to Bothelm, and he healed
rapidly. Since the healing apparently did not take place until St.
Wilfred asked the other workmen to join him, one wonders if St. Wilfred
was the catalyst, or again if it was the combined unconscious PK of the
entire assemblage? Dr. William Tufts Brigham, the curator of the Bishop
Museum in Honolulu and a noted botanist who devoted much of his private
life to investigating the paranormal, recorded an incident in which a
broken bone was instantaneously healed by a native Hawaiian shaman, or
kahuna. The incident was witnessed by a friend of Brigham's named J. A.
K. Combs. Combs's grandmother-in-law was considered one of the most
powerful women kahunas in the islands, and once, while attending a
party at the woman's home, Combs observed her abilities firsthand. On
the occasion in question, one of the guests slipped and fell in the
beach sand, breaking his leg so severely that the bone ends pressed
visibly out against the skin. Recognizing the seriousness of the break,
Combs recommended, that the man be taken to a hospital immediately, but
the elderly kahuna would hear none of it. Kneeling beside the man, she
straightened his leg and pushed on the area where the fractured bones
pressed out against his skin. After praying and meditating for several
minutes she stood up and announced that the healing was finished. The
man rose wonderingly to his feet, took a step, and then another. He was
completely healed and his leg showed no indication of the break in any
way.
Mass
Psychokinesis in Eighteenth-Century France
Such incidents notwithstanding, one of the most astounding
manifestations of psychokinesis, and one of the most remarkable
displays of miraculous events ever recorded, took place in Paris in the
first half of the eighteenth century. The events centered around a
puritanical sect of Dutch-influenced Catholics known as the Jansenists,
and were precipitated by the death of a saintly and revered Jansenist
deacon named Francois de Paris. Although few people living today have
even heard of the Jansenist miracles, they were one of the most talked
about events in Europe for the better part of a century. To understand
fully the Jansenist miracles, it is necessary to know a little about
the historical events that preceded François de Paris's death.
129
Jansenism was founded in the early seventeenth century, and from the
start it was at odds with both the Roman Catholic Church and the French
monarchy. Many of the beliefs diverged sharply with standard church
doctrine but it was a popular movement and quickly gained followers
among the French populace. Most damning of all, it was viewed by both
the papacy and King Louis XV, a devout Catholic, as Protestantism only
masquerading as Catholicism. As a result, both the church and the king
were constantly maneuvering to undermine the movement's power. One
obstacle to these maneuverings, and one of the factors, that
contributed to the movement's popularity, was that Jansenist leaders
seemed especially skilled at performing miraculous healings.
Nonetheless, the church and the monarchy persevered, causing fierce
debates to rage throughout France. It was on May 1, 1727, at the height
of this power struggle, that Francois de Paris died and was interred in
the parish cemetery of Saint-Medard, Paris. Because of the abbe's
saintly reputation, worshipers began to gather at his tomb, and from
the beginning a host of miraculous healings were reported. The ailments
thus cured included cancerous tumors, paralysis, deafness, arthritis,
rheumatism, ulcerous sores, persistent fevers, prolonged hemorrhaging,
and blindness. But this was not all. The mourners also started to
experience strange involuntary spasms or convulsions and to undergo the
most amazing contortions of their limbs. These seizures quickly proved
contagious, spreading like a brush fire until the streets were packed
with men, women, and children, all twisting and writhing as if caught
up in a surreal enchantment. It was while they were in this fitful and
trancelike state, that the "convulsionaires, " as they have come to be
called, displayed the most phenomenal of their talents. One was the
ability to endure without harm an almost unimaginable variety of
physical tortures. These included severe beatings, blows from both
heavy and sharp objects, and strangulation—all with no sign of
injury, or even the slightest trace of wounds or bruises. What makes
these miraculous events so unique is that they were witnessed by
literally thousands of observers. The frenzied gatherings around Abbe
Paris's tomb were by no means short-lived. The cemetery and the streets
surrounding it were crowded day and night for years, and even two
decades later miracles were still being reported (to give some idea of
the enormity of the phenomena, in 1733 it was noted in the public
records that over 3, 000 volunteers were needed simply to assist the
convulsionaires and make sure, for example, that the female
participants did not become immodestly exposed during their seizures).
As a result, the supernormal abilities of the convulsionaires became an
international cause celebre, and thousands flocked to see them,
including individuals from all social strata and officials from every
educational, religious, and governmental institution imaginable;
numerous accounts, both official and unofficial, of the miracles
witnessed are recorded in the documents of the time. Moreover, many of
the witnesses, such as the investigators from the Roman Catholic
Church, had a vested interest in refuting the Jansenist miracles, but
they still went away confirming them (the Roman Catholic Church later
remedied this embarrassing state of affairs by conceding that the
miracles existed but were the work of the devil, hence proving that the
Jansenists were depraved). One investigator, a member of the Paris
Parliament named Louis- Basile Carre de Montgeron, witnessed enough
miracles to fill four thick volumes on the subject, which he published
in 1737 under the title "La Vérité des Miracles". In the
work he provides numerous examples of the convulsionaries' apparent
invulnerability to torture. In one instance a twenty-year-old
convulsionaire named Jeanne Maulet leaned against a stone wall while a
volunteer from the crowd, "a very strong man, " delivered one hundred
blows to her stomach with a thirty-pound hammer (the convulsionaires
themselves asked to be tortured because they said it relieved the
excruciating pain of the convulsions). To test the force of the blows,
Montgeron himself then took the hammer and tried it on the stone wall
against which the girl had leaned. He wrote, "At the twenty-fifth blow
the stone upon which I struck, which had been shaken by the preceding
efforts, suddenly became loose and fell on the other side of the wall,
making an aperture more than half a foot in size." Montgeron describes
another instance in which a convulsionaire bent back into an arc so
that her lower back was supported by "the sharp point of a peg. " She
then asked that a fifty-pound stone attached to a rope be hoisted to
"an extreme height" and allowed to fall with all its weight on her
stomach. The stone was hoisted up and allowed to fall again and again,
but the woman seemed completely unaffected by it. She effortlessly
maintained her awkward position, suffered no pain or harm, and walked
away from the ordeal without even so much as a mark on the flesh of her
back. Montgeron noted that while the ordeal was in progress she kept
crying out, "Strike harder, harder!"
131
In fact, it appears that nothing could harm the convulsionaires. They
could not be hurt by the blows of metal rods, chains, or timbers. The
strongest men could not choke them. Some were crucified and afterward
showed no trace of wounds. Most mind-boggling of all, they could not
even be cut or punctured with knives, swords, or hatchets! Montgeron
cites an incident in which the sharpened point of an iron drill was
held against the stomach of a convulsionaire and then pounded so
violently with a hammer that it seemed "as if it would penetrate
through to the spine and rupture all the entrails. " But it didn't, and
the convulsionaire maintained an "expression of perfect rapture,"
crying, "Oh, that does me good! Courage, brother; strike twice as hard,
if you can!" Invulnerability was not the only talent the Jansenists
displayed during their seizures. Some became clairvoyant and were able
to "discern hidden things. " Others could read even when their eyes
were closed and tightly bandaged, and instances of levitation were
reported. One of the levitators, an abbe named Bescherand from
Montpellier, was so "forcibly lifted into the air" during his
convulsions that even when witnesses tried to hold him down they could
not succeed in keeping him from rising up off of the ground. Although
we have all but forgotten about the Jansenist miracles today, they were
far from ignored by the intelligentsia of the time. The niece of the
mathematician and philosopher Pascal succeeded in having a severe ulcer
in her eye vanish within hours, as the result of a Jansenist miracle.
When King Louis XV tried unsuccessfully to stop the convulsions by
closing the cemetery of Saint-Medard, Voltaire quipped, "God was
forbidden, by order of the King, to work any miracles there." And in
his Philosophical Essays the Scottish philosopher David Hume wrote,
"There surely never was so great a number of miracles ascribed to one
person as those which were lately said to have been wrought in France
upon the tomb of Abbe Paris. Many of the miracles were immediately
proved upon the spot, before judges of unquestioned credit and
distinction, in a learned age, and on the most eminent theatre that is
now in the world." How are we to explain the miracles produced by the
convulsionaires?
Although Bohm is willing to consider the possibility of PK and other
paranormal phenomena, he prefers not to speculate about specific events
such as the super
normal abilities of the Jansenists. But once again, if we take the
testimony of so many witnesses seriously, unless we are willing to
concede that God favored the Jansenist Catholies over the Roman, PK
seems the likely explanation. That some kind of psychic functioning was
involved is strongly suggested by the appearance of other psychic
abilities, such as clairvoyance, during the seizures. In addition, we
have already looked at a number of examples where intense faith and
hysteria have triggered the deeper forces of the mind, and these too
were present in ample portions. In fact, instead of being produced by
one individual, the psychokinetic effects may have been created by the
combined fervor and belief of all those present, and this might account
for the unusual vigor of the manifestations. This idea is not new. In
the 1920s the great Harvard psychologist William McDougall also
suggested that religious miracles might be the result of the collective
psychic powers of large numbers of worshipers. PK would explain many of
the convulsionaire's seeming invulnerabilities. In the case of Jeanne
Maulet it could be argued that she unconsciously used PK to block the
effect of the hammer blows. If the convulsionaires were unconsciously
using PK to take control of chains, timbers, and knives, and stop them
in their tracks at the precise moment of impact, it would also explain
why these objects left no marks or bruises. Similarly, when individuals
tried to strangle , perhaps their hands were held in place by PK and
although they thought they were squeezing flesh, they were really only
flexing in the nothingness.
Reprogramming
the Cosmic Motion Picture Projector
PK does not explain every aspect of the convulsionaires'
invulnerability, however. There is the problem of inertia—the
tendency of an object in motion to stay in motion—to consider.
When a fifty-pound stone or a piece of timber comes crashing down, it
carries with it a lot of energy, and when it is stopped in its tracks,
the energy has to go somewhere. For example, if a person in a suit of
armor is struck by a thirty-pound hammer, although the metal of the
armor may deflect
the blow, the person is still considerably shaken. In the case of
Jeanne Maulet it appears that the energy somehow bypassed her body and
was transferred to the wall behind her, for as Montgeron noted, the
stone was "shaken by the efforts. " But in the case of the woman who
was arched and had the fifty-pound stone dropped on her abdomen, the
matter is less clear.
133
One wonders why she wasn't driven into the ground like a croquet hoop,
or why, when they were struck with timbers, the convulsionaires were
not knocked off their feet? Where did the deflected energy go? Again,
the holographic view of reality provides a possible answer. As we have
seen, Bohm believes that consciousness and matter are just different
aspects of the same fundamental something, a something that has its
origins in the implicate order. Some researchers believe this suggests
that the consciousness may be able to do much more than make a few
psychokinetic changes in the material world. For example, Grof believes
that if the implicate and explicate orders are an accurate description
of reality, "it is conceivable that certain unusual states of
consciousness could mediate direct experience of, and intervention in,
the implicate order. It would thus be possible to modify phenomena in
the phenomenal world by influencing their generative matrix." Put
another way, in addition to psychokinetically moving objects around,
the mind may also be able to reach down and reprogram the cosmic motion
picture projecter that created those objects in the first place. Thus,
not only could the conventionally recognized rules of nature, such as
inertia, be completely bypassed, but the mind could alter and reshape
the material world in ways far more dramatic than even psychokinesis
implies. That this or some other theory must be true is evidenced in
another supernormal ability displayed by various individuals throughout
history: invulnerability to fire. In his book "The Physical Phenomena
of Mysticism", Thurston gives numerous examples of saints who possessed
this ability, one of the most famous being St. Francis of Paula. Not
only could St. Francis of Paula hold burning embers in his hands
without being harmed, but at his canonization hearings in 1519 eight
eyewitnesses testified that they had seen him walk unharmed through the
roaring flames of a furnace to repair one of the furnace's broken
walls... It seems that challenges to faith, such as the one King Louis
XV tried to impose on the Jansenists, have engendered miracles in more
than one instance. Although the kahunas of Hawaii do not walk through
roaring furnaces, there are reports that they can stroll across hot
lava without being harmed. Brigham told of meeting three kahunas who
promised to perform the feat for him, and of following them on a
lengthy trek to a lava flow near the erupting Kilauea. They chose a
150-foot-wide lava flow that had cooled enough to support their weight,
but was so hot that patches of incandescence still coursed through its
surface. As Brigham watched, the kahunas took off their sandals and
started to recite the lengthy prayers necessary to protect them as they
strolled out onto the barely hardened molten rock. As it turned out,
the kahunas had told Brigham earlier that they could confer their fire
immunity on him if he wanted to join them, and he had bravely agreed.
But as he faced the baking heat of the Java he had second and even
third thoughts. "The upshot of the matter was that I sat tight and
refused to take off my boots, " Brigham wrote in his account of the
incident. After they finished invoking the gods, the oldest kahuna
scampered out onto the lava and crossed the 150 feet without harm.
Impressed, but still adamant about not going, Brigham stood up to watch
the next kahuna, only to be given a shove that forced him to break into
a run to keep from falling face first onto the incandescent rock. And
run Brigham did. When he reached higher ground on the other side he
discovered that one of his boots had burned off and his socks were on
fire. But, miraculously, his feet were completely unharmed. The kahunas
had also suffered no harm and were rolling in laughter at Brigham's
shock. "I laughed too, " wrote Brigham. "I was never so relieved in my
life as I was to find that I was safe. There is little more that I can
tell of this experience. I had a sensation of intense heat on my face
and body, but almost no sensation in my feet."
The convulsionaires also occasionally displayed complete immunity to
fire. The two most famous of these "human salamanders"—in the
middle ages the term salamander referred to a mythological lizard
believed to live in fire—were Marie Sonnet and Gabrielle Moler.
On one occasion, and in the presence of numerous witnesses, including
Montgeron, Sonnet stretched herself on two chairs over a blazing fire
and remained there for half an hour. Neither she nor her clothing
showed any ill effects.
135
In another instance she sat with her feet in a brazier full of burning
coals. As with Brigham, her shoes and stockings burned off, but her
feet were unharmed. Gabrielle Moler's exploits were even more
dumbfounding. In addition to being impervious to the thrusts of swords
and blows delivered by a shovel, she could stick her head into a
roaring hearth fire and hold it there without suffering any injury.
Eyewitnesses report that afterward her clothing was so hot it could
barely be touched, yet her hair, eyelashes, and eyebrows were never so
much as singed. No doubt she was great fun at parties. Actually the
Jansenists were not the first convulsionary movement in France. In the
late 1600s, when King Louis XIV tried to purge the country of the
unabashedly Protestant Huguenots, a group of Huguenot resisters in the
valley of the Cevennes and known as the Camisards displayed similar
abilities. In an official report sent to Rome, one of the persecutors,
a prior named Abbe du Chayla, complained that no matter what he did, he
could not succeed in harming the Camisards. When he ordered them shot,
the musket balls would be found flattened between their clothing and
their skin. When he closed their hands upon burning coals, they were
not harmed, and when he wrapped them head to toe in cotton soaked with
oil and set them on fire, they did not burn. As if this weren't enough,
Claris, the Camisard leader, ordered, that a pyre be built and then
climbed to the top of it to deliver an ecstatic speech. In the presence
of six hundred witnesses he ordered the pyre be set on fire and
continued to rant as the flames rose above his head. After the pyre was
completely consumed, Claris remained, unharmed and with no mark of the
fire on his hair or clothing. The head of the French troops sent to
subdue the Camisards, a colonel named Jean Cavalier, was later exiled
to England where he wrote a book on the event in 1707 entitled "A Cry
from the Desert".
As for Abbe du Chayla, he was eventually murdered by the Camisards
during a retaliatory raid. Unlike some of them, he possessed no special
invulnerability. Literally hundreds of credible accounts of fire
immunity exist. It is reported that when Bernadette of Lourdes was in
ecstasy she was also impervious to fire. According to witnesses, on one
occasion her hand dropped so close to a burning candle while she was in
trance that the flames licked around her fingers. One of the
individuals present was Dr. Dozous, the municipal physician of Lourdes.
Being of quick mind, Dozous timed the event and noted that it was a
full ten minutes before she came out of trance and removed her hand. He
later wrote, "I saw it with my own eyes. But I swear, if anyone had
tried to make me believe such a story I would have laughed him to
scorn."
On September 7, 1871, the New York Herald reported, that Nathan Coker,
an elderly Negro blacksmith living in Easton, Maryland, could handle
red-hot metal without being harmed. In the presence of a committee,
that included several doctors, he heated an iron shovel, until it was
incandescent, and then held it against the soles of his feet, until it
was cool. He also licked the edge of the red-hot shovel and poured
melted lead shot in his mouth, allowing it to run over his teeth and
gums, until it solidified. After each of these feats the doctors
examined him and found no trace of injury. While on a hunting trip in
1927 in the Tennessee mountains, K. R. Wissen, a New York physician,
encountered a twelve-year-old boy who was similarly impervious. Wissen
watched the boy handle red-hot irons out of a fireplace with impunity.
The boy told Wissen he had discovered his ability by accident when he
picked up a red-hot horseshoe in his uncle's blacksmith shop. The pit
of flaming embers the Grosvenors watched Mohotty walk through was
twenty-feet long and measured 1328 degrees Fahrenheit on the National
Geographic team's thermometers. In the May 1959 issue of the Atlantic
Monthly, Dr. Leonard Feinberg of the University of Illinois reports
witnessing another Ceylonese fire-walking ritual during which the
natives carried red-hot iron pots on their heads without being harmed.
In an article in Psychiatric Quarterly, psychiatrist Berthold Schwarz
reports watching Appalachian Pentecostals hold their hands in an
acetylene flame without being harmed, ™ and so on, and so on.
The
Laws of Physics as Habits and Realities Both Potential and Real
Just as it is hard to imagine where the deflected energy goes in some
of the examples of PK we have looked at, it is equally difficult to
understand where the energy of a red-hot iron pot goes while the pot is
resting flat against the hair and flesh of a Ceylonese native's head.
137
But if consciousness can mediate directly in the implicate order, it
becomes a more tractable problem. Again, rather than being due to some
undiscovered energy or law of physics (such as some kind of insulating
force field) that operates within the framework of reality, it would
result from activity on an even more fundamental level and involve the
processes that create both the physical universe and the laws of
physics in the first place. Looked at another way, the ability of
consciousness to shift from one entire reality to another suggests that
the usually inviolate rule that fire burns human flesh may only be one
program in the cosmic computer, but a program that has been repeated so
often it has become one of nature's habits. As has been mentioned,
according to the holographic idea, matter is also a kind of habit and
is constantly born anew out of the implicate, just as the shape of a
fountain is created anew out of the constant flow of water that gives
it form. Peat humorously refers to the repetitious nature of this
process as one of the universe's neuroses. "When you have a neurosis
you tend to repeat the same pattern in your life, or do the same
action, as if there's a memory built up and the thing is stuck with
that," he says. "I tend to think things like chairs and tables are like
that also. They're a sort of material neurosis, a repetition. But there
is something subtler going on, a constant enfolding and unfolding. In
this sense chairs and tables are just habits in this flux, but the flux
is the reality, even if we tend only to see the habit." Indeed, given
that the universe and the laws of physics that govern it are also
products of this flux, then they, too, must be viewed as habits.
Clearly they are habits that are deeply ingrained in the holomovement,
but supernormal talents such as immunity to fire indicate that, despite
their seeming constancy, at least some of the rules that govern reality
can be suspended. This means the laws of physics are not set in stone,
but are more like Shainberg's vortices, whirlpools of such vast
inertial power that they are as fixed in the holomovement as our own
habits and deeply held convictions are fixed in our thoughts. Grof's
proposal that altered states of consciousness may be required in order
to make such changes in the implicate is also attested to by the
frequency with which fire immunity is associated with heightened faith
and religious zeal. The pattern that began to take shape in the last
chapter continues, and its message becomes increasingly clear—the
deeper and more emotionally charged our beliefs, the greater the
changes we can make in both our bodies and reality itself. At this
point we might ask, if consciousness can make such extraordinary
alterations under special circumstances, what role does it play in the
creation of our day-to-day reality? Opinions are extremely varied. In
private conversation Bohm admits to believing that the universe is all
"thought" and reality exists only in what we think, but again he
prefers not to speculate about miraculous occurrences. Pribram is
similarly reticent to comment on specific events but does believe a
number of different potential realities exist and consciousness has a
certain amount of latitude in choosing which one manifests. "I don't
believe anything goes," he says,
"but there are a lot of worlds out there, that we don't understand."
After years of firsthand experiences with the miraculous, Watson is
bolder. "I have no doubt that reality is in a very large part a
construct of the imagination. I am not speaking as a particle physicist
or even as someone who is totally aware of what's going on in the
frontier of that discipline, but I think we have the capacity to change
the world around us in quite fundamental ways" (Watson, who was once
enthusiastic about the holographic idea, is no longer convinced that
any current theory in physics can adequately explain the supernormal
abilities of the mind). Gordon Globus, a professor of psychiatry and
philosophy at the University of California at Irvine, has a different
but similar view. Globus thinks the holographic theory is correct in
its assertion that the mind constructs concrete reality out of the raw
material of the implicate. However, he has also been greatly influenced
by anthropologist Carlos Castaneda's now famous otherworldly
experiences with the Yaqui Indian shaman, Don Juan. In stark contrast
to Pribram, he believes that the seemingly inexhaustible array of
"separate realities" Castaneda experienced under Don Juan's
tutelage— and indeed even the equally vast array of realities we
experience during ordinary dreaming—indicate, that there are an
infinite number of potential realities, enfolded in the implicate.
Moreover, because the holographic mechanisms the brain uses to
construct everyday reality are the same ones it uses to construct our
dreams and the realities we experience during Castaneda-esque (esque -
possession of a specified quality) altered states of consciousness, he
believes all three types of reality are fundamentally the same.
Does
Consciousness Create Subatomic Particles or Not Create Subatomic
Particles, That Is the Question
This difference of opinion indicates once again that the holographic
theory is still very much an idea in the making, not unlike a newly
formed Pacific island whose volcanic activity keeps it from having
clearly defined shores. Although some might use this lack of consensus
to criticize it, it should be remembered that Darwin's theory of
evolution, certainly one of the most potent and successful ideas
science has ever produced, is also still very much in a state of flux,
and evolutionary theorists continue to debate its scope,
interpretation, regulatory mechanisms, and ramifications. The
difference of opinion also reveals just how complex a puzzle
miracles are. Jahn and Dunne offer yet another opinion on the role
consciousness plays in the creation of day-to-day reality, and although
it differs from one of Bohm's basic premises, because of the possible
insight it offers into the process by which miracles are effected, it
deserves our attention. Unlike Bohm, Jahn and Dunne believe subatomic
particles do not possess a distinct reality until consciousness enters
the picture." I think we have long since passed the place in high
energy physics where we're examining the structure of a passive
universe, " Jahn states. "I think we're into the domain where the
interplay of consciousness in the environment is taking place on such a
primary scale that we are indeed creating reality by any reasonable
definition of the term." As has been mentioned, this is the view held
by most physicists. However, Jahn and Dunne's position differs from the
mainstream in an important way. Most physicists would reject the idea
that the interplay between consciousness and the subatomic world could
in any way be used to explain PK, let alone miracles. In fact, the
majority of physicists not only ignore any implications this interplay
might have but actually behave as if it doesn't exist. "Most physicists
develop a somewhat schizophrenic view, " says quantum theorist Fritz
Rohrlich of Syracuse University. "On the one hand they accept the
standard interpretation of quantum theory. On the other they insist on
the reality of quantum systems even when these are not observed." This
bizarre I'm-not-going-to-think-about-it-even-when-I-know-it's true
attitude keeps many physicists from considering even the
philosophical implications of quantum physics' most incredible
findings. As N. David Mermin, a physicist at Cornell University, points
out, physicists fall into three categories: a small minority is
troubled by the philosophical implications; a second group has
elaborate reasons why they are not troubled, but their explanations
tend "to miss the point entirely"; and a third group has no elaborate
explanations but also refuses to say why they aren't troubled. "Their
position is unassailable (not able to be challenged)," says Mermin.
Jahn and Dunne are not so timid. They believe that instead of
discovering particles, physicists may actually be creating them. As
evidence, they cite a recently discovered subatomic particle called an
anomalon, whose properties vary from laboratory to laboratory. Imagine
owning a car that had a different color and different features
depending on who drove it! This is very curious and seems to suggest
that an anomalon's reality depends on who finds/creates it. Similar
evidence may also be found in another subatomic particle. In the 1930s
Pauli proposed the existence of a massless particle called a neutrino
to solve an outstanding problem concerning radioactivity. For years the
neutrino was only an idea, but then in 1957 physicists discovered
evidence of its existence. In more recent years, however, physicists
have realized that if the neutrino possessed some mass, it would solve
several even thornier problems than the one facing Pauli, and lo and
behold in 1980 evidence started to come in that the neutrino had a
small but measurable mass! This is not all. As it turned out, only
laboratories in the Soviet Union discovered neutrinos with mass.
Laboratories in the United States did not. This remained true for the
better part of the 1980s, and although other laboratories have now
duplicated the Soviet findings, the situation is still unresolved. Is
it possible that the different properties displayed by neutrinos are
due at least in part to the changing expectations and different
cultural biases of the physicists who searched for them? If so, such a
state of affairs raises an interesting question. If physicists do not
discover the subatomic world, but create it, why do some particles,
such as electrons, appear to have a stable reality, no matter who
observes them? In other words, why does a physics student with no
knowledge of an electron still discover the same characteristics, that
a seasoned physicist discovers? One possible answer is, that our
perceptions of the world may not be based solely on the information we
receive through our five senses.
(It means, that our Knowledge
spreads holographically and is perceived by all life forms, including
humans. LM)
141
As fantastic, as this may sound, a very good case can be made for such
a notion. Before explaining, I would like to relate an occurrence I
witnessed in the middle 1970s. My father had hired a professional
hypnotist to entertain a group of friends at his house and had invited
me to attend the event. After quickly determining the hypnotic
susceptibility of the various individuals present, the hypnotist chose
a friend of my father's named Tom as his subject. This was the first
time Tom had ever met the hypnotist. Tom proved to be a very good
subject, and within seconds the hypnotist had him in a deep trance. He
then proceeded with the usual tricks performed by stage hypnotists. He
convinced Tom there was a giraffe in the room and had Tom gaping in
wonder. He told Tom that a potato was really an apple and had Tom eat
it with gusto. But the highlight of the evening was when he told Tom
that when he came out of trance, his teenage daughter, Laura, would be
completely invisible to him. Then, after having Laura stand directly in
front of the chair in which Tom was sitting, the hypnotist awakened him
and asked him if he could see her. Tom looked around the room and his
gaze appeared to pass right through his giggling daughter. "No, " he
replied. The hypnotist asked Tom if he was certain, and again, despite
Laura's rising giggles, he answered no. Then the hypnotist went behind
Laura so he was hidden from Tom's view and pulled an object out of his
pocket. He kept the object carefully concealed so that no one in the
room could see it, and pressed it against the small of Laura's back. He
asked Tom to identify the object. Tom leaned forward as if staring
directly through Laura's stomach and said that it was a watch. The
hypnotist nodded and asked if Tom could read the watch's inscription.
Tom squinted as if struggling to make out the writing and recited both
the name of the watch's owner (which happened to be a person unknown to
any of us in the room) and the message. The hypnotist then revealed
that the object was indeed a watch and passed it around the room so
that everyone could see that Tom had read its inscription correctly.
When I talked to Tom afterward, he said that his daughter had been
absolutely invisible to him. All he had seen was the hypnotist standing
and holding a watch cupped in the palm of his hand. Had the hypnotist
let him leave without telling him what was going on, he never would
have known he wasn't perceiving normal consensus reality. Obviously
Tom's perception of the watch was not based on information he was
receiving through his five senses. Where was he getting the information
from?
One explanation is, that he was obtaining it telepathically from
someone else's mind, in this case, the hypnotist's. The ability of
hypnotized individuals to "tap" into the senses of other people has
been reported by other investigators. The British physicist Sir William
Barrett found evidence of the phenomenon in a series of experiments
with a young girl. After hypnotizing the girl he told her that she
would taste everything he tasted. "Standing behind the girl, whose eyes
I had securely bandaged, I took up some salt and put it in my mouth;
instantly she sputtered and exclaimed, 'What for are you putting salt
in my mouth?' Then I tried sugar; she said That's better'; asked what
it was like, she said 'Sweet. ' Then mustard, pepper, ginger, et cetera
were tried; each was named and apparently tasted by the girl when
I put them in my own mouth."
In his book "Experiments in Distant Influence" the Soviet physiologist
Leonid Vasiliev cites a German study conducted in the 1950s that
produced similar findings. In that study, the hypnotized subject not
only tasted what the hypnotist tasted, but blinked when a light was
flashed in the hypnotist's eyes, sneezed when the hypnotist took a
whiff of ammonia, heard the ticking of a watch held to the hypnotist's
ear, and experienced pain when the hypnotist pricked himself with a
needle, all done in a manner that safeguarded against her obtaining the
information through normal sensory cues. Our ability to tap into the
senses of others is not limited to hypnotic states. In a now famous
series of experiments physicists Harold Puthoff and Russell Targ of the
Stanford Research Institute in California found that just about
everyone they tested had a capacity they call "remote viewing, " the
ability to describe accurately what a distant test subject is seeing.
They found that individual after individual could remote-view simply by
relaxing and describing whatever images came into their minds. Puthoff
and Targ's findings have been duplicated by dozens of laboratories
around the world, indicating that remote viewing is probably a
widespread latent ability in all of us. The Princeton Anomalies
Research lab has also corroborated Puthoff and Targ's findings. In one
study Jahn himself served as the receiver and tried to perceive what a
colleague was observing in Paris, a city Jahn has never visited. In
addition to seeing a bustling street, an image of a knight in armor
came into Jahn's mind. It later turned out that the sender was standing
in front of a government building ornamented with statuary of
historical military figures, one of whom was a knight in armor.
143
So it appears that we are deeply interconnected with each other in yet
another way, a situation that is not so strange in a holographic
universe. Moreover, these interconnections manifest even when we are
not consciously aware of them. Studies have shown that when a person in
one room is given an electric shock, it will register in the polygraph
readings of a person in another room. A light flashed in a test
subject's eyes will register in the EEG readings of a test subject
isolated in another room, and even the blood volume of a test subject's
finger changes, as measured by a plethysmograph, a sensitive indicator
of autonomic nervous system functioning—when a "sender" in
another room encounters the name of someone they know while reading a
list composed mainly of names unknown to them.
Given both our deep interconnectedness and our ability to construct
entirely convincing realities out of information received via this
interconnectedness, such as Tom did, what would happen if two or more
hypnotized individuals tried to construct the same imaginary reality?
Intriguingly, this question has been answered in an experiment
conducted by Charles Tart, a professor of psychology at the Davis
campus of the University of California. Tart found two graduate
students, Anne and Bill, who could go into deep trance and were also
skilled hypnotists in their own right. He had Anne hypnotize Bill and
after he was hypnotized, he had Bill hypnotize her in return. Tart's
reasoning was that the already powerful rapport that exists between
hypnotist and subject would be strengthened by using this unusual
procedure. He was right. When they opened their eyes in this mutually
hypnotized state everything looked gray. However, the grayness quickly
gave way to vivid colors and glowing lights, and in a few moments they
found themselves on a beach of unearthly beauty. The sand sparkled like
diamonds, the sea was filled with enormous frothing bubbles and
glistened like champagne, and the shoreline was dotted with translucent
crystalline rocks pulsing with internal light. Although Tart could not
see what Anne and Bill were seeing, from the way they were talking he
quickly realized they were experiencing the same hallucinated reality.
Of course, this was immediately obvious to Anne and Bill and they set
about to explore their newfound world, swimming in the ocean and
studying the glowing crystalline rocks. Unfortunately for Tart they
also stopped talking, or at least they stopped talking from Tart's
perspective. When he questioned them about their silence they told him
that in their shared dreamworld they were talking, a phenomenon
Tart feels involved some kind of paranormal communication between the
two. In session after session Anne and Bill continued to construct
various realities, and all were as real, available to the five senses,
and dimensionally realized, as anything they experienced in their
normal waking state. In fact, Tart resolved that the worlds Anne and
Bill visited we're actually more real than the pale, lunar version of
reality with which most of us must be content. As he states, after
"they had been talking about their experiences to each other for some
time, and found they had been discussing details of the experiences
they had shared for which there were no verbal stimuli on the tapes,
they felt they must have actually been 'in' the nonworldly locales they
had experienced." Anne and Bill's ocean world is the perfect example of
a holographic reality—a three-dimensional construct created out
of interconnectedness, sustained by the flow of consciousness, and
ultimately as plastic as the thought processes that engendered it. This
plasticity was evident in several of its features. Although it was
three-dimensional, its space was more flexible than the space of
everyday reality and sometimes took on an elasticity Anne and Bill had
no words to describe. Even stranger, although they were clearly highly
skilled at sculpting a shared world outside themselves, they frequently
forgot to sculpt their own bodies, and existed more often than not as
floating faces or heads. As Anne reports, on one occasion when Bill
told her to give him her hand, "I had to kind of conjure up a hand."
How did this experiment in mutual hypnosis end? Sadly, the idea that
these spectacular visions were somehow real, perhaps even more real
than everyday reality, so frightened both Anne and Bill that they
became increasingly nervous about what they were doing. They eventually
stopped their explorations, and one of them, Bill, even gave up
hypnosis entirely. The extrasensory interconnectedness that allowed
Anne and Bill to construct their shared reality might almost be viewed
as a kind of field effect between them, a "reality-field" if you will.
One wonders what would have happened if the hypnotist at my father's
house had put all of us into a trance? In light of the evidence above,
there is every reason to believe that if our rapport were deep enough,
Laura would have become invisible to us all. We would have collectively
constructed a reality-field of a watch, read its inscription, and been
completely convinced that what we were perceiving was real.
145
If consciousness plays a role in the creation of subatomic particles,
is it possible that our observations of the subatomic world are also
reality-fields of a kind? If Jahn can perceive a suit of armor through
the senses of a friend in Paris, is it any more farfetched to believe
that physicists all around the world are unconsciously interconnecting
with one another and using a form of mutual hypnosis similar to that
used by Tart's subjects to create the consensus characteristics they
observe in an electron? This possibility may be supported by another
unusual feature of hypnosis. Unlike other altered states of
consciousness, hypnosis is not associated with any unusual EEC
patterns. Physiologically speaking, the mental state hypnosis most
closely resembles is our normal waking consciousness. Does this mean
that normal waking consciousness is itself a kind of hypnosis, and we
are all constantly tapping into reality-fields?
Nobelist Josephson has suggested that something like this may be going
on. Like Globus, he takes Castaneda's work seriously and has attempted
to relate it to quantum physics. He proposes that objective reality is
produced out of the collective memories of the human race while
anomalous events, such as those experienced by Castaneda, are the
manifestation of the individual will. Human consciousness may not be
the only thing that participates in the creation of reality-fields.
Remote viewing experiments have shown that people can accurately
describe distant locations even when there are no human observers
present at the locations. Similarly, subjects can identify the contents
of a sealed box randomly selected from a group of sealed boxes and
whose contents are therefore completely unknown. This means that we can
do more than just tap into the senses of other people. We can also tap
into reality itself to gain information. As bizarre as this sounds, it
is not so strange when one remembers that in a holographic universe,
consciousness pervades (saturate) all matter, and "meaning" has an
active presence in both the mental and physical worlds. Bohm believes
the ubiquitousness (ever-present, omnipresent, universal) of meaning
offers a possible explanation for both telepathy and remote viewing. He
thinks both may actually be just different forms of psychokinesis. Just
as PK is a resonance of meaning conveyed from a mind to an object,
telepathy can be viewed as a resonance of meaning conveyed from a mind
to a mind, says Bohm. In like manner, remote viewing can be looked at
as a resonance of meaning conveyed from an object to a mind. "When
harmony or resonance of 'meanings' is established, the action works
both ways, so that the 'meanings' of the distant system could act in
the viewer to produce a kind of inverse psychokinesis that would, in
effect, transmit an image of that system to him, " he states.
146
Jahn and Dunne have a similar view. Although they believe reality is
established only in the interaction of a consciousness with its
environment, they are very liberal in how they define consciousness. As
they see it, anything capable of generating, receiving, or utilizing
information can qualify. Thus, animals, viruses, DNA, machines
(artificially intelligent and otherwise), and so-called nonliving
objects may all have the prerequisite properties to take part in the
creation of reality. If such assertions are true, and we can obtain
information not only from the minds of other human beings but from the
living hologram of reality itself, psychometry—the ability to
obtain information about an object's history simply by touching
it—would also be explained. Rather than being inanimate, such an
object would be suffused with its own kind of consciousness. Instead of
being a "thing" that exists separately from the universe, it would be
part of the interconnectedness of all things—connected to the
thoughts of every person who ever came in contact with it, connected to
the consciousness that pervades every animal and object that was ever
associated with its existence, connected via the implicate to its own
past, and connected to the mind of the psychometrist holding it.
You
Can Get Something for Nothing
Do physicists play a role in the creation of subatomic particles? At
present the puzzle remains unresolved, but our ability to interconnect
with one another and conjure up realities that are as real as our
normal waking reality is not the only clue that this may be the case.
Indeed, the evidence of the miraculous indicates that we have scarcely
even begun to fathom our talents in this area. Consider the following
miraculous healing reported by Gardner. In 1982 an English physician
named Ruth Coggin, working in Pakistan, was visited by a thirty-five-
year-old Pakistani woman named Kamro. Kamro was eight months pregnant
and for the better part of her pregnancy had suffered from bleeding and
intermittent abdominal pain. Coggin recommended that she go into the
hospital immediately, but Kamro refused.
147
Nonetheless, two days later her bleeding became so severe that she was
admitted on an emergency basis. Coggin's examination revealed that
Kamro's blood loss had been "very heavy, " and her feet and abdomen
were pathologically swollen. The next day Kamro had "another heavy
bleed, " forcing Coggin to perform a cesarean section. As soon as
Coggin opened the uterus even more copious amounts of dark blood
flooded out and continued to flow so heavily it became clear that
Karnro had virtually no clotting ability. By the time Coggin delivered
Kamro's healthy baby daughter, "deep pools of unclotted blood" filled
her bed and continued to flow from her incision. Coggin managed to
obtain two pints of blood to transfuse the gravely anemic woman, but it
was not nearly enough to replace the staggering loss. Having no other
options, Coggin resorted to prayer... Then they waited. For the next
several hours Kamro continued to bleed, but instead of getting worse,
her general condition stabilized. That evening Coggin prayed with Kamro
again, and although her "brisk bleeding" continued unabated, she seemed
unaffected by the loss. Forty-eight hours after the operation her blood
finally began to clot and her recovery started in full. Ten days later
she went home with her baby. Although Coggin had no way of measuring
Kamro's actual blood loss, she had no doubts, that the young mother had
lost more, than her total blood volume during the surgery and the
profuse bleeding, that ensued. After Gardner examined the documentation
of the case, he agreed. The trouble with this conclusion is, that human
beings cannot produce new blood fast enough to cover such catastrophic
losses; if they could, many fewer people would bleed to death. This
leaves one with the unsettling conclusion, that Kamro's new blood must
have materialized out of thin air. The ability to create an
infinitesimal particle or two pales in comparison to the
materialization of the ten to twelve pints of blood, necessary to
replenish the average human body. And blood is not the only thing we
can create out of thin air. In June of 1974, while traveling in Timor
Timur, a small island in easternmost Indonesia, Watson
encountered an equally confounding example of materialization.
Although his original intention had been to visit a famous matan do'ok,
a type of Indonesian wonder-worker, who was said to be able to make it
rain on demand, he was diverted by accounts of an unusually active
buan, an evil spirit, wreaking havoc in a house in a nearby village.
The family living in the house consisted of a married couple, their two
small boys, and the husband's unmarried younger half-sister. The couple
and their children were typically Indonesian in appearance, with dark
complexions and curly hair, but the half-sister, whose name was Alin,
was physically very different and had a much lighter complexion and
features, that were almost Chinese, which accounted for her inability
to obtain a husband. She was also treated with indifference by the
family, and it was immediately plain to Watson, that she was the source
of the psychic disturbance. That evening during dinner in the family's
grass-roofed home, Watson witnessed several startling phenomena. First,
without warning, the couple's eight-year-old boy screamed and dropped
his cup on the table, as the back of his hand began to bleed
inexplicably. Watson, who was sitting next to the boy, examined his
hand and saw, that there was a semicircle of fresh punctures on it,
like a human bite, but with a diameter larger, than the boy's. Alin,
always the odd person out, was busy at the fire opposite the boy, when
this occurred. As Watson was examining the wounds, the lamp flame
turned blue and abruptly flared up, and in the suddenly brighter light
a shower of salt began to pour down over the food, until it was
completely covered and inedible. "It wasn't a sudden deluge, but a slow
and deliberate action, which lasted long enough for me to look up and
see, that it seemed to begin in midair, just about eye level, perhaps
four feet over the table, " says Watson. Watson immediately leapt up
from the table, but the show wasn't over. Suddenly a series of loud
rapping sounds issued from the table, and it began to wobble. The
family also jumped up and all watched, as the table bucked "like the
lid
on a box containing some wild animal," and finally flipped over on its
side. Watson first reacted by running out of the house with the rest of
the family, but when he recovered his senses, he returned and searched
the room for evidence of any trickery, that might account for the
occurrence. He found none. The events, that took place in the little
Indonesian hut, are classic examples of a poltergeist haunting, a type
of haunting typified by mysterious sounds and psychokinetic activity
rather, than the appearances of ghosts or apparitions.
(This is an activity of faminine
Inorganic Beings from our Twin World! LM).
149
Because poltergeists tend to center more around people, in this case
Alin, rather than places, many parapsychologists believe they are
actually manifestations of the unconscious psychokinetic ability of the
person, around whom they are most active. Even materialization has a
long and illustrious history in the annals of poltergeist research. For
instance, in his classic work on the subject "Can We Explain the
Poltergeist" A. R. G. Owen, a fellow and lecturer in Mathematics at
Trinity College, Cambridge, gives numerous examples of objects
materializing out of thin air in poltergeist cases dating from A. D.
530 to modern times. Small stones and not salt, however, are the
objects that materialize most often. In the "Introduction" I mentioned
that I had experienced firsthand many of the paranormal phenomena that
would be discussed in this book and would relate a few of my own
experiences. It is thus time to come clean and confess that I know how
Watson must have felt after witnessing the sudden onslaught of
psychokinetic activity in the little Indonesian hut because when I was
a child, the house in which my family had recently moved (a new house
that my parents themselves had built) became the site of an active
poltergeist haunting. Since our poltergeist left my family's home and
followed me when I went away to college, and since its activity very
definitely seemed connected to my moods - its antics becoming more
malicious when I was angry or my spirits were low, and more impish and
whimsical (playful, fantastic) when my mood was brighter—I have
always accepted the idea that poltergeists are manifestations of the
unconscious psychokinetic ability of the person around whom they are
most active. This connection to my emotions displayed itself
frequently. If I was in a good mood, I might wake up to find all of my
socks draped over the house plants. If I was in a darker frame of mind,
the poltergeist might manifest by hurling a small object across the
room or occasionally even by breaking something. Over the years both I
and various family members and friends witnessed a wide range of
psychokinetic activity. My mother tells me that even when I was a
toddler pots and pans had already begun to jump inexplicably from the
middle of the kitchen table to the floor. I have written about some of
these experiences in my book "Beyond the Quantum". I do not make these
disclosures lightly. I am aware of how alien such occurrences are to
most people's experience and fully understand the skepticism with which
they will be greeted in some quarters. Nonetheless, I am compelled to
talk about them because I think it is vitally important that we try to
understand such phenomena and not just sweep them under the carpet.
150
Still it is with some trepidation that I admit that my own poltergeist
also occasionally materialized objects. The materializations started
when I was six years old, and inexplicable showers of gravel rained
down on our roof at night. Later it took to pelting me inside my home
with small polished stones and pieces of broken glass with edges worn
like the shards of drift glass one finds on the beach. On rarer
occasions it materialized other objects including coins, a necklace,
and several odder trifles. Unfortunately, I usually did not see the
actual materializations, but only witnessed their aftermath, such as
when a pile of spaghetti noodles (sans sauce) fell on my chest one day
while I was taking a nap in my New York apartment. Given that I was
alone in a room with no open windows or doors, there was no one else in
my
apartment, and there was no sign, that anyone had either cooked
spaghetti or broken in to throw spaghetti at me, I can only assume
that, for reasons unknown, the handful of cold spaghetti noodles, that
dropped out of midair and onto my chest, materialized out of nowhere.
On a few occasions, however, I did see objects actually materialize.
For example, in 1976 I was working in my study, when I happened to look
up and see a small brown object appear suddenly in midair just a few
inches below the ceiling. As soon, as it popped into existence it
zoomed down at a sharp angle and landed at my feet. When I picked it up
I saw, that it was a piece of brown drift glass, that originally might
have been used in making beer bottles. It was not quite as spectacular,
as a shower of salt lasting several seconds, but it taught me, that
such things were possible. Perhaps the most famous modern-day
materializations are those produced by Sathya Sai Baba, a
sixty-four-year-old Indian holy man living in a distant corner of the
state of Andhra Pradesh in southern India. According to numerous
eyewitnesses, Sai Baba is able to produce much more than salt and a few
stones. He plucks lockets, rings, and jewelry out of the air and passes
them out as gifts. He also materializes an endless supply of Indian
delicacies and sweets, and out of his hands pour volumes of vibuti, or
sacred ash. These events have been witnessed by literally thousands of
individuals, including both scientists and magicians, and no one has
ever detected any hint of trickery. One witness is psychologist
Erlendur Haraldsson of the University of Iceland.
151
Haraldsson has spent over ten years studying Sai Baba and has published
his findings in a recent book entitled "Modern Miracles: An
Investigative Report on Psychic Phenomena Associated with Sathya Sai
Baba". Although Haraldsson admits, that he cannot prove conclusively,
that Sai Baba's productions are not the result of deception and sleight
of hand, he offers a large amount of evidence, that strongly suggests
something supernormal is taking place. For starters, Sai Baba can
materialize specific objects on request. Once when Haraldsson was
having a conversation with him about spiritual and ethical issues, Sai
Baba said, that daily life and spiritual life should "grow together
like a double rudraksha," When Haraldsson asked, what a double
rudraksha was, neither Sai Baba, nor the interpreter knew the English
equivalent of the term. Sai Baba tried to continue with the discussion,
but Haraldsson remained insistent. "Then suddenly, with a sign of
impatience, Sai Baba closed his fist and waved his hand for a second or
two. As he opened it, he turned to me and said: 'This is it.' In his
palm was an acorn-like object. This was two rudrakshas grown together
like a twin orange or a twin apple, " says Haraldsson. When Haraldsson
indicated, that he wanted to keep the double-seed as a memento, Sai
Baba agreed, but first asked to see it again. "He enclosed the
rudraksha in both his hands, blew on it, and opened his hands toward
me. The double rudraksha was now covered, on the top and bottom, by two
golden shields held together by a short golden chain. On the top was a
golden cross with a small ruby affixed to it, and a tiny opening, so
that it could hang on a chain around the neck." Haraldsson later
discovered, that double rudrakshas were extremely rare botanical
anomalies. Several Indian botanists, he consulted, said they had never
even seen one, and when he finally found a small, malformed specimen in
a shop in Madras, the shopkeeper wanted the Indian equivalent of almost
three hundred dollars for it. A London goldsmith confirmed, that the
gold in the ornamentation had a purity of at least twenty-two carats.
Such gifts are not rare. Sai Baba frequently hands out costly rings,
jewels, and objects made of gold to the throngs, who visit him daily
and who venerate him as a saint. He also materializes vast quantities
of food, and when the various delicacies he produces fall from his
hands they are sizzling hot, so hot that people sometimes cannot even
hold them. He can make sweet syrups and fragrant oils pour from his
hands (and even his feet), and when he is finished, there is no trace
of the sticky substance on his skin. He can produce exotic objects such
as grains of rice with tiny, perfectly carved pictures of Krishna on
them, out-of-season fruits (a near impossibility in an area of the
country, that has no electricity or refrigeration), and anomalous
fruits, such as apples that, when peeled, turn out to be an apple on
one side and another fruit on the other. Equally astonishing are his
productions of sacred ash. Every time he walks among the crowds, that
visit him, prodigious amounts of it pour from his hands. He scatters it
everywhere, into offered containers and outstretched hands, over heads,
and in long serpentine trails on the ground. In a single transit of the
grounds around his ashram he can produce enough of it to fill several
drums. On one of his visits, Haraldsson, along with Dr. Karlis Osis,
the director of research for the American Society for Psychical
Research, actually saw some of the ash in the process of materializing.
As Haraldsson reports, "His palm was open and turned downwards, and he
waved his hand in a few quick, small circles. As he did, a grey
substance appeared in the air just below his palm. Dr. Osis, who sat
slightly closer, observed, that this material first appeared entirely
in the form of granules (that crumbled into ash when touched) and might
have disintegrated earlier, if Sai Baba had produced them by a sleight
of hand, that was undetectable to us." Haraldsson notes, that Sai
Baba's manifestations are not the result of mass hypnosis, because he
freely allows his open-air demonstrations to be filmed, and everything
he does still shows up in the film. Similarly, the production of
specific objects, the rarity of some of the objects, the hotness of the
food, and the sheer volume of the materializations seem to rule against
deception as a possibility. Haraldsson also points out, that noone has
ever come forth with any credible evidence, that Sai Baba is faking his
abilities. In addition, Sai Baba has been producing a continuous flow
of objects for half a century, since he was fourteen, a fact, that is
further testament to both the volume of the materializations and the
significance of his untarnished reputation. Is Sai Baba producing
objects out of nothingness? At present the jury is still out, but
Haraldsson makes it clear, what his position is. He believes Sai Baba's
demonstrations remind us of the "enormous potentials, that may lie
dormant somewhere within all human beings." Accounts of individuals,
who can materialize, are not unknown in India. In his book
Autobiography of a Yogi, Paramahansa Yogananda (1893-1952), the first
eminent holy man of India to set up permanent residence in the West,
describes his meetings with several Hindu ascetics, who could
materialize out-of-season fruits, gold plates, and other objects.
153
Interestingly, Yogananda cautioned, that such powers, or siddis, are
not always evidence, that the person, possessing them, is spiritually
evolved. "The world [is] nothing, but an objectivized dream, " says
Yogananda, and "whatever your powerful mind believes very intensely
instantly comes to pass." Have such individuals discovered a way to tap
just a little of the enormous Sea of Cosmic Energy, that Bohm says,
fills every cubic centimeter of empty space?
A remarkable series of materializations, that has received even greater
confirmation, than that bestowed by Haraldsson on Sai Baba, was
produced by Therese Neumann. In addition to her stigmata, Neumann also
displayed inedia, the supernormal ability to live without food. Her
inedia began in 1923, when she "transferred" the throat disease of a
young priest to her own body and subsisted solely on liquids for
several years. Then, in 1927, she gave up both food and water entirely.
When the local bishop in Regensburg first learned of Neumann's fast, he
sent a commission into her home to investigate. From July 14, 1927, to
July 29, 1927, and under the supervision of a medical doctor named
Seidl, four Franciscan nursing sisters scrutinized her every move. They
watched her day and night, and the water she used for
washing and rinsing her mouth was carefully measured and weighed. The
sisters discovered several unusual things about Neumann. She never went
to the bathroom (even after a period of six weeks she only had one
bowel movement, and the excrement, examined by a Dr. Reismanns,
contained only a small amount of mucus and bile, but no traces of
food). She also showed no signs of dehydration, even though the average
human expels about four hundred grams (fourteen ounces) of water daily
in the air he or she exhales, and a like amount through the pores. And
her weight remained constant; although she lost nearly nine pounds (in
blood) during the weekly opening of her stigmata, her weight returned
to normal within a day or two later. At the end of the inquiry Dr.
Seidl and the sisters were completely convinced, that Neumann had not
eaten or drunk a thing for the entire fourteen days. The test seems
conclusive, for while the human body can survive two weeks without
food, it can rarely survive half that time without water. Yet this was
nothing for Neumann; she did not eat or drink a thing for the next
thirty-five years. So it appears, that she was not only materializing
the enormous amount of blood necessary to perpetuate her stigmata, but
also regularly materializing the water and nutrients she needed to stay
alive and in good health. Inedia is not unique to Neumann. In The
Physical Phenomena of Mysticism, Thurston gives several examples of
stigmatists, who went for years without eating or drinking.
Materialization may be more common, than we realize. Compelling
accounts of bleeding statues, paintings, icons, and even rocks, that
have historical or religious significance abound in the literature on
the miraculous. There are also dozens of stories of Madonnas and other
icons shedding tears. A virtual epidemic of "weeping
Madonnas" swept Italy in 1953- 62. And in India, followers of Sai Baba
showed Haraldsson pictures of the ascetic, that were miraculously
exuding sacred ash.
Changing
the Whole Picture
In a way materialization challenges our conventional ideas about
reality most of all, for although we can, with effort, hammer things
such as PK into our current world view, the creation of an object out
of thin air rocks the very foundation of that world view. Still, it is
not all the mind can do. So far we have looked at miracles that involve
only "parts" of reality—examples of people psychokinetically
moving parts around, of people altering parts (the laws of physics) to
make themselves immune to fire, and of people materializing parts
(blood, salt, stones, jewelry, ash, nutrients, and tears). But if
reality is really an unbroken whole, why do miracles seem to involve
only parts? If miracles are examples of the mind's own latent
abilities, the answer, of course, is because we ourselves are so deeply
programmed to see the world in terms of parts. This implies that if we
were not so inculcated (to teach by constant repetition) in
thinking in terms of parts, if we viewed the world differently,
miracles would also be different. Rather than finding so many examples
of miracles in which the parts of reality had been transformed, we
would find more instances in which the whole of reality had been
transformed. In fact a few such examples exist, but they are rare and
offer an even graver challenge to our conventional ideas about reality
than materializations do. Watson provides one. While he was in
Indonesia he also encountered another young woman with power. The
woman's name was Tia, but unlike Alin's power, hers did not seem to be
an expression of an unconscious psychic gift. Instead it was
consciously controlled and stemmed from Tia's natural connection to
forces that lie dormant in most of us.
155
Tia was, in short, a shaman in the making. Watson witnessed many
examples of her gifts. He saw her perform miraculous healings, and
once, when she was engaged in a power struggle with the local Moslem
religious leader, he saw her use the power of her mind to set the
minaret of the local mosque on fire. But he witnessed one of Tia's most
awesome displays when he accidentally stumbled upon her talking with a
little girl in a shady grove of kenari trees. Even at a distance,
Watson could tell from Tia's gestures that she was trying to
communicate something important to the child. Although he could not
hear their conversation, he could tell from her air of frustration that
she was not succeeding. Finally, she appeared to get an idea and
started an eerie dance. Entranced, Watson continued to watch as she
gestured toward the trees, and although she scarcely seemed to move,
there was something hypnotic about her subtle gesticulations. Then she
did something that both shocked and dismayed Watson. She caused the
entire grove of trees suddenly to blink out of existence. As Watson
states, "One moment Tia danced in a grove of shady kenari; the next she
was standing alone in the hard, bright light of the sun." A few seconds
later she caused the grove to reappear, and from the way the little
girl leapt to her feet and rushed around touching the trees, Watson was
certain that she had shared the experience also. But Tia was not
finished. She caused the grove to blink on and off several times as
both she and the little girl linked hands, dancing and giggling at the
wonder of it all. Watson simply walked away, his head reeling.
In 1975 when I was a senior at Michigan State University, I had a
similarly profound and reality-challenging experience. I was having
dinner with one of my professors at a local restaurant, and we were
discussing the philosophical implications of Carlos Castaneda's
experiences. In particular our conversation centered around an incident
Castaneda relates in Journey to Ixtlan. Don Juan and Castaneda are in
the desert at night searching for a spirit, when they come upon a
creature, that looks like a calf, but has the ears of a wolf and the
beak of a bird. It is curled up and screaming, as if in the throes of
an agonizing death. At first Castaneda is terrified, but after telling
himself, that what he is seeing, can't possibly be real, his vision
changes and he sees, that the dying spirit is actually a fallen tree
branch, trembling in the wind. Castaneda proudly points out the thing's
true identity, but as usual, the old Yaqui shaman rebukes him. He tells
Castaneda, that the branch was a dying spirit, while it was alive
with power, but that it had transformed into a tree branch, when
Castaneda doubted its existence. However, he stresses that both
realities were equally real. In my conversation with my professor, I
admitted that I was intrigued by Don Juan's assertion that two mutually
exclusive realities could each be real and felt that the notion could
explain many paranormal events. Moments after discussing this incident
we left the restaurant and, because it was a clear summer night, we
decided to stroll. As we continued to converse I became aware of a
small group of people walking ahead of us. They were speaking an
unrecognizable foreign language, and from their boisterous behavior it
appeared that they were drunk. In addition, one of the women was
carrying a green umbrella, which was strange because the sky was
totally cloudless and there had been no forecast of rain. Not wanting
to collide with the group, we dropped back a little, and as we did, the
woman suddenly began swinging the umbrella in a wild and erratic
manner. She traced out huge arcs in the air, and several times as she
spun around, the tip of the umbrella nearly grazed us. We slowed our
pace even more, but it became increasingly apparent, that her
performance was designed to attract our attention. Finally, after she
had our gaze firmly fixed on, what she was doing, she held the umbrella
with both hands over her head and then threw it dramatically at our
feet. We both stared at it dumbly, wondering why she had done such a
thing, when suddenly something remarkable began to happen. The umbrella
did something, that I can only describe as "flickering" like a lantern
flame about to go out. It emitted an odd, crackling sound like the
sound of cellophane being crumpled, and in a dazzling array of
sparkling, multicolored light, its ends curled up, its color changed,
and it reshaped itself into a gnarled, brown-gray stick. I was so
stunned, I didn't say anything for several seconds. My professor spoke
first and said in a quiet, shocked voice, that she had thought the
object had been an umbrella. I asked her, if she had seen something
extraordinary happen and she nodded. We both wrote down, what we
thought, had transpired and our accounts matched exactly. The only
vague difference in our descriptions was, that my professor said the
umbrella had "sizzled" when it transformed into a stick, a sound not
too terribly dissimilar from the crackly sound of cellophane being
crumpled.
157
What
Does It All Mean?
This incident raises many questions, for which I have no answers. I do
not know, who the people were, who threw the umbrella at our feet, or
if they were even aware of the magical transformation, that took place
as they strolled away, although the woman's bizarre and seemingly
purposeful performance suggests, that they were not completely
unwitting. Both, my professor and I, were so transfixed by the magical
transformation of the umbrella, that by the time we had the presence of
mind to ask them, they were long gone. I do not know, why the event
happened, save that it seems obvious, it was connected in some way to
our talk about Castaneda encountering a similar occurrence. I do not
even know, why I have had the privilege of experiencing so many
paranormal occurrences, save that it appears to be related to the fact,
that I was born with a great deal of native psychic ability. As an
adolescent I started having vivid and detailed dreams about events,
that would later happen. I often knew things about people, I had no
right knowing. When I was seventeen, I spontaneously developed the
ability to see an energy field, or "aura, " around living things, and
to this day can often determine things about a person's health by their
pattern and colors of the mist of light, that I see surrounding them.
Above and beyond that, all I can say is, that we are all gifted with
different aptitudes and qualities. Some of us are natural artists. Some
dancers. I seem to have been born with the chemistry necessary to
trigger shifts in reality, to catalyze somehow the forces required to
precipitate paranormal events. I am grateful for this capacity, because
it has taught me a great deal about the universe, but I do not know,
why I have it. What I do know is, that the "umbrella incident," as I
have come to call it, entailed a radical alteration in the world. In
this chapter we have looked at miracles, that have involved
increasingly greater shifts in reality. PK is easier for us to fathom,
than the ability to pluck an object out of the air, and the
materialization of an object is easier for most of us to accept, than
the appearance and disappearance of an entire grove of trees, or the
paranormal appearance of a group of people, capable of transmogrifying
matter from one form into another. More and more these incidents
suggest, that reality is, in a very real sense, a hologram, a
construct. The question becomes: Is it a hologram, that is relatively
stable for long periods of time and subject to only minimal alterations
by consciousness, as Bohm suggests? Or is it a hologram, that only
seems stable, but under special circumstances can be changed and
reshaped in virtually limitless ways, as the evidence of the miraculous
suggests? Some researchers, who have embraced the holographic idea,
believe the latter is the case. For example, Grof not only takes
materialization and other extreme paranormal phenomena seriously, but
feels, that reality is indeed cloud-built and pliant to the subtle
authority of consciousness. "The world is not necessarily as solid, as
we perceive it, " he says.
Physicist William Tiller, head of the Department of Materials Science
at Stanford University and another supporter of the holographic idea,
agrees. Tiller thinks: reality is similar to the "holodeck" on the
television show Star Trek: The Next Generation. In the series, the
holodeck is an environment, in which occupants can call up a
holographic simulation of literally any reality they desire, a lush
forest, a bustling city. They can also change each simulation in any
way they want, such as cause a lamp to materialize or make an unwanted
table disappear. Tiller thinks the Universe is also a kind of holodeck
created by the "integration" of all living things. "We've created it as
a vehicle of experience, and we've created the Laws, that govern it, "
he asserts. "And when we get to the frontiers of our understanding, we
can in fact shift the Laws, so that we're also creating the physics, as
we go along."
If Tiller is right and the Universe is an enormous holodeck, the
ability to materialize a gold ring or cause a grove of kenari trees to
flick on and off is no longer so strange. Even the umbrella incident
can be viewed as a temporary aberration in the holographic simulation
we call ordinary reality. Although my professor and I were unaware,
that we possessed such an ability, it may be, that the emotional fervor
of our discussion about Castaneda, caused our unconscious minds to
change the hologram of reality to better reflect, what we were
believing at the moment. Given Ullman's assertion, that our psyche is
constantly trying to teach us things, we are unaware of in our waking
state, our unconscious may even be programmed to produce occasionally
such miracles, in order to offer us glimpses of reality's true nature,
to show us, that the world, we create for ourselves, is ultimately as
creatively infinite, as the reality of our dreams. Saying, that reality
is created by the integration of all living things, is really no
different from saying, that the Universe is comprised of reality fields.
159
If this is true, it explains why the reality of some subatomic
particles, such as electrons, seems relatively fixed, while the reality
of others, such as anomalons, appears to be more plastic. It may be
that the reality fields we now perceive as electrons became part of the
cosmic hologram long ago, perhaps long before human beings were even
part of the integration of all things. Hence, electrons may be so
deeply ingrained in the hologram they are no longer as susceptible to
the influence of human consciousness as other newer reality fields.
Similarly, anomalons may vary from lab to lab because they are more
recent reality fields and are still inchoate (immature), still
floundering around in search of an identity, as it were. In a sense,
they are like the champagne beach Tart's subjects perceived while it
was still in its gray state and had not yet fully coalesced out of the
implicate. This may also explain why aspirin helps prevent heart
attacks in Americans, but not in the British. It, too, may be a
relatively recent reality field and one that is still in the making.
There is even evidence that the ability to materialize blood is a
comparatively recent reality field. Rogo notes that accounts of blood
miracles began with the fourteenth-century miracle of San Gennaro. The
fact that no blood miracles are known to predate San Gennaro seems to
indicate that the ability flickered into existence at that time. Once
it was thus established it would be easier for others to tap into the
reality field of its possibility, which may explain why there have been
numerous blood miracles since San Gennaro, but none before. Indeed, if
the universe is a holodeck, all things that appear stable and eternal,
from the laws of physics to the substance of galaxies, would have to be
viewed as reality fields, will-or-the-wisps no more or less real than
the props in a giant, mutually shared dream. All permanence would have
to be looked at as illusory, and only consciousness would be eternal,
the consciousness of the living universe. Of course, there is one other
possibility. It may be that only anomalous events, such as the umbrella
incident, are reality fields, and the world at large is still every bit
as stable and unaffected by consciousness as we have been taught to
believe. The problem with this assumption is that it can never be
proved. The only litmus test we have of determining whether something
is real, say a purple elephant that has just strolled into our living
room, is to find out if other people can see it as well. But once we
admit that two or more people can create a reality—whether it is
a transforming umbrella or a vanishing grove of kenari trees—we
no longer have any way of proving that every thing else in the world is
not created by the mind. It all boils down to a matter of personal
philosophy. And personal philosophies vary. Jahn prefers to think that
only the reality created by the interactions of consciousness are real.
"The question of whether there's an 'out there' out there is abstract.
If we have no way of verifying the abstraction, there is no profit in
attempting to model it, " he says. Globus, who willingly admits that
reality is a construct of consciousness, prefers to think that there is
a world beyond the bubble of our perceptions. "I'm interested in nice
theories," he says," and a nice theory postulates existence." However,
he admits that this is merely his bias, and there is no empirical way
to prove such an assumption. As for me, as a result of my own
experiences I agree with Don Juan, when he states:
"We
are perceivers. We are an awareness; we are not objects; we have no
solidity. We are boundless. The world of objects and solidity is a way
of making our passage on earth convenient. It is only a description,
that was created to help us. We, or rather our reason, forget, that the
description is only a description and thus we entrap the totality of
ourselves in a vicious circle, from which we rarely emerge in our
lifetime."
Put another way, there is no reality above and beyond that created by
the integration of all consciousnesses, and the holographic universe
can potentially be sculpted in virtually limitless ways by the mind. If
this is true, the laws of physics and the substance of galaxies are not
the only things that are reality fields. Even our bodies, the vehicles
of our consciousness in this life, would have to be looked upon as no
more or less real than anomalous and champagne beaches. Or as Keith
Floyd, a psychologist at Virginia Interment College and another
supporter of the holographic idea, states, "Contrary to what everyone
knows is so, it may not be the brain that produces consciousness, but
rather consciousness that creates the appearance of the
brain—matter, space, time and everything else we are pleased to
interpret as the physical universe." This is perhaps most disturbing of
all, for we are so deeply convinced that our bodies are solid and
objectively real it is difficult for us even to entertain the idea that
we, too, maybe no more than will-or- the-wisps. But there is compelling
evidence that this is also the case. Another phenomenon often
associated with saints is bilocation, or the ability to be in two
places at once. According to Haraldsson, Sai Baba does biolocation one
better.
161
Numerous witnesses have reported watching him snap his fingers and
vanish, instantly reappearing a hundred or more yards away. Such
incidents very much suggest that our bodies are not objects, but
holographic projections that can blink "off" in one location and "on"
in another with the same ease that an image might vanish and reappear
on a video screen. An incident that further underscores the holographic
and immaterial nature of the body can be found in phenomena produced by
an Icelandic medium named Indridi Indridason. In 1905 several of
Iceland's leading scientists decided to investigate the paranormal and
chose Indridason as one of their subjects. At the time, Indridason was
just a country bumpkin with no previous experience with things psychic,
but he quickly proved to be a spectacularly talented medium. He could
go into trance quickly and produce dramatic displays of PK. But most
bizarre of all, sometimes while he was deep in trance, different parts
of his body would completely dematerialize. As the astonished
scientists watched, an arm or a hand would fade out of existence, only
to rematerialize before he awakened. Such events again offer us a
tantalizing glimpse of the enormous potentialities that may lie dormant
in all of us. As we have seen, our current scientific understanding of
the universe is completely incapable of explaining the various
phenomena we have examined in this chapter and therefore has no choice
but to ignore them. However, if researchers such as Grof and Tiller are
correct and the mind is able to intercede in the implicate order, the
holographic plate that gives birth to the hologram we call the
universe, and thus create any reality or laws of physics that it wants
to, then not only are such things possible, but virtually anything is
possible. If this is true, the apparent solidity of the world is only a
small part of what is available to our perception. Although most of us
are indeed entrapped in our current description of the universe, a few
individuals do have the ability to see beyond the world's solidity. In
the next chapter we will take a look at some of these individuals and
examine what they see.
Seeing
Holographically
We human beings consider ourselves to be made up of "solid matter."
Actually, the physical body is the end product, so to speak, of the
subtle information fields, which mold our physical body as well as all
physical matter. These fields are holograms which change in time (and
are) outside the reach of our normal senses. This is what clairvoyants
perceive as colorful eggshaped halos or auras surrounding our physical
bodies. —Itzhak Bentov "Stalking the Wild Pendulum".
A number of years ago I was walking along with a friend, when a street
sign caught my attention. It was simply a No Parking sign and seemed no
different from any of the other No Parking signs, that dotted the city
streets. But for some reason it held me transfixed. I wasn't even
aware, that I was staring at it until my friend suddenly exclaimed,
"That sign is misspelled!" Her announcement snapped me out of my
reverie, and as I watched, the i in the word Parking quickly changed
into an e. What happened was, that my mind was so accustomed to seeing
the sign spelled correctly, that my unconscious edited out what was
there, and made me see, what it expected to be there. My friend, as it
turned out, had also seen the sign spelled correctly at first, which
was why she had such a vocal reaction, when she realized it was
misspelled. We continued to walk on, but the incident bothered me. For
the first time I realized, that the eye/brain is not a faithful camera,
but tinkers with the world, before it gives it to us.
Neurophysiologists have long been aware of this fact. In his early
studies of vision, Pribram discovered, that the visual information a
monkey receives via its optic nerves, does not travel directly into its
visual cortex, but is first filtered through other areas of its brain.
Numerous studies have shown, that the same is true of human vision.
Visual information, entering our brains, is edited and modified by our
temporal lobes, before it is passed on to our visual cortices. Some
studies suggest, that less, than 50 percent of what we "see", is
actually based on information entering our eyes. The remaining 50
percent plus is pieced together out of our expectations of what the
world should look like (and perhaps out of other sources such as
reality fields). The eyes may be visual organs, but it is the brain,
that sees. This is why we don't always notice, when a close friend
shaves off his mustache, and why our house always looks strangely
different, when we return to it after a vacation. In both instances we
are so used to responding, to what we think is there, we don't always
see, what really is there. Even more dramatic evidence of the role the
mind plays in creating, what we see, is provided by the eye's so-called
Blind Spot. In the middle of the retina, where the optic nerve connects
to the eye, we have a Blind Spot, where there are no photoreceptors.
Even when we look at the world around us, we are totally unaware, that
there are Gaping Holes in our vision. The brain artfully fills in the
gaps like a skilled tailor reweaving a Hole in a piece of fabric. What
is all the more remarkable is, that it reweaves the tapestry of our
visual reality so masterfully, we aren't even aware, that it is doing
so. This leads to a disturbing question. If we are seeing less, than
half of what is out there, what is out there, that we are not seeing?
It doesn't matter whether we are gazing at a blank piece of paper or an
ornate Persian carpet. What misspelled street signs and blind spots are
escaping our attention completely? Our technological prowess provides
us with a few answers. For example, although spiderwebs look drab and
white to us, we now know, that to the ultraviolet-sensitive eyes of the
insects, for whom they were designed, they are actually brightly
colored and hence alluring. To demonstrate, how our brains construct
what we perceive as reality, hold the illustration at eye level, close
your left eye, and stare at the circle in the middle of the grid with
your right eye. Slowly move the book back and forth along the line of
your vision, until the star vanishes (about 10 to 15 inches). The star
disappears, because it is falling on your blind spot. Now close your
right eye and stare at the star. Move the book back and forth, until
the circle in the middle of the grid vanishes. When it does, notice
that although the circle disappears, all the lines of the grid remain
intact. This is because your brain is filling in what it thinks should
be there. Our technology also tells us that fluorescent lamps do not
continuously provide light, but are actually flickering on and off at a
rate that is just a little too fast for us to discern. Yet this
unsettling strobelike effect is quite visible to honeybees, who must be
able to fly at breakneck speed over a meadow and still see every flower
that whizzes by. But are there other important aspects of reality that
we are not seeing, aspects that are beyond even our technological
grasp? According to the holographic model, the answer is yes. Remember
that in Pribram's view, reality at large is really a frequency domain,
and our brain is a kind of lens that converts these frequencies into
the objective world of appearances. Although Pribram began by studying
the frequencies of our normal sensory world, such as frequencies of
sound and light, he now uses the term frequency domain to refer to the
interference patterns, that compose the implicate order. Pribram
believes, there may be all kinds of things out there in the frequency
domain, that we are not seeing, things our brains have learned to edit
out regularly of our visual reality.
165
He thinks, that when mystics have transcendental experiences, what they
are really doing is catching glimpses of the frequency domain.
"Mystical experience makes sense, when one can provide the mathematical
formulas, that take one back and forth between the ordinary world, or
'image-object' domain, and the 'frequency' domain, " he states.
The Human Energy Field
In India, sacred writings, that date back over five thousand years
refer to this Life Energy as Prana. In China, since the third
millennium B. C., it has been called ch'i and is believed to be White
Energy (it's true Sun Energy!
LM), that flows through the acupuncture meridian
system... One Mystical Phenomenon, that appears to involve the ability
to see reality's frequency aspects is the Aura, or Human Energy Field.
The notion, that there is a subtle field of energy around the human
body, a halolike envelope of Light, that exists just beyond normal
human perception, can be found in many ancient traditions. In their
book Future Science, writer John White and parapsychologist Stanley
Krippner list 97 different cultures, that refer to the Aura with 97
different names. Many cultures believe the aura of an extremely
spiritual individual is so bright it is visible even to normal human
perception, which is why so many traditions, including Christian,
Chinese, Japanese, Tibetan, and Egyptian, depict saints as having halos
or other circular symbols around their heads. In his book on miracles
Thurston devotes an entire chapter to accounts of Luminous Phenomena
associated with Catholic saints, and both Neumann and Sai Baba are
reported to have occasionally had visible Auras of Light around
them.The great Sufi mystic Hazrat Inayat Khan, who died in 1927, is
said to have sometimes given off so much light, that people could
actually read by it. Under normal circumstances, however, the Human
Energy Field is visible only to individuals, who have a specially
developed capacity to see it. Sometimes people are born with the
ability. Sometimes it develops spontaneously at a certain point in a
person's life, as it did in my case, and sometimes it develops as the
result of some practice or discipline, often of a spiritual nature. The
first time I saw the distinctive mist of light around my arm I thought
it was smoke and jerked my arm up to see, if I had somehow caught my
sleeve on fire. Of course, I hadn't and quickly discovered that the
light surrounded my entire body and formed a nimbus (luminous mist,
cloud) around everyone else's as well. According to some schools of
thought the human energy field has a number of distinct layers. I do
not see layers in the field and have no personal basis to judge if this
is true or not. These layers are actually said to be three-dimensional
energy bodies that occupy the same space as the physical body but are
of increasingly larger size so that they only look like layers, or
strata, as they extend outward from the body. Many psychics assert that
there are seven main layers, or subtle bodies, each progressively less
dense than the one before it, and each increasingly more difficult to
see. Different schools of thought refer to these energy bodies by
different names. One common system of nomenclature refers to the first
four as the etheric body; the astral, or emotional body; the mental
body, and the causal, or intuitive body. It is generally believed that
the etheric body, the body that is closest in size to the physical
body, is a kind of energy blueprint and is involved in guiding and
shaping the growth of the physical body. As their names suggest, the
next three bodies are related to emotional, mental, and intuitive
processes. Virtually no one agrees on what to call the remaining three
bodies, although it is commonly agreed that they have to do with the
soul and higher spiritual functioning. According to Indian yogic
literature, and to many psychics as well, we also have special energy
centers in our body. These focal points of subtle energy are connected
to endocrine glands and major nerve centers in the physical body, but
also extend up and into the energy field. Because they resemble
spinning vortices of energy when they are looked at head-on, yogic
literature refers to them as chakras, from the Sanskrit word for
"wheel, " and this term is still used today. The Crown Chakra, an
important Chakra, that originates in the uppermost tip of the brain and
is associated with spiritual awakening, is often described by
clairvoyants, as looking like a little cyclone whirling in the energy
field on top of the head, and it is the only chakra I see clearly (my
own abilities appear to be too rudimentary to permit me to see the
other chakras). It ranges from a few inches to a foot or more in
height. When people are in a joyous state, this whirlwind of energy
grows taller and brighter, and when they dance, it bobs and sways like
a candle flame...
167
The human energy field is not always bluish white, but can possess
various colors. According to talented psychics, these colors, their
muddiness or intensity, and their location in the aura are related to a
person's mental state, emotional state, activity, health, and assorted
other factors. I can only see colors occasionally and sometimes can
interpret their meaning, but again my abilities in this area are not
terribly advanced. One person, who does have advanced abilities is
therapist and healer Barbara Brennan. Brennan began her career as an
atmospherics physicist working for NASA at the Goddard Space Flight
Center, and later left to become a counselor. Her first inkling that
she was psychic came when she was a child and discovered she could walk
blindfolded through the woods and avoid the trees simply by sensing
their energy fields with her hands. Several years after she became a
counselor, she began seeing halos of colored light around people's
heads. After overcoming her initial shock and skepticism, she set about
to develop the ability and eventually discovered she had an
extraordinary natural talent as a healer. Brennan not only sees the
chakras, layers, and other fine structures of the human energy field
with exceptional clarity, but can make startlingly accurate medical
diagnoses based on what she sees. After looking at one Woman's Energy
Field, Brennan told her there was something abnormal about her uterus.
The woman then told Brennan that her doctor had discovered the same
problem, and it had already caused her to have one miscarriage. In
fact, several physicians had recommended a hysterectomy and that was
why she was seeking Brennan's counsel. Brennan told her that if she
took a month off and took care of herself, her problem would clear up.
Brennan's advice turned out to be correct, and a month later the
woman's physician confirmed, that her uterus had returned to normal. A
year later the woman gave birth to a healthy baby boy. In another case
Brennan was able to see that a man had problems performing sexually,
because he had broken his coccyx (tailbone) when he was twelve. The
still out-of-place coccyx was applying undue pressure to his spinal
column, and this in turn was causing his sexual dysfunction. There
seems to be little Brennan cannot pick up by looking at the Human
Energy Field. She says that in its early stages cancer looks gray-blue
in the Aura, and as it progresses, it turns to black. Eventually, white
spots appear in the black, and, if the white spots sparkle and begin to
look as if they are erupting from a volcano, it means the cancer has
metastasized. Drugs such as alcohol, marijuana, and cocaine are also
detrimental to the brilliant, healthy colors of the Aura and create
what Brennan calls "etheric mucus." In one instance she was able to
tell a startled client which, nostril he habitually used to snort
cocaine, because the Field over that side of his face was always gray
with the sticky etheric mucus. Prescription drugs are not exempt, and
often cause dark areas to form in the Energy Field over the liver.
Potent drugs such as chemotherapy "clog" the entire Field, and Brennan
says she has even seen auric traces of the supposedly harmless
radiopaque dye used to diagnose spinal injuries, a full ten years after
it has been injected into a person's spine. According to Brennan, a
person's psychological condition is also reflected in their energy
field. An individual with psychopathic tendencies has a top-heavy Aura.
The Energy Field of a masochistic personality is coarse and dense
and is more gray, than blue. The field of a person with a rigid
approach to life is also coarse and grayish, but with most of its
energy concentrated on the outer edge of the Aura, and so on. Brennan
says that illness can actually be caused by tears, blockages, and
imbalances in the Aura, and by manipulating these dysfunctional areas
with her hands and her own energy field, she can greatly enhance a
person's own healing processes. Her talents have not gone unnoticed.
Swiss psychiatrist and thanatologist Elisabeth Kubler- Ross says
Brennan is "probably one of the best spiritual healers in the Western
Hemisphere." Bernie Siegel is equally laudatory: "Barbara Brennan's
work is mind opening. Her concepts of the role disease plays and how
healing is achieved certainly fit in with my experience." As a
physicist, Brennan is keenly interested in describing the human energy
field in scientific terms and believes Pribram's assertion that there
is a frequency domain beyond our field of normal perception is the best
scientific model we have so far for understanding the phenomenon.
"From the point of view of the Holographic Universe, these events [the
Aura and the healing forces required to manipulate its energies] emerge
from frequencies that transcend Time and Space; they don't have to be
transmitted. They are potentially simultaneous and everywhere, " she
says.
169
That the Human Energy Field exists everywhere and is nonlocal, until it
is plucked out of the frequency domain by human perception, is
evidenced in Brennan's discovery, that she can read a Person's Aura,
even when the person is many miles distant. The longest-distance Aura
reading, she has done so far, was during a telephone conversation
between New York City and Italy. She discusses this, as well as many
other aspects of her remarkable abilities, in her recent and
fascinating book "Hands of Light."
The
Energy Field of the Human
PsycheAnother gifted psychic who
can see the aura in great detail is Los Angeles-based "human energy
field consultant" Carol Dryer. Dryer says she has been able to see
auras for as long as she can remember, and indeed it was quite some
time before she realized other people couldn't see auras. Her ignorance
in this regard frequently landed her in trouble as a child when she
would tell her parents intimate details about their friends, things she
had no apparent way of knowing. Dryer makes her living as a psychic,
and in the past decade and a half has seen over five thousand clients.
She is well known in the media because her client list includes many
celebrities such as Tina Turner, Madonna, Rosanna Arquette, Judy
Collins, Valerie Harper, and Linda Gray. But even the star power of her
client list does not begin to convey the true extent of her talent. For
instance, Dryer's client list also includes physicists, noted
journalists, archaeologists, lawyers, and politicians, and she has used
her abilities to assist the police and frequently does consultation
work for psychologists, psychiatrists, and medical doctors. Like
Brennan, Dryer can give long-distance readings, but prefers to be in
the same room with the person. She can also see a person's energy field
as well with her eyes closed as she can with her eyes open. In fact,
she generally keeps her eyes closed during a reading to help her
concentrate solely on the energy field. This does not mean that she
sees the aura only in her mind's eye. "It's always in front of me as if
I'm looking at a movie or a play, " says Dryer. "It's as real as the
room I'm sitting in. Actually,
it's more real and more brightly colored." However, she does not see
the precise stratified layers described by other clairvoyants, and she
often doesn't even see the outline of the physical body. "A person's
physical body can come into it, but rarely, because that's seeing the
etheric body, rather than seeing the Aura or the Energy Field around
them. If I'm seeing the etheric, it's usually because it contains leaks
or rips that are keeping the Aura from being whole. Thus I cannot see
it completely. There are only patches of it. It's kind of like a ripped
blanket or a torn curtain. Holes in the etheric field are usually the
result of trauma, injury, illness, or some other
kind of devastating experience. "But beyond seeing the etheric, Dryer
says that instead of seeing the layers of the Aura, like tiers of cake,
piled one on top
of the other, she experiences them as changing textures and intensities
of visual sensation. She compares this to being immersed in the ocean
and feeling water of different temperatures wash by." Rather than
getting into rigid concepts like layers, I tend to see the energy field
in terms of Movements and Waves of Energy, "she says." It's as if my
vision is telescoping through various levels and dimensions of the
Energy Field, but I don't actually see it neatly arranged in various
layers."
This does not mean that Dryer's perception of the Human Energy Field is
in any way less detailed than Brennan's. She perceives a dazzling
amount of pattern and structure—kaleidoscopic clouds of color,
shot through with light, complex images, glistening shapes, and
gossamer mists. However, not all Energy Fields are created equal.
According to Dryer, shallow people have shallow and humdrum (dull)
Auras. Conversely, the more complex the person, the more complex and
interesting their Energy Field. "A Person's Energy Field is as
individual as their fingerprint, I've never really seen any two that
look alike," she says. Like Brennan, Dryer can diagnose illnesses by
looking at a Person's Aura, and when she chooses, she can adjust her
vision and see the chakras. But Dryer's special skill is the ability to
peer deep into a person's psyche and give them an eerily accurate
status report of the weaknesses, strengths, needs, and general health
of their emotional, psychological, and spiritual being. So profound are
her talents in this area that some have likened a session with Dryer to
six months of psychotherapy. Numerous clients have credited her with
completely transforming their lives, and her files are filled with
glowing letters of thanks. I, too, can attest to Dryer's abilities. In
my first reading with her, and although we were virtual strangers, she
proceeded to describe things about me, that not even my closest
friends know. These were not just vague platitudes, but specific and
detailed assessments of my talents, vulnerabilities, and personality
dynamics. By the end of the two-hour session I was convinced, that
Dryer had not been looking at my physical presence, but at the Energy
Construct of my psyche itself. I have also had the privilege of talking
with and/or listening to the session recordings of over two dozen of
Dryer's clients, and have discovered that, almost without exception,
others have found her as accurate and insightful, as did I.
Doctors,
Who See the Human Energy Field
Although the existence of the
Human Energy Field is not recognized by the medical orthodox community,
it has not been completely ignored by medical practitioners. One
medical professional, who takes the energy field seriously, is
neurologist and psychiatrist Shafica Karagulla. Karagulla received her
degree of doctor of medicine and surgery from the American University
of Beirut, Lebanon, and obtained her training in psychiatry under the
well-known psychiatrist Professor Sir David K. Henderson, at the Royal
Edinburgh Hospital for Mental and Nervous Disorders. She also spent
three and a half years as a research associate to Wilder Penfield, the
Canadian neurosurgeon whose landmark studies of memory launched both
Lashley and Pribram on their quest. Karagulla began as a skeptic, but
after encountering several individuals, who could see Auras, and
confirming their ability to make accurate medical diagnoses as a result
of what they saw, she became a believer.
Karagulla calls the faculty to see the Human Energy Field higher sense
perception, or HSP, and in the 1960s she set out to determine if any
members of the medical profession also possessed the ability. She put
out various feelers among her friends and colleagues, but at first the
going was slow. Even doctors who were said to have the ability were
reluctant to meet with her. After being put off repeatedly by one such
doctor, she finally made an appointment to see him as a patient. She
entered his office, but instead of allowing him to perform a physical
examination to diagnose her condition, she challenged him to use his
higher sense perception. Realizing he was cornered, he gave in. "All
right, stay where you are, " he told her. "Don't tell me anything. "
Then he scanned her body and gave her a quick run-down of her health,
including a description of an internal condition she had that would
eventually require surgery, a condition she had secretly already
diagnosed. He was "correct in every detail, " says Karagulla. As
Karagulla's network of contacts expanded, she met doctor after doctor
with similar gifts and describes these encounters in her book
"Breakthrough to Creativity". Most of these physicians were unaware,
that other individuals existed, who possessed similar talents, and felt
they were alone and peculiar in this regard. Nonetheless, they
invariably described what they were seeing, as an "Energy Field" or a
"Moving Web of Frequencies" around the body and interpenetrating the
body. Some saw chakras, but because they were ignorant of the term,
they described them as "vortices of energy at certain points along the
spine, connected with or influencing the endocrine system." And almost
without exception they kept their abilities a secret out of fear of
damaging their professional reputations. Out of respect for their
privacy, Karagulla identifies them in her book by first name only but
says they include famous surgeons, Cornell University professors of
medicine, heads of departments in large hospitals, and Mayo Clinic
physicians." I was continually surprised to find how many members of
the medical profession had HSP abilities, " she writes. "Most of them
felt a little uneasy about their gifts, but finding them useful in
diagnosis, they used them. They came from many parts of the country,
and although they were unknown to each other, they all reported similar
types of experiences. " At the end of her report, she concludes, "When
many reliable individuals independently report the same kind of
phenomena, it is time science takes cognizance of it." Not all health
professionals are so opposed to going public with their abilities. One
such individual is Dr. Dolores Krieger, a professor of nursing at New
York University. Krieger became interested in the human energy field
after participating in a study of the abilities of Oscar Estebany, a
well-known Hungarian healer. After discovering that Estebany could
raise the hemoglobin levels in ill patients simply by manipulating
their fields, Krieger set out to learn more about the mysterious
energies involved. She immersed herself in a study of prana, the
chakras, and the aura, and eventually became a student of Dora Kunz,
another well-known clairvoyant. Under Kunz's guidance, she learned how
to feel blockages in the human energy field and to heal by manipulating
the field with her hands.
173
Realizing the enormous medical potential of Kunz's techniques, Krieger
decided to teach what she had learned to others. Because she knew terms
such as aura and chakra would have negative connotations for many
health-care professionals, she decided to call her healing method
"therapeutic touch. " The first class she taught on therapeutic touch
was a master's level course for nurses at New York University entitled
"Frontiers in Nursing: The Actualization of Potential for Therapeutic
Field Interaction. " Both the course and the technique proved so
successful that Krieger has since taught therapeutic touch to literally
thousands of nurses, and it is now used in hospitals around the world.
The effectiveness of therapeutic touch has also been demonstrated in
several studies. For example, Dr. Janet Quinn, an associate professor
and assistant director of nursing research at the University of South
Carolina at Columbia, decided to see if therapeutic touch could lower
the anxiety levels of heart patients. To accomplish this she devised a
double-blind study in which one group of nurses trained in the
technique would pass their hands over a group of heart patients'
bodies. A second group with no training would pass their hands over the
bodies of another group of heart patients, but without actually
performing the technique. Quinn found that the anxiety levels in the
authentically treated patients dropped 17 percent after only five
minutes of therapy, but there was no change in anxiety levels among the
patients who received the "fake" treatment. Quinn's study was them lead
story in the Science Times section of the March 26, 1985, issue of the
New York Times.
Another health professional, who lectures widely about the human energy
field, is University of Southern California heart and lung specialist
W. Brugh Joy. Joy, who is a graduate of both Johns Hopkins and the Mayo
Clinic, discovered his gift, in 1972, while examining a patient in his
office. Instead of seeing the aura, Joy initially was only able to feel
its presence with his hands. "I was examining a healthy male in his
early twenties, " he says. "As my hand passed over the solar plexus
area, the pit of the stomach, I sensed something, that felt like a warm
cloud. It seemed to radiate out three to four feet from the body,
perpendicular to the surface and to be shaped like a cylinder about
four inches in diameter." Joy went on to discover, that all his
patients had palpable cylinderlike radiations, emanating not only from
their stomachs, but from various other points on their bodies. It
wasn't, until he read an ancient Hindu book about the human energy
system, that he found, he had discovered, or rather rediscovered, the
chakras. Like Brennan, Joy thinks the holographic model offers the best
explanation for understanding the human energy field. He also feels,
that the ability to see Auras is latent in all of us." I believe, that
reaching expanded states of consciousness is merely the attuning of our
central nervous system to perceptive states, that have always existed
in us, but have been blocked by our outer mental conditioning," says
Joy. To prove his point, Joy now spends most of his time teaching
others, how to sense the human energy field. One of Joy's students is
Michael Crichton, the author of such bestsellers as "The Andromeda
Strain and Sphere", and the director of the motion pictures Coma and
The First Great Train Robbery. In his recent bestselling autobiography
Travels, Crichton, who obtained his medical degree from the Harvard
University Medical School, describes how he learned to feel and
eventually, see the human energy field by studying under both Joy and
other gifted teachers. The experience astonished and transformed
Crichton. "There isn't any delusion. It is absolutely clear, that this
body energy is a genuine phenomenon of some kind," he states.
Chaos
Holographic Patterns
The increasing willingness of
doctors to go public with such abilities is not the only change that
has taken place since Karagulla did her investigations. Over the past
twenty years Valerie Hunt, a physical therapist and professor of
kinesiology at UCLA, has developed a way to confirm experimentally the
existence of the human energy field. Medical science has long known
that humans are electromagnetic beings. Doctors routinely use
electrocardiographs to make electrocardiograms (EKGs) or records, of
the electrical activity of the heart, and electroencephalographs to
make electroencephalograms (EEGs) of the brain's electrical activity.
Hunt has discovered that an electromyograph, a device used to measure
the electrical activity in the muscles, can also pick up the electrical
presence of the human energy field. Although Hunt's original research
involved the study of human muscular movement, she became interested in
the energy field after encountering a dancer who said she used her own
energy field to help her dance.
175
This inspired Hunt to make electromyograms (EMGs) of the electrical
activity in the woman's muscles while she danced, and also to study the
effect healers had on the electrical activity in the muscles of people
being healed. Her research eventually expanded to include individuals
who could see the human energy field, and it was here that she made
some of her most significant discoveries. The normal frequency range of
the electrical activity in the brain is between 0 and 100 cycles per
second (cps), with most of the activity occurring between 0 and 30 cps.
Muscle frequency goes up to about 225 cps, and the heart goes up to
about 250 cps, but this is where electrical activity associated with
biological function drops off. In addition to these, Hunt discovered
that the electrodes of the electromyograph could pick up another field
of energy radiating from the body, much subtler and smaller in
amplitude than the traditionally recognized body electricities but with
frequencies that averaged between 100 and 1600 cps, and which sometimes
went even higher. Moreover, instead of emanating from the brain, heart,
or muscles, the field was strongest in the areas of the body associated
with the chakras. "The results were so exciting that I simply was not
able to sleep that night, " says Hunt. "The scientific model I had
subscribed to throughout my life just couldn't explain these findings."
Hunt also discovered that when an aura reader saw a particular color in
a person's energy field, the electromyograph always picked up a
specific pattern of frequencies that Hunt learned to associate with
that color. She was able to see this pattern on an oscilloscope, a
device, that converts electrical waves into a visual pattern on a
monochromatic video display screen. For example, when an aura reader
saw blue in a person's energy field, Hunt could confirm that it was
blue by looking at the pattern on the oscilloscope. In one experiment
she even tested eight aura readers simultaneously to see, if they would
agree with the oscilloscope as well, as with each other. "It was the
same right down the line," says Hunt. Once Hunt confirmed the existence
of the human energy field, she, too, became convinced, that the
holographic idea offers one model for understanding it. In addition to
its frequency aspects, she points out that the energy field, and indeed
all of the body's electrical systems, is holographic in another way.
Like the information in a Hologram, these systems are distributed
globally throughout the body. For instance, the electrical activity
measured by an electro- encephalograph is strongest in the brain, but
an EEC reading can also be made by attaching an electrode to the toe.
Similarly, an EKG can be picked up in the little finger. It's stronger
and higher in amplitude in the heart, but its frequency and pattern are
the same everywhere in the body. Hunt believes this is significant.
Although every portion of what she calls the "holographic field
reality" of the Aura contains aspects of the whole energy field,
different portions are not absolutely identical to each other. These
differing amplitudes keep the energy field from being a static
hologram, and instead allow it to be dynamic and flowing, says Hunt.
One of Hunt's most startling findings is that certain talents and
abilities seem to be related to the presence of specific frequencies in
a person's energy field. She has found, that when the main focus of a
person's consciousness is on the material world, the frequencies of
their energy field tend to be in the lower range and are not too far
removed from the 250 cps of the body's biological frequencies. In
addition to these, people who are psychic or who have healing abilities
also have frequencies of roughly 400 to 800 cps in their field. People
who can go into trance and apparently channel other information sources
through them, skip these "psychic" frequencies entirely and operate in
a narrow band between 800 and 900 cps. "They don't have any psychic
breadth at all, " states Hunt. "They're up there in their own field.
It's narrow. It's pinpointed, and they literally are almost out of it."
People, who have frequencies above 900 cps are what Hunt calls mystical
personalities. Whereas psychics and trance mediums are often just
conduits of information, mystics possess the wisdom to know, what to do
with the information, says Hunt. They are aware of the cosmic
interrelatedness of all things and are in touch with every level of
human experience. They are anchored in ordinary reality, but often have
both psychic and trance abilities. However, their frequencies also
extend way beyond the bands associated with these capabilities. Using a
modified electromyogram (an electromyogram can normally detect
frequencies only up to 20, 000 cps) Valerie Hunt has encountered
individuals, who have frequencies as high as 200,000 cps in their
energy fields. This is intriguing, for mystical traditions have often
referred to highly spiritual individuals, as possessing a "higher
vibration", than normal people. If Hunt's findings are correct, they
seem to add credence to this assertion. Another of Hunt's discoveries
involves the New Science of Chaos. As its name implies, chaos is the
study of chaotic phenomena, i. e., processes that are so haphazard they
do not appear to be governed by any laws.
177
For example, when smoke rises from an extinguished candle it flows
upward in a thin and narrow stream. Eventually the structure of the
stream breaks down and becomes turbulent. Turbulent smoke is said to be
chaotic because its behavior can no longer be predicted by science.
Other examples of chaotic phenomena include water when it crashes at
the bottom of a waterfall, the seemingly random electrical fluctuations
that rage through the brain of an epileptic during a seizure, and the
weather when several different temperature and airpressure fronts
collide. In the past decade science has discovered that many Chaotic
Phenomena are not as disordered, as they seem, and often contain hidden
Patterns and Regularities (recall Bohm's assertion, that there is no
such thing as Disorder, only Orders of indefinitely high degree).
Scientists have also discovered mathematical ways of finding some of
the regularities that lie hidden in chaotic phenomena. One of these
involves a special kind of mathematical analysis that can convert data
about a chaotic phenomenon into a shape on a computer screen. If the
data contains no hidden patterns, the resulting shape will be a
straight line. But if the chaotic phenomenon does contain hidden
regularities, the shape on the computer screen will look something like
the spiral designs children make by winding colored yarn around an
array of nails pounded into a board. These shapes are called "chaos
patterns" or "strange attractors" (because the lines that compose the
shape seem to be attracted again and again to certain areas of the
computer screen, just as the yarn might be said to be repeatedly
"attracted" to the array of nails around which it is wound). When Hunt
observed energy field data on the oscilloscope, she noticed that it
changed constantly. Sometimes it came in great clumps, sometimes it
waned and became patchy, as if the energy field itself were in an
unceasing state of fluctuation. At first glance these changes seemed
random, but Hunt sensed intuitively they possessed some order.
Realizing that chaos analysis might reveal whether she was right or
not, she sought out a mathematician. First they ran four seconds of
data from an EKG through the computer to see what would happen. They
got a straight line. Then they ran the same amount of data from an EEC
and an EMG. The EEC produced a straight line and the EMG produced a
slightly swollen line, but still no chaos pattern. Even when they
submitted data from the lower frequencies of the human energy field,
they got a straight line. But when they analyzed the very high
frequencies of the field they met with success. "We got the most
dynamic chaos pattern you ever saw, " says Hunt." This meant that
although the kaleidoscopic changes taking place in the energy field
appeared to be random, they were actually very highly ordered and rich
with pattern.
"The pattern is never a repeatable one, but it's so dynamic and
complex, I call it a Chaos Holograph Pattern," Hunt states. Hunt
believes her discovery was the first true Chaos Pattern to be found in
a major electrobiological system. Recently researchers have found Chaos
Patterns in EEC recordings of the brain, but they needed many minutes
of data from numerous electrodes to obtain such a pattern. Hunt
obtained a Chaos pattern from three to four seconds of data recorded by
one electrode, suggesting that the human energy field is far richer in
information and possesses a far more complex and dynamic organization
than even the electrical activity of the brain.
What
Is the Human Energy Field Made Of?
Despite the human energy field's
electrical aspects, Hunt does not believe it is purely electromagnetic
in nature.
"We have a feeling, that it is much more complex and without doubt
composed of an as yet undiscovered energy, " she says. What is this
undiscovered energy?
At present we do not know. Our best clue comes from the fact that
almost without exception psychics describe it as having a higher
frequency or vibration than normal matter-energy. Given the uncanny
accuracy talented psychics have in perceiving illnesses in the energy
field, we should perhaps pay serious attention to this observation. The
universality of this perception even ancient Hindu literature asserts
that the energy body possesses a higher vibration than normal
matter—may be an indication that such individuals are intuiting
an important fact about the energy field. Ancient Hindu literature also
describes matter as being composed of anu, or "atoms, " and says that
the subtle vibratory energies of the human energy field exist paramanu,
or literally "beyond the atom." This is interesting, for Bohm also
believes that at a subquantum level beyond the atom there are many
subtle energies still unknown to science. He confesses that he does not
know whether the human energy field exists or not, but in commenting on
the possibility, he states, "The implicate order has many levels of
subtlety.
179
If our attention can go to those levels of subtlety, then we should be
able to see more than we ordinarily see." It is worth noting that we
really don't know what any field is. As Bohm has said, "What is an
electric field? We don't know." When we discover a new kind of field it
seems mysterious. Then we name it, get used to dealing with it and
describing its properties, and it no longer seems mysterious. But we
still do not know what an electric or a gravitational field really is.
As we saw in an earlier chapter, we don't even know what electrons are.
We can only describe how they behave. This suggests that the human
energy field will also ultimately be defined in terms of how it
behaves, and research such as Hunt's will only further our
understanding.
Three-Dimensional
Images in the Aura
If these inordinately subtle
energies are the stuff from which the human energy field is made, we
may rest assured that they possess qualities unlike the kinds of energy
with which we are normally familiar. One of these is evident in the
human energy field's nonlocal characteristics. Another, and one that is
particularly holographic, is the aura's ability to manifest as an
amorphous blur of energy, or occasionally form itself into
three-dimensional images. Talented psychics often report seeing such
"holograms" floating in people's auras. These images are usually of
objects and ideas that hold a prominent position in the thoughts of the
person around whom they are seen. Some occult traditions hold that such
images are a product of the third, or mental, layer of the aura, but
until we have the means to confirm or deny this allegation, we must
confine ourselves to the experiences of the psychics who are able to
see images in the aura. One such psychic is Beatrice Rich. As often
happens, Rich's powers manifested at an early age. When she was a
child, objects in her presence would occasionally move about on their
own accord. When she grew older she discovered she knew things about
people she had no normal means of knowing. Although she began her
career as an artist, her clairvoyant talents proved so impressive that
she decided to become a full-time psychic. Now she gives readings for
individuals from all walks of life, from housewives to chief executives
of corporations, and articles about her work have appeared in such
diverse publications as New York magazine, World Tennis, and New York
Woman. Rich often sees images floating around or hovering near her
clients. Once she saw silver spoons, silver plates, and similar objects
circling around a man's head. Because it was early in her explorations
of psychic phenomena, the experience startled her. At first she did not
know why she was seeing what she was seeing. But finally she told the
man and discovered that he was in the import/export business and traded
in the very objects she was seeing circling his head. The experience
was riveting and changed her perceptions forever. Dryer has had many
similar experiences. Once during a reading she saw a bunch of potatoes
whirling around a woman's head. Like Rich, she was at first dumbfounded
but summoned her courage and asked the woman if potatoes had any
special meaning for her. The woman laughed and handed Dryer her
business card. "She was from the Idaho Potato Board, or something like
that, " says Dryer. "You know, the potato grower's equivalent of the
American Dairy Association." These images don't always just hover in
the aura, but sometimes can appear to be ghostly extensions of the body
itself. On one occasion Dryer saw a wispy and holographiclike layer of
mud clinging to a woman's hands and arms. Given the woman's impeccable
grooming and expensive attire, Dryer could not imagine why thoughts of
mucking around in some kind of viscous sludge would be occupying her
mind. Dryer asked her if she understood the image, and the woman
nodded, explaining that she was a sculptor and had tried out a new
medium that morning that had clung to her arms and hands exactly as
Dryer had described. I, too, have had similar experiences when looking
at the energy field. Once, while deep in thought about a novel I was
working on about werewolves (as some readers may be aware, I have a
fondness for writing fiction about folkloric subjects), I noticed that
the ghostly image of a werewolf's body had formed around my own body.
I would quickly like to stress that this was a purely visual phenomenon
and at no time did I feel I had in any way become a werewolf.
Nonetheless, the holographiclike image that enveloped my body was real
enough that when I lifted my arm I could actually see the individual
hairs in the fur and the way the canine nails protruded from the
wolfish hand that encased my own hand. Indeed, everything about these
features was absolutely real, save that they were translucent and I
could see my own flesh-and-blood hand beneath them.
181
The experience should have been frightening, but for some reason it
wasn't, and I found myself only fascinated by, what I was seeing. What
was significant about this experience was that Dryer was my house guest
at the time and happened to walk into the room while I was still
sheathed in this phantomlike werewolf body. She reacted immediately and
said: "Oh my, you must be thinking about your werewolf novel because
you've become a werewolf. " We compared notes and discovered that we
were each observing the same features. We became involved in
conversation, and as my thoughts strayed from the novel, the werewolf
image slowly faded.
Movies
in the Aura
The images, that psychics see in
the energy field, are not always static. Rich says, she often sees,
what looks like a little transparent movie going on around a client's
head: "Sometimes I see a small image of the person behind their head or
shoulders, doing various things, they do in life. My clients tell me,
that my descriptions are very accurate and specific. I can see their
offices and what their bosses look like. I can see, what they've
thought of and what's happened to them during the last six months.
Recently I told a client, that I could see her home and she had masks
and flutes hanging on her wall. She said, 'No, no, no. ' I said yes,
there are musical instruments hanging on the wall, mostly flutes, and
there are masks. And then she said, 'Oh, that's my summer home.' Dryer
says, she also sees, what look like three-dimensional movies in a
person's energy field. "Usually they're in color, but they can also be
brown, or look like tintypes. Often they depict a story about the
person, that can take anywhere from five minutes to an hour to unfold.
The images are also incredibly detailed. When I see a person, sitting
in a room, I can tell them how many plants are in the room, how many
leaves are on each plant, and how many bricks are in the wall. I
usually don't get into such minute description, unless it seems
pertinent." I can attest to Dryer's accuracy. I have always been an
organized person, and when I was a child, I was quite precocious in
this regard. Once, when I was five years old, I spent several hours
meticulously storing and organizing all of my toys in a closet. When I
was finished, then showed my mother, what I had done, and admonished
her please not to touch anything in the closet, because I did not want
her messing up my, carefully ordered, arrangements. My mother's account
of this incident has amused the family ever since. During my first
reading with Dryer, she described this incident in detail, as well, as
many other events in my life, as she watched it unfold, like a movie,
in my energy field. She, too, chuckled, as she described it. Dryer
likens the images, she sees, to holograms and says, that, when she
chooses one and starts to watch it, it seems to expand and fill the
entire room. "If I see something going on with a person's shoulder,
such as an injury, suddenly the whole scene widens. That's, when I get
the sense, that it's a hologram, because sometimes I feel, I can step
right into it and be a part of it. It's not happening to me, but around
me. It's almost, as if I'm in a three-dimensional movie, a holographic
movie, with the person." Dryer's holographic vision is not limited to
events from a person's life. She sees visual representations of the
operations of the unconscious mind as well. As we all know, the
unconscious mind speaks in a language of symbols and metaphors. This is
why dreams often seem so nonsensical and mysterious. However, once one
learns how to interpret the language of the unconscious, the meanings
of dreams become clear. Dreams are not the only things, that are
written in the parlance of the unconscious. Individuals, who are
familiar with the language of the psyche—a language, psychologist
Erich Fromm calls, the "forgotten language", because most of us have
forgotten, how to interpret it—recognize its presence in other
human creations such as myths, fairy tales, and religious visions. Some
of the holographic movies, Dryer sees in the human energy field, are
also written in this language and resemble the metaphorical messages of
dreams. We now know, that the unconscious mind is active not only while
we dream, but all of the time. Dryer is able to peel back a person's
waking self and gaze directly at the unceasing river of images, that is
always flowing through their unconscious mind. And both practice and
her natural, intuitive gifts have made her extremely skilled at
deciphering the language of the unconscious. "Jungian psychologists
love me, " says Dryer. In addition, Dryer has a special way of knowing,
whether she has interpreted an image correctly.
"If I haven't explained it correctly, it doesn't go away, " she states.
"It just stays in the energy field. But once I've told the person
everything, they need to know about a particular image, it begins to
dissolve and disappear."
183
Dryer thinks this is, because it is a client's own unconscious mind,
that chooses, what images to show her. Like Ullman, she believes the
psyche is always trying to teach the conscious self things, it needs to
know, to become healthier and happier, and to grow spiritually. Dryer's
ability, to observe and interpret the innermost workings of a person's
psyche, is one of the reasons, she is able to effect such profound
transformations in many of her clients. The first time she described
the stream of images, she saw, unfolding in my own energy field, I had
the uncanny sensation, she was telling me about one of my own dreams,
save that it was a dream, I had not yet dreamed. At first the
phantasmagoria of images was only mysteriously familiar, but, as she
unraveled and explained each symbol and metaphor in
turn, I recognized the machinations of my inner self,
both: the things I accepted and the things I was less willing to
embrace. Indeed, it is clear from the work of psychics like Rich and
Dryer, that there is an enormous amount of information in the energy
field. One wonders, if this is perhaps, why Hunt obtained such a
pronounced chaos pattern, when she analyzed data from the aura. The
ability to see images in the human energy field is not new. Nearly
three hundred years ago the great Swedish mystic Emanuel Swedenborg
reported, that he could see a "wave-substance" around people, and in
the wave-substance a person's thoughts were visible, as images, he
called, "portrayals." In commenting on the inability of other people to
see this wave-substance around the body, he observed: "I could see
solid concepts of thought, as though they were surrounded by a kind of
wave. But nothing reaches [normal] human sensation, except what is in
the middle and seems solid." Swedenborg could also see portrayals in
his own energy field: "When I was thinking about someone, I knew then,
his image appeared, as he looked, when he was named in human presence;
but all around, like something flowing in waves, was everything, I had
known and thought about him from boyhood."
Holographic
Body Assessment
Frequency is not the only thing,
that is distributed holographically throughout the field. Psychics
report, that the wealth of personal information, the field contains,
can also be found in every portion of the body's aura. As Brennan puts
it, "The aura not only represents, but also contains, the whole."
California clinical psychologist Ronald Wong Jue agrees. Jue, a former
president of the Association for Transpersonal Psychology and a
talented clairvoyant, has found, that an individual's history is even
contained in the "energy patterns" inherent in the body. "The body is a
kind of microcosm, a universe unto itself, reflecting all of the
different factors, that a person is dealing with and trying to
integrate, " says Jue. Like Dryer and Rich, Jue has the psychic ability
to tune into movies about the important issues in a person's life, but
instead of seeing them in the energy field, he conjures them up in his
mind's eye by laying his hands on a person and literally
psychometrizing their body. Jue says, this technique enables him to
determine quickly the emotional scripts, core issues, and relationship
patterns, that are most prominent in a person's life, and often uses it
on his patients to facilitate the therapeutic process. "The technique
was actually taught to me by a psychiatrist colleague of mine, named
Ernest Pecci," Jue states. "He called it 'body reading.' Instead of
talking about the etheric body and things like that, I chose to use the
holographic model, as a way of explaining it, and call it 'Holographic
Body Assessment'." In addition to using it in his clinical practice,
Jue also gives seminars, in which he teaches others, how to use the
technique.
X-Ray
Vision
In the last chapter we explored
the possibility, that the body is not a solid construct, but is itself,
a kind of holographic image. Another faculty, possessed by many
clairvoyants, seems to support this notion, that is, the ability to
literally look inside a person's body. Individuals, who are gifted at
seeing the energy field, can also often adjust their vision and see
through the flesh and bones of the body, as if they were no more, than
layers of colored mist. During the course of her research, Karagulla
discovered a number of people, both in and out of the medical
profession, who possessed this X-ray vision. A woman, she identifies as
Diane, was the head of a corporation. Just before meeting Diane,
Karagulla wrote, "For me, as a psychiatrist, to be meeting somebody,
who was reported to be able to 'see' right through me, was a shattering
reversal of my usual procedures."
185
Karagulla put Diane through a lengthy series of tests, introducing her
to people and having her make on-the-spot diagnoses. On one of these
occasions Diane described a woman's energy field, as "wilted" and
"broken into fragments", and said, this indicated, she had a serious
problem in her physical body. She then looked into the woman's body and
saw, that there was an intestinal blockage near her spleen. This
surprised Karagulla, because the woman showed none of the symptoms,
that usually indicated such a serious condition. Nonetheless, the woman
went to her doctor, and X rays revealed a blockage in the precise area,
Diane had described. Three days later the woman underwent surgery, to
have the life-threatening obstruction removed. In another series of
tests Karagulla had Diane diagnose patients at random in the outpatient
clinic of a large New York hospital. After Diane made a diagnosis,
Karagulla would determine the accuracy of her observations, by
referring to the patient's records. On one of these occasions Diane
looked at a patient, unknown to both of them, and told Karagulla, that
the woman's pituitary gland (a gland deep in the brain) was missing,
her pancreas looked, as if it was not functioning properly, her breasts
had been affected, but were now missing, she didn't have enough energy,
going through her spine from the waist down, and she had trouble with
her legs. The medical report on the woman revealed, that her pituitary
gland had been surgically removed, she was taking hormones, which
affected her pancreas, she had had a double mastectomy due to cancer,
an operation on her back to decompress her spinal cord and relieve
pains in her legs, and her nerves had been damaged, making it difficult
for her to empty her bladder. In case after case Diane revealed, that
she could gaze effortlessly into the depths of the physical body. She
gave detailed descriptions of the condition of the internal organs. She
saw the state of the intestines, the presence or absence of the various
glands, and even described the density or brittleness of the bones.
Concludes Karagulla: "Although I could not evaluate her findings,
regarding the energy body, her observations of physical conditions
correlated with amazing accuracy with the medical diagnoses." Brennan
is also skilled at looking into the human body and calls the ability
"internal vision." Using internal vision, she has accurately diagnosed
a wide range of conditions including bone fractures, fibroid tumors,
and cancer. She says, she can often tell the condition of an organ by
its color: for example, a healthy liver looks dark red, a
jaundiced liver looks a sickly yellow-brown, and the liver of an
individual, undergoing chemotherapy, usually looks green-brown. Like
many other psychics with internal vision, Brennan can adjust the focus
of her vision and even see microscopic structures, such as viruses and
individual blood cells. I have personally encountered several psychics
with internal vision and can corroborate its authenticity. One psychic,
I have seen demonstrate the ability, is Dryer. On one of these
occasions she not only accurately diagnosed an internal medical
problem, I was having, but offered some startling information of an
entirely different nature along with it. A few years back I started
having trouble with my spleen. To try and remedy the situation, I began
performing daily visualization exercises, seeing images of my spleen in
a state of wholeness and health, seeing it being bathed in healing
light, and so on. Unfortunately, I am a very impatient person, and when
I did not have overnight success, I got angry. During my next
meditation I mentally scolded my spleen and warned it in no uncertain
terms, that it better start doing, what I wanted. This incident took
place purely in the privacy of my own thoughts, and I quickly forgot
about it. A few days later I saw Dryer and asked her, if she could look
into my body and tell me, if there was anything, I should be aware of
(I did not tell her about my health problem). Nonetheless, she
immediately described, what was wrong with my spleen and then paused,
scowling as if she was confused. "Your spleen's very upset about
something," she murmured. And then suddenly it hit her. "Have you been
yelling at your spleen?" I sheepishly admitted, that I had. Dryer all,
but threw her hands up. "You mustn't do that. Your spleen became ill,
because it thought, it was doing, what you wanted. That was, because
you were unconsciously giving it the wrong directions. Now, that you've
yelled at it, it's really confused." She shook her head with concern.
"Never, never get angry at your body or your internal organs, " she
advised. "Only send them positive messages." The incident not only
revealed Dryer's skill, at looking inside the human body, but also
seemed to suggest, that my spleen has some sort of mentality or
consciousness all of its own. It reminded me not only of Pert's
assertion, that she no longer knows, where the brain leaves off and the
body begins, but made me wonder, if perhaps all of the body's
subcomponents—glands, bones, organs, and cells—possess
their own intelligence? If the body is truly holographic, it may be,
that Pert's remark is more correct, than we realize, and the
consciousness of the whole is very much contained in all of its parts.
187
Internal
Vision and Shamanism
In some shamanic cultures
internal vision is one of the prerequisites for becoming a shaman.
Among the Araucanian Indians of Chile and the Argentine pampas, a newly
initiated shaman is taught to pray specifically for the faculty. This
is, because the shaman's major role in Araucanian culture is, to
diagnose and heal illness, for which internal vision is considered
essential. Australian shamans refer to the ability as the "strong eye,
" or "seeing with the heart." The Jivaro Indians of the forested
eastern slopes of the Ecuadorian Andes acquire the ability, by drinking
an extract of a jungle vine called ayahuasca, a plant containing a
hallucinogenic substance, believed to bestow psychic abilities on the
imbiber. According to Michael Harner, an anthropologist at the New
School for Social Research in New York, who specializes in shamanic
studies, ayahuasca permits the Jivaro shaman "to see into the body of
the patient, as though it were glass." Indeed, the ability to "see" an
illness, whether it involves actually looking inside the body or seeing
the malady, represented as a kind of metaphorical hologram, such as a
three-dimensional image of a demonic and repulsive creature inside or
near the body—is universal in shamanic traditions. But whatever
the culture, in which internal vision is reported, its implications are
the same. The body is an energy construct and ultimately may be no more
substantive, than the energy field, in which it is embedded.
The
Energy Field as Cosmic Blueprint
The idea, that the physical body
is just one more level of density in the human energy field, and is,
itself, a kind of hologram, that has coalesced out of the interference
patterns of the aura, may explain both: the extraordinary healing
powers of the mind and the enormous control it has over the body in
general. Because an illness can appear in the energy field weeks and
even months before it appears in the body, many psychics believe, that
disease actually originates in the energy field. This suggests, that
the field is in some way more primary, than the physical body, and
functions as a kind of blueprint, from which the body gets its
structural cues. Put another way, the energy field may be the body's
own version of an implicate order. This may explain Achterberg's and
Siegel's findings, that patients are already "imaging" their illnesses
many months before, the illnesses manifest in their bodies. At present,
medical science is at a loss to explain, how mental imagery could
actually create an illness. But, as we have seen, ideas, that are
prominent in our thoughts, quickly appear as images in the energy
field. If the energy field is the blueprint, that guides and molds the
body, it may be, that by imaging an illness, even unconsciously, and
repeatedly reinforcing its presence in the field, we are in effect
programming the body to manifest the illness. Similarly, this same
dynamic linkage between mental images, the energy field, and the
physical body may be one of the reasons, imagery and visualization can
also heal the body. It may even help explain, how faith and meditation
on religious images enable stigmatists to grow nail-like fleshy
protuberances from their hands. Our current scientific understanding is
at a loss to explain such a biological capacity, but again, constant
prayer and meditation may cause such images to become so impressed in
the energy field, that the constant repetition of these patterns is
finally given form in the body.
One researcher, who believes it is the energy field, that molds the
body, and not the other way around, is Richard Gerber, a Detroit
physician, who has spent the last twelve years investigating the
medical implications of the body's subtle energy fields. "The etheric
body is a holographic energy template, that guides the growth and
development of the physical body, " says Gerber. Gerber believes, that
the distinct layers, some psychics see in the aura, also play a factor
in the dynamic relationship among thought, the energy field, and the
physical body. Just as the physical body is subordinate to the etheric,
the etheric body is subordinate to the astral/emotional body, the
astral/emotional to the mental, and so on, says Gerber, with each body,
functioning as the template for the one before it. Thus the subtler the
layer of the energy field, in which an image or thought manifests, the
greater its ability to heal and reshape the body.
189
"Because the mental body feeds energy into the astral/emotional body,
which then funnels down into the etheric and physical bodies, healing a
person at the mental level is stronger and produces longer lasting
results than healing from either the astral or etheric levels, " says
Gerber. Physicist Tiller agrees. "The thoughts that one creates
generate patterns at the mind level of nature. So we see that illness,
in fact, eventually becomes manifest from the altered mind patterns
through the rachet effect—first, to effect at the etheric level
and then, ultimately, at the physical level [where] we see it openly as
disease. " Tiller believes the reason illnesses often recur is that
medicine currently treats only the physical level. He feels that if
doctors could treat the energy field as well, they would bring about
longer lasting cures. Until then, many treatments "will not be
permanent because we have not altered the basic hologram at the mind
and spiritual levels," he states. In a wide-ranging speculation Tiller
even suggests that the universe itself started as a subtle energy field
and gradually became dense and material through a similar rachet
effect... Like the image a psychic sees floating in the human
energy field, this divine pattern functioned as a template, influencing
and molding increasingly less subtle levels of the cosmic energy field
"on down the line via a series of holograms, " until it eventually
coalesced into a hologram of a physical universe. If this is true, it
suggests that the human body is holographic in another way, for each of
us truly would be a universe in miniature. Furthermore, if our thoughts
can cause ghostly holographic images to form, not only in our own
energy fields, but in the subtle energetic levels of reality itself, it
may help explain how the human mind is able to effect some of the
miracles we examined in the previous chapter. It may even explain
synchronicities, or how processes and images from the innermost depths
of our psyche manage to take form in external reality. Again, it may be
that our thoughts are constantly affecting the subtle energetic levels
of the holographic universe, but only emotionally powerful thoughts,
such as the ones that accompany moments of Crisis and
transformation—the kind of events that seem to engender
synchronises—are potent enough to manifest, as a series of
coincidences in physical reality.
A
Participatory Reality
Of course, these processes are
not contingent (accidental) on the subtle energy fields of the universe
being stratified (arranged) into rigidly defined layers. They could
also work, even if the subtle fields of the universe are a smooth
continuum. In fact, given how sensitive these subtle fields are to our
thoughts, we must be very careful when trying to form set ideas about
their organization and structure. What we believe about them may in
fact help mold and create their structure. This is perhaps, why
psychics disagree about whether the human energy field is divided into
layers. Psychics who believe in clearly defined layers may actually be
causing the energy field to form itself into layers. The individual,
whose energy field is being observed, may also participate in this
process. Brennan is very frank about this and notes, that the more one
of her clients understands the difference between the layers, the
clearer and more distinct the layers of their energy field become. She
admits that the structure she sees in the energy field is thus but one
system, and others have come up with other systems. For example, the
authors of the tantras, a collection of Hindu yogic texts written
during the fourth through sixth centuries A. D., perceived only three
layers in the energy field. There is evidence that the structures
clairvoyants inadvertently create in the energy field can be remarkably
long-lived. For centuries the ancient Hindus believed that each chakra
also had a Sanskrit letter written in its center. Japanese researcher
Hiroshi Motoyama, a clinical psychologist who has successfully
developed a technique for measuring the electrical presence of the
chakras, says that he first became interested in the chakras because
his mother, a simple woman with natural clairvoyant gifts, could see
them clearly. However, for years she was puzzled because she could see
what looked like an inverted sailboat in her heart chakra. It wasn't
until Motoyama began his own investigations that he discovered what his
mother was seeing was the Sanskrit letter yam, the letter the ancient
Hindus perceived in the heart chakra. Some psychics, such as Dryer, say
that they also see Sanskrit letters in the chakras. Others do not. The
only explanation appears to be that psychics who see the letters are
actually tuning into holographic structures long ago imposed on the
energy field by the beliefs of the ancient Hindus. At first glance this
notion may seem strange, but it does have a precedent (previous
incident). As we have seen, one of the basic tenets of quantum physics
is that we are not discovering reality, but participating in its
creation. It may be that as we probe deeper into the levels of reality
beyond the atom, the levels where the subtle energies of the human aura
appear to lie, the participatory nature of reality becomes even more
pronounced.Thus we must be extremely cautious about saying that we have
discovered a particular structure or pattern in the human energy field,
when we may have actually created what we have found.
Mind
and the Human Energy Field
It is significant that an
examination of the human energy field leads one to precisely the same
conclusion Pribram made after discovering that the brain converts
sensory import into a language of frequencies. That is, that we have
two realities: one in which our bodies appear to be concrete and
possess a precise location in space and time; and one in which our very
being appears to exist primarily as a shimmering cloud of energy whose
ultimate location in space is somewhat ambiguous. This realization
brings with it some profound questions. One is, what becomes of mind?
We have been taught that our mind is a product of our brain, but if the
brain and the physical body are just holograms, the densest part of an
increasingly subtle continuum of energy fields, what does this say
about the mind? Human energy field research provides an answer.
Recently a discovery made by neurophysiologists Benjamin Libet and
Bertram Feinstein at Mount Zion Hospital in San Francisco has been
causing a stir in the scientific community. Libet and Feinstein
measured the time it took for a touch stimulus on a patient's skin to
reach the brain as an electrical signal. The patient was also asked to
push a button when he or she became aware of being touched. Libet and
Feinstein found that the brain registered the stimulus in 0. 0001 of a
second after it occurred, and the patient pressed the button 0-1 of a
second after the stimulus was applied. But, remarkably, the patient
didn't report being consciously aware of either the stimulus or
pressing the button for almost 0. 5 second. This meant that the
decision to respond was being made by the patient's unconscious mind.
The patient's awareness of the action was the slow man in the race.
Even more disturbing, none of the patients Libet and Feinstein tested
were aware that their unconscious minds had already caused them to push
the button before they had consciously decided to do so. Somehow their
brains were creating the comforting delusion, that they had consciously
controlled the action, even though they had not. This has caused some
researchers to, wonder, if free will is an illusion. Later studies have
shown, that one and a half seconds before we "decide" to move one of
our muscles, such as lift a finger, our brain has already started to
generate the signals necessary to accomplish the movement. Again, who
is making the decision, the conscious mind or the unconscious mind?
Valarie Hunt does such findings one better. She has discovered, that
the human energy field responds to stimuli, even before the brain does.
She has taken EMG readings of the energy field and EEC readings of the
brain simultaneously and discovered, that when she makes a loud sound
or flashes a bright light, the EMG of the energy field registers the
stimulus before it ever shows up on the EEC. What does it mean? "I
think, we have way overrated the brain, as the active ingredient in the
relationship of a human to the world, " says Hunt. "It's just a real
good computer. But the aspects of the mind, that have to do with
creativity, imagination, spirituality, and all those things, I don't
see them in the brain at all. The mind's not in the brain. It's in that
darn field." {electromyograms (EMGs) are measuring the electrical
activity in the woman's muscles, while she dances.} Dryer has also
noticed, that the energy field responds before a person consciously
registers a response. As a consequence, instead of trying to judge her
client's reactions by watching their facial expressions, she keeps her
eyes closed and watches how their energy fields react. "As I speak, I
can see the colors change in their energy field. I can see how they
feel about, what I'm saying, without having to ask them. For instance,
if their field becomes foggy,
I know they're not understanding what I'm telling them, " she states.
If the mind is not in the brain, but in the energy field, that
permeates both the brain and the physical body, this may explain, why
psychics such as Dryer see so much of the content of a person's psyche
in the field. It may also explain how my spleen, an organ not normally
associated with thought, managed to have its own rudimentary form of
intelligence. Indeed, if the mind is in the field, it suggests, that
our awareness, the thinking, feeling part of ourselves, may not even be
confined to the physical body, and as we will see, there is
considerable evidence to support this idea as well.
But first we must turn our attention to another issue. The solidity of
the body is not the only thing, that is illusory in a holographic
universe. As we have seen, Bohm believes, that even time itself is not
absolute, but unfolds out of the implicate (imply, interweave) order.
This suggests, that the linear division of time into past, present, and
future is also just another construct of the mind. In the next chapter
we will examine the evidence, that supports this idea as well, as the
ramifications this view has for our lives in the here and now.
195
PART
III - SPACE AND TIME
"Shamanism and similar mysterious
areas of research have gained in significance, because they postulate
new ideas about mind and spirit. They speak of things like vastly
expanding the realm of consciousness . . . the belief, the knowledge,
and even the experience, that our physical world of the senses is a
mere illusion, a world of shadows, and that the three-dimensional tool,
we call our body, serves only as a container or dwelling place for
Something infinitely greater and more comprehensive, than that body,
and which constitutes the matrix of the real life." Holger Kahweil
"Dreamtime and Inner Space".
197
Time
Out of Mind
"The "home" of the mind, as of
all things, is the implicate (imply, interweave) order. At this level,
which is the fundamental plenum for the entire manifest universe, there
is no linear time. The implicate domain is atemporal; moments are not
strung together serially, like beads on a string." Larry Dossey
"Recovering the Soul".
As the man gazed off into space, the room, he was in, became ghostly
and transparent, and in its place materialized a scene from the distant
past. Suddenly he was in the courtyard of a palace, and before him was
a young woman, olive-skinned and very pretty. He could see her gold
jewelry around her neck, wrists, and ankles, her white translucent
dress, and her black braided hair gathered regally under a high
square-shaped tiara. As he looked at her, information about her life
flooded his mind. He knew, she was Egyptian, the daughter of a prince,
but not a pharaoh. She was married. Her husband was slender and wore
his hair in a multitude of small braids that fell down on both sides of
his face. The man could also fast-forward the scene, rushing through
the events of the woman's life as if they were no more than a movie. He
saw that she died in childbirth. He watched the lengthy and intricate
steps of her embalming, her funeral procession, the rituals that
accompanied her being placed in her sarcophagus, and when he finished,
the images faded and the room once again came back into view. The man's
name was Stefan Ossowiecki, a Russian-born Pole and one of the
century's most gifted clairvoyants, and the date was February 14, 1935.
His vision of the past had been evoked when he handled a fragment of a
petrified human foot. Ossowiecki proved so adept at psychometrizing
artifacts that he eventually came to the attention of Stanislaw
Poniatowski, a professor at the University of Warsaw and the most
eminent ethnologist in Poland at the time. Poniatowski tested
Ossowiecki with a variety of flints and other stone tools obtained from
archaeological sites around the world. Most of these lithics, as they
are called, were so nondescript that only a trained eye could tell they
had been shaped by human hands. They were also precertified by experts
so that Poniatowski knew their ages and historical origins, information
he kept carefully concealed from Ossowiecki. It did not matter. Again
and again Ossowiecki identified the objects correctly, describing their
age, the culture that had produced them, and the geographical
locations, where they had been found. On several occasions the
locations Ossowiecki cited disagreed with the information Poniatowski
had written in his notes, but Poniatowski discovered that it was always
his notes that were in error, not Ossowiecki's information. Ossowiecki
always worked the same. He would take the object in his hands and
concentrate until the room before him, and even his own body, became
shadowy and almost nonexistent. After this transition occurred, he
would find himself looking at a three-dimensional movie of the past. He
could then go anywhere he wanted in the scene and see anything he
chose. While he was gazing into the past, Ossowiecki even moved his
eyes back and forth as if the things he was describing possessed an
actual physical presence before him. He could see the vegetation, the
people, and the dwellings in which they lived. On one occasion, after
handling a stone implement from the Magdalenian culture, a Stone Age
people who flourished in France about 15, 000 to 10, 000 B. C.,
Ossowiecki told Poniatowski that Magdalenian women had very complex
hair styles. At the time this seemed absurd, but subsequent discoveries
of statues of Magdalenian women with ornate coiffures proved Ossowiecki
right. Over the course of the experiments Ossowiecki offered over one
hundred such pieces of information, details about the past that at
first seemed inaccurate, but later proved correct.
199
He said that Stone Age peoples used oil lamps and was vindicated when
excavations in Dordogne, France, uncovered oils lamps of the exact size
and style he described. He made detailed drawings of the animals
various peoples hunted, the style of the huts in which they lived, and
their burial customs—assertions that were all later confirmed by
archaeological discoveries. Poniatowski's work with Ossowiecki is not
unique. Norman Emerson, a professor of anthropology at the University
of Toronto and founding vice president of the Canadian Archaeological
Association, has also investigated the use of clairvoyants in
archaeological work. Emerson's research has centered around a truck
driver named George McMullen. Like Ossowiecki, McMullen has the ability
to psychometrize objects and use them to tune into scenes from the
past. McMullen can also tune into the past simply by visiting an
archaeological site. Once there, he paces back and forth until he gets
his bearings. Then he begins to describe the people and culture that
once flourished at the site. On one such occasion Emerson watched as
McMullen bounded over a patch of bare ground, pacing out what he said
was the location of an Iroquois longhouse. Emerson marked the area with
survey pegs and six months later uncovered the ancient structure
exactly where McMullen said it would be. Although Emerson began as a
skeptic, his work with McMullen has made him a believer. In 1973, at an
annual conference of Canada's leading archaeologists, he stated, "It is
my conviction that I have received knowledge about archaeological
artifacts and archaeological sites from a psychic informant who relates
this information to me without any evidence of the conscious use of
reasoning. " He concluded his talk by saying that he felt McMullen's
demonstrations opened "a whole new vista" in archaeology, and research
into the further use of psychics in archaeological investigations
should be given "first priority." Indeed, retrocognition, or the
ability of certain individuals to shift the focus of their attention
and literally gaze back into the past, has been confirmed repeatedly by
researchers. In a series of experiments conducted in the 1960s, W. H.
C. Tenhaeff, the director of the Parapsychological Institute of the
State University of Utrecht, and Marius Valkhoff, dean of the faculty
of arts at the University of Witwatersrand, Johannesburg, South Africa,
found that the great Dutch psychic, Gerard Croiset, could psychometrize
even the smallest fragment of bone and accurately describe its past.
Dr. Lawrence LeShan, a New York clinical psychologist, and another
skeptic-turned-believer, has conducted similar experiments with the
noted American psychic, Eileen Garrett. At the 1961 annual meeting of
the American Anthropological Association, archaeologist Clarence W.
Weiant revealed that he would not have made his famous Tres Zapctes
discovery, universally considered to be one of the most important
Middle American archaeological finds ever made, were it not for the
assistance of a psychic. Stephan A. Schwartz, a former editorial staff
member of National Geographic magazine and a member of MIT's Secretary
of Defense Discussion Group on Innovation, Technology, and Society,
believes that retrocognition is not only real, but will eventually
precipitate a shift in scientific reality as profound as the shifts
that followed the discoveries of Copernicus and Darwin. Schwartz feels
so strongly about the subject that he has written a comprehensive
history of the partnership between clairvoyants and archaeologists
entitled The Secret Vaults of Time. "For three-quarters of a century
psychic archaeology has been a reality, " says Schwartz. "This new
approach has done much to demonstrate that the time and space framework
so crucial to the Grand Material world-view is by no means as absolute
a construct as most scientists believe."
The
Past as Hologram
Such abilities suggest that the past is not lost, but still exists in
some form accessible to human perception. Our normal view of the
universe makes no allowance for such a state of affairs, but the
holographic model does. Bohm's notion that the flow of time is the
product of a constant series of unfoldings and enfoldings suggests that
as the present enfolds and becomes part of the past, it does not cease
to exist, but simply returns to the cosmic storehouse of the implicate.
Or as Bohm puts it, "The past is active in the present as a kind of
implicate order." If, as Bohm suggests, consciousness also has its
source in the implicate, this means that the human mind and the
holographic record of the past already exist in the same domain, are,
in a manner of speaking, already neighbors. Thus, a shift in the focus
of one's attention may be all that is needed to access the past.
201
Clairvoyants such as McMullen and Ossowiecki may simply be individuals
who have an innate knack for making this shift, but again, as with so
many of the other extraordinary human abilities we have looked at, the
holographic idea suggests that the talent is latent in all of us. A
metaphor for the way the past is stored in the implicate can also be
found in the hologram. If each phase of an activity, say a woman
blowing a soap bubble, is recorded as a series of successive images in
a multiple-image hologram, each image becomes as a frame in a movie. If
the hologram is a "white light" hologram—a piece of holographic
film whose image can be seen by the naked eye and does not need laser
light to become visible— when a viewer walks by the film and
changes the angle of his or her perception, he/she will see what
amounts to a three- dimensional motion picture of the woman blowing the
soap bubble. In other words, as the different images unfold and enfold,
they will seem to flow together and present an illusion of movement. A
person, who is unfamiliar with holograms might mistakenly assume that
the various stages in the blowing of the soap bubble are transitory and
once perceived can never be viewed again, but this is not true. The
entire activity is always recorded in the hologram, and it is the
viewer's changing perspective that provides the illusion that it is
unfolding in time. The holographic theory suggests that the same is
true of our own past. Instead of fading into oblivion, it too remains
recorded in the cosmic hologram and can always be accessed once again.
Another suggestively hologramlike feature of the retrocognitive
experience is the three-dimensionality of the scenes that are accessed.
For instance, psychic Rich, who can also psychometrize (say about their
past) objects, says she knows what Ossowiecki meant when he said that
the images he saw were as three-dimensional and real, even more real,
than the room in which he was sitting. "It's as if the scene takes
over, " says Rich. "It's dominant, and once it starts to unfold I
actually become a part of it. It's like being in two places at once.
I'm aware that I'm sitting in a room, but I'm also in the scene."
Similarly holographic is the nonlocal nature of the ability. Psychics
are able to access the past of a particular archaeological site both
when they are at the site and when they are many miles removed. In
other words, the record of the past does not appear to be stored at any
one location, but like the information in a hologram, it is nonlocal
and can be accessed from any point in the space-time framework.
202-203
The nonlocal aspect of the phenomenon is further underscored by the
fact, that some psychics don't even need to resort to psychometry in
order to tune into the past. The famous Kentuckian clairvoyant Edgar
Cayce could tap into the past simply by lying down on a couch in his
house and entering a sleeplike state. He dictated volumes on the
history of the human race and was often startlingly accurate... It is
interesting to note, that many retrocognitive individuals can also see
the human energy field. When he was a child, Ossowieski's mother gave
him eye drops in an attempt to get rid of the bands of color, he told
her, he saw around people, and McMullen also can diagnose a person's
health by looking at their field. This suggests, that retrocognition
may be linked to the ability to see the subtler and more vibratory
aspects of reality. Put another way, the past may be just one more
thing, that is encoded in Pribram's frequency domain, a portion of the
cosmic interference patterns, that most of us edit out and only a few
tune into and convert into hologramlike images.
"Maybe
in the
holographic state - in the frequency domain - 4 thousand years ago is
tomorrow," says Pribram.
Phantoms
from the Past
The idea, that the past is
holographically recorded in the cosmic airways and can occasionally be
plucked out by the human mind and converted into holograms, may also
explain at least some hauntings. Many ghostly apparitions appear to be
little more, than holograms, three-dimensional recordings of some
person or scene from the past. For example, one theory about ghosts is,
that they are the soul or spirit of the deceased individual, but not
all ghosts are human. There are numerous cases on record of individuals
seeing phantoms of inanimate objects as well, a fact, that belies the
idea, that apparitions are discarnate souls. "Phantasms of the Living",
a massive 2-volume set of well-documented reports of hauntings and
other paranormal phenomena, compiled by the Society for Psychical
Research in London, offers many such examples. For instance, in one
case a British military officer and his family watched as a spectral
horse-drawn carriage pulled upon their lawn and stopped. So real was
the ghostly carriage, that the officer's son walked up to it and saw,
what appeared to be a female figure inside. The image vanished before
he could obtain a better look, and left no horse or wheel tracks. How
common are such experiences? We do not know, but we do know, that in
the United States and England several studies have shown that 10-17% of
the general population have seen an apparition, indicating, that
such phenomena may be far more common, than most of us suspect. The
notion, that some events leave stronger imprints in the holographic
record, than others, is also supported by the tendency of hauntings to
occur at locations, where some terrible act of violence or other
unusually powerful emotional occurence has taken place. The literature
is filled with apparitions, appearing at the sites of murders, military
battles and other kinds of mayhem. This suggests, that in addition to
images and sounds, the emotions being felt during an event are also
recorded in the cosmic hologram. Again it appears, that it is the
emotional intensity of such events, that makes them more prominent in
the holographic record, and that allows normal individuals to
unwittingly tap into them. And again, many of these hauntings appear to
be less the product of unhappy earthbound spirits, and more just
accidental qlimpses into the holographic record of the past. This, too,
is supported by the literature on the subject. For example, in 1907,
and at the promting of the poet William Butler Yeats, a UCLA
antropologist and religious scholar named W.Y. Evans-Wentz embarked on
a 2 years journey through Ireland, Scotland, Wales, Cornwall, and
Brittany to interview people, who had allegedly encounted fairies and
other supernatural beings. Evans-Wentz undertook the project, because
Yeats told him that, as twentieth-century values replaced the old
beliefs, encounters with fairies were becoming less frequent and needed
to be documented, before the tradition was lost completely. As
Evans-Wentz went from village to village interviewing the usually
elderly stalwarts of the faith, he discovered, that not all of the
fairies people encountered in the glens and the moon-dappled meadows
were small. Some were tall and looked like normal human beings, except
they were luminous and translucent and had the curious habit of wearing
the clothing of earlier historical periods. Moreover, these "fairies"
often appeared in or around archeological
ruins or burial mounds, standing stones, crumbling sixth-century
fortresses, and so on—and
participated in activities, associated
with bygone times.
204-205
Evans-Wentz interviewed
witnesses, who had seen
fairies, that looked like men in Elizabethan dress, engaging in hunts,
fairies, that walked in ghostly processions to and from the remains of
old forts, and fairies, that rang bells, while standing in the ruins of
ancient churches. One activity, of which the fairies seemed
inordinately fond, was waging war. In his book "The Fairy-Faith in
Celtic Countries" Evans-Wentz presents the testimony of dozens of
individuals, who claimed to see these spectral conflicts, moonlit
meadows thronged with men battling in medieval armor, or desolate fens
(a marsh) covered with soldiers in colored uniforms. Sometimes these
frays (fights, arguments) were eerily silent. Sometimes they were
full-fledged dins (continueing and unpleasant noise); and, perhaps most
haunting of all, sometimes they could only be heard, but not seen. From
this, Evans-Wentz concluded, that at least some of the phenomena his
witnesses, were interpreting as fairies, were actually some kind of
afterimage of events, that had taken place in the past. "Nature herself
has a memory, " he theorized. "There is some indefinable psychic
element in the earth's atmosphere, upon which all human and physical
actions or phenomena are photographed or impressed. Under certain
inexplicable conditions, normal persons, who are not Seers, may observe
Nature's mental records like pictures, cast upon a screen, often like
moving pictures." As for why encounters with fairies were becoming less
frequent, a remark made by one of Evans-Wentz's respondents provides a
clue. The respondent was an elderly gentleman named John Davies living
on the Isle of Man, and after describing numerous sightings of the good
people, he stated,
"Before
education came
into the island, more people
could see the fairies; now very few people can see them." Since
"education" no doubt included an anathema against believing in fairies,
Davies's remark suggests, that it was a change in attitude, that caused
the widespread retrocognitive abilities of the Manx people to atrophy.
Once again this underscores the enormous power our beliefs have in
determining, which of our extraordinary potentials we manifest and
which we do not. But whether our beliefs allow us to see these
hologram-like movies of the past or cause our brains to edit them out,
the evidence suggests, that they exist nonetheless. Nor are such
experiences limited to Celtic countries. There are reports of witnesses
seeing phantom soldiers dressed in ancient Hindu costumes in India. In
Hawaii, such ghostly splays are well known and books on the islands are
filled with accounts of individuals, who have seen phantom processions
of Hawaiian warriors in feather cloaks, marching along with war clubs
and torches. Sightings of spectral armies fighting equally phantasmal
battles are even mentioned in ancient Assyrian texts. Occasional ly
historians are able to recognize the event being replayed. At four in
the morning on August 4, 1951, two English women vacationing in the
seaside village of Puys, France, were awakened by the sound of gunfire.
They raced to the window, but were shocked to find, that the village
and the sea beyond were calm and devoid of any activity, that might
account for, what they were hearing. The British Society for Psychical
Research investigated and discovered, that the women's chronology of
events mirrored exactly military records of a raid the Allies had made
against the Germans at Puys on August 19, 1942. The women, it seemed,
had heard the sound of a slaughter, that had taken place nine years
earlier. Although the dark intensity of such events gives them a higher
profile in the holographic landscape, we must not forget, that
contained within the shimmering holographic record of the past, are all
the joys of the human race as well. It is, in essence, a library of
all, that ever was, and learning to tap into this dazzling and infinite
treasure-trove on a more massive and systematic scale, could expand our
knowledge of both ourselves and the universe in ways, we have not yet
dared dream. The day may come, when we can manipulate reality like the
crystal in Bohm's analogy, causing what is real and what is invisible
to shift kaleidoscopically, and calling up images of the past with the
same ease, that we now call up a program on our computer. But even
this is not all, that a more holographic understanding of time may
offer.
The
Holographic Future
As disconcerting, as having
access to the entire past is, it pales beside the notion, that the
future is also accessible in the cosmic hologram. Still, there is an
enormous body of evidence, that proves at least some future events are
as easy to see, as past events. This has been amply demonstrated in
literally hundreds of studies. In the 1930s J. B. and Louisa Rhine
discovered, that volunteers could guess, what cards would be drawn
randomly from a deck with a success rate, that was better, than chance
by odds of three million to one.
206-207
In the 1970s Helmut Schmidt, a physicist at Boeing Aircraft in Seattle,
Washington, invented a device, that enabled him to test whether people
could predict random subatomic events. In repeated tests with three
volunteers and over sixty thousand trials, he obtained results, that
were one billion to one against chance. In his work at the Dream
Laboratory at Maimonides Medical Center, Montague Ullman, along with
psychologist Stanley Krippner and researcher Charles Honorton, produced
compelling evidence, that accurate precognitive information can also be
obtained in dreams. In their study, volunteers were asked to spend
eight consecutive nights at the sleep laboratory, and each night they
were asked to try to dream about a picture, that would be chosen at
random the next day and shown to them. Ullman and his colleagues hoped
to get one success out of eight, but found, that some subjects could
score as many as five "hits" out of eight. For example, after waking,
one volunteer said, that he had dreamed of "a large concrete building"
from which a "patient" was trying to escape. The patient had a white
coat on, like a doctor's coat, and had gotten only "as far, as the
archway. " The painting chosen at random the next day turned out to be
Van Gogh's Hospital Corridor at St. Remy, a watercolor, depicting a
lone patient, standing at the end of a bleak and massive hallway and
quickly exiting through a door beneath an archway. In their
remote-viewing experiments at Stanford Research Institute, Puthoff and
Targ found that, in addition to being able to psychically describe
remote locations, that experimenters were visiting in the present, test
subjects could also describe locations experimenters would be visiting
in the future, before the locations had even been decided
upon.
In one instance, for example, an
unusually talented subject, named Hella Hammid, a photographer by
vocation, was asked to describe the spot Puthoff would be visiting
one-half hour hence. She concentrated and said, she could see him
entering "a black iron triangle." The triangle was "bigger, than a
man," and, although
she did not know precisely what it was, she could
hear a rhythmic squeaking sound occurring "about once a second." Ten
minutes before she did this, Puthoff had set out on a half-hour drive
in the Menlo Park and Palo Alto areas. At the end of the half hour, and
well after Hammid had recorded her perception of the black iron
triangle, Puthoff took out ten sealed envelopes, containing ten
different target locations. Using a random number generator, he chose
one at random. Inside was the
address of a small park about six miles from the laboratory. He drove
to the park, and when he got there, he found a children's
swing—the black iron triangle—and walked into its midst.
When he sat down in the swing it squeaked rhythmically, as it swung
back and forth. Puthoff and Targ's precognitive remote-viewing findings
have been duplicated by numerous laboratories around the world,
including Jahn and Dunne's research facility at Princeton. Indeed, in
334 formal trials Jahn and Dunne found, that volunteers were able to
come up with accurate precognitive information 62 percent of the time.
Even more dramatic are the results of the so-called "chair tests," a
famous series of experiments devised by Croiset First, the experimenter
would randomly select a chair from the seating plan for an upcoming
public event in a large hall or auditorium. The hall could be located
in any city in the world and only events, that did not have reserved
seating qualified. Then, without telling Croiset the name or location
of the hall, or the nature of the event, the experimenter would ask the
Dutch psychic to describe, who would be sitting in the seat during the
evening in question. Over the course of a twenty-five-year period,
numerous investigators in both Europe and America put Croiset through
the rigors of the chair test and found, that he was almost always
capable of giving an accurate and detailed description of the person,
who would be sitting in the chair, including describing their gender,
facial features, dress, occupation, and even incidents from their past.
For instance, on January 6, 1969, in a study conducted by Dr. Jule
Eisenbud, a clinical professor of psychiatry at the University of
Colorado Medical School, Croiset was told, that a chair had been chosen
for an event, that would take place on January 23, 1969. Croiset, who
was in Utrecht, Holland, at the time, told Eisenbud, that the person,
who
would sit in the chair would be a man five feet nine inches in height,
who brushed his black hair straight back, had a gold tooth in his lower
jaw, a scar on his big toe, who worked in both science and industry,
and sometimes got his lab coat stained by a greenish chemical. On
January 23, 1969, the man, who sat down in the chair, which was in an
auditorium in Denver, Colorado, fit Croiset's description in every way,
but one. He was not five feet nine, but five feet nine and
three-quarters. The list goes on and on.
208-209
What is the explanation for such findings? Krippner believes, that
Bohm's assertion, that the mind can access the implicate order, is one
explanation...The hologram-
like nature of many precognitive experiences
provides further evidence, that the ability to foresee the future,
is a holographic phenomenon. As with retrocognition, psychics report,
that precognitive information often appears to them in the form of
3-dimensional images. Cuban-born psychic Tony Cordero says, that when
he
sees the future, it's like watching a movie in his mind. Cordero saw
one
of the first such movies, when he was a child and had a vision of the
Communist takeover of Cuba.
"I told my family, that I saw red flags all over Cuba, and they were
going to have to leave the country, and that a lot of members of the
family were going to be shot", says Cordero. "I actually saw relatives
being shot. I could smell smoke and could hear the sound of gunfire. I
feel like, I am in the situation. I can hear people talking, but
they cannot hear or see me. It's like travelling into time or
something. The words psychics use, to describe their experiences, are
also similar to Bohm's. Garrett described clairvoyance as "an
intensely accute sensing of some aspects of life in operation, and
since at clairvoyant levels time is undivided and whole, one often
perceives the object or event in its past, present and/or future phases
in abruptly swift successions."
We
Are All Precognitive
Bohm's assertion, that every human consciousness has its source in the
implicate, implies, that we all possess the ability to access the
future,
and this is also supported by the evidence. Jahn and Dunne's discovery,
that even normal individuals do well in precognitive remote-viewing
tests, is one indication of the wide
spread nature of the ability.
Numerous other findings, both experimental and anecdotal, provide
additional evidence. In a 1934 BBC broadcast Dame Edith Lyttelton, a
member of the politically and socially prominent Balfour family in
England and the president of the British Society for Psychical
Research, invited listeners to send in accounts of their own
precognitive experiences. She was inundated with mail, and even after
eliminating the cases, that didn't have corroborative (confirming)
evidence, she still had enough to fill a volume on the subject.
Similarly, surveys, conducted by Louisa Rhine, revealed, that
precognitions occur more frequently, than any other kind of psychic
experience. Studies also show, that precognitive visions tend to be of
tragedies, with premonitions of unhappy events outnumbering happy ones
by a ratio of 4 to 1. Presentiments of death predominate, with
accidents coming in second, and illnesses third. The reason for this
seems obvious. We are so thoroughly conditioned to believe, that
perceiving the future is not possible, our natural precognitive
abilities have gone dormant. Like the superhuman strengths individuals
display during life-threatening emergencies, they only spill over into
our conscious minds during times of crisis - when someone near to us is
about to die; when our children or some other loved one is in danger,
and so on. That our "sophisticated" understanding of reality is
responsible for our inability to both grasp and utilize the true nature
of our relationship with time is evident in the fact, that primitive
cultures nearly always score better on ESP tests, than so-called
civilized cultures. Future evidence, that we have relegated our innate
precognitive abilities to the hinterland of the unconscious, can be
found in the close association between premonitions and dreams. Studies
show, that from 60 to 68% of all precognitions occur during dreaming.
We
may have banished our ability to see the future from our conscious
minds, but it is still very active in the deeper strata of our psyches.
210-211
Tribal cultures are well aware of this fact, and shamanic traditions
almost universally stress how important dreaming is in divining the
future. Even our most ancient writings pay homage to the premonitory
power of dreams... The antiquity of such traditions indicates, that the
tendency of premonitions to occur in dreams, is due to more, than just
our current skeptical attitude toward precognition. The proximity, the
unconscious mind has to the atemporal realm of the implicate, may also
play a role. Because our dreaming self is deeper in the psyche, than
our
conscious self—and thus closer to the primal ocean, in which past,
present, and future become one—it may be easier for it to access
information about the future. Whatever the reason, it should come as no
surprise, that other methods, for accessing the unconscious, can also
produce precognitive information. For example, in the 1960s Karlis Osis
and hypnotist J. Fahler found, that hypnotized subjects scored
significantly higher on precognition tests, than nonhypnotized
subjects.
Other studies have also confirmed the ESP-enhancing effects of
hypnosis. However, no amount of dry statistical data has the impact of
an example from real life. In his book "The Future Is Now: The
Significance of Precognition", Arthur Osborn records the results of a
hypnosis-precognition experiment involving the French actress Irene
Muza. After being hypnotized and asked, if she could see her future,
Muza replied, "My career will be short: I dare not say, what my end
will
be: it will be terrible."
Startled, the experimenters decided not to tell Muza, what she had
reported, and gave her a posthypnotic suggestion to forget everything
she had said. When she awakened from her trance, she had no memory of,
what she had predicted for herself. Even if she had known, it would not
have caused the type of death, she suffered. A few months later her
hairdresser accidentally spilled some mineral spirits on a lighted
stove, causing Muza's hair and clothing to be set on fire. Within
seconds
she was engulfed in flames and died in a hospital a few hours
later.
Hololeaps
of Faith
The events, that befell Irene
Muza
raise an important question. If Muza had known about the fate, she had
predicted for herself, would she have been able to avoid it?
Put another way, is the future frozen and completely predetermined, or
can it be changed? At first blush, the existence of precognitive
phenomena seems to indicate, that the former is the case, but this
would
be a very disturbing state of affairs. If the future is a hologram,
whose every detail is already fixed, it means, that we have no free
will. We are all just puppets of destiny moving mindlessly through a
script, that has already been written. Fortunately the evidence
overwhelmingly indicates, that this is not the case. The literature is
filled with examples of people, who were able to use their precognitive
glimpses of the future to avoid disasters, instances in which
individuals correctly foresaw the crash of a plane and avoided death by
not getting on, or had a vision of their children being drowned in a
flood and moved them out of harm's way just in the nick of time. There
are nineteen documented cases of people, who had precognitive glimpses
of the sinking of the Titanic—some were experienced by passengers,
who paid attention to their premonitions and survived, some were
experienced by passengers, who ignored their forebodings and drowned,
and some were experienced by individuals, who were not in either of
these two categories. Such incidents strongly suggest, that the future
is not set, but is plastic and can be changed. But this view also
brings with it a problem. If the future is still in a state of flux,
what is Croiset tapping into, when he describes the individual, who
will
sit down in a particular chair seventeen days hence? How can the future
both exist and not exist?
Loye provides a possible answer. He believes, that reality is a giant
hologram, and in it the past, present, and future are indeed fixed, at
least up to a point.
The rub
is, that it is
not the only hologram. There
are many such holographic entities floating in the timeless and
spaceless waters of the implicate, jostling and swimming around one
another like so many amoebas. "Such holographic entities could also be
visualized as parallel worlds, parallel universes, " says Loye. Thus,
the future of any given holographic universe is predetermined, and when
a person has a precognitive glimpse of the future, they are tuning into
the future of that particular hologram only. But like amoebas, these
holograms also occasionally swallow and engulf each other, melding and
bifurcating like the protoplasmic globs of energy, that they really
are.
Sometimes these jostlings jolt us and are responsible for the
premonitions, that from time to time engulf us. And when we act upon a
premonition and appear to alter the future, what we are really doing is
leaping from one hologram to another.
212-213
Loye calls these intra holographic leaps "hololeaps" and feels, that
they are, what provides us with our true capacity for both, insight and
freedom. Bohm sums up the same situation in a slightly different
manner. "When
people dream of accidents correctly and do not take the plane or ship,
it is not the actual future, that they were seeing. It was merely
something in the present, which is implicate and moving toward making
that future. In fact, the future, they saw, differed from the actual
future, because they altered it. Therefore I think, it's more plausible
to say, that, if these phenomena exist, there's an anticipation of the
future in the implicate order in the present. As they used to say,
coming
events cast their shadows in the present. Their shadows are being cast
deep in the implicate order."
Bohm's and Loye's descriptions seem to be two different ways of, trying
to express the same thing—a view of the future as a hologram, that
is substantive enough for us to perceive it, but malleable enough to be
susceptible to change. Others have used still different words to sum
up,
what appears to be the same basic thought. Cordero describes the future
as a hurricane, that is beginning to form and gather momentum, becoming
more concrete and unavoidable, as it approaches. Ingo Swann, a gifted
psychic, who has produced impressive results in various studies,
including Puthoff and Targ's remote-viewing research, speaks of the
future, as composed of "crystallizing possibilities."
The Hawaiian kahunas, widely esteemed for their precognitive powers,
also speak of the future as fluid, but in the process of
"crystallizing"
and believe, that great world events are crystallized furthest in
advance, as are the most important events in a person's life, such as
marriage, accidents, and death. The numerous premonitions, that are now
known to have preceded both the
Kennedy assassination and the Civil War (even George Washington had a
precognitive vision of a future civil war somehow involving "Africa, "
the issue, that all men are "brethren", and the word Union) seem to
corroborate this kahuna belief. Loye's notion, that there are many
separate holographic futures and we
choose, which events are going to manifest and which are not, by
leaping
from one hologram to another, carries with it another implication.
Choosing one holographic future over another is essentially the same as
creating the future. As we have seen, there is a good deal of evidence,
suggesting, that consciousness plays a significant role in creating the
here and now. But if the mind can stray beyond the boundaries of the
present and occasionally stalk the misty landscape of the future, do we
have a hand, in creating future events as well? Put another way, are
the
vagaries of life truly random, or do we play a role in literally
sculpting our own destiny? Remarkably, there is some intriguing
evidence, that the latter may be the case.
The
Shadowy Stuff of the Soul
Dr. Joel Whitton, a professor of psychiatry at the University of
Toronto Medical School, has also used hypnosis to study, what people
unconsciously know about themselves. However, instead of asking them
about their future, Whitton, who is an expert in clinical hypnosis and
also holds a degree in neurobiology, asks them about their past, their
distant past to be exact. For the last several decades Whitton has
quietly and without fanfare been gathering evidence suggestive of
reincarnation. Reincarnation is a difficult subject, for so much
silliness has been presented about it, that many people dismiss it out
of hand. Most do not realize, that in addition to (and one might even
say in spite of) the sensational claims of celebrities and the stories
of reincarnated Cleopatras, that garner most of the media attention,
there is a good deal of serious research, being done on reincarnation.
In the last several decades a small, but growing number of highly
credentialed researchers has compiled an impressive body of evidence on
the subject. Whitton is one of these researchers. The evidence does not
prove, that reincarnation exists, nor is it the intention of this book
to make such an argument. In fact, it is difficult to imagine, what
might constitute perfect proof of reincarnation. Rather, the findings,
that will be touched upon here, are offered only as intriguing
possibilities and because they are relevant to our current discussion.
Thus, they deserve our open-minded consideration. The main thrust of
Whitton's hypnosis research is based on a simple and startling fact.
When individuals are hypnotized, they often remember, what appear to be
memories of previous existences. Studies have shown, that over 90
percent of all hypnotizable individuals are able to recall these
apparent memories. The phenomenon is widely recognized, even by
skeptics. For example, the psychiatry textbook "Trauma, Trance and
Transformation" warns fledgling hypnotherapists not to be surprised, if
such memories surface spontaneously in their hypnotized patients.
214-215
The author of the text rejects the idea of rebirth, but does note, that
such memories can have remarkable healing potential nonetheless. The
meaning of this phenomenon is, of course, hotly debated. Many
researchers argue, that such memories are fantasies or fabrications of
the unconscious mind, and there is no doubt, that this is sometimes the
case, especially if the hypnotic session or "regression" is conducted
by an unskilled hypnotist, who does not know the proper questioning
techniques, required to safeguard against eliciting fantasies. But
there
are also numerous cases on record, in which individuals have, under the
guidance of skilled professionals, produced memories, that do not
appear
to be fantasies. The evidence, assembled by Whitton, falls into this
category. To conduct his research, Whitton gathered together a core
group of roughly thirty people. These included individuals from all
walks of life, from truck drivers to computer scientists, some of whom
believed in reincarnation and some of whom did not. He then hypnotized
them individually and spent literally thousands of hours recording
everything they had to say about their alleged previous existences.
Even
in its broad
strokes the information was fascinating. One striking
aspect was the degree of agreement between the subjects' experiences.
All reported numerous past lives, some as many, as twenty to
twenty-five, although a practical limit was reached, when Whitton
regressed them, to what he calls, their "caveman existences," when one
lifetime became indistinguishable from the next. AH reported, that
gender was not specific to the soul, and many had lived at least one
life, as the opposite sex. And all reported, that the purpose of life
was
to evolve and learn, and that multiple existences facilitated this
process. Whitton also found evidence, that strongly suggested, the
experiences were actual past lives.
One unusual feature was the
ability
the memories had to explain a wide range of seemingly unrelated events
and experiences in the subjects' current lives. For example, one man, a
psychologist born and raised in Canada, had possessed an inexplicable
British accent as a child. He also had an irrational fear of breaking
his leg, a phobia of air travel, a terrible nail-biting problem, an
obsessive fascination with torture, and as a teenager had had a brief
and enigmatic vision of being in a room with a Nazi officer, shortly
after operating the pedals of a car during a driving test. Under
hypnosis the man recalled being a British pilot during World War II.
While on a mission over Germany his plane was hit by a shower of
bullets, one of which penetrated the fuselage and broke his leg. This
in turn caused him to lose control of the plane's foot pedals, forcing
him to crash-land. He was subsequently captured by the Nazis, tortured
for information by having his nails pulled out, and died a short time
later. Many of the subjects also experienced profound psychological and
physical healings, as a result of the traumatic past-life memories they
unearthed, and gave uncannily accurate historical details about the
times, in which they had lived.
Some
even spoke
languages, unknown to
them. While reliving an apparent past life as a Viking, one man, a
thirty-seven-year-old behavioral scientist, shouted words, that
linguistic authorities later identified as Old Norse. After being
regressed to an ancient Persian lifetime, the same man began to write
in a spidery, Arabic-style script, that an expert in Near Eastern
languages identified, as an authentic representation of Sassanid
Pahlavi, a long extinct Mesopotamian tongue, that flourished between A.
D. 226 and 651." But Whitton's most remarkable discovery came, when he
regressed subjects to the interim between lives, a dazzling,
light-filled realm, in which there was "no such thing as time or space,
as we know it." According to his subjects, part of the purpose of this
realm was to allow them to plan their next life, to literally sketch
out the important events and circumstances, that would befall them in
the future. But this process was not simply some fairy-tale exercise in
wish fulfillment. Whitton found, that when individuals were in the
between-life realm, they entered an unusual state of consciousness, in
which they were acutely self-aware and had a heightened moral and
ethical sense. In addition, they no longer possessed the ability to
rationalize away any of their faults and misdeeds, and saw themselves
with total honesty. To distinguish it from our normal everyday
consciousness, Whitton calls this intensely conscientious state of mind
"metaconsciousness." Thus, when subjects planned their next life, they
did so with a sense of moral obligation. They would choose to be reborn
with people, whom they had wronged in a previous life, so they would
have
the opportunity to make amends for their actions. They planned pleasant
encounters with "soul mates", individuals, with whom they had built a
loving and mutually beneficial relationship over many lifetimes; and
they scheduled "accidental" events to fulfill still other lessons and
purposes.
216-217
One man said, that as he planned his next life, he visualized
"a sort of clockwork instrument, into which you could insert certain
parts, in order for specific consequen
ces to follow." These consequences were not always pleasant. After
being regressed to a
metaconscious state, a woman, who had been raped, when she was
thirty-
seven, revealed, that she had actually planned the event, before
she had come into this incarnation. As she explained, it had been
necessary for her to experience a tragedy at that age, in order to
force
her to change her "entire soul complexion" and thus break through to a
deeper and more positive understanding of the meaning of life. Another
subject, a man, afflicted with a serious and life-threatening kidney
disease, disclosed, that he had chosen the illness to punish himself
for
a past-life transgression. However, he also revealed, that dying, from
the kidney disease, was not part of his script, and before he had come
into this life, he had also arranged to encounter someone or something,
that would help him remember this fact and hence enable him to heal
both his guilt and his body. True to his word, after he started his
sessions with Whitton, he experienced a near miraculous complete
recovery. Not all of Whitton's subjects were so eager to learn about
the future their meta conscious selves, had laid out for them. Several
censored their own memories and asked Whitton to please give them
posthypnotic instructions not to remember anything, that they had said
during trance. As they explained, they did not want to be tempted to
tamper with the script their metaconscious selves had written for them.
This is an astounding idea. Is it possible, that our unconscious mind
is
not only aware of the rough outline of our destiny, but actually steers
us toward its fulfillment?
Whitton's research is not the only evidence, that this may be the case.
In a statistical study of 28 serious U. S. railroad accidents,
parapsychologist William Cox found, that significantly fewer
people took
trains on accident days, than on the same day in previous weeks. Cox's
finding suggests, that we all may be constantly unconsciously
precognizing the future and making decisions, based on that
information:
some of us opting to avoid mishap, and perhaps some—like the
woman, who chose to experience a personal tragedy and the man, who
elected to endure a kidney disease—choosing to experience
negative situations to fulfill other unconscious designs and purposes.
"Carefully or haphazardly, we choose our earthly circumstances, " says
Whitton. "The message of metaconsciousness is, that the life situation
of every human being is neither random, nor inappropriate. Seen
objectively from the interlife, every human experience is simply
another lesson in the cosmic classroom." It is important to note, that
the existence of such unconscious agendas does not mean, that our lives
are rigidly predestined and all fates unavoidable. The fact, that many
of Whitton's subjects asked not to remember, what they said under
hypnosis, implies again, that the future is only roughly outlined and
still subject to change. Whitton is not the only reincarnation
researcher, who has uncovered evidence, that our unconscious has more
of
a hand in our lives, than we may realize.
Another is Dr. Ian Stevenson,
a professor of psychiatry at the University of Virginia Medical School.
Instead of using hypnosis, Stevenson interviews young children, who
have
spontaneously remembered apparent previous existences. He has spent
more, than thirty years in this pursuit and has collected and analyzed
thousands of cases from all over the globe. According to Stevenson,
spontaneous past-life recall is relatively common among children, so
common, that the number of cases, that seem worth considering, far
exceeds
his staff's ability to investigate them. Generally children are between
the ages of two and four, when they start talking about their "other
life, " and frequently they remember dozens of particulars, including
their name, the names of family members and friends, where they lived,
what their house looked like, what they did for a living, how they
died, and even obscure information such as, where they hid money,
before
they died and, in cases involving murder, sometimes even, who killed
them. Indeed, frequently their memories are so detailed, Stevenson is
able to track down the identity of their previous personality and
verify virtually everything, they have said. He has even taken children
to the area, in which their past incarnation lived, and watched as they
navigated effortlessly through strange neighborhoods and correctly
identified their former house, belongings, and past-life relatives and
friends. Like Whitton, Stevenson has gathered an enormous amount of
data, suggestive of reincarnation, and to date has published six
volumes
on his findings. And like Whitton, he also has found evidence, that the
unconscious plays a far greater role in our makeup and destiny, than we
have hitherto suspected. He has corroborated Whitton's finding, that we
are frequently reborn with individuals, we have known in previous
existences, and that, foe guiding, force behind our choices, is often
affection or a sense of guilt or indebtedness.
218-219
He agrees, that personal
responsibility, not chance, is the arbiter of our fate. He has found,
that although a person's material conditions can vary greatly from one
life to the next, their moral conduct, interests, aptitudes, and
attitudes remain the same. Individuals, who were criminals in their
previous existence, tend to be drawn to criminal behavior again;
people,
who were generous and kind, continue to be generous and kind, and so
on.
From this Stevenson concludes, that it is not the outward trappings of
life that matter, but the inner ones, the joys, sorrows, and "inner
growths" of the personality, that appear to be most important. Most
significant of all,
he found no compelling evidence of "retributive
karma" or any indication, that we are cosmically punished for our sins.
"There is then—if we judge by the evidence of the cases—no
external judge of our conduct and no being, who shifts us from life to
life, according to our deserts. If this world is (in Keats's phrase) 'a
vale of soul-
making, we are the makers of our own souls, " states
Stevenson. Stevenson
has also uncovered a phenomenon, that did not turn
up in Whitton's study, a discovery that provides even more dramatic
evidence of the power, the unconscious mind has, to sculpt and
influence
our life circumstances. He has found, that a person's previous
incarnation can apparently affect the very shape and structure of their
current physical body. He has discovered, for example, that Burmese
children, who remember
previous lives as British or American Air Force
pilots, shot down over Burma during World War II, all have fairer hair
and complexions, than their siblings. He has also found instances, in
which distinctive facial features, foot deformities and other
characteristics, have carried over from one life to the next. Most
numerous among these are physical injuries, carrying over as scars or
birthmarks. In one case, a boy, who remembered, being murdered in his
former life, by having his throat slit, still had a long reddish mark,
resembling a scar across his neck. In another, a boy, who remembered
committing suicide, by shooting himself in the head in his past
incarnation, still had two scarlike birthmarks, that lined up perfectly
along the bullet's trajectory, one, where the bullet had entered, and
one,
where it had exited. And in another, a boy had a birthmark, resembling
a
surgical scar, complete with a line of red marks, resembling stitch
wounds, in the exact location, where his previous personality had had
surgery. In fact, Stevenson has gathered hundreds of such cases and is
currently compiling a four-volume study of the phenomenon. In some of
the cases he has even been able to obtain hospital and/or autopsy
reports of the deceased personality and show, that such injuries not
only occurred, but were in the exact location of the present birthmark
or deformity. He feels, that such marks not only provide some of the
strongest evidence in favor of reincarnation, but also suggest the
existence of some kind of intermediate nonphysical body, that functions
as a carrier of these attributes between one life and the next. He
states: "It seems to me, that the imprint of wounds on the previous
personality must be carried between lives on some kind of an extended
body, which in turn acts as a template for the production on a new
physical body of birthmarks and deformities, that correspond to the
wounds on the body of the previous personality."
Stevenson's theorized "template body" echoes Tiller's assertion, that
the human energy field is a holographic template, that guides the form
and structure of the physical body. Put another way, it is a kind of
three-dimensional blueprint, around which the physical body forms.
Similarly, his findings, regarding birthmarks, add further support to
the
idea, that we are at heart just images, holographic constructs, created
by thought. Stevenson has also noted, that although his research
suggests, that we are the creators of our own lives and, to a certain
extent, our own bodies, our participation in this process is so
passive,
as to be almost involuntary. Deep strata of the psyche appear to be
involved in these choices, strata, that are much more in touch with the
implicate. Or as Stevenson puts it:
"Levels
of mental
activity far
deeper, than those, that regulate the digestion of our supper
in our
stomach [and] our ordinary breathing, must govern these
processes."
As
unorthodox, as many of Stevenson's conclusions are, his reputation, as
a
careful and thorough investigator, has gained him respect in some
unlikely quarters.
His findings have been published in such
distinguished scientific periodicals as the American Journal of
Psychiatry, the Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease, and the
International Journal of Comparative Sociology. And in a review of one
of his works the prestigious Journal of the American Medical
Association stated, that he has "painstakingly and unemotionally
collected a detailed series of cases, in which the evidence for
reincarnation is difficult to understand on any other grounds.... He
has placed on record a large amount of data, that cannot be ignored."
Our Thoughts
220-221
As with so many of the "discoveries" we have looked at, the idea, that
some, deeply unconscious and even spiritual, part of us can reach
across
the boundaries of time and is responsible for our destiny, can also be
found in many shamanic traditions and other sources. According to the
Batak people of Indonesia, everything, a person experiences, is
determined by his or her soul, or tondi, which reincarnates from one
body to the next and is a medium capable of reproducing not only the
behavior, but the physical attributes of the person's former self. The
Ojibway Indians also believed a person's life is scripted by an
invisible spirit or soul and is laid out in a manner, that promotes
growth and development. If a person dies without completing all the
lessons, they need to learn, their spirit body returns and is reborn in
another physical body. The kahunas call this invisible aspect the
aumakua, or "high self." Like Whitton's metaconsciousness, it is the
unconscious portion of a person, that can see the parts of the future,
that are crystallized, or "set. " It is also the part of us, that is
responsible for creating our destiny, but it is not alone in this
process. Like many of the researchers, mentioned in this book, the
kahunas believed, that thoughts are things and are composed of a subtle
energetic substance, they called kino mea, or "shadowy body stuff."
Hence, our hopes, fears, plans, worries, guilts, dreams, and imaginings
do not vanish after leaving our mind, but are turned into thought
forms, and these, too, become some of the rough strands, from which the
high self weaves our future. Most people are not in charge of their own
thoughts, said the kahunas, and constantly bombard their high self with
an uncontrolled and contradictory mixture of plans, wishes, and fears.
This confuses the high self and is why most people's lives appear to be
equally haphazard and uncontrolled. Powerful kahunas, who were in open
communication with their high selves, were said to be able to help a
person remake his or her future. Similarly, it was considered extremely
important that people take time out at frequent intervals, to think
about their lives and visualize in concrete terms, what they wished to
happen to themselves. By doing this the kahunas asserted, that people
can more consciously control the events, that befall them and make
their
own future. In an idea, that is reminiscent of Tiller and Stevenson's
notion of a subtle intermediary body, the kahunas believed this shadowy
body stuff also forms a template, upon which the physical body is
molded. Again it was said, that kahunas, who were in extraordinary
attunement with their high self, could sculpt and reform the shadowy
body stuff, and hence the physical body, of another person and this
was,
how miraculous healings were effected. This view also provides an
interesting parallel to some of our own conclusions, as to why thoughts
and images have such a powerful impact on health. The tantric mystics
of Tibet referred to the "stuff' of thoughts as tsai and held, that
every mental
action produced waves of this mysterious energy. They
believed the entire Universe is a product of the mind, and is created
and animated by the collective tsal of all beings. Most people are
unaware, that they possess this power, said the Tantrists, because the
average human mind functions "like a small puddle, isolated from the
great ocean." Only great yogis, skilled at contacting the deeper levels
of the mind, were said to be able consciously to utilize such forces,
and one of the things they did, to achieve this goal, was to visualize
repeatedly the desired creation. Tibetan tantric texts are filled with
visualization exercises, or "sadhanas," designed for such purposes,
and
monks
of
some sects, such as the Kargyupa, would spend as long, as
seven years in complete solitude, in a cave or a sealed room,
perfecting their visualization abilities.
The
twelfth-century
Persian
Sufis also stressed the importance of visualization, in altering and
reshaping one's destiny, and called the subtle matter of thought alam
almithal. Like many clairvoyants, they believed, that human beings
possess a subtle body, controlled by chakralike energy centers. They
also held, that reality is divided into a series of subtler planes of
being, or Hadarat, and that the plane of being directly adjacent to
this one was a kind of template reality, in which the alam almithal of
one's thoughts, formed into idea-images, which in turn eventually
determined the course of one's life. The Sufis also added a twist of
their own. They felt the heart chakra, or himma, was the agent
responsible for this process, and that control of the heart chakra was
therefore a prerequisite for controlling one's destiny. Edgar Cayce
also spoke of thoughts as tangible things, a finer form of matter and,
when he was in trance, repeatedly told his clients, that their thoughts
created their destiny and that "thought is the builder. " in his view,
the thinking process is like a spider, constantly spinning, constantly
adding to its web.
222-223
Every
moment of our lives we are creating the images
and patterns, that give our future energy and shape, said Cayce.
Paramahansa Yogananda advised people to visualize the future, they
desired for themselves and charge it with the "energy of
concentration." As he put it, "Proper visualization
by the exercise of concentration
and willpower enables us to materialize thoughts, not only as
dreams or
visions in the mental realm, but also as experiences in the material
realm."
Indeed,
such ideas can be found in a wide range of disparate sources.
"We are, what we
think" said the Buddha. "All, that we are, arises with
our thoughts. With our thoughts
we make
the world." "As a man acts, so
does he become. As a man's desire is, so is his destiny" states the
Hindu pre-Christian Brihadaranyaka Upanishad.
"All
things in the world of Nature are not controlled by Fate, for the
soul has a principle of its own" said the fourth-century Greek
philosopher lamblichus...
An
Indication of Something Deeper
Even today the idea, that our thoughts create our destiny, is still
very
much in the air. It is the subject of best-selling self- help books,
such as Shakti Gawain's "Creative Visualization" and Louise L. Hay's
"You Can Heal Your Life". Hay, who says, she cured herself of cancer by
changing her mental patterning, gives hugely successful workshops on
her techniques. It is the main philosophy inherent in many popular
"channeled" works such as "A Course in Miracles" and Jane Robert's Seth
books. It is also being embraced by some eminent psychologists. Jean
Houston, a past president of the Association for Humanistic Psychology
and current Director of the Foundation for Mind Research in Pomona, New
York, discusses the idea at length in her book "The Possible Human".
Houston also gives a variety of visualization exercises in the work and
even calls one "Orchestrating the Brain and Entering the Holoverse."
Another book, that draws heavily on the holographic model to support
the
idea, that we can use visualization to reshape our future, is Mary
Orser
and Richard A. Zaire's "Changing Your Destiny". In addition, Zarro is
the founder of Future-shaping Technologies, a company, that gives
seminars on "futureshaping" techniques to businesses, and numbers both
Panasonic and the International Banking and Credit Association among
its clients. Former astronaut Edgar Mitchell, the sixth man to walk on
the moon and a longtime explorer of inner as well, as outer space, has
taken a similar task. In 1973 he founded the Institute of Noetic
Sciences, a California-
based organization, devoted to researching such
powers of the mind. The institute is still going strong, and current
projects include a massive study of the mind's role in miraculous
healings and spontaneous remissions, and a study of the role,
consciousness plays, in creating a positive global future. "We create
our own reality, because our inner emotional—our
subconscious—reality draws us into those situations, from which we
learn," states Mitchell. "We experience it as strange things, happening
to us [and] we meet the people in our lives, that we need to learn
from.
And so we create these circumstances at a very deep metaphysical and
subconscious level." Is the current popularity of the idea, that we
create our own destiny, just a fad, or is its presence in so many
different cultures and times an indication of something much deeper, a
sign, that it is something all human beings intuitively know is true?
At
present this question remains unanswered, but in a holographic
universe—a universe, in which the mind participates with reality
and in which the innermost stuff of our psyches can register, as
synchronicities in the objective world—the notion, that we are
also the sculptors of our own fate, is not so farfetched. It even seems
probable.
Three Last Pieces of Evidence
Before concluding, three last pieces of evidence deserve to be looked
at. Although not conclusive, each offers a peek at still other
time-transcending abilities consciousness may possess in a holographic
universe.
MASS DREAMS OF THE FUTURE
224-225
Another past-life researcher, who turned up evidence suggestive, that
the
mind has a hand in creating one's destiny, was the late San
Francisco-based psychologist Dr. Helen Wambach. Wambach's approach was
to hypnotize groups of people in small workshops, regress them to
specified time periods, and ask them a predetermined list of questions
about their sex, clothing style, occupation, utensils, used in eating,
and so on. Over the course of her twenty-nine-year investigation
of the past-life phenomenon, she hypnotized literally thousands of
individuals and amassed some impressive findings.
One criticism leveled against reincarnation is, that people only seem
to
remember past lives as famous or historical personages. Wambach,
however, found, that more than 90 percent of her subjects recalled past
lives as peasants, laborers, farmers, and primitive food gatherers.
Less than 10 percent remembered incarnations as aristocrats, and none
remembered being anyone famous, a finding, that argues against the
notion, that past-life memories are fantasies. Her subjects were also
extraordinarily accurate, when it came to historical details, even
obscure ones. For instance, when people remembered lives in the 1700s,
they described using a three-pronged fork to eat their evening meals,
but after 1790 they described most forks as having four prongs, an
observation, that correctly reflects the historical evolution of the
fork. Subjects were equally accurate when it came to describing
clothing and footwear, types of foods eaten, et cetera. Wambach
discovered,
she could also progress people to future lives. Indeed, her
subjects' descriptions of coming centuries were so fascinating, she
conducted a major future-life-
progression project in France and the
United States. Unfortunately, she passed away before completing the
study, but psychologist Chet Snow, a former colleague of Wambach's,
carried on her work and recently published the results in a book
entitled "Mass Dreams of the Future".
When
the reports of
the 2, 500
people, who participated in the project, were tallied, several
interesting features emerged. First, virtually all of the respondents
agreed, that the population of the earth had decreased dramatically.
Many did not even find themselves in physical bodies in the various
future time periods specified, and those, who did, noted, that the
population was much smaller, than it is today. In addition, the
respondents divided up neatly into four categories, each relating a
different future.
One group described a joyless and sterile future, in which most people
lived in space stations, wore silvery suits, and ate synthetic food.
Another, the "New Agers" reported, living happier and more natural
lives in natural settings, in harmony with one another, and in
dedication to learning and spiritual development. Type 3, the "hi-tech
urbanites", described a bleak mechanical future, in which people lived
in underground cities and cities enclosed in domes and bubbles. Type 4
described themselves as post-disaster survivors, living in a world,
that
had been ravaged by some global, possibly nuclear, disaster. People in
this group lived in homes ranging from urban ruins to caves to isolated
farms, wore plain handsewn clothing, that was often made of fur, and
obtained much of their food by hunting.
What is the explanation? Snow turns to the holographic model for the
answer, and like Loye, believes, that such findings suggest, that there
are several potential futures, or holoverses, forming in the gathering
mists of fate. But, like other past-life researchers, he also believes,
we
create our own destiny, both individually and collectively, and thus
the four scenarios are really a glimpse into the various potential
futures, the human race is creating for itself en masse. Consequently,
Snow recommends, that instead of building bomb shelters or moving to
areas, that won't be destroyed by the "coming Earth changes", predicted
by some psychics,
we should spend time believing in and visualizing a
positive future. He cites the Planetary Commission—the ad hoc
collection of millions of individuals around the world, who have agreed
to spend the hour of 12: 00 to 1: 00 P. M., Greenwich mean time, each
December thirty-first, united in prayer and meditation on world peace
and healing—as a step in the right direction. "If we are
continually shaping our future physical reality by today's collective
thoughts and actions, then the time to wake up to the alternative, we
have created, is now, " states Snow. "The choices between the kind of
Earth, represented by each of the Types, are clear. Which do we want
for
our grandchildren? Which do we want perhaps to return to ourselves
someday?"
CHANGING
THE PAST
The future may not be the only thing, that can be formed and reshaped
by human thought. At the 1988 Annual Convention of the
Parapsychological Association, Helmut Schmidt and Marilyn Schlitz
announced, that several experiments, they had conducted, indicated the
mind may be able to alter the past as well.
226-227
In one study Schmidt and Schlitz used a computerized randomization
process to record 1,000 different sequences of sound. Each sequence
consisted of 100 tones of varying duration, some of them pleasing to
the ear and some just bursts of noise. Because the selection process
was random, according to the laws of probability, each sequence should
contain roughly 50 percent pleasing sounds and 50 percent noise.
Cassette recordings of the sequences were then mailed to volunteers.
While listening to the prerecorded cassettes, the subjects were told to
try to psychokinetically increase the duration of the pleasing sounds
and decrease the durations of the noise. After the subjects completed
the task, they notified the lab of their attempts, Schmidt and Schlitz
then examined the original sequences. They discovered, that the
recordings, the subjects listened to, contained significantly longer
stretches of pleasing sounds, than noise. In other words, it appeared,
that the subjects had psychokinetically reached back through time and
had an effect on the randomized process, from which their prerecorded
cassettes had been made. In another test Schmidt and Schlitz programmed
the computer to produce 100-tone sequences randomly composed of four
different notes, and subjects were instructed to try to
psychokinetically cause more high notes to appear on the tapes, than
low. Again a retroactive PK effect was found. Schmidt and Schlitz also
discovered, that volunteers, who meditated regularly, exerted a greater
PK effect, than nonmeditators, suggesting again, that contact with the
unconscious is the key to accessing the reality-structuring portions of
the psyche. The idea, that we can psychokinetically alter events, that
have already
occurred is an unsettling notion, for we are so deeply programmed to
believe the past is frozen, as if it were a butterfly in glass, it is
difficult for us to imagine otherwise. But in a holographic universe, a
universe, in which time is an illusion and reality is no more, than a
mind-created image, it is a possibility, to which we may have to become
accustomed.
A
WALK THROUGH THE GARDEN OF TIME
As fantastic, as the above two notions are, they are small change,
compared to the last category of time anomaly, that merits our
attention. On August 10, 1901, two Oxford professors, Anne Moberly, the
principal of St. Hugh's College, Oxford, and Eleanor Jourdain, the vice
principal, were walking through the garden of the Petit Trianon at
Versailles, when they saw a shimmering effect pass over the landscape
in front of them, not unlike the special effects in a movie, when it
changes from one scene to another. After the shimmering passed, they
noticed, that the landscape had changed. Suddenly the people around
them were wearing eighteenth-century costumes and wigs and were
behaving in an agitated manner. As the two women stood dumbfounded, a
repulsive man with a pockmarked face approached and urged them to
change their direction. They followed him past a line of trees to a
garden, where they heard strains of music, floating through the air and
saw an aristocratic lady painting a watercolor. Eventually the vision
vanished and the landscape returned to normal, but the transformation
had been so dramatic, that when the women looked behind them, they
realized the path they had just walked down was now blocked by an old
stone wall. When they returned to England, they searched through
historical records and concluded, that they had been transported back
in time to the day, in which the sacking of the Tuileries and the
massacre of the Swiss Guards had taken place—which accounted for
the agitated manner of the people in the garden—and that the
woman in the garden was none other, than Marie Antoinette. So vivid was
the experience, that the women filled a booklength manuscript about the
occurrence and presented it to the British Society for Psychical
Research. What makes Moberly and Jourdain's experience so significant
is, that they did not simply have a retrocognitive vision of the past,
but actually walked back into the past, meeting people and wandering
around in the Tuileries garden as it was more, than one hundred years
earlier. Moberly and Jourdain's experience is difficult to accept as
real, but given, that it provided them with no obvious benefit, and
most certainly put their academic reputations at risk, one is hard
pressed to imagine, what would motivate them to make up such a story.
And it is not the only such occurrence at the Tuileries to be reported
to the British Society for Psychical Research. In May 1955, a London
solicitor and his wife also encountered several eighteenth-century
figures in the garden. And on another occasion, the staff of an
embassy, whose offices overlook Versailles, claims to have watched the
garden revert back to an earlier period of history as well. Here in the
United States parapsychologist Gardner Murphy, a former president of
both the American Psychological Association and the American Society
for Psychical Research, investigated a similar case, in which a woman,
228-229
identified only by the name Buterbaugh looked out the window of her
office at Nebraska Wesleyan University and saw the campus, as it was
fifty years earlier.
Gone were the bustling streets and the sorority
houses, and in their place was an open field and a sprinkling of trees,
their leaves aflutter in the breeze of a summer, long since passed. Is
the boundary between the present and the past so flimsy, that we can,
under the right circumstances, stroll back into the past with the same
ease, that we can stroll through a garden? At present we simply do not
know, but in a world, that is comprised less of solid objects,
traveling in Space and Time, and more of ghostly holograms of energy,
sustained by processes, that are at least partially connected to human
consciousness, such events may not be as impossible,
as they appear.
And if this seems disturbing—this idea, that our minds and even
our bodies are far less bound by the strictures of time, than we have
previously imagined, we should remember, that the idea the
Earth is round once proved equally frightening to a humanity,
convinced, that it was flat. The evidence, presented in this chapter,
suggests, that we are still children, when it comes to understanding
the true nature of time. And like all children, poised on the threshold
of adulthood,
we
should put aside our fears and come to terms with the way the world
really is. For in a holographic universe, a universe, in which all
things are just ghostly coruscations of energy, more than just our
understanding of time must change. There are still other shimmerings to
cross our landscape, still deeper depths to plumb.
Traveling
in the Superhologram
Access to holographic reality becomes experientially available, when
one's consciousness is freed from its dependence on the physical body.
So long as one remains tied to the body and its sensory modalities,
holographic reality at best can only be an intellectual construct. When
one [is freed from the body], one experiences it directly. That is why
mystics speak about their visions with such certitude and conviction,
while those, who haven't experienced this realm for themselves, are
left feeling skeptical or even indifferent. — Kenneth Ring, Ph.D.
"Life at Death". Time is not the only thing, that is illusory in a
holographic universe. Space, too, must be viewed, as a product of our
mode of perception. This is even more difficult to comprehend, than the
idea, that time is a construct, for when it comes to trying to
conceptualize "spacelessness", there are no easy analogies, no images
of
amoeboid universes or crystallizing futures, to fall back on. We are so
conditioned to think in terms of space as an absolute, that it is hard
for us even to begin to imagine, what it would be like to exist in a
realm, in which space did not exist.
230-231
Nonetheless, there is evidence, that we are ultimately no more bound by
space, than we are by time. One powerful indication, that this is so,
can be found in out-of-body phenomena, experiences, in which an
individual's conscious awareness appears to detach itself from the
physical body and travel to some other location. Out-of-body
experiences, or OBEs, have been reported throughout history by
individuals from all walks of life. Aldous Huxley, Goethe, D. H.
Lawrence, August Strindberg, and Jack London all reported having OBEs.
They were known to the Egyptians, the North American Indians, the
Chinese, the Greek philosophers, the medieval alchemists, the Oceanic
peoples, the Hindus, the Hebrews, and the Moslems. In a cross-cultural
study of 44 non-Western societies, Dean Shiels found, that only three
did not hold a belief in OBEs. ' In a similar study anthropologist
Erika Bourguignon looked at 488 world societies— or roughly 57
percent of all known societies—and found, that 437 of them, or 89
percent, had at least some tradition regarding OBEs. Even today studies
indicate, that OBEs are still widespread. The late Dr. Robert Crookall,
a geologist at the University of Aberdeen and an amateur
parapsychologist, investigated enough cases to fill nine books on the
subject.
In the 1960s Celia Green, the director of the Institute of
Psychophysical Research in Oxford, polled 115 students at Southampton
University and found, that 19 percent admitted to having an OBE. When
380 Oxford students were similarly questioned, 34 percent answered in
the affirmative. In a survey of 902 adults Haraldsson found, that 8
percent had experienced being out of their bodies at least once in
their life. And a 1980 survey, conducted by Dr. Harvey Irwin at the
University of New England in Australia, revealed, that 20 percent of
177 students had experienced an OBE. When averaged, these figures
indicate, that roughly one out of every five people will have an OBE at
some point in his or her life. Other studies suggest the incidence may
be closer to one in ten, but the fact remains: OBEs are far more
common, than most people realize. The typical OBE is usually
spontaneous and occurs most often during sleep, meditation, anesthesia,
illness, and instances of traumatic pain (although they can occur under
other circumstances as well). Suddenly a person experiences the vivid
sensation, that his mind has separated from his body. Frequently he
finds himself floating over his body and discovers: he can travel or
fly to other locations. What is it like to find oneself, free from the
physical, and staring down at one's own body? In a 1980 study of 339
cases of out-of-body travel, Dr. Glen Gabbard of the Menninger
Foundation in Topeka, Dr. Stuart Twemlow of the Topeka Veterans'
Administration Medical Center, and Dr. Fowler Jones of the University
of Kansas Medical Center found, that a whopping 85 percent described
the experience as pleasant and over half of them said, it was joyful. I
know the feeling. I had a spontaneous OBE as a teenager, and after
recovering from the shock of finding myself floating over my body and
staring down at myself, asleep in bed, I had an indescribably
exhilarating time, flying through walls and soaring over the treetops.
During the course of my bodiless journey I even stumbled across a
library book, a neighbor had lost and was able to tell her, where the
book was located the next day. I describe this experience in detail in
Beyond the Quantum. It is of no small significance, that Gabbard,
Twemlow, and Jones also studied the psychological profile of OBEers and
found, that they were psychologically normal and were on the whole
extremely well adjusted. At the 1980 meeting of the American
Psychiatric Association they presented their conclusions and told their
colleagues, that reassurances, that OBEs are common occurrences, and
referring the patient to books on the subject, may be "more
therapeutic", than psychiatric treatment. They even hinted, that
patients might gain more relief by talking to a yogi, than to a
psychiatrist! Such facts notwithstanding, no amount of statistical
findings are as convincing, as actual accounts of such experiences. For
example, Kimberly Clark, a hospital social worker in Seattle,
Washington, did not take OBEs seriously, until she encountered a
coronary patient, named Maria. Several days after being admitted to the
hospital Maria had a cardiac arrest and was quickly revived. Clark
visited her later that afternoon, expecting to find her anxious over
the fact, that her heart had stopped.
As she had expected, Maria was
agitated, but not for the reason she had anticipated. Maria told Clark,
that she had experienced something very strange. After her heart had
stopped, she suddenly found herself looking down from the ceiling and
watching the doctors and the nurses working on her. Then something,
over the emergency room driveway, distracted her and as soon, as she
"thought herself there, she was there. Next Maria "thought her way" up
to the third floor of the building and found herself "eyeball to
shoelace" with a tennis shoe. It was an old shoe and she noticed, that
the little toe had worn a hole through the brie. She also noticed
several other details, such as the fact, that the lace was stuck under
the heel.
232-233
After Maria finished her account, she begged Clark to please go to the
ledge and see, if there was a shoe there, so that she could confirm,
whether her experience was real or not. Skeptical, but intrigued, Clark
went outside and looked up at the ledge, but saw nothing. She went up
to the third floor and began going in and out of patients' rooms
looking through windows so narrow, she had to press her face against
the glass just to see the ledge at all. Finally, she found a room,
where she pressed her face against the glass, looked down and saw the
tennis shoe. Still, from her vantage point she could not tell, if the
little toe had worn a place in the shoe or if any of the other details
Maria had described, were correct. It wasn't until she retrieved the
shoe, that she confirmed Maria's various observations. "The only way
she would have had such a perspective, was if she had been floating
right outside and at very close range to the tennis shoe, " states
Clark, who has since become a believer in OBEs. "It was very concrete
evidence for me." Experiencing an OBE during cardiac arrest is
relatively common, so common, that Michael B. Sabom, a cardiologist and
professor of medicine at Emory University and a staff physician at the
Atlanta Veterans' Administration Medical Center, got tired of hearing
his patients recount such "fantasies" and decided to settle the matter
once and for all. Sabom selected two groups of patients, one composed
of 32 seasoned cardiac patients, who had reported OBEs during their
heart attacks, and one made up of 25 seasoned cardiac patients, who had
never experienced an OBE. He then interviewed the patients, asking the
OBEers to describe their own resuscitation, as they had witnessed it
from the out-of-body state, and asking the nonexperiencers to describe,
what they imagined, must have transpired during their resuscitation. Of
the nonexperiencers, 20 made major mistakes, when they described their
resuscitations, 3 gave correct, but general descriptions, and 2 had no
idea at all, what had taken place. Among the experiencers, 26 gave
correct, but general descriptions, 6 gave highly detailed and accurate
descriptions of their own resuscitation, and I gave a blow-by blow
accounting so accurate, that Sabom was stunned. The results inspired
him to delve even deeper into the phenomenon, and like Clark, he has
now become an ardent believer and lectures widely on the subject. There
appears "to be no plausible explanation for the accuracy of these
observations, involving the usual physical senses, " he says. "The
out-of-body hypothesis simply seems to fit best with the data at hand."
Although the OBEs, experienced by such patients, are spontaneous, some
people have mastered the ability well enough to leave their body at
will. One of the most famous of these individuals is a former radio and
television executive named Robert Monroe. When Monroe had his first OBE
in the late 1950s, he thought, he was going crazy and immediately
sought medical treatment. The doctors, he consulted, found nothing
wrong,
but he continued to have his strange experiences and continued to be
greatly disturbed by them. Finally, after learning from a psychologist
friend, that Indian yogis reported leaving their bodies all the time,
he began to accept his uninvited talent. "I had two options," Monroe
recalls. "One was sedation for the rest of my life; the other was to
learn something about this state, so I could control it." From that day
forward Monroe began keeping a written journal of his experiences,
carefully documenting everything he learned about the out-of-body
state. He discovered, he could pass through solid objects and travel
great distances in the twinkling of an eye simply by "thinking" himself
there. He found, that other people were seldom aware of his presence,
although the friends, whom he traveled to see, while in this "second
state", quickly became believers, when he accurately described their
dress and activity at the time of his out-of-body visit. He also
discovered, that he was not alone in his pursuit and occasionally
bumped into other disembodied travelers. Thus far he has catalogued his
experiences in two fascinating books "Journeys Out of the Body" and
"Far Journeys". OBEs have also been documented in the lab. In one
experiment, parapsychologist Charles Tart was able to get a skilled
OBEer, he identifies only as Miss 2, to identify correctly a five-digit
number written on a piece of paper, that could only be reached, if she
were floating in the out-of-body state." In a series of experiments,
conducted at the American Society for Psychical Research in New York,
Karlis Osis and psychologist Janet Lee Mitchell found several gifted
subjects, who were able to "fly in" from various locations around the
country and correctly describe a wide range of target images, including
objects, placed on a table, colored geometric patterns placed on a
free-floating shelf near the ceiling, and optical illusions, that could
only be seen when an observer peered through a small window in a
special device. Dr. Robert Morris, the director of research at the
Psychical Research Foundation in Durham, North Carolina, has even used
animals to detect out-of-body visitations. In one experiment, for
instance, Morris found, that a kitten, belonging to a talented
out-of-body subject named Keith Harary, consistently stopped meowing
and started purring, whenever Harary was invisibly present.
OBEs as a Holographic Phenomenon
234-235
Considered as a whole, the evidence seems unequivocal. Although we are
taught, that we "think" with our brains, this is not always true. Under
the right circumstances our consciousness—the thinking,
perceiving part of us—can detach from the physical body and exist
just about anywhere, it wants to. Our current scientific understanding
cannot account for this phenomenon, but it becomes much more tractable
in terms of the holographic idea. Remember,
that in a
holographic
universe, location is itself an illusion.
Just as an image of an
apple
has no specific location on a piece of holographic film, in a universe,
that is organized holographically, things and objects also possess no
definite location; everything is ultimately nonlocal, including
consciousness. Thus, although our consciousness appears to be localized
in our heads, under
certain conditions
it can, just as easily, appear to be
localized in the upper corner of the room, hovering over a grassy lawn,
or floating eyeball-to-shoelace with a tennis shoe on the third-floor
ledge of a building. If the idea of a nonlocal consciousness seems
difficult to grasp, a useful analogy can once again be found in
dreaming. Imagine, that you are dreaming, you are attending a crowded
art exhibit. As you wander among the people and gaze at the artworks,
your consciousness appears to be localized in the head of the person,
you are in the dream. But where is your consciousness really? A quick
analysis will reveal, that it is actually in everything in the dream,
in the other people attending the exhibit, in the artworks, even in the
very space of the dream.
In
a dream, location
is also an illusion,
because everything— people, objects, space, consciousness, and so
on—is unfolding out of the deeper and more fundamental reality of
the dreamer.
"Another strikingly holographic feature of the OBE
is the
plasticity of the form, a person assumes, once they are out of the
body. After detaching from the physical, OBEers sometimes find
themselves in a ghostlike body, that is an exact replica of their
biological body. This caused some researchers in the past to postulate,
that human beings possess a "phantom double", that the phantom double
is not a permanent energy replica of the biological body, but is
instead a kind of hologram, that can assume many shapes. This notion is
borne out by the fact, that phantom doubles are not the only forms,
people find themselves in during OBEs. There are numerous reports,
where people have also perceived themselves as balls of light,
shapeless clouds of energy, and even no discernible form at all. There
is even evidence, that the form, a person assumes during an OBE, is a
direct consequence of their beliefs and expectations. For example, in
his 1961 book "The Mystical Life", mathematician J. H. M. Whiteman
revealed, that he experienced at least two OBEs a month during most of
his adult life and recorded over two thousand such incidents. He also
disclosed, that he always felt like a woman, trapped in a man's body,
and during separation this sometimes resulted in his finding himself in
female form. Whiteman experienced various other forms, as well during
his OB adventures, including children's bodies, and concluded, that
beliefs, both conscious and unconscious, were the determining factors
in the form this second body assumed. Monroe agrees and asserts, that
it is our "thought habits", that create our OB forms. Because we are so
habituated to being in a body, we have a tendency to reproduce the same
form in the OB state. Similarly, he believes, it is the discomfort most
people feel, when they are naked, that causes OBEers to unconsciously
sculpt clothing for themselves, when they assume a human form. "I
suspect, that one may modify the Second Body into whatever form is
desired," says Monroe.
What is our true form, if any, when we are in
the disembodied state? Monroe has found, that once we drop all such
disguises, we are at heart a "vibrational pattern [comprised] of many
interacting and resonating frequencies." This finding is also
remarkably suggestive, that something holographic is going on and
offers further evidence, that we—like all things in a Holographic
Universe—are ultimately a frequency phenomenon, which our mind
converts into various holographic forms.
236-237
It adds credence to Hunt's conclusion, that our consciousness is
contained, not in the brain, but in a plasmic holographic energy field,
that both permeates and surrounds the physical body. The form we
assume, while in the OB state, is not the only thing, that displays
this holographic plasticity.
Despite the accuracy of the observations, made by talented OB travelers
during their disembodied jaunts, researchers have long been troubled by
some of the glaring inaccuracies, that crop up as well. For instance,
the title of the lost library book, I stumbled across during my own
OBE, looked bright green, while I was in a disembodied state. But after
I was back in my physical body and returned to retrieve the book, I
saw, that the lettering was actually black. The literature is filled
with accounts of similar discrepancies, instances, in which OB
travelers accurately described a distant room, full of people, save
that they added an extra person or perceived a couch, where there was
really a table. In terms of the holographic idea, one explanation may
be, that such OB travelers have not yet fully developed the ability to
convert the frequencies, they perceive, while in a disembodied state,
into a completely accurate holographic representation of consensus
reality. In other words, since OBEers appear to be relying on a
completely new set of senses, these senses may still be wobbly and not
yet proficient at the art of converting the frequency domain into a,
seemingly objective, construct of reality. These nonphysical senses are
further hampered by the constraints our own self-limiting beliefs place
upon them. A number of talented OB travelers have noted, that once they
became more at home in their second body, they discovered, that they
could "see" in all directions at once without turning their heads. In
other words, although seeing in all directions appears to be normal
during the OB state, they were so accustomed to believing, that they
could see only through their eyes— even when they were in a
nonphysical hologram of their body—that this belief at first kept
them from realizing, that they possessed 360- degree vision. There is
evidence, that even our physical senses have fallen victim to this
censorship. Despite our unwavering conviction, that we see with our
eyes, reports persist of individuals, who possess "eyeless sight" or
the ability to see with other areas of their bodies. Recently David
Eisenberg, M. D., a clinical research fellow at the Harvard Medical
School, published an account of two school-age Chinese sisters in
Beijing, who can "see" well enough with the skin in their armpits to
read notes and identify colors. In Italy the neurologist Cesare
Lombroso studied a blind girl, who
could see with the tip of her nose and the lobe of her left ear. In the
1960s the prestigious Soviet Academy of Science investigated a Russian
peasant woman named Rosa Kuleshova, who could see photographs and read
newspapers with the tips of her fingers, and pronounced her abilities
genuine. Significantly, the Soviets ruled out the possibility, that
Kuleshova was simply detecting the varying amounts of stored heat
different colors emanate naturally— Kuleshova could read a black
and white newspaper even when it was covered with a sheet of heated
glass. Kuleshova became so renowned for her abilities, that Life
magazine eventually published an article about her.
In short, there is
evidence, that we too are not limited to seeing only through our
physical eyes. This is, of course, the message, inherent in my father's
friend Tom's ability to read the inscription on a watch, even when it
was shielded by his daughter's stomach, and also in the remote-viewing
phenomenon. One cannot help, but wonder, if eyeless sight is actually
just further evidence, that reality is indeed maya, an illusion, and
our physical body, as well, as all the seeming absoluteness of its
physiology, is as much a holographic construct of our perception, as
our second body. Perhaps we are so deeply habituated to believing, that
we can see only through our eyes, that even in the physical we have
shut ourselves off from the full range of our perceptual capabilities.
Another holographic aspect of OBEs is the blurring of the division
between past and future, that sometimes occurs during such experiences.
For example, Osis and Mitchell discovered, that when Dr. Alex Tanous, a
well-known psychic and talented OB traveler from Maine, flew in and
attempted to describe the test objects, they placed on a table, he had
a tendency to describe items, that were placed there days later! This
suggests, that the realm, people enter during the OB state, is one of
the subtler levels of reality Bohm speaks about, a region, that is
closer to the implicate (involve intimately, imply) and hence closer to
the level of reality, in which the division between past, present, and
future ceases to exist. Put another way, it appears, that instead of
tuning into the frequencies, that encode the present, Tanous's mind
inadvertently tuned into frequencies, that contained information about
the future and converted those into a hologram of reality. That
Tanous's perception of the room was a holographic phenomenon and not
just a precognitive vision, that took place solely in his head.
Underscored by another fact.
238-239
The day of his schedule to produce an OBE, Osis asked New York psychic
Christine Whiting to hold vigil in the room and try to describe any
projector she might "see", visiting there. Despite Whiting's ignorance
of who would be flying in or when, when Tanous made his OB visit, she
saw his apparition clearly and described him as wearing brown corduroy
pants and a white cotton shirt, the clothing Dr. Tanous was wearing in
Maine at the time of his attempt. Harary has also made occasional OB
journeys into the future and agrees, that the experiences are
qualitatively different from other precognitive experiences. "OBEs to
future time and space differ from regular precognitive dreams, in that
I
am definitely 'out' and moving through a black, dark area, that ends at
some lighted future scene", he states. When he makes an OB visit to the
future, he has sometimes even seen a silhouette of his future self in
the scene, and this is not all. When the
events, he
has witnessed
eventually, come to pass, he can also sense his time-traveling OB self
in the actual scene with him.. He describes this eerie sensation, as
"meeting myself 'behind' myself, as if I were two beings", an
experience,
that surely must put normal deja vus to shame. There are also
cases on
record of OB journeys into the past. The Swedish playwright August
Strindberg, himself a frequent OB traveler, describes one in his book
"Legends". The occurrence took place while Strindberg was sitting in a
wine shop, trying to persuade a young friend not to give up his
military career. To bolster his argument Strindberg brought up a past
incident, involving both of them, that had taken place one evening in a
tavern. As the playwright proceeded to describe the event, he suddenly
"lost consciousness" only to find himself, sitting in the tavern in
question and reliving the occurrence. The experience lasted only for a
few moments, and then he abruptly found himself back in his body and in
the present. The argument can also be made, that the retrocognitive
visions we examined in the last chapter, in which clairvoyants had the
experience, that they were actually present during, and even "floating"
over the historical scenes, they were describing, are also a form of OB
projection into the past. Indeed, when one reads the voluminous
literature now available on the OB phenomenon, one is repeatedly struck
at the similarities between OB travelers' descriptions of their
experiences and characteristics we have now come to associate with a
holographic universe. In addition to describing the OB state as a
place, where time and space no longer properly exist, where thought can
be transformed into hologramlike forms, and where consciousness is
ultimately a pattern of vibrations, or frequencies, Monroe notes, that
perception during OBEs seems based less on "a reflection of light
waves" and more on "an impression of radiation" an observation, that
suggests once again, that when one enters the OB realm, one begins to
enter Pribram's frequency domain. Other OB travelers have also referred
to the frequencylike quality of the Second State. For instance, Marcel
Louis Forhan, a French OB experiencer, who wrote under the name of
"Yram", spends much of his book, Practical
Astral
Projection, trying
to describe the wavelike and seemingly electromagnetic qualities of the
OB realm. Still others have commented on the sense of Cosmic
Unity, one
experiences during the state, and have summarized it, as a feeling,
that
"everything is everything, " and "I am that." As holographic, as the
OBE
is, it is only the tip of the iceberg, when it comes to more direct
experience of the frequency aspects of reality. Although OBEs are only
experienced by a segment of the human race, there is another
circumstance, under which we all come into closer contact with the
frequency domain. That is, when we journey to that undiscovered
country,
from whose bourn no traveler returns. The rub, with all due respect to
Shakespeare, is that some travelers do return. And the stories, they
tell, are filled with features, that smack once again of things
holographic.
The
Near-Death Experience
By
now, nearly everyone has heard of near-death experiences, or NDEs
incidents, in which individuals are declared clinically "dead", are
resuscitated, and report, that during the experience, they left their
physical body and visited, what appeared to be the realm of the
afterlife. In our own culture NDEs first came to prominence in 1975
when Raymond A. Moody, Jr., a psychiatrist, who also has a Ph. D. in
philosophy, published his best-selling investigation of the subject,
"Life after Life". Shortly thereafter Elisabeth Kubler-Ross revealed,
that she had simultaneously conducted similar research and had
duplicated Moody's findings.
240-241
Indeed, as more and more
researchers began to document the phenomenon, it became
increasingly clear, that NDEs were not only incredibly widespread—a
1981 Gallup poll found, that eight million adult Americans had
experienced an NDE, or roughly one person in twenty—but provided the
most compelling evidence to date for survival after death. Like OBEs,
NDEs appear to be a universal phenomenon. They are described at length
in both the eighth-century "Tibetan Book of the Dead" and the 2,
500-year-old Egyptian "Book of the Dead". In Book X of The Republic
Plato gives a detailed account of a Greek soldier named Er, who came
alive just seconds, before his funeral pyre was to be lit, and said,
that
he had left his body and went through a "passageway" to the land of the
dead. The Venerable Bede gives a similar account in his eighth-century
work "A History of the English Church" and "People", and, in fact, in
her recent book "Otherworld Journeys" Carol Zaleski, a lecturer on the
study of religion at Harvard, points out, that medieval literature is
filled with accounts of NDEs. NDEers also have no unique demographic
characteristics. Various studies have shown, that there is no
relationship between NDEs and a person's age, sex, marital status,
race, religion and/or spiritual beliefs, social class, educational
level, income, frequency of church attendance, size of home community,
or area of residence. NDEs, like lightning, can strike anyone at any
time. The devoutly religious are no more likely to have an NDE, than
nonbelievers. One of the most interesting aspects of the ND phenomenon
is the consistency one finds from experience to experience. A summary
of a typical NDE is as follows:"A man is dying and suddenly finds
himself floating above his body and watching, what is going on. Within
moments he travels at great speed through a darkness or a tunnel. He
enters a realm of dazzling light and is warmly met by recently deceased
friends and relatives. Frequently he hears indescribably beautiful
music and sees sights—rolling meadows, flower-filled valleys, and
sparkling streams—more lovely, than anything he has seen on earth. In
this light-filled world he feels no pain or fear and is pervaded with
an overwhelming feeling of joy, love, and peace. He meets a "being of
light", who emanates a feeling of enormous compassion, and is prompted
by the being(s) to experience a "life review, " a panoramic replay of
his life.
He becomes so enraptured by his experience of this greater
reality, that he desires nothing more, than to stay. However, the being
tells him, that it is not his time yet and persuades him to return to
his earthly life and reenter his physical body. It should be noted,
this is only a general description and not all NDEs contain all of the
elements described. Some may lack some of the above-mentioned features,
and others may contain additional ingredients. The symbolic trappings
of the experiences can also vary. For example, although NDEers in
Western cultures tend to enter the realm of the afterlife by passing
through a tunnel, experiencers from other cultures might walk down a
road or pass over a body of water to arrive in the world beyond.
Nevertheless, there is an astonishing degree of agreement among the
NDEs, reported by various cultures throughout history. For instance,
the
life review, a feature, that crops up again and again in modern-day
NDEs, is also described in the "Tibetan Book of the Dead", the
"Egyptian Book of the Dead", in Plato's account of what Er experienced
during his sojourn in the hereafter, and in the 2, 000-year-old yogic
writings of the Indian sage Patanjali. The cross-cultural similarities
between NDEs has also been confirmed in formal study. In 1977, Osis and
Haraldsson compared nearly nine hundred deathbed visions, reported by
patients to doctors and other medical personnel in both India and the
United States and found, that although there were various cultural
differences—for example, Americans tended to view the being of light as
a Christian religious personage and Indians perceived it to be a Hindu
one—the "core" of the experience was substantially the same and
resembled the NDEs, described by Moody and Kubler- Ross. Although the
orthodox view of NDEs is that they are just hallucinations, there is
substantial evidence that this is not the case. As with OBEs, when
NDEers are out-of-body, they are able to report details, they have no
normal sensory means of knowing. For example, Moody reports a case, in
which a woman left her body during surgery, floated into the waiting
room, and saw, that her daughter was wearing mismatched plaids. As it
turned out, the maid had dressed the little girl so hastily, she had
not
noticed the error and was astounded, when the mother, who did not
physically see the little girl that day, commented on the fact. In
another case, after leaving her body, a female NDEer went to the
hospital lobby and overheard her brother-in-law tell a friend, that it
looked like he was going to have to cancel a business trip and instead
be one of his sister-in-law's pallbearers. After the woman recovered,
she reprimanded her astonished brother-in-law for writing her off so
quickly. And these are not even the most extraordinary examples of
sensory awareness in the ND out-of-body state.
242-243
NDE
researchers have found, that even patients, who are blind, and have had
no light perception for years, can see and accurately describe, what is
going on around them, when they have left their bodies during an NDE.
Kubler-Ross has encountered several such individuals and has
interviewed them at length to determine their accuracy. "To our
amazement, they were able to describe the color and design of clothing
and jewelry the people present wore," she states. Most staggering of
all are those NDEs and deathbed visions, involving two or more
individuals. In one case, as a female NDEer found herself moving
through the tunnel and approaching the realm of light, she saw a friend
of hers coming back! As they passed, the friend telepathically
communicated to her, that he had died, but was being "sent back."
The
woman, too, was eventually "sent back" and, after she recovered, she
discovered, that her friend had suffered a cardiac arrest at
approximately the same time of her own experience. There are numerous
other cases on record, in which dying individuals knew, who was waiting
for them in the world beyond, before news of the person's death arrived
through normal channels. And if there is still any doubt, yet another
argument against the idea, that NDEs are hallucinations, is their
occurrence in patients, who have flat EEGs. Under normal circumstances,
whenever a person talks, thinks, imagines, dreams, or does just about
anything else, their EEC registers an enormous amount of activity. Even
hallucinations measure on the EEC. But there are many cases, in which
people with flat EEGs have had NDEs. Had their NDEs been simple
hallucinations, they would have registered on their EEGs. In brief,
when all these facts are considered together— the widespread nature of
the NDE, the absence of demographic characteristics, the universality
of the core experience, the ability of NDEers to see and know things,
they have no normal sensory means of seeing and knowing, and the
occurrence of NDEs in patients, who have fiat EEGs—the conclusion seems
inescapable. People, who have NDEs, are not suffering from
hallucinations
or delusional fantasies, but are actually making visits to an entirely
different level of reality. This is also the conclusion, reached by
many
NDE researchers. One such researcher is Dr. Melvin Morse, a
pediatrician in Seattle, Washington. Morse first became interested in
NDEs after treating a 7year-old drowning victim. By the time the
little girl was resuscitated, she was profoundly comatose, had fixed
and
dilated pupils, no muscle reflexes, and no corneal response. In medical
terms this gave her a Glascow Coma Score of three, indicating, that she
was in a coma so deep, she had almost no chance of ever recovering.
Despite these odds,
she made a full recovery and, when Morse looked in
on her for the first time after she regained consciousness, she
recognized him and said, that she had watched him working on her
comatose body. When Morse questioned her further, she explained, that
she
had left her body and passed through a tunnel into heaven, where she
had
met "the Heavenly Father." The Heavenly Father told her, she was not
really meant to be there yet and asked, if she wanted to stay or go
back. At first she said she wanted to stay, but when the Heavenly
Father pointed out, that that decision meant she would not be seeing
her
mother again, she changed her mind and returned to her body. Morse was
skeptical, but fascinated and from that point on set out to learn
everything, he could, about NDEs. At the time, he worked for an air
transport service in Idaho, that carried patients to the hospital, and
this afforded him the opportunity to talk with scores of resuscitated
children. Over a ten-year period
he interviewed every child survivor of
cardiac arrest at the hospital, and over and over they told him the
same thing. After going unconscious, they found themselves outside
their
bodies, watched the doctors working on them, passed through a tunnel,
and were comforted by luminous beings. Morse continued to be skeptical,
and, in his increasingly desperate search for some logical explanation,
he read everything, he could find, on the side effects of the drugs his
patients were taking, and explored various psychological explanations,
but nothing seemed to fit. "Then one day I read a long article in a
medical journal, that tried to explain NDEs, as being various tricks of
the brain," says Morse. "By then I had studied NDEs extensively and
none of the explanations, that this researcher listed, made sense. It
was
finally clear to me, that he had missed the most obvious explanation of
all—NDEs are real. He had missed the possibility, that the soul really
does travel." Moody echoes the sentiment and says, that twenty years of
research have convinced him, that NDEers have indeed ventured into
another level of reality. He believes, that most other NDE researchers
feel the same. "I have talked to almost every NDE researcher in the
world about his or her work. I know, that most of them believe in their
hearts, that NDEs are a glimpse of life after life. But as scientists
and people of medicine, they still haven't come up with 'scientific
proof, that a part of us goes on living after our physical being is
dead.
244-245
This lack of proof keeps them from going public
with their true feelings." As a result of his 1981 survey, even George
Gallup, Jr., the president of the Gallup Poll, agrees: "A growing
number of researchers have been gathering and evaluating the accounts
of those, who have had strange near-death encounters. And the
preliminary results have been highly suggestive of some sort of
encounter with an extradimensional realm of reality. Our own extensive
survey is the latest in these studies and is also uncovering some
trends, that point toward a super parallel universe of some sort."
A Holographic
Explanation of the Near-Death
Experience. These
are astounding assertions. What is even more astounding is, that the
scientific establishment has for the most part ignored both the
conclusions of these researchers and the vast body of evidence, that
compels them to make such statements. The reasons for this are complex
and varied. One is, that it is currently not fashionable in science to
consider seriously any phenomenon, that seems to support the idea of a
spiritual reality, and, as mentioned at the beginning of this book,
beliefs are like addictions, and do not surrender their grip easily.
Another reason, as Moody mentions, is the widespread prejudice among
scientists, that the only ideas, that have any value or significance
are those, that can be proven in a strict scientific sense. Yet another
is the inability of our current scientific understanding of reality
even to begin to explain NDEs, if they are real. This last reason,
however, may not be the problem it seems. Several NDE researchers have
pointed out, that the holographic model offers us a way to understand
these experiences. One such researcher is Dr. Kenneth Ring, a professor
of psychology at the University of Connecticu and one of the first NDE
researchers to use statistical analysis and standardized interviewing
techniques to study the phenomenon. In his 1980 book "Life at Death",
Ring spends considerable time, arguing in favor of a holographic
explanation of the NDE. Put bluntly, Ring believes, that NDEs are also
ventures into the more frequency-like aspects of reality. Ring bases
his conclusion on the numerous suggestively holographic aspects of the
NDE. One is the tendency of experiencers to describe the world beyond,
as a realm composed of "light", "higher vibrations" or "frequencies."
Some NDEers even refer to the celestial music, that often accompanies
such experiences, as more "a combination of vibrations", than actual
sounds—observations, that Ring believes are evidence, that the
act of dying involves a shift of consciousness away from the ordinary
world of appearances and into a more holographic reality of pure
frequency.
NDEers
also frequently say, that characterizations, that the
realm is suffused with a light more brilliant, than any they have ever
seen on Earth, but one that, despite its unfathomable intensity, does
not hurt the eyes, Ring feels are further evidence of the frequency
aspects of the hereafter. "Another feature Ring finds undeniably
holographic is NDEers' descriptions of Time and Space in the afterlife
realm. One of the most commonly reported characteristics of the world
beyond is, that it is a dimension, in which Time and Space cease to
exist. "I found myself in a space, in a period of time, I would say,
where all space and time was negated, " says one NDEer clumsily. "It
has to be out of time and space.
It must be, because... it can't be put
into a time thing, " says another. Given, that time and space are
collapsed, and location has no meaning in the frequency domain, this is
precisely, what we would expect to find, if NDEs take place in a
holographic state of consciousness, says Ring. If the near-death realm
is even more frequency-like, than our own level of reality, why does it
appear to have any structure at all? Given that both OBEs and NDEs
offer ample evidence, that the mind can exist independently of the
brain, Ring believes it is not too farfetched to assume, that it, too,
functions holographically. Thus, when the mind is in the
"higher"
frequencies of the near-death dimension, it continues to do, what it
does best, translate those frequencies into a world of appearances. Or
as Ring puts it, "I believe, that this is a realm, that is created by
interacting thought structures. These structures or 'thought-forms'
combine to form patterns, just as interference waves form patterns on a
holographic plate. And just as the holographic image appears to be
fully real, when illuminated by a laser beam, so the images, produced
by interacting thought-forms, appear to be real."
Ring is not alone in his speculations. In the keynote address for the
1989 meeting of the International Association for Near-Death Studies
(IANDS), Dr. Elizabeth W. Fenske, a clinical psychologist in private
practice in Philadelphia, announced, that she, too, believes, that NDEs
are journeys into a holographic realm of higher frequencies. She agrees
with Ring's hypothesis, that the landscapes, flowers, physical
structures and so forth, of the afterlife dimension, are fashioned out
of interacting (or interfering) thought patterns.
"I
think we've come
to the point in NDE research, where it's difficult to make a
distinction between thought and light. In the near-death
experience
thought seems to be light, " she observes.
246-247
Heaven as Hologram
In addition to
those,
mentioned by Ring and Fenske, the NDE has numerous other features, that
are markedly holographic. Like OBEers,
after
NDEers have detached from
the physical, they find themselves in one of two forms, either as a
disembodied cloud of energy, or as a hologram-like body, sculpted by
thought.
When the latter is the case, the mind-created nature of the
body is often surprisingly obvious to the NDEer. For example, one
near-death survivor says, that when
he first emerged from his body, he
looked "something like a jellyfish" and fell lightly to the floor, like
a soap bubble. Then he quickly expanded into a ghostly
three-dimensional image of a naked man. However, the presence of two
women in the room embarrassed him and to his surprise, this feeling
caused him suddenly to become clothed (the women, however, never
offered any indication, that they were able to see any of this). That
our innermost feelings and desires are responsible, for creating the
form we assume in the afterlife dimension, is evident in the
experiences
of other NDEers. People, who are confined in wheelchairs in their
physical existence, find themselves in healthy bodies, that can run and
dance. Amputees invariably have their limbs back. The elderly often
inhabit youthful bodies, and even stranger, children frequently see
themselves as adults, a fact, that may reflect every child's fantasy to
be a grown-up, or more profoundly, may be a symbolic indication, that
in our souls some of us are much older, than we realize. These
hologram-like bodies can be remarkably detailed. In the incident,
involving the man, who
became embarrassed at his own nakedness, for
example, the clothing, he materialized for himself, was so meticulously
wrought, that he could even make out the seams in the material !
Similarly, another man, who studied his hands while in the ND, state,
said:
"They were
composed of light with tiny structures in them" and
when he looked closely, he could
even see "the
delicate whorls of his
fingerprints and tubes of light up his arms." Some of Whitton's
research is also relevant to this issue. Amazingly, when Whitton
hypnotized patients and regressed them to the between life state, they
too reported all the classic features of the NDE, passage through a
tunnel, encounters with deceased relatives and/or "guides", entrance
into a splendorous light-filled realm, in which time and space no
longer existed, encounters with luminous beings, and a life review. In
fact, according to Whitton's subjects, the main purpose of the lite
review was to refresh their memories, so they could more mindfully plan
their next life, a process, in which the beings of light gently and
noncoercively assisted. Like Ring, after studying the testimony of his
subjects, Whitton concluded, that the shapes and structures one
perceives in the afterlife dimension are thought-forms created by the
mind. "Rene Descartes' famous dictum, 'I think, therefore I am" is
never more pertinent, than in the between-life state," says Whitton.
"There is no experience of existence without thought". This was
especially true, when it came to the form Whitton's patients assumed in
the between-life state. Several said, they didn't even have a body,
unless they were thinking. "One man
described it
by saying, that if he
stopped thinking, he was merely a cloud in an endless cloud,
undifferentiated" he observes. "But as soon as he started to think, he
became himself" (a state of affairs, that is oddly reminiscent
of the
subjects in Tart's mutual hypnosis experiment, who discovered, they
didn't have hands, unless they thought them into existence). At first
the bodies, Whitton's subjects assumed, resembled the persons, they had
been in their last life. But as their experience in the between-life
state continued, they gradually became a kind of hologram-like
composite of all of their past lives. This composite identity even had
a name, separate from any of the names, they had used in their physical
incarnations, although none of his subjects was able to
pronounce it,
using their physical vocal cords. What do NDEers look like? when they
have not constructed a hologram-like body for themselves? Many say,
that they were not aware of any form and were simply "themselves" or
"their mind."
Others have more specific impressions and describe
themselves as "a cloud of colors, "a mist", "an energy pattern" or "an
energy field" terms,
that again suggest,
248-249
that we
are all ultimately
just frequency phenomena, patterns of some unknown vibratory energy
enfolded in the greater matrix of the frequency domain. Some
NDEers
assert, that in addition to being composed of colored frequencies of
light, we are also constituted out of sound. "I realized, that each
person and thing has its own musical tone range as well, as its own
color range," says an Arizona housewife, who had an NDE during
childbirth. "If you can imagine yourself effortlessly moving in and out
among prismatic rays of light and hearing each person's musical notes
join and harmonize with your own, when you touch or pass them, you
would have some idea of the unseen world." The woman, who encountered
many individuals in the afterlife realm, who manifested only as clouds
of colors and sound, believes the mellifluous tones, each soul
emanates,
are, what people are describing, when they say, they hear beautiful
music in the ND dimension. Like Monroe, some NDEers report
being able
to see in all directions at once, while in the disembodied state. After
wondering, what he looked like, one man said, he suddenly found himself
staring at his own back. Robert Sullivan, an amateur NDE researcher
from Pennsylvania, who specializes in NDEs by soldiers during combat,
interviewed a World War II veteran, who temporarily retained this
ability even after he returned to his physical body. "He experienced
three hundred-sixty-degree vision, while running away from a German
machine-gun nest," says Sullivan. "Not only could he see ahead, as he
ran, but he could see the gunners trying to draw a bead on him from
behind."
Instantaneous Knowledge
Another part of the
NDE, that possesses many holographic features, is the life review. Ring
refers to it as "a holographic phenomenon par excellence." Grof and
Joan Halifax, a Harvard medical anthropologist and the coauthor (with
Grof) of "The Human Encounter with Death", have also commented on the
life review's holographic aspects. According to several NDE
researchers, including Moody, even many NDEers themselves use the term
"holographic", when describing the experience.
The reason for this characterization is obvious as soon, as one begins
to read accounts of the life review. Again and
again NDEers
use the
same adjectives to describe it, referring to it, as an incredibly
vivid, wrap-around, three-dimensional replay of their entire life.
"It's like climbing right inside a movie of your life, " says one
NDEer. "Every moment from every year of your life is played back in
complete sensory detail. Total, total recall. And it all happens in an
instant." "The whole thing was really odd. I was there; I was actually
seeing these flashbacks; I was actually walking through them, and it
was so fast. Yet, it was slow enough, that I could take it all in,"
says another. During this instantaneous and panoramic remembrance
NDEers reexperience all the emotions, the joys and the sorrows, that
accompanied all of the events in their life. More than that, they feel
all of the emotions of the people, with whom they have interacted as
well. They feel the happiness of all the individuals, to whom they've
been kind. If they have committed a hurtful act, they become acutely
aware of the pain their victim felt, as a result of their
thoughtlessness. And no event seems too trivial to be exempt. While
reliving a moment in her childhood, one woman suddenly experienced all
the loss and powerlessness her sister had felt after she (then a child)
snatched a toy away from her sister. Whitton has uncovered evidence,
that thoughtless acts are not the only things, that cause individuals
remorse during the life review. Under hypnosis his subjects reported,
that failed dreams and aspirations — things they had hoped to
accomplish during their life, but had not - also caused them pangs
of sadness. Thoughts, too, are replayed with exacting fidelity during
the life review. Reveries, faces glimpsed once, but remembered for
years, things, that made one laugh, the joy one felt, when gazing at a
particular painting, childish worries, and long forgotten
daydreams—all flit through one's mind in a second. As one NDEer
summarizes, "Not even your thoughts are l o s t . . . Every thought was
there." And so, the life review is holographic not only in its
three-
dimensionality, but in the amazing capacity for information
storage the process displays. It is also holographic in a third way.
Like the kabbalistic "aleph," a mythical point in space and time, that
contains all other points in space and time, it is a moment, that
contains all other moments. Even the ability to perceive the life
review seems holographic, in that it is a faculty, capable of
experiencing something, that is paradoxically at once both incredibly
rapid and yet slow enough to witness in detail.
As an NDEer in 1821 put
it, it
is the
ability to "simultaneously comprehend the Whole and every
part."
250-251
In fact, the life review bares a marked resemblance to the afterlife
judgment scenes, described in the sacred texts of many of the world's
great religions, from the Egyptian to Christian, but with one crucial
difference. Like Whitton's subjects, NDEers universally report, that
they are never judged by the beings of light, but feel only love and
acceptance in their presence. The only judgment, that ever takes place
is self-judgment and arises solely out of the NDEer's own feelings of
guilt and repentance. Occasionally the beings do assert themselves, but
instead of behaving in an authoritarian manner, they act as guides and
counselors, whose only purpose is to teach. This total lack of cosmic
judgment and/or any divine system of punishment and reward has been and
continues to be one of the most controversial aspects of the NDE among
religious groups, but it is one of the most often reported features of
the experience. What is the explanation? Moody believes it is as
simple, as it is polemic. We live in a universe, that is far more
benevolent, than we realize. That is not to say, that anything goes
during the life review. Like Whitton's hypnotic subjects, after
arriving in the realm of light NDEers appear to enter a state of
heightened or metaconsciousness awareness and become lucidly honest in
their self-reflections. It also does not mean, that the beings of light
prescribe no values. In NDE after NDE they stress two things. One is
the importance of love. Over and over they repeat this message, that we
must learn to replace anger with love, learn to love more, learn to
forgive and love everyone unconditionally, and learn, that we in turn
are loved. This appears to be the only moral criterion the beings use.
Even sexual activity ceases to possess the moral stigma we humans are
so fond of attaching to it. One of Whitton's subjects reported, that
after living several withdrawn and depressed incarnations, he was urged
to plan a life as an amorous and sexually active female, in order to
add balance to the overall development of his soul. It appears, that in
the minds of the beings of light, compassion is the barometer of grace,
and time and time again, when NDEers wonder, if some act, they
committed, was right or wrong, the beings counter their inquiries only
with a question:
Did you do it out of love? Was the motivation love? That is why we have
been placed here on the Earth, say the beings, to learn, that love is
the key. They acknow-
ledge, that it is a difficult undertaking, but
intimate, that it is crucial to both our biological and spiritual
existence in ways, that we have perhaps not even begun to fathom. Even
children return from the near-death realm with this message firmly
impressed in their thoughts. States one little boy, who after being hit
by a car, was guided into
the world beyond by two people in "very white" robes: "What I learned
there is, that the most important thing is loving, while you are
alive." The second thing the beings emphasize is knowledge. Frequently
NDEers comment, that the beings seemed pleased, whenever an incident,
involving knowledge or learning, flickered by during their life review.
Some are openly counseled to embark on a quest for knowledge, after
they return to their physical bodies, especially knowledge, related to
self-growth or that enhances one's ability to help other people. Others
are prodded with statements such as "learning is a continuous process
and goes on even after death" and "knowledge is one of the few things
you will be able to take with you after you have died." The preeminence
of knowledge in the afterlife dimension is apparent in another way.
Some
NDEers
discovered, that in the presence of the light, they suddenly
had direct access to all knowledge. This access manifested in
several
ways. Sometimes it came in response to inquiries. One man said, that
all, he had to do, was ask a question, such as, what would it be like
to
be an insect, and instantly the experience was his. Another NDEer
described it by saying, "You can think of a question... and immediately
know the answer to it. As simple, as that. And it can be any question
whatsoever. It can be on a subject, that you don't know anything about,
that you are not in the proper position even to understand and the
light will give you the instantaneous correct answer and make you
understand it." Some NDEers report, that they didn't even have to ask
questions, in order to access this infinite library of information.
Following their life review, they just suddenly knew everything, all
the knowledge, there was to know, from the beginning of Time to the
end. Others came into contact with this knowledge after the being of
light made some specific gesture, such as wave its hand. Still others
said, that instead of acquiring the knowledge, they remembered it, but
forgot most of, what they recalled as soon, as they returned to their
physical bodies (an amnesia, that seems to be universal among NDEers,
who are privy to such visions). Whatever the case, it appears, that
once we are in the world beyond, it is no longer necessary to enter an
altered state of consciousness, in order to have access to the
transpersonal and infinitely interconnected informational realm,
experienced by Grof's patients.
252-253
In addition to being holographic in all
the ways, already mentioned, this vision of total knowledge has another
holographic characteristic. NDEers often say, that during the vision
the information arrives in nonlinear "chunks" (rotes), that register
instantaneously in one's thoughts. In other words, rather than, being
strung out in a linear fashion, like words in a sentence or scenes in a
movie, all the facts, details, images, and pieces of information burst
into one's awareness in an instant (rotes).
One NDEer referred to these
bursts of information as "bundles of thought." Monroe, who has also
experienced such instantaneous explosions of information while in the
OB state, calls them "rotes" or "thought balls." Indeed, anyone, who
possesses any appreciable psychic ability, is familiar with this
experience, for this is the form, in which one receives psychic
information as well. For instance, sometimes, when I meet a stranger
(and on occasion even when I just hear a person's
name), a thought ball of information about that person will instantly
flash into my awareness. This thought ball can include important facts
about the person's psychological and emotional makeup, their health,
and even scenes from their past. I find, that I am especially prone to
getting thought balls about people, who are in some kind of crisis. For
example, recently I met a woman and instantly knew, she was
contemplating suicide. I also knew some of the reasons why. As I always
do in such situations,
I started talking to her and cautiously
maneuvered the conversation to things psychic. After finding out, that
she was receptive to the subject, I confronted her with what I knew and
got her to talk about her problems. I got her to promise to seek some
kind of professional counseling, instead of the darker option, she was
consider
ing. Receiving information in this manner is similar to the way
one becomes aware of information, while dreaming. Virtually everyone
has had a dream, in which they find themselves in a situation and
suddenly know all kinds of things about it, without being told. For
instance, you might dream you are at a party and as soon, as you are
there, you know, who it is being given for and why. Similarly, everyone
has had a detailed idea or inspiration dawn upon them in a flash. Such
experiences are lesser versions of the thought ball effect.
Interestingly, because these bursts of psychic information arrive in
nonlinear chunks, it sometimes takes me several moments to translate
them into words. Like the psychological gestalts, experienced by
individuals during transpersonal experiences, they are holographic in
the sense, that they are instantaneous "wholes" our time-oriented minds
must struggle with for a moment, in order to unravel and convert into a
serial arrangement of parts. What form does the knowledge contained in
the thought balls, experienced during NDEs take? According to NDEers
all
forms of communication are used, sounds, moving hologramlike images,
even telepathy—a fact, that Ring believes, demonstrates once again,
that the hereafter is "a world of existence, where thought is king."
The
thoughtful reader may immediately wonder, why the quest for learning is
so important during life, if we have access to all knowledge after we
die?
When asked this question, NDEers replied, that they weren't certain,
but felt strongly, that it had something to do with the purpose of life
and the ability of each individual to reach out and help others.
Life Plans and Parallel
Time Tracks
Like Whitton, NDE
researchers have also uncovered evidence, that our lives are planned
beforehand, at least to some extent, and we each play a role in the
creation of this plan. This is apparent in several aspects of the
experience. Frequently after arriving in the world of light, NDEers are
told, that "it is not their time yet." As Ring points out, this remark
clearly implies the existence of some kind of "life plan." It is also
clear, that NDEers play a role in the formulation of these destinies,
for they are often given the choice whether to return or stay. There
are even instances of NDEers being told, that it is their time and
still
being allowed to return. Moody cites a case, in which a man started to
cry, when he realized, he was dead, because he was afraid, his wife
wouldn't be able to raise their nephew without him. On hearing this,
the
being told him, that since he wasn't asking for himself, he would be
allowed to return. In another case a woman argued, that she hadn't
danced enough yet. Her remark caused the being of light to give a
hearty laugh and she, too, was given permission to return to physical
life. That our future is at least partially sketched out is also
evident in a phenomenon Ring calls the "personal flashforward. " On
occasion, during the vision of knowledge, NDEers are shown glimpses of
their own future.
254-255
In one particularly striking case a child NDEer was
told various specifics about his future, including the fact, that he
would be married at age twenty- eight and would have two children. He
was even shown his adult self and his future children, sitting in a
room
of the house, he would eventually be living in, and as he gazed at the
room, he noticed something very strange on the wall, something that his
mind could not grasp. Decades later and after each of these predictions
had come to pass,
he found himself in the very scene, he had witnessed
as a child and realized, that the strange object on the wall was a
"forced-air heater, " a kind of heater, that had not yet been invented
at the time of his NDE. In another equally astonishing personal
flashforward a female NDEer was shown a photograph of Moody, told his
full name, and told, that when the time was right, she would tell him
about her experience. The year was 1971 and Moody had not yet published
"Life after Life", so his name and picture meant nothing to the woman.
However, the time became "right" four years later, when Moody and his
family unwittingly moved to the very street, on which the woman lived.
That Halloween Moody's son was out trick-or-treating and knocked on the
woman's door. After hearing the boy's name, the woman told him to tell
his father, she had to talk to him, and when Moody obliged, she related
her remarkable story. Some NDEs even support Loye's proposal, that
several holographic parallel universes, or time tracks, exist. On
occasion NDEers are shown personal flashforwards and told, that the
future they have witnessed, will come to pass only, if they continue on
their current path. In one unique instance an NDEer was shown a
completely different history of the earth, a history, that would have
developed, if "certain events" had not taken place around the time of
the Greek philosopher and mathematician Pythagoras three thousand years
ago. The vision revealed, that if these events, the precise nature of
which the woman does not disclose, had failed to take place, we would
now be living in a world of peace and harmony, marked "by the absence
of
religious wars and of a Christ figure." Such experiences suggest, that
the laws of time and space, operative in a holographic universe, may be
very strange indeed. Even NDEers, who do not experience direct evidence
of the role, they play in their own destiny, often come back with a
firm
understanding of the holographic interconnectedness of all things. As a
sixty-twoyear- old businessman, who had an NDE during a cardiac arrest,
puts it "One thing, I learned, was, that we are all part of one big,
living Universe. If we think we can hurt another person or another
living thing without
hurting ourselves, we are sadly mistaken. I look at a forest or a
flower
or a bird now, and say:"That is me, part of me." We are connected with
all things and, if we send love along those connections, then we are
happy."
You
Can Eat,
but You Don't Have To
The holographic and mind-created aspects of the near-death dimension
are apparent in myriad other ways. In describing the hereafter one
child said, that food appeared, whenever she wished for it, but there
was
no need to eat, an observation, that underscores once again the
illusory
and hologramlike nature of afterlife reality. Even the symbolic
language of the psyche is given "objective" form. For example, one of
Whitton's subjects said, that when he was introduced to a woman, who
was
going to figure prominently in his next life, instead of appearing as a
human, she appeared as a shape, that was half-rose, half-cobra. After
being directed to figure out the meaning of the symbolism, he realized,
that he and the woman had been in love with one another in two other
lifetimes. However, she had also twice been responsible for his death.
Thus, instead of manifesting as a human, the loving and sinister
elements of her character caused her to appear in a hologramlike form,
that better symbolized these two, dramatically polar, qualities.
Whitton's subject is not alone in his experience. Hazrat Inayat Khan
said, that when he entered a mystical state and traveled to "divine
realities", the beings, he encountered, also occasionally appeared in
half-human, half-animal forms. Like Whitton's subject, Khan discerned,
that these transfigurations were symbolic, and when a being appeared as
part animal, it was, because the animal symbolized some quality the
being
possessed. For example, a being, that had great strength, might appear
with the head of a lion, or a being, that was
unusually smart and crafty, might have some of the features of a fox.
Khan theorized, that this is why ancient cultures, such as the
Egyptian,
pictured the gods, that rule the afterlife realm, as having animal
heads.
256-257
The propensity near-death reality has for molding itself into
hologramlike shapes, that mirror the thoughts, desires, and symbols,
that
populate our minds, explains why Westerners tend to perceive the beings
of light, as Christian religious figures, why Indians perceive them as
Hindu saints and deities, and so on. The plasticity of the ND realm
suggests, that such outward appearances may be no more or less real,
than
the food wished into existence by the little girl, mentioned above, the
woman, who appeared as an amalgam of a cobra and a rose, and the
spectral clothing conjured into existence by the NDEer, who was
embarrassed at his own nakedness. This same plasticity explains the
other cultural differences one finds in near-death experiences, such
as,
why some NDEers reach the hereafter by traveling through a tunnel, some
by crossing a bridge, some by going over a body of water, and some
simply by walking down a road. Again it appears, that in a reality
created solely out of interacting thought structures, even the
landscape itself is sculpted by the ideas and expectations of the
experiencer. At this juncture an important point needs to be made. As
startling and foreign, as the near-death realm seems, the evidence,
presented in this book, reveals, that our own level of existence may
not
be all that different. As we have seen, we too can access all
information, it is just a little more difficult for us. We too can
sometimes
have personal flashforwards and come face-to-face with the
phantasmal nature of time and space. And we too can sculpt and reshape
our bodies, and sometimes even our reality, according to our beliefs,
it just takes us a little more time and effort. Indeed, Sai Baba's
abilities suggest, that we can even materialize food simply, by wishing
for it, and Therese Neumann's inedia offers evidence,
that
eating may
ultimately be as unnecessary for us, as it is for individuals in the
near-death realm. In fact, it appears, that this reality and the next
are different in degree, but not in kind. Both are
hologramlike
constructs, realities, that are established, as Jahn and Dunne put it,
only by the interaction of consciousness with its environment. Put
another way, our reality appears to be a more frozen version of the
afterlife dimension. It takes a little more time for our beliefs to
resculpt our bodies into things like nail-like stigmata and for the
symbolic language of our psyches to manifest externally as
synchronicities.
But manifest they do, in a slow and inexorable river,
a river, whose persistent presence teaches us, that we live in a
universe,
we are only just beginning to understand.
Information about the
Near-Death Realm from Other Sources
One does not have to be in a life-threatening crisis to visit the
afterlife dimension. There is evidence, that the ND realm can also be
reached during OBEs. In his writings, Monroe describes several visits
to levels of reality, in which he encountered deceased friends. An even
more skilled out-of-body visitor to the land of the dead was Swedish
mystic Swedenborg. Born in 1688, Swedenborg was the Leonardo da Vinci
of his era. In his early years he studied science. He was the leading
mathematician in Sweden, spoke nine languages, was an engraver, a
politician, an astronomer, and a businessman, built watches and
microscopes as a hobby, wrote books on metallurgy, color theory,
commerce, economics, physics, chemistry, mining, and anatomy, and
invented prototypes for the airplane and the submarine. Throughout all
of this he also meditated regularly, and when he reached middle age,
developed the ability to enter deep trances, during which he left his
body and visited, what appeared to him to be, heaven and conversed with
"angels" and "spirits. " That Swedenborg was experiencing something
profound during these journeys, there can be no doubt. He became so
famous for this ability, that the queen of Sweden asked him to find
out,
why her deceased brother had neglected to respond to a letter, she had
sent him before his death. Swedenborg promised to consult the deceased
and the next day returned with a message, which the queen confessed
contained information only she and her dead brother knew. Swedenborg
performed this service several times for various individuals, who
sought
his help, and on another occasion told a widow, where to find a secret
compartment in her deceased husband's desk, in which she found some
desperately needed documents. So well known was this latter incident,
that it inspired the German philosopher Immanuel Kant to write an
entire book on Swedenborg, entitled "Dreams of a Spirit-Seer". But the
most amazing thing about Swedenborg's accounts of the afterlife realm
is how closely they mirror the descriptions, offered by modern-day
NDEers. For example, Swedenborg talks about passing through a dark
tunnel, being met by welcoming spirits, landscapes more beautiful, than
any on earth and one, where time and space no longer exist, a dazzling
light, that emitted a feeling of love, appearing before beings of
light,
and being enveloped by an all-encompassing peace and serenity.
258-259
He also
says, that he was allowed to observe firsthand the arrival of the newly
deceased in heaven, and watch, as they were subjected to the life
review, a process,
he called "the opening of the "Book of Lives". He
acknowledged, that during the process a person witnessed "everything
they had ever been or done," but added a unique twist. According to
Swedenborg, the information, that arose during the opening of the "Book
of Lives", was recorded in the nervous system of the person's spiritual
body. Thus, in order to evoke, the life review an "angel" had to
examine
the individual's entire body, "beginning with the fingers of each hand,
and proceeding through the whole." Swedenborg also refers to the
holographic thought balls, the angels use to communicate, and says,
that
they are no different from the portrayals, he could see in the
"wave-substance", that surrounded a person. Like most NDEers he
describes these telepathic bursts of knowledge, as a picture language
so
dense with information, that each image contains a thousand ideas. A
communicated series of these portrayals can also be quite lengthy and
"last up to several hours, in such a sequential arrangement, that one
can only marvel." But even here Swedenborg added a fascinating twist.
In addition to using portrayals, angels also employ a speech, that
contains concepts, that are beyond human understanding. In fact, the
main reason, they use portrayals, is because it is the only way, they
can
make even a pale version of their thoughts and ideas, comprehensible to
human beings. Swedenborg's experiences even corroborate some of the,
less commonly reported, elements of the NDE. Swedenborg noted, that
in the
spirit
world one no longer needs to eat food, but added, that information
takes
its place, as a source of nourishment. He said, that when
spirits and
angels talked, their thoughts were constantly coalescing into
three-dimensional symbolic images, especially animals. For example, he
said, that when angels talked about love and affection, "beautiful
animals are presented, such as lambs. When however the angels are
talking about evil affections, this is portrayed by hideous, fierce,
and useless animals, like tigers, bears, wolves, scorpions, snakes, and
mice." Although it is not a feature, reported by modern NDEers,
Swedenborg said, that he was astonished to find, that in heaven there
are
also spirits from other planets, an astounding assertion for a
man, who
was born over three hundred years ago! Most intriguing of all are those
remarks by Swedenborg, that seem to refer to reality's holographic
qualities. For
instance, he said, that although human beings appear to be separate
from one another, we are all connected in a cosmic unity. Moreover,
each of us is a heaven in miniature, and every person, indeed the
entire physical universe, is a microcosm of the greater divine reality.
As we have seen, he also believed, that underlying visible reality was
a
wave-substance. In fact, several Swedenborg scholars have commented
on
the many parallels between some of Swedenborg's concepts and Bohm and
Pribram's theory. One such scholar is Dr. George F. Dole, a professor
of theology at the Swedenborg School of Religion in Newton,
Massachusetts. Dole, who holds degrees from Yale, Oxford, and Harvard,
notes, that one of the most basic tenets of Swedenborg's thinking is,
that our universe
is constantly created and sustained by two wavelike
flows, one from heaven and one coming from our own soul or spirit.
"If
we put these images together, the resemblance to the hologram is
striking" says Dole. "We are constituted by the intersection of two
flows—one direct, from the divine, and one indirect, from the
divine via our environment. We can view ourselves as interference
patterns, because the inflow is a wave phenomenon, and we are, where
the
waves meet." Swedenborg also believed that, despite its ghostlike and
ephemeral qualities, heaven is actually a more fundamental level of
reality, than our own physical world. It is, he said, the archetypal
source, from which all earthly forms originate, and to which all forms
return, a concept not too dissimilar from Bohm's idea of the implicate
and explicate orders. In addition, he too believed, that the afterlife
realm and physical reality are different in degree, but not in kind,
and
that the material world is just a frozen version of the thought-built
reality of heaven.
The
matter, that comprises both heaven and earth
"flows in by stages" from the Divine, said Swedenborg, and "at each new
stage it becomes more general and therefore coarser and hazier, and it
becomes slower, and therefore more viscous and colder."
Swedenborg
filled almost twenty volumes with his experiences, and on his deathbed
was asked, if there was anything he wanted to recant. He earnestly
replied: "Everything, that I have written, is as true, as you now
behold
me. I might have said much more, had it been permitted to me. After
death you will see all, and then we shall have much to say to each
other on the subject."
The Land of Nonwhere
260-261
Swedenborg is not the only
individual in history, who possessed the ability to make out-of-body
journeys to the subtler levels of reality. The twelfth-century Persian
Sufis also employed deep trancelike meditation to visit the "land,
where
spirits dwell." And again, the parallels between their reports and the
body of evidence, that has accrued (accumulated) in this chapter, are
striking. They
claimed, that in this other realm one possesses a "subtle body" and
relies on senses, that are not always associated with "specific organs"
in that body. They asserted, that it is a dimension, populated by many
spiritual teachers, or imams, and sometimes called it "the country of
the hidden Imam." They held, that it is a world, created solely out of
the subtle matter of alam almithal, or thought. Even space itself,
including "nearness", "distances" and "far-off" places, was created by
thought. But this did not mean, that the country of the hidden Imam,
was
unreal, a world, constituted out of sheer nothingness. Nor was it a
landscape, created by only one mind. Rather it was a plane of
existence,
created by the imagination of many people, and yet one, that still had
its own corporeality and dimension, its own forests, mountains, and
even cities. The Sufis devoted a good deal of their writings to the
clarification of this point. So alien is this idea to many
Western
thinkers, that the late Henry Corbin, a professor of Islamic Religion
at
the Sorbonne in Paris and a leading authority in Iranian-Islamic
thought, coined the term 'imaginal' to describe it, meaning a world,
that
is created by imagination, but is ontologically no less real, than
physical reality. "The reason, I absolutely had to find another
expression, was that, for a good many years, my profession required me
to interpret Arabic and Persian texts, whose meaning I would
undoubtedly have betrayed, had I simply contented myself with the term
imaginary," stated Corbin. Because of the imaginal nature of the
afterlife realm, the Sufis concluded, that imagination itself is a
faculty of perception, an idea, that offers new light on why Whitton's
subject materialized a hand, only after he started thinking, and why
visualizing images has such a potent effect on the health and physical
structure of our bodies. It also contributed to the Sufis' belief, that
one could use visualization, a process they called "creative prayer,"
to alter and reshape the very fabric of one's destiny. In a notion,
that parallels Bohm's implicate and explicate orders, the
Sufis believed that, despite its phantasmal qualities, the afterlife
realm is the generative matrix, that gives birth to the entire physical
universe. All things in physical reality arise from this spiritual
reality, said the Sufis. However, even the most learned among them
found this strange, that, by meditating and venturing deep into the
psyche, one arrived in an inner world, that "turns out to envelop,
surround, or contain that, which at first was outer and visible." This
realization is, of course, just another reference to the nonlocal and
holographic qualities of reality. Each of us contains the whole of
heaven. More
than that, each of us contains the location of heaven. Or
as the Sufis put it, instead of having to search for spiritual reality
"in the where," the "where" is in us. Indeed, in discussing the
nonlocal aspects of the afterlife realm, a twelfth-century Persian
mystic, named Sohrawardi said, that the country of the hidden Imam
might
better be called Na-Koja-Abad, "the land of nonwhere." Admittedly this
idea is not new. It is the same sentiment, expressed in the statement
"the kingdom of heaven is within."
What is new, is
the idea, that such
notions are actually references to the nonlocal aspects of the subtler
levels of reality. Again, it is suggested, that when a person has an
OBE,
they might not actually travel anywhere. They might be merely altering
the always illusory hologram of reality, so that they have the
experience of traveling somewhere. In a holographic universe not only
is consciousness already everywhere, it too is nonwhere. The idea, that
the afterlife realm lies deep in the nonlocal expanse of the psyche,
has
been alluded to by some NDEers. As one seven-year old boy put
it:
"Death is like walking into your mind." Bohm offers a similarly
nonlocal view of, what happens during our transition from this life to
the next: "At the present, our whole thought process is telling us,
that
we have to keep our attention here. You can't cross the street, for
example, if you don't. But consciousness is always in the unlimited
depth, which is beyond space and time, in the subtler levels of the
implicate order. Therefore, if you went deeply enough into the actual
present, then maybe there's no difference between this moment and the
next. The idea would be, that in the death experience you would get
into
that. Contact with eternity is in the present moment, but it is
mediated by thought. It is a matter of attention."
Intelligent and
Coordinated Images of Light
262-263
The idea, that the subtler levels of reality can be accessed through a
shift in consciousness alone, is also one of the main premises of the
yogic tradition. Many yogic practices are designed specifically to
teach individuals, how to make such journeys. And once again, the
individuals, who succeed in these ventures, describe what is by now a
familiar landscape. One such individual was Sri Yukteswar Giri, a
little known, but widely respected Hindu holy man, who died in Puri,
India, in 1936. Evans-
Wentz,
who met Sri Yukteswar in the 1920s,
described him as a man of "pleasing presence and high character" fully
"worthy of the veneration (honour), that his followers accorded him."
Individuals, who live in this wondrous realm, can materialize
any body they want and can "see" with any area of their body, they
wish.
They can also materialize any fruit or other food, they desire,
although
they "are almost freed from any necessity of eating" and "feast only on
the ambrosia (anything with delicious flavour) of eternally new
knowledge." Sri
Yukteswar appears to have been especially gifted at passing back and
forth between this world and the next, and described the afterlife
dimension, as a world, composed of "various subtle vibrations of light
and color" and "hundreds of times larger, than the material cosmos. He
also said, that it was infinitely more beautiful, than our own realm of
existence, and abounded with "opal lakes, bright seas, and rainbow
rivers." Because it is more "vibrant with God's creative light" its
weather is always pleasant, and its only climatic manifestations are
occasional falls of "luminous white snow and rain of manycolored
lights." They communicate through a
telepathic series of "light pictures," rejoice at
"the immortality of
friendship," realize "the indestructibility of love," feel keen pain
"if any mistake is made in conduct or perception of truth," and when
they are confronted with the multitude of relatives, fathers, mothers,
wives, husbands, and friends, acquired during their "different
incarnations on earth," they are at a loss, as to whom to love
especially and thus learn to give "a divine and equal love to all."
What is the quintessential nature of our reality, once we take up
residence in this luminous land? To this question, Sri Yukteswar gave
an answer, that was as simple, as it was holographic. In this realm,
where
eating and even breathing are unnecessary, where a single thought can
materialize a "whole garden of fragrant flowers," and all bodily
injuries are "healed at once by mere willing", we are, quite simply,
"intelligent and coordinated images of light".
More References to Light
Sri Yukteswar is not the only yogic teacher to use such hologram-like
terms, when describing the subtler levels of reality. Another is Sri
Aurobindo Ghose, a thinker, political activist, and mystic, whom
Indians
revere alongside Gandhi. Born in 1872 to an upper-class Indian family,
Sri Aurobindo was educated in England, where
he quickly developed the
reputation, as a kind of prodigy. He was fluent not only in English,
Hindi, Russian, German, and French, but also in ancient Sanskrit. He
could read a case of books a day (as a youth, he read all of the many
and voluminous sacred books of India) and repeat verbatim every word on
every page, that he read.
His powers of concentration were legendary,
and it was said, that he could sit studying in the same posture all
night long, oblivious even to the incessant bites of the mosquitoes.
Like Gandhi, Sri Aurobindo was active in the nationalist movement in
India and spent time in prison for sedition (rebelion against
authority). However, despite all his
intellectual and humanitarian passion, he remained an atheist, until
one
day, when he saw a wandering yogi instantaneously heal his brother of a
life-
threatening illness. From that point on, Sri Aurobindo devoted his
life to the yogic disciplines and, like Sri Yukteswar, through
meditation he eventually learned to become, in his own words, "an
explorer of the planes of consciousness." It was not an easy task for
Sri
Aurobindo, and one of the most intractable obstacles, he had to
overcome
to accomplish his goal, was to learn how to silence the endless chatter
of words and thoughts, that flow unceasingly through the normal human
mind. Anyone, who has ever tried to empty his or her mind of all
thought
for even a moment or two, knows how daunting (discouraging) an
undertaking this is. But
it is also a necessary one, for the yogic texts are quite explicit on
this point. To plumb the subtler and more implicate regions of the
psyche does indeed require a Bohmian shift of attention. Or, as Sri
Aurobindo put it, to discover the "new country within us" we must first
learn how "to leave the old one behind."
264-265
It took
Sri
Aurobindo years to
learn, how to silence his mind and travel inward, but once he
succeeded, he discovered the same vast territory, encountered by all of
the other Marco Polos of the spirit thai, we have looked at—a
realm beyond space and time, composed of a "multicolored infinity of
vibrations" and peopled by non-physical beings,
so far in advance of
human consciousness, that they make us look like children. These beings
can take on any form at will, said Sri Aurobindo, the same being,
appearing as a saint and to an Indian as a Hindu one, although he
stressed, that their purpose is not to deceive, but merely to make
themselves more accessible "to a particular consciousness."
According
to Sri Aurobindo, in their truest form these beings appear as
"pure vibration." In his two-volume work "On Yoga" he even likens
their ability to appear as either a form or a vibration, to the
waveparticle duality, discovered by "modern science." Sri Aurobindo
also
noted, that in this luminous realm one is no longer restricted to
taking
in information in a "point-by-point" manner, but can absorb it "in
great masses" and in a single glance perceive "large extensions of
space and time." In fact, quite a number of Sri Aurobindo's assertions
are indistinguishable from many of Bohm's and Pribram's conclusions. He
said, that most human beings possess a "mental screen", that keeps us
from seeing beyond "the veil of matter", but when one learns to peer
beyond this veil, one finds, that everything is comprised of "different
intensities of luminous vibrations." He asserted, that consciousness is
also composed of different vibrations, and believed, that all matter is
to some degree conscious. Like Bohm, he even
asserted, that
psychokinesis is a direct result of the fact, that all matter is to
some
degree conscious. If matter were not conscious, no yogi could move an
object with his mind, because there would be no possibility of contact
between the yogi and the object, Sri Aurobindo says. Most Bohmian of
all are Sri Aurobindo's remarks about wholeness and fragmentation.
According to Sri Aurobindo, one of the most important things one learns
in "the great and luminous kingdoms of the Spirit, " is, that all
separateness is an illusion, and all things are ultimately
interconnected and whole. Again and again in his writings he stressed
this fact, and held, that it was only as one descended from the higher
vibrational levels of reality to the lower, that a "progressive law of
fragmentation" took over. We
fragment things, because we exist at a
lower vibration of consciousness and reality, says Sri Aurobindo, and
it is our propensity (tendency) for fragmentation, that keeps us from
experiencing
the intensity of consciousness, joy, love, and delight for existence,
that are the norm in these higher and more subtle realms. Just as Bohm
believes, that it is not possible for disorder to exist in
a Universe, that is ultimately unbroken and whole, Sri Aurobindo
believed the same was true of consciousness. If a single point of the
universe were totally unconscious, the whole universe would be totally
unconscious, he said, and if we perceive a pebble at the side of the
road or a grain of sand under our fingernail to be lifeless and dead,
our perception is again illusory and brought on only by our
somnambulistic inurement (sleepwalking, used to something
unpleasant) with fragmentation. Like Bohm, Sri Aurobindo's
epiphanic understanding of wholeness also made him aware of the
ultimate relativity of all truths and the arbitrariness of trying to
divide the seamless holomovement up into "things". So convinced was he,
that any attempt to reduce the Universe into absolute facts and
unchangeable doctrine, only led to distortion, that he was even against
religion, and all his life emphasized, that the true spirituality came
not from any organization or priesthood, but from the spiritual
universe within. We must not only cut asunder the snare of the mind and
the senses, but flee also from the snare of the thinker, the snare of
the theologian and the church-builder, the meshes of the Word and the
bondage of the Idea. All these are within us waiting to wall in the
spirit with forms; but we must always go beyond, always renounce the
lesser for the greater, the finite for the Infinite; we must be
prepared to proceed from illumination to illumination, from experience
to experience, from soul-state to soulstate....Nor must we attach
ourselves even to the truths, we hold most securely, for they are, but
forms and expressions of the Ineffable (indescribable), who refuses to
limit itself to
any form or expression. But if the cosmos is ultimately ineffable, a
farrago (mixture) of multicolored vibrations, what are all the forms we
perceive?
What is physical reality? It is, said Sri Aurobindo, just "a mass of
stable light."
The picture of
reality, reported by NDEers, is remarkably self-consistent and is
corroborated by the testimony of many of the world's most talented
mystics as well.
Survival
in Infinity
266-267
Even more astonishing is, that, as breathtaking
and foreign, as these subtler levels of reality are to those of us, who
reside in the world's more "advanced" cultures, they are mundane and
familiar territories to so-called primitive peoples. For example, Dr.
E. Nandisvara Nayake Thero, an anthropologist, who has lived with and
studied a community of aborigines in Australia, points out, that the
aboriginal concept of the "dreamtime, " a realm, that Australian
shamans
visit by entering a profound trance, is almost identical to the
afterlife planes of existence described in Western sources.
It
is the
realm, where human spirits go after death, and once there a shaman can
converse with the dead and instantly access all knowledge. It is also a
dimension, in which time, space, and the other boundaries of earthly
life cease to exist and one must learn to deal with Infinity. Because
of this, Australian shamans often refer to the afterlife as "survival
in Infinity."
Holger Kalweit, a German ethnopsychologist with degrees
in both psychology and cultural anthropology, goes Thero one better. An
expert on shamanism, who is also active in near-death research, Kalweit
points out, that virtually all of the world's shamanic traditions
contain descriptions of this vast and extradimensional realm, replete
with references to the life review, higher spiritual beings, who teach
and guide, food conjured (summon) up out of thought, and indescribably
beautiful
meadows, forests, and mountains. Indeed, not only is the ability to
travel into the afterlife realm the most universal requirement for
being a shaman, but NDEs are often the very catalyst, that thrusts an
individual into the role. For instance, the Oglala Sioux, the Seneca,
the Siberian Yakut, the South American Guajiro, the Zulu, the Kenyan
Kikuyu, the Korean Mu dang, the Indonesian Mentawai Islanders, and the
Caribou Eskimo—all have traditions of individuals, who became
shamans after a life-threatening illness propelled them headlong into
the afterlife realm. However, unlike Western NDEers, for whom such
experiences are disorientingly new, these shamanic explorers appear to
have a far vaster knowledge of the geography of these subtler realms
and are often able to return to them again and again. Why? Kalweit
believes, it is because such experiences are a daily reality for such
cultures. Whereas our society suppresses any thoughts or mention of
death and dying, and has devalued the mystical by defining reality
strictly in terms of the material, tribal peoples still have day-to-day
contact with the psychic nature of reality. Thus, they have a better
understanding of the rules, that govern these inner realms, says
Kalweit, and are much more skilled at navigating their territories.
That these inner regions, have been well traveled by shamanic peoples,
is
evidenced by an experience anthropologist Michael Harner had among the
Conibo Indians of the Peruvian Amazon. In 1960 the American Museum of
Natural History sent Harner on a year-long expedition to study the
Conibo, and while there he asked the Amazonian native to tell him about
their religious beliefs. They told him, that if he really wished to
learn, he had to take a shamanic sacred drink, made from a
hallucinogenic plant known as ayahuasca, the "soul vine." He agreed
and, after drinking the bitter concoction, had an out-of-body
experience,
in which he traveled a level of reality, populated by, what appeared to
be, the gods and devils of the Conibo's mythology. He saw demons with
grinning crocodilian heads. He watched as an "energy-essence" rose up
out of his chest and floated toward a dragon-headed ship, manned by
Egyptian-style figures with blue-jay heads; and he felt, what he
thought
was the slow, advancing numbness of his own death. But the most
dramatic experience he had during his spirit journey was an encounter
with a group of winged, dragonlike beings, that emerged from his spine.
After they had crawled out of his body, they "projected" a visual scene
in front of him, in which they showed him, what they said, was the
"true"
history of the Earth. Through a kind of "thought language" they
explained, that they were responsible for both the origin and evolution
of all life on the planet. Indeed, they resided not only in human
beings, but in all life, and had created the multitude of living forms,
that populates the Earth, to provide themselves with a hiding place
from
some undisclosed enemy in outer space (Harner notes, that although the
beings were almost like DNA, at the time, 1961, he knew nothing of
DNA). After this concatenation (chain) of visions was over, Harner
sought out a
blind Conibo shaman, noted for his paranormal talents, to talk to him
about the experience. The shaman, who had made many excursions into the
spirit world, nodded occasionally, as Harner related the events, that
had
befallen him, but when he told the old man about the dragonlike beings
and their claim, that they were the true masters of the Earth, the
shaman smiled with amusement.
"Oh, they are always
saying that. But
they are only the Masters of Outer Darkness" he corrected. "I was
stunned" says Harner. "What I had experienced was already familiar to
this barefoot, blind shaman.
268-269
Known to him from his
own explorations of
the same hidden world, into which I had ventured." However, this was
not
the only shock Earner received. He also recounted his experience to two
Christian missionaries, who lived nearby, and was intrigued, when they
too seemed to know, what he was talking about. After
he finished, they
told him, that some of his descriptions were virtually identical to
certain passages in the "Book of Revelation", passages that Harner, an
atheist, had never read. So it seems, that the old Conibo shaman
perhaps
was not the only individual to have traveled the same ground, Harner
later and more falteringly covered. Some of the visions and "trips to
heaven", described by Old and New Testament prophets, may also have
been
shamanic journeys into the inner realm. Is it possible, that what we
have been viewing as quaint folklore and charming but naive mythology,
are actually sophisticated accounts of the cartography of the subtler
levels of reality? Kalweit, for one, believes the answer is an emphatic
yes. "In light of the revolutionary findings of recent research into
the nature of dying and death, we can no longer look upon tribal
religions and their ideas about the World of the Dead as limited
conceptions," he says. "[Rather] the shaman should be considered, as a
most up-to-date and knowledgeable psychologist."
An
Undeniable Spiritual Radiance
One last piece of evidence of the reality of the NDE is the
transformative effect, it has on those, who experience it. Researchers
have discovered, that NDEers are almost always profoundly changed by
their journey to the beyond. They become happier, more optimistic, more
easygoing, and less concerned with material possessions. Most striking
of all, their capacity to love expands enormously. Aloof husbands
suddenly become warm and affectionate, workaholics start relaxing and
devoting time to their families, and introverts become extroverts.
These changes are often so dramatic, that people, who know the NDEer
frequently remark, that he or she has become an entirely different
person. There are even cases on record of criminals, completely
reforming their ways, and fire-and-brimstone preachers, replacing their
message of damnation with one of unconditional love and compassion.
NDEers also become much more spiritually oriented. They return not only
firmly convinced of the immortality of the human soul, but also with a
deep and abiding sense, that the universe is compassionate and
intelligent, and this loving presence is always with them. However,
this awareness does not necessarily result in their becoming more
religious. Like Sri Aurobindo, many NDEers stress the importance of the
distinction between religion and spirituality, and assert, that it is
the latter (spirituality), that has blossomed into greater fullness in
their lives, not the former. Indeed, studies show, that following
their
experience, NDEers display an increased openness to ideas outside their
own religious background, such as reincarnation and Eastern religions.
This widening of interests frequently extends to other areas as well.
For instance, NDEers often develop a marked fascination for the types
of subjects, discussed in this book, in particular psychic phenomena
and
the new physics. One NDEer, investigated by Ring, for example, was a
driver of heavy equipment, who displayed no interest in books or
academic pursuits prior to his experience. However, during his NDE he
had a vision of total knowledge, and although he was unable to recall
the content of the vision, after he recovered, various physics' terms
started popping into his head. One morning not long after his
experience, he blurted out the word quantum. Later he announced
cryptically, "Max Planck—you'll be hearing about him in the near
future," and as time continued to pass, fragments of equations and
mathematical symbols began to surface in his thoughts. Neither he, nor
his wife knew, what the word quantum meant, or who Max Planck (widely
viewed as the founding father of quantum physics) was, until the man
went to a library and looked the words up. But after discovering, that
he was not talking gibberish, he started to read voraciously, not only
books on physics, but also on parapsychology, metaphysics, and higher
consciousness; and he even enrolled in college, as a physics major. The
man's wife wrote a letter to Ring, trying to describe her husband's
transformation: "Many times he says a word, he has never heard before
in
our reality—it might be a foreign word of a different
language—but l e a r n s...it in relationship to the "light"
theory.... He talks about things faster, than the speed of light and
it's hard for me to understand, when [he] picks up a book on physics,
he
already knows the answer and seems to feel more ..."
270-271
The man also
started developing various psychic abilities after his experience,
which is not uncommon among NDEers. In 1982 Bruce Greyson, a
psychiatrist at the University of Michigan and lANDS's director of
research, gave sixty-nine NDEers a questionnaire, designed to study
this
issue, and he found, that there was an increase in virtually all of the
psychic and psi-related phenomena, he assessed." Phyllis Atwater, an
Idaho housewife, who became an NDE researcher, following her own
transformative NDE, has interviewed dozens of NDEers and has obtained
similar findings. 'Telepathy and healing gifts are common," she
states.
"So is 'remembering' the future. Time and space stop, and you
live in a future sequence in detail. Then, when the event occurs, you
recognize it." Moody believes, that the profound and positive identity
changes, such individuals undergo, is the most compelling evidence,
that
NDEs are actually journeys into some spiritual level of reality. Ring
agrees. "[At the core of the NDE] we find an absolute and undeniable
spiritual radiance," he says. "This spiritual core is so awesome and
overwhelming, that the person is at once and forever thrust into an
entirely new mode of being." NDE researchers are not the only
individuals, who are beginning to accept the existence of this
dimension
and the spiritual component of the human race. Nobelist Brian
Josephson, himself a longtime meditator, is also convinced, that there
are subtler levels of reality, levels, that can be accessed through
meditation, and where, quite possibly, one travels after death. At a
1985 symposium on the possibility of life beyond biological death, held
at Georgetown University and convened by U. S. Senator Claiborne Pell,
physicist Paul Davies expressed a similar openness.
"We are all agreed
that, at least insofar as human beings are concerned, mind is a product
of matter, or put more accurately, mind finds expression through matter
(specifically our brains). The lesson of the quantum is, that matter
can
only achieve concrete, well-defined existence in conjunction with mind.
Clearly, if mind is pattern, rather than substance, then it is capable
of many different representations." Even psychoneuroimmunologist
Candace Pert, another participant at the symposium, was receptive to
the idea. "I think it is important to realize, that information is
stored in the brain, and it is conceivable to me, that this information
could transform itself into some other realm. Where does the
information go after the destruction of the molecules (the mass) that
compose it?"
Matter can neither be created, nor destroyed, and perhaps biological
information flow cannot just disappear at death and must be transformed
into another realm"
she says. Is it possible, that what Bohm has called
the implicate level of reality, is actually the realm of the spirit,
the
source of the spiritual radiance, that has trans
figured the mystics of
all ages? Bohm himself does not dismiss the idea. The implicate domain
"could equally well be called "Idealism, Spirit, Consciousness"
he
states with typical matter-of-factness. "The separation of the
two—matter and spirit—is an abstraction. The ground is
always one."
Who
Are the Beings of Light?
Because most of the
above remarks were made by physicists and not theologians, one cannot
help, but wonder, if perhaps, the interest in new physics, displayed by
Ring's NDEer, is an indication of something deeper. If, as Bohm
suggests, physics is beginning to make inroads in areas, that were once
exclusively the province of the mystic, is it possible, that these
encroachments have already been anticipated by the beings, who inhabit
the near-death realm? Is that why NDEers are given an insatiable hunger
for such knowledge? Are they, and by proxy, the rest of the human race,
being prepared for some coming confluence between science and the
spiritual? We will explore this possibility a little later. First,
another question must be asked. If the existence of this higher
dimension is no longer at issue, then what are its parameters? More
specifically, who are the beings, that inhabit it, and what is their
society, dare one say their civilization, really like? These are, of
course, difficult questions to answer. When Whitton tried to find out
the identity of the beings, who counseled people in the between-life
state, he found the answer elusive. "The impression my subjects
gave—the ones, who could answer the question—was, that these
were entities, who had completed their cycle of incarnations here" he
says. After hundreds of journeys into the inner realm, and after
interviewing dozens of other talented fellow OBEers on the matter,
Monroe has also come up empty-handed. "Whatever they may be, [these
beings] have the ability to radiate a warmth of friendliness,
that
evokes complete trust"
he observes.
272-273
"Perceiving our thoughts is
absurdly easy for [them]." And "the entire history of humankind and
earth is available to them in the most minute detail." But Monroe,
too, confesses ignorance, when it comes to the ultimate identity of
these nonphysical entities, save that their first order of business
appears to be "totally solicitous (concerned) as to the well-being of
the human
beings, with whom they are associated."
Not muck more can be said about the civilizations of these subtle
realms, save that individuals, who are privileged enough to visit them,
universally report, seeing many vast and celestially beautiful cities
there. NDEers, yogic adepts, and ayahuasca-using shamans—all
describe these mysterious metropolises with remarkable consistency. The
twelfth-century Sufis were so familiar with them, that they even gave,
several of them, names. The most notable feature of these great cities
is, that they are brilliantly luminous. They are also frequently
described as foreign in architecture, and so sublimely beautiful, that,
like all of the other features of these implicate dimensions, words
fail to convey their grandeur. In describing one such city, Swedenborg
said, that it was a place "of staggering architectural design, so
beautiful, that you would say, this is the home and the source of the
art
itself." People, who visit these cities, also frequently assert, that
they
have an unusual number of schools and other buildings, associated with
the pursuit of knowledge. Most of Whitton's subjects recalled spending,
at least some time, hard at work in vast halls of learning, equipped
with
libraries and seminar rooms, while in the between-life state. Many
NDEers also report being shown "schools," "libraries," and
"institutions of higher learning" during their experiences. And one can
even find references to great cities, devoted to learning and reachable
only by journeying into "the hidden depths of the mind" in
eleventh century Tibetan texts. Edwin Bernbaum, a Sanskrit scholar at
the University of California at Berkeley, believes, that James Hilton's
novel Lost Horizon, in which he created the fictional community of
Shangri-La, was actually inspired by one of these Tibetan legends. The
only problem is, that in an imaginal realm such descriptions don't
mean very much. One can never be sure, whether the spectacular
architectural structures, NDEers encounter, are realities or just
allegorical phantasms. For instance, both Moody and Ring have
reported
cases, in which NDEers said, that the buildings of higher learning,
they
visited, were not just
devoted to knowledge, but were literally built
out of knowledge. This curious choice of words suggests, that
perhaps
visits to these edifices are actually encounters with something, so
beyond human conception—perhaps a dynamic living cloud of pure
knowledge, or what information becomes, as Pert puts it, after it has
been transformed into another realm—that translating
it into a
hologram of a building or library, is the only way the human mind can
process it. The same is true of the beings, one encounters in
the
subtler dimensions.
We can never know from their appearance alone, what
they really are. For example, George Russell, a well-
known-turn-of-the
century Irish Seer and an extraordinarily talented OBEer, encountered
many "beings of light" during, what he called, his journeys into the
"inner world." When asked once during an interview to describe, what
these beings looked like, he stated: "The first of these I saw, I
remember very clearly, and the manner of its appearance: there was at
first a dazzle of light, and then I saw, that this came from the heart
of a tall figure with a body, apparently shaped out of half-transparent
or opalescent air, and throughout the body ran a radiant, electrical
fire, to which the heart seemed the centre. Around the head of this
being and through its waving luminous hair, which was blown all about
the body like living strands of gold, there appeared flaming wing-like
auras. From the being itself light seemed to stream outwards in every
direction; and the effect, left on me after the vision, was one of
extraordinary lightness, joyousness, or ecstasy. Intriguingly, I have
met several other individuals, usually people with more, than normal
psychic ability, who have also had these dreams (one, a talented Texas
clairvoyant named Jim Gordon, was so baffled by the experience, that he
often asked his nonplussed mother, why he had to go to school twice,
once during the day with all the other children, and once at night,
while he slept). It is relevant to mention here, that Monroe and
numerous other OBE researchers believe, that flying dreams are actually
just poorly remembered OBEs, making me wonder, if perhaps some of us,
at
least, are visiting these incorporeal schools, even while we are alive.
If anyone, reading this book, has also had such experiences, I would be
very interested in hearing about them."
Throughout my high-school and
college years I had vivid and frequent dreams, that I was attending
classes on spiritual subjects at a strangely beautiful university in
some sublime and otherworldly place. These were not anxiety dreams
about going to school, but incredibly pleasant flying dreams, in which
I
floated weightlessly to lectures on the human energy field and
reincarnation. During these dreams I sometimes encountered people, I
had
known in this life, but who had died, and even people, who identified
themselves, as souls about to be reborn.
274-275
On the other hand, Monroe asserts, that once he has been in the
presence
of one of these nonphysical entities for a while, it discards its
appearance and he perceives nothing, although he continues to sense
"the radiation, that is the entity." Again the question can be asked:"
When a journeyer to the inner dimensions encounters a Being of light,
is that Being a reality or just an allegorical phantasm?" The answer
is, of course, that it is a bit of both, for in a holographic universe
all appearances are illusions, hologramlike images, constructed by the
interaction of the consciousness present, but illusions based, as
Pribram says, on something, that is there. Such are the dilemmas one
faces in a universe, that appears to us in
explicate form, but always has its source in something ineffable, in
the
implicate. We can take heart in the fact, that the hologramlike images,
our minds construct in the afterlife realm, appear to bear at least
some
relationship to the something, that is there. When we encoun
ter a
disembodied cloud of pure knowledge, we convert it into a school or
library. When an NDEer meets a woman, with whom he has had a love/hate
relationship,
he sees her as half rose, half cobra, a symbol, that still
conveys the quintessence of her character; and when travelers in the
subtler realms encounter helpful, non
physical consciousnesses, they see
them as luminous ...beings. As for the ultimate identity of these
beings, we can deduce from their behavior, that they are older, wiser,
and possess some deep and loving connection to the human species, but
beyond this, the question remains unanswered, as to whether they are
...
the souls of human beings, who have finished reincarnating, or
something,
that is altogether beyond human comprehension. To speculate further
would be presumptuous, in that it would not only be tackling a
question,
that thousands of years of human history have failed to resolve, but
would also ignore Sri Aurobindo's warning against turning spiritual
understandings into religious ones. As science gathers more evidence,
the answer will most assuredly become clearer, but until then, the
question of, who and what these beings are, remains open.
The
Omnijective Universe
The hereafter is not the only realm, in which we can encounter
hologramlike apparitions, sculptured by our beliefs. It appears, that
on
occasion we can even have such experiences at our own level of
existence. For example, philosopher Michael Grosso believes, that
miraculous appearances of the Virgin Mary may also be hologram
like
projections, created by the collective beliefs of the human race. One
"Marian" vision, that is especially holographic in flavor is the
well-known appearance of the Virgin in Knock, Ireland, in 1879. On that
occasion fourteen people saw three glowing and eerily motionless
figures, consisting of Mary, Joseph, and St. John the Evangelist
(identified, because he closely resembled a statue of the saint in a
nearby village), standing in a meadow next to the local church. These
brilliantly luminous figures were so real, that when witnesses
approached, they could even read the lettering on a book St. John was
holding. But, when one of the women present tried to embrace the
Virgin,
her arms closed on empty air. "The figures appeared so full and
lifelike, I could not understand, why my hands could not feel, what was
so
plain and distinct to my sight" the woman later wrote. Another
impressively holographic Marian vision is the equally famous appearance
of the Virgin in Zeitoun, Egypt.
The sightings began in 1968, when two
Moslem automobile mechanics saw a luminous apparition of Mary standing
on the ledge of the central dome of a Coptic church in the poor Cairo
suburb. For the next three years glowing three-dimensional images of
Mary, Joseph, and the Christ Child appeared weekly over the church,
sometimes hovering in midair for as long, as six hours. Unlike the
figures at Knock, the Zeitoun apparitions moved about and waved at the
crowds of people, who regularly gathered to see them. However, they too
had many holographic aspects. Their appearance was always heralded by a
brilliant flash of light. Like holograms shifting from their frequency
aspects and slowly coming into focus, they were at first amorphous and
slowly coalesced into human shape. They were often accompanied by doves
"formed of pure light", that soared for great distances over the crowd,
but never flapped their wings. Most telling of all, after three years
of manifestations and as interest in the phenomenon started to wane,
the Zeitoun figures also waned, becoming hazier and hazier, until, in
their last several appearances, they were little more, than clouds of
luminous fog. Nonetheless, during their peak, the figures were seen by
literally hundreds of thousands of witnesses and were extensively
photographed. "I've interviewed quite a number of these people, and
when you hear them talk about, what they saw, you can't get rid of the
feeling, that they're describing some sort of holographic
projection," says Grosso.
276-277
In his thought-provoking book "The Final
Choice" Grosso says, that after studying the evidence, he is convinced,
that such visions are not appearances of the historical Mary, but are
actually psychic holographic projections, created by the collective
unconscious. Interestingly, not all of the Marian apparitions are
silent. Some, like the manifestations at Fatima and Lourdes, speak, and
when they do, their message is invariably a warning of impending
apocalypse, if we mortals do not mend our ways. Grosso interprets this
as evidence, that the human collective unconscious is deeply disturbed
by the violent impact, modern science has had on human life and on the
ecology of the earth. Our collective dreams are, in essence, warning us
of the possibility of our own self-destruction. Others have also
agreed,
that belief in Mary is the motivating force, that causes these
projections to coalesce into being. For instance, Rogo points out, that
in 1925, while the Coptic church, that became the site of the Zeitoun
manifestations, was being built, the philanthropist, responsible for
its
construction, had a dream, in which the Virgin told him, she would
appear
at the church as soon, as it was completed. She did not appear at the
prescribed time, but the prophecy was well known in the community. Thus
"there existed a forty-
year-old tradition, that a Marian visitation
would eventually take place at the church," nays Rogo. "These
preoccupations may have gradually built up a psychic 'blue
print' of the
Virgin within the church itself, i. e., an ever-increasing pool of
psychic energy, created by the thoughts of the Zeitounians, which in
1968
became so high-pitched, that an image of the Virgin Mary burst into
physical reality!"
In previous writings I, too, have offered a similar explanation of
Marian visions. There is evidence, that some UFOs may also be some kind
of hologramlike phenomen
on. When people first started reporting
sightings of, what appeared to be spacecraft from other planets in the
late 1940s, researchers, who delved deeply enough into the reports to
realize, that at least some of them had to be taken seriously, assumed,
that they were exactly, what they appeared to be—glimpses of
intelligently guided crafts from more advanced and probably
extraterrestrial civilizations. However, as encounters with UFOs become
more widespread, especially those, involving contact with UFO
occupants—and data accumulates, it becomes increasingly apparent
to many researchers, that these so-called spacecraft are not
extraterrestrial in origin. Some of the features of the phenomenon,
that indicate, they are not
extraterrestrial, include the following.
First, there are too many
sightings; literally thousands of encounters with UFOs and their
occupants have been documented, so many, that it is difficult to
believe,
they could all be actual visits from other planets.
Second, UFO
occupants often do not possess traits, one would expect in a truly
extraterrestrial lifeform; too many of them are described as humanoid
beings, who breathe our air, display no fear of contracting earthly
viruses, are well adapted to the earth's gravity and the sun's
electromagnetic emissions, display recognizab
le emotions in their
faces, and talk our language, all of which are possible, but
unlikely traits in truly extraterrestrial visitors.
Third, they do not
behave as extraterrestrial visitors. Instead of making the proverbial
landing on the White House lawn, they appear to farmers and stranded
motorists. They chase jets, but don't attack. They dart around in the
sky, allowing dozens and sometimes hundreds of witnesses to see them,
but they show no interest in making any formal contact. And often, when
they contact individuals, their behavior still seems illogical. For
instance, one of the most commonly reported types of contact is that,
which involve some sort of medical examination. And yet, arguably, a
civilization, that possesses the technological capability to travel
almost incomprehensible tracts of outer space, would most assuredly
possess the scientific wherewithal to obtain such information, without
any physical contact at all or, at the very least, without having to
abduct the scores of people, who appear to be legitimate victims of
this
mysterious phenomenon. Finally, and most curious of all, UFOs do not
even behave, as physical objects do. They have been watched on radar
screens to make instant ninety-degree-angle turns, while traveling at
enormous speeds—an antic, that would rip a physical object apart.
They can change size, instantly vanish into nothingness, appear out of
nowhere, change color, and even change shape (traits, that are also
displayed by their occupants). In short, their behavior is not at all,
what one would expect from a physical object, but of something quite
different, something, with which we have become more, than a little
familiar in this book. As astrophysicist Dr. Jacques Vallee, one of the
world's most respected
UFO researchers and the model for the character LaCombe in the film
Close Encounters of the Third Kind, stated recently:"It is the behavior
of an image, or a holographic projection." As the nonphysical and
hologramlike qualities of UFOs become increasingly apparent to
researchers, some have concluded, that rather, than being from
other star systems,
278-279
UFOs are actually visitors from other dimensions,
or levels of reality {it is important to note, that not all researchers
agree with this point
of view, and some remain convinced, that UFOs are extraterrestrial in
origin). However, this explanation still does not adequately explain
many of the other bizarre aspects of the phenomenon, such as, why UFOs
aren't making formal contact, why they behave so absurdly, and so on.
Indeed, the inadequacy of the extra dimensional explanation, at least
in the terms, in which it was initially couched, only becomes more
glaring, as still further unusual aspects of the UFO phenomenon come
into focus. One of the more baffling of these is growing evidence, that
UFO encounters are less of an objective experience and more of a
subjective, or psychological, one. For instance, the well-known
"interrupted journey" of Betty and Barney Hill, one of the most
thoroughly documented UFO abduction cases on record, seems as if it
were an actual alien contact in all ways, except one: the commander of
the UFO was dressed in a Nazi uniform, a fact, that does not make
sense,
if the Hills' abductors were truly visitors from an alien civilization,
but it does, if the event was psychological in nature and more akin to
a
dream or hallucination, experiences, that often contain obvious symbols
and disconcerting flaws in logic. Other UFO encounters are even more
surreal and dreamlike in character, and in the literature one can find
cases, in which UFO entities sing absurd songs or throw strange objects
(such as potatoes) at witnesses; cases, that start out as
straightforward abductions aboard spacecraft, but end up as
hallucinogenic journeys through a series of Dantesque realities; and
cases, in which humanoid aliens shapeshift into birds, giant insects,
and other phantasmagoric creatures. As early as 1959, and even before,
much of this evidence was in, the psychological and archetypal
component of the UFO phenomenon, inspired Carl Jung to propose, that
"flying saucers" were actually a product of the collective human
unconscious and a kind of modern myth in the making. In 1969, and as
the mythic dimension of UFO experiences became even clearer, Vallee
took the observation a step further. In his landmark book "Passport to
Magonia" he points out that, far from being a new phenomenon, UFOs
actually appear to be a very old phenomenon in a new guise and greatly
resemble various folkloric traditions, from descriptions of elves and
gnomes in European countries to medieval accounts of angels to the
supernatural beings, described in Native American legends. The absurd
behavior of UFO entities is the same, as the mischievous
behavior of elves and fairies in Celtic legends, the Norse gods, and
the trickster figures among the Native Americans, says Vallee. When
stripped to their underlying archetypes, all such phenomena are part of
the same vast, pulsating something, a something, that changes its
appearance to suit the culture and time period, in which it manifests,
but that has been with the human race for a long, long time. What is
that something?
In "Passport to Magonia" Vallee provides no substantive answer and says
only, that it appears to be intelligent, timeless, and to be the
phenomenon, on which all myths are based. What, then, are UFOs and
related phenomena? In "Passport to Magonia" Vallee says, that we cannot
rule out the possibility, that they are the expression of some
extraordinarily advanced nonhuman intelligence, an intelligence so
beyond us, that its logic appears to us only as absurdity. But if this
is true, how are we to explain the conclusions of mythology experts
from Mircea Eliade to Joseph Campbell, that myths are an organic and
necessary expression of the human race, as inevitable a human
by-product, as language and art? Can we really accept, that the
collective human psyche is so barren and jejune, that it developed
myths
only as a response to another intelligence? And yet, if UFOs and
related phenomena are merely psychic projections, how are we to explain
the physical traces, they leave behind, the burnt circles and deep
impressions found at the sites of landings, the unmistakable tracks
they make on radar screens, and the scars and incision marks they leave
on the people, on whom they perform their medical examinations? In an
article, published in 1976, I proposed, that such phenomena are
difficult
to categorize, because we are trying to hammer them into a picture of
reality, that is fundamentally incorrect. Given, that quantum physics
has
shown us, that mind and matter are inextricably linked, I suggested,
that
UFOs and related phenomena are further evidence of this ultimate lack
of division between the psychological and physical worlds. They are
indeed a product of the collective human psyche, but they are also
quite real. Put another way, they are something, the human race has not
yet learned to comprehend properly, a phenomenon, that is neither
subjective, nor objective, but "omnijective"—a term, I coined to
refer to this unusual state of existence (I was unaware at the time,
that Corbin had already coined the term, imaginal to describe the same
blurred status of reality, only in the context of the mystical
experiences of the Sufis). This point of view has become increasingly
prevalent among researchers.
280-281
In a recent article Ring argues, that UFO
encounters are imaginal experiences and are similar not only to the
confrontations with the real, but mind-created world individuals
experience during NDEs, but also to the mythic realities, shamans
encounter during journeys through the subtler dimensions. They are, in
short, further evidence, that reality is a
multilayered and
mind-generated hologram.
"I'm finding, that I'm drawn more and more to points of view that allow
me not only to acknowledge and honor the reality of these different
experiences, but also to see the connections between realms that, for
the most part, have been studied by different categories of scholars"
states Ring. "Shamanism tends to be thrown into anthropology. UFOs tend
to be thrown into whatever ufology is. NDEs are studied by
parapsychologists and medical people. And Stan Grof studies psychedelic
experiences from a transpersonal psychology perspective. I think
there's good reason to hope that the imaginal can be, and the
holographic might still prove to be, perspectives, that can allow one
to see not the identities, but the linkages and commonalities between
these different types of experiences." So convinced is Ring of the
profound relationship among these at first seemingly disparate
phenomena that he has recently obtained a grant to do a comparative
study on people who have had UFO encounters and people who have had
NDEs. Dr. Peter M. Rojcewicz, a folklorist at the Juilliard School in
New York City, has also concluded that UFOs are omnijective. In fact,
he believes the time has come for folklorists to realize that probably
all of the phenomena discussed by Vallee in "Passport to Magonia" are
as real as they are symbolic of processes deep in the human psyche.
"There exists a continuum of experiences where reality and imagination
imperceptibly flow into each other" he states. Rojcewicz acknowledges
that this continuum is further evidence of the Bohmian unity of all
things and feels that, in light of the evidence that such phenomena are
imaginal/omnijective, it is no longer defensible for folklorists to
treat them simply as beliefs. Numerous other researchers, including
Vallee, Grosso, and Whitley Strieber, author of the bestselling book
"Communion" and one of the most famous and articulate victims of a UFO
abduction, have also acknowledged the seeming omnijective nature of the
phenomenon. As Strieber states, encounters with UFO beings "may be our
first true quantum discovery in the large-scale world: the very act of
observing it may be creating it as a concrete actuality, with sense,
definition, and a consciousness of its own."
In short, there is growing agreement among researchers of this
mysterious phenomenon that the imaginal is not confined to the
afterlife realm, but has spilled over into the seeming solidity of our
stick-sand-stones world. No longer confined to the visions of shamans,
the old gods have sailed their celestial barks right up to the doorstep
of the computer generation, only instead of dragon-headed ships their
vessels are spaceships, and they have traded in their blue-jay heads
for space helmets. Perhaps we should have anticipated this spillover
long ago, this merging of the Land of the Dead with our own realm, for
as Orpheus, the poet-musician of Greek mythology, once warned:"The
gates of Pluto must not be unlocked, within is a people of dreams." As
significant as this realization is—that the universe is not
objective but omnijective, that just beyond the pale of our own safe
neighborhood lies a vast otherness, a numinous landscape (more properly
a mindscape) as much a part of our own psyche as it is terra
incognita— it still does not shed light on the deepest mystery of
all. As Carl Raschke, a faculty member in the Department of Religious
Studies at the University of Denver, notes, "In the omnijective cosmos,
where UFOs have their place alongside quasars and salamanders, the
issue of the veridical, or hallucinatory, status of glowing, circular
apparitions, becomes moot. The problem is not whether they exist, or in
what sense they exist, but what ultimate aim they serve." In other
words, what is the final identity of these beings? Again, as with
entities encountered in the near-death realm, there are no clearcut
answers. On one end of the spectrum, researchers such as Ring and
Grosso lean toward the idea that, despite their impingements in the
world of matter, they are more psychic projection than nonhuman
intelligence. Grosso, for instance, thinks that, like Marian visions,
they are further evidence that the psyche of the human race is in a
state of unrest. As he states, "UFOs and other extraordinary phenomena
are manifestations of a disturbance in the collective unconscious of
the human species." On the other end of the spectrum are those
researchers who maintain that, despite their archetypal
characteristics, UFOs are more alien intelligence than psychic
projection. For example, Raschke believes that UFOs are "a holographic
materialization from a conjugate dimension of the universe" and that
this interpretation "certainly must take precedence over the psychic
projection hypothesis, which flounders when one examines thoughtfully
the astounding, vivid, complex, and consistent features of the 'aliens'
and their 'spaceships' described by abductees." Vallee is also in this
camp: "I believe that the UFO phenomenon is one of the ways through
which an alien form of intelligence of incredible complexity is
communicating with us symbolically. There is no indication that it is
extraterrestrial. Instead, there is mounting evidence, that i t . . .
[comes from] other dimensions beyond spacetime; from a multiverse which
is all around us, and of which we have stubbornly refused to consider
in spite of the evidence available to us for centuries." As for my own
feelings, I believe that probably no single explanation can account for
all of the varied aspects of the UFO phenomenon. Given the apparent
vastness of the subtler levels of reality, it is easy for me to believe
that there are no doubt countless nonphysical species in the higher
vibratory realms. Although the abundance of UFO sightings may bode
against their being extraterrestrial—given the obstacle posed by
the immense interstellar distances separating the Earth from the other
stars in the galaxy—in a holographic universe, a universe in
which there may be an infinity of realities occupying the same space as
our own world, it ceases not only to be a sticking point, but may in
fact be evidence of just how unfathomably abundant with intelligent
life the superhologram is. The truth is that we simply do not have the
information necessary to assess how many nonphysical species are
sharing our own space. Although the physical cosmos may turn out to be
an ecological Sahara, the spaceless and timeless expanses of the inner
cosmos may be as rich with life as the rain forest and the coral reef.
After all, research into NDEs and shamanic experiences has so far taken
us only just inside the borders of this cloud-shrouded realm. We do not
yet know how large its continents are or how many oceans and mountain
ranges it contains. And if we are being visited by beings who are as
insubstantial and plastic in form as the bodies OBEers find themselves
in after they have exteriorized, it is not at all surprising that they
might appear in a chameleonlike multitude of shapes. In fact, their
actual appearance may be so beyond our comprehension that it may be our
own holographically organized minds that give them these shapes. Just
as we convert the beings of light encountered during NDEs into
religious historical personages, and clouds of pure information into
libraries and institutions of learning, our minds may also be sculpting
the outward appearance of the UFO phenomenon.
283
It is interesting to note that if this is the case, it means that the
true reality of these beings is apparently so transmundane and strange
that we have to plumb the deepest regions of our folk memories and
mythological unconscious to find the necessary symbols to give them
form. It also means that we must be exceedingly careful in interpreting
their actions. For example, the medical examinations that are the
centerpiece of so many UFO abductions may be only a symbolic
representation of what is going on. Rather than probing our physical
bodies, these nonphysical intelligences actually may be probing some
portion of us for which we currently have no labels, perhaps the subtle
anatomy of our energy selves or even our very souls. Such are the
problems one faces if the phenomenon is indeed an omnijective
manifestation of a nonhuman intelligence. On the other hand, if it is
possible for the faith of the citizens of Knock and Zeitoun to cause
luminous images of the Virgin to coalesce into existence, for the minds
of physicists to dabble around with the reality of the neutrino, and
for yogis such as Sai Baba to materialize physical objects out of thin
air, it only stands to reason that we would also find ourselves awash
with holographic projections of our beliefs and mythologies. At least
some anomalous experiences may fall into this category. For instance,
history tells us that Constantine and his soldiers saw an enormous
flaming cross in the sky, a phenomenon that seems to be nothing more
than a psychic exteriorization of the emotions the army responsible for
nothing short of the Christianization of the pagan world was feeling on
the eve of their historic undertaking. The wellknown manifestation of
the Angels of Mons, in which hundreds of World War I British soldiers
saw an immense apparition of Saint George and a squadron of angels in
the sky while fighting what was - at first a losing battle at the
front, in Mons, Belgium, also appears to fall into the category of
psychic projection. It is clear to me that what we are calling UFO and
other folkloric experiences are really a wide range of phenomena and
probably include all of the above. I have also long been of the opinion
that these two explanations are not mutually exclusive. It may be that
Constantine's flaming cross was also a manifestation of an
extradimensional intelligence. In other words, when our collective
beliefs and emotions become high-pitched enough to create a psychic
projection, perhaps what we are really doing is opening a doorway
between this world and the next. Perhaps the only time these
intelligences can appear and interact with us is when our own potent
beliefs create a kind of psychic niche for them. Another concept from
the new physics may be relevant here. After acknowledging, that
consciousness is the agent that allows a subatomic particle such as an
electron to pop into existence, we should not therefore jump to the
conclusion that we are the sole agents in this creative process,
cautions University of Texas physicist John Wheeler. We are creating
subatomic particles and hence the entire universe, says Wheeler, but
they are also creating us. Each creates the other in what he calls a
"self-reference cosmology." Seen in this light, UFO entities may very
well be archetypes from the collective unconscious of the human race,
but we may also be archetypes in their collective unconscious. We may
be as much a part of their deep psychic processes as they are of ours.
Strieber has also echoed this point and says that the universe of the
beings who abducted him and our own are "spinning each other together"
in an act of cosmic communion. The spectrum of events we are lumping
into the broad category of UFO encounters may also include phenomena
with which we are not even yet familiar. For instance, researchers who
believe the phenomenon is some kind of psychic projection invariably
assume that it is a projection of the collective human mind. However,
as we have seen in this book, in a holographic universe we can no
longer view consciousness as confined solely to the brain. The fact
that Carol Dryer was able to communicate with my spleen and tell me
that it was upset because I had yelled at it indicates that other
organs in our body also possess their own unique forms of mentality.
Psychoneuroimmunologists say the same about the cells in our immune
system, and according to Bohm and other physicists, even subatomic
particles possess this trait. As outlandish as it sounds, some aspects
of UFOs and related phenomena may be projections of these collective
mentalities. Certain features of Michael Harner's encounter with the
dragonlike beings certainly suggest that he was confronting a kind of
visual manifestation of the intelligence of the DNA molecule. In this
same vein Strieber has suggested the possibility that UFO beings are
what "the force of evolution looks like when it's applied to a
conscious mind."
We must remain open to all of these possibilities. In a universe that
is conscious right down to its very depths, animals, plants, even
matter itself may all be participating in the creation of these
phenomena.
285
One thing that we do know is that in a holographic universe, a universe
in which separateness ceases to exist and the innermost processes of
the psyche can spill over and become as much a part of the objective
landscape as the flowers and the trees, reality itself becomes little
more than a mass shared dream. In the higher dimensions of existence,
these dreamlike aspects become even more apparent, and indeed numerous
traditions have commented on this fact. The "Tibetan Book of the Dead"
repeatedly stresses the dreamlike nature of the afterlife realm, and
this is also, of course, why the Australian aborigines refer to it as
the dreamtime. Once we accept this notion, that reality at all levels
is omnijective and has the same ontological status as a dream, the
question becomes: "Whose dream is it?" Of the religious and
mythological traditions that address this question, most give the same
answer, It is the dream of a single divine intelligence... The Hindu
Vedas and yogic texts assert again and again that the universe is ...
dream. In ... the sentiment is summed up in the oft repeated saying, we
are all thoughts in the mind ... or as the poet Keats put it, we are
all part of ... "long immortal dream." But are we being dreamed by a
single divine intelligence, or are we being dreamed by the collective
consciousness of all things— by all the electrons, Z particles,
butterflies, neutron stars, sea cucumbers, human and nonhuman
intelligences in the universe? Here again we collide headlong into the
bars of our own conceptual limitations, for in a holographic universe
this question is meaningless. We cannot ask if the part is creating the
whole, or the whole is creating the part because the part is the whole.
So whether we call the collective consciousness of all things or simply
"the consciousness of all things, " it doesn't change the situation.
The universe is sustained by an act of such stupendous and ineffable
creativity that it simply cannot be reduced to such terms. Again it is
a self-reference cosmology. Or as the Kalahari Bushmen so eloquently
put it: "The dream is dreaming itself."
286
Holomovement -
Holographic Thoughts
The basic idea came to Bohm in the early 1970s, during an extraordinary
period of creativity at Birkbeck College in London. The holomovement is
one of a number of new concepts, which Bohm presented in an effort to
move beyond the mechanistic formulations of the standard interpretation
of the quantum theory and relativity theory. Along with such concepts
as undivided wholeness and the implicate order, the holomovement is
central to his formulation of a “new order” in physics
which would move beyond the mechanistic order.
Early Development of the
Idea
In an essay published in 1971, Bohm carried continued his earlier
critique ...Bohm came instead to embrace a concept of reality as a
dynamic movement of the whole: “In this view, there is no
ultimate set of separately existent entities, out of which all is
supposed to be constituted. Rather, unbroken and undivided movement is
taken as a primary notion”. He then goes on to paraphrases da
Vinci to the effect that movement gives shape to all forms and
structure gives order to movement, but adds modern insight when he
suggests, that “a deeper and more extensive inner movement
creates, maintains, and ultimately dissolves structure.”
In article from the same period, “On the Metaphysics and Movement
of Universal Fitting,” Bohm identifies some of the inadequacies
of the mechanistic model, particularly the inability to predict the
future movement of complex wholes from the initial conditions, and
suggests instead a focus on a general laws of interaction governing the
relationship of the parts within a whole: “What we are doing in
this essay is to consider what it means to turn this prevailing
metaphysics of science ‘upside down’ by exploring the
notion that a kind of art—a movement of fitting together—is
what is universal, both in nature and in human activities”. This
movement of the whole is what he calls the holomovement.
Undivided Wholeness
The term holomovement is one of many neologisms, which Bohm coined in
his search to overcome the limitations of the standard Copenhagen
interpretation of quantum mechanics. This approach involved not just a
critique of the assumptions of the standard model, but a set of new
concepts in physics, which move beyond the conventional language of
quantum mechanics. Wholeness and the Implicate Order is the culmination
of these reflections, and an attempt to show how the new insights
provided by a post-Copenhagen model can be extended beyond physics into
other domains, such as life, consciousness, and cosmology. The holomove-
ment concept is introduced in incremental steps. It is first presented
under the aspect of wholeness in the lead essay, called
“Fragmentation and Wholeness.” There Bohm states the major
claim of the book: “The new form of insight can perhaps best be
called Undivided Wholeness in Flowing Movement” (Bohm, 1980, 11).
This view implies that flow is, in some sense, prior to that of the
‘things’ that can be seen to form and dissolve in this
flow. He notes how “each relatively autonomous and stable
structure is be understood not as something independently and
permanently existent, but rather as a product, that has been formed in
the whole flowing movement and what will ultimately dissolve back into
this movement. How it forms and maintains itself, then, depends on its
place function within the whole”. For Bohm, movement is what is
primary; and what seem like permanent structures are only relatively
autonomous sub-entities, which emerge out of the whole of flowing
movement and then dissolve back into it an unceasing process of
becoming.
All is Flux
(Flux - fluctuation, instability, change, alteration, modification,
flow, fluidity, movement, motion, transition)
“Not only is everything changing, but all is flux. That is to
say, what is the process of becoming itself, while all objects, events,
entities, conditions, structures, etc., are forms, that can be
abstracted from this process”. His notion of the whole is s not a
static Paramedian oneness outside of space and time. Rather, the
wholeness to which he refers here is more akin to the Heraclitian flux,
or to the process philosophy of Whitehead. The formal presentation of
the concept comes late in the book. After discussing the concepts of
undivided wholeness and the Implicate and Explicate Orders, he presents
the formal definition under the subheading
“The Holomovement and its Aspects.” Consistent with his own
earlier Causal Interpretation, and more generally with the de
Broglie-Schroedinger approach, he posits, that a new kind of
description would be appropriate for giving primary relevance to the
Implicate Order. Using the hologram as a model {link to holographic
universe], Bohm argues, that the Implicate Order is enfolded within a
more generalized wave structure of the Universe-in-Motion, or what he
calls the Holomovement. To generalize so as to emphasize undivided
wholeness, we shall say that what ‘carries’ an implicate
order is the holomovement, which is an unbroken and undivided totality.
In certain cases, we can abstract particular aspects of the
holomovement (e.g. light, electrons, sound, etc.), but more generally,
all forms of the holomovement merge and are inseparable. Thus in its
totality, the holomovement is not limited in any specifiable way at
all. It is not required to conform to any particular order, or to be
bounded by any particular measure. Thus, the holomovement is
undefinable and immesasurable.”
As the interconnected totality of all there is, the holomovement is of
potentially an infinite order, and cannot be pinned down to any one
notion of order. It is important to note that Bohm’s concepts of
the Implicate Order and the holomovement are significant departures
from the earlier “Hidden Variables” interpretation, and the
conceptual framework is somewhat different from that articulated in the
Bohm-Vigier interpretation and the in interpretations of the proponents
of “Bohmian Mechanics [link],” where the general assumption
is of an underlying Dirac ether (see F. David Peat’s Introduction
to Quantum Implications). While the concept of the holomove
ment has been criticized as being “metaphysical,” it is
really more subtle (finely woven), while at the same time encompassing
the whole range of interconnected physical phenomena.
The Law of the
Holomovement: Holonomy
The starting point for Bohm’s articulation of what he means by a
“new order in physics” is his notion of wholeness. Thus
crucial for understanding the holomovement is his notion of how
interconnected phenomena are woven together in an underlying unified
fabric of physical law. In the following section, called “Law in
the Holomovement,” he takes up the question of order, and the
laws of organization which relate the parts to each other and to the
whole. This is what he calls the “law of the whole,” or
holonomy. Rather than starting with the parts and explaining the whole
in terms of the parts, Bohm’s point of view is just the opposite:
he starts with a notion of undivided wholeness and derives the parts as
abstractions from the whole. The essential point is that the Implicate
Order and the holomovement imply a way of looking at reality not merely
in terms of external interactions between things, but in terms of the
internal (enfolded) relationships among things: “The
relationships constituting the fundamental law are between the enfolded
structures that interweave and inter-penetrate each other, through the
whole of space, rather than between the abstracted and separated forms
that are manifest to the senses (and to our instruments)”.
Extension to Life,
Consciousness and Cosmology
In the final chapter of the book, “The Enfolding-Unfolding
Universe and Consciousness,” Bohm elaborated further on the need
for new notions of order of physics, and set forth a general view, in
which totalities are continually forming and dissolving out of the
Universal Flux, or what he designates as the Holomovement. He
recapitulates: “Our basic proposal was that what is the
holomovement, and that everything is to be explained in terms of forms
derived from this holomovement. The Implicate Order has its ground in
the holomovement which is, as we have seen, vast, rich, and in a state
of unending Flux of enfoldment and unfoldment, with laws, most of which
are only vaguely known. As such, the holomovement includes not just
physical reality, but life, consciousness and cosmology. As Bohm sums
it up at the end of the book: “Our overall approach has thus
brought together questions of the nature of the cosmos, of matter in
general, of life, and of consciousness. All of these have been
considered to be projections of a common ground. This we may call the
ground of all that is”.
Return to the Dreamtime
Where does the holographic model go from here? Before examining the
possible answers, we might want to see where the question has been
before. In this book
I have referred to the holographic concept as a new theory, and this is
true in the sense that it is the first time it has been presented in a
scientific context.
But as we have seen, several aspects of this theory have already been
foreshadowed in various ancient traditions. They are not the only such
foreshadowings, which is intriguing, for it suggests that others have
also found reason to view the universe as holographic, or at least to
intuit its holographic qualities. For example, Bohm's idea that the
universe can be viewed as the compound of two basic orders, the
implicate and the explicate, can be found in many other traditions. The
Tibetan Buddhists call these two aspects the void and nonvoid. The
nonvoid is the reality of visible objects. The void, like the implicate
order, is the birthplace of all things in the universe, which pour out
of it in a "boundless flux. " However, only the void is real and all
forms in the objective world are illusory, existing merely because of
the unceasing flux between the two orders. In turn, the void is
described as "subtle" "indivisible" and "free from distinguishing
characteristics." Because it is seamless totality it cannot be
described in words. Properly speaking, even the nonvoid cannot be
described in words because it, too is a totality, in which
consciousness and matter and all other things are indissoluble and
whole. Herein lies a paradox, for despite its illusory nature the
nonvoid still contains "an infinitely vast complex of universes." And
yet its indivisible aspects are always present. As the Tibet scholar
John Blofeld states, "In a universe thus composed, everything
interpenetrates, and is interpenetrated by, everything else; as with
the void, so with the non-void—the part is the whole." The
Tibetans prefigured some of Pribram's thinking as well. According to
Milarepa, an eleventh-century Tibetan yogin and the most renowned of
the Tibetan Buddhist saints, the reason we are unable to perceive the
void directly is because our unconscious mind (or, as Milarepa puts it,
our "inner consciousness") is far too "conditioned" in its perceptions.
This conditioning not only keeps us from seeing what he calls "the
border between mind and matter, " or what we would call the frequency
domain, but also causes us to form a body for ourselves when we are in
the between-life state and no longer have a body.
"In the invisible realm of the heavens... the illusory mind is the
great culprit, " writes Milarepa, who counseled his disciples to
practice "perfect seeing and contemplation" in order to realize this
"Ultimate Reality." Zen Buddhists also recognize the ultimate
indivisibility of reality, and indeed the main objective of Zen is to
learn how to perceive this wholeness. In their book Games Zen Masters
Play, and in words that could have been lifted right from one of Bohm's
papers, Robert Sohl
and Audrey Carr state"To confuse the indivisible nature of reality with
the conceptual pigeonholes of language is the basic ignorance from
which Zen seeks to free us. The ultimate answers to existence are not
to be found in intellectual concepts and philosophies, however
sophisticated, but rather in a level of direct nonconceptual experience
[of reality]."
The Hindus call the implicate level of reality Brahman. Brahman is
formless but is the birthplace of all forms in visible reality, which
appear out of it and then enfold back into it in endless flux. Like
Bohm, who says that the implicate order can just as easily be called
spirit, the Hindus sometimes personify this level of reality and say
that it is composed of pure consciousness. Thus, consciousness is not
only a subtler form of matter, but it is more fundamental than matter;
and in the Hindu cosmogony it is matter that has emerged from
consciousness, and not the other way around. Or as the Vedas put it,
the physical world is brought into being through both the "veiling" and
"projecting" powers of consciousness. Because the material universe is
only a second-generation reality, a creation of veiled consciousness,
the Hindus say that it is transitory and unreal, or maya. As the
Svetasvatara Upanishad states, "One should know that Nature is illusion
(maya), and that Brahman is the illusion maker. This whole world is
pervaded with beings that are parts of it". Similarly, the Kena
Upanishad says that Brahman is an uncanny something "which changes its
form every moment from human shape to a blade of grass." Because
everything unfolds out of the irreducible totality of Brahman, the
world is also a seamless whole, say the Hindus, and it is again maya
that keeps us from realizing there is ultimately no such thing as
separateness." Maya severs the united consciousness so that the object
is seen as other than the self and then as split up into the
multitudinous objects in the universe, " says the Vedic scholar Sir
John Woodroffe. "And there is such objectivity as long as [humanity's]
consciousness is veiled or contracted. But in the ultimate basis of
experience the divergence has gone, for in it lie, in undifferentiated
mass, experiencer, experience, and the experienced." This same concept
can be found in Judaic thought. However, despite its illusory nature,
it is not complete nothingness, "for every reflection of reality, even
remote, broken up and transient, necessarily possesses something of its
cause."
289
The idea that the creation set into motion by the God of Genesis is an
illusion is reflected even in the Hebrew language, for as the Zohar, a
thirteenth-century Kabbalistic commentary on the Torah and the most
famous of the esoteric Judaic texts, notes, the verb baro, "to create"
implies the idea of "creating an illusion." There are many holographic
concepts in shamanistic thinking as well. The Hawaiian kahunas say,
that everything in the universe is infinitely interconnected and that
this interconnectivity can almost be thought of as a web. The shaman,
recognizing the interconnectedness of all things, sees himself at the
center of this web and thus capable of affecting every other part of
the universe (it is interesting to note, that the concept of maya is
also frequently likened to a web in Hindu thought). Like Bohm, who says
that consciousness always has its source in the implicate, the
aborigines believe that the true source of the mind is in the
transcendent reality of the dreamtime. Normal people do not realize
this and believe that their consciousness is in their bodies. However,
shamans know this is not true, and that is why they are able to make
contact with the subtler levels of reality. The Dogon people of the
Sudan also believe that the physical world is the product of a deeper
and more fundamental level of reality and is perpetually flowing out of
and then streaming back into this more primary aspect of existence. As
one Dogon elder described it:
"To draw up and then return what one had drawn—that is the life
of the world." In fact, the implicate/explicate idea can be found in
virtually all shamanic traditions. States Douglas Sharon in his book
"Wizard of the Four Winds: A Shaman's Story": "Probably the central
concept of shamanism, wherever in the world it is found, is the notion,
that underlying all the visible forms in the world, animate and
inanimate, there exists a vital essence, from which they emerge and by
which they are nurtured. Ultimately everything returns to this
ineffable, mysterious, impersonal Unknown."
The Candle and the Laser
290-291
Certainly one of the most fascinating properties of a piece of
holographic film is the nonlocal way an image is distributed in its
surface. As we have seen, Bohm believes the universe itself is also
organized in this manner and employs a thought experiment involving a
fish and two television monitors to explain why he believes the
universe is similarly nonlocal. Numerous ancient
thinkers also appear to have recognized, or at least intuited, this
aspect of reality. The twelfth century Sufis summed it up by saying
simply that "the macrocosm is the microcosm" a kind of earlier version
of Blake's notion of seeing the world in a grain of sand. The Greek
philosophers Anaximenes of Miletus, Pythagoras, Heraclitus, and Plato;
the ancient Gnostics—all embraced the macrocosm-microcosm idea.
After a shamanic vision of the subtler levels of reality the
semimythical ancient Egyptian prophet Hermes Trismegistus employed a
slightly different phrasing and said that one of the main keys to
knowledge was the understanding that "the without is like the within of
things; the small is like the large." The medieval alchemists, for whom
Hermes Trismegistus became a kind of patron saint, distilled the
sentiment into the motto "As above, so below." In talking about the
same macrocosm-equals-microcosm idea the Hindu
Visvasara Tantra uses somewhat cruder terms and states simply: "What is
here is elsewhere." The Oglala Sioux medicine man Black Elk put an even
more nonlocal twist on the same concept. While standing on Harney Peak
in the Black Hills he witnessed a "great vision" during which he "saw
more than I can tell and I understood more than I saw; for I was seeing
in a sacred manner the shapes of all things in the spirit, and the
shape of all shapes as they must live together as one being." One of
the most profound understandings he came away with after this encounter
with the ineffable was that Harney Peak was the center of the world.
However, this distinction was not limited to Harney Peak, for as Black
Elk put it:"Anywhere is the center of the world."
Over twenty-five centuries earlier the Greek philosopher Empedocles
brushed up against the same sacred otherness and wrote, that "God
is a circle, whose center is everywhere, and its circumference
nowhere." Not content with mere words, some ancient thinkers resorted
to even more elaborate analogies in their attempt to communicate the
holographic properties of reality. To this end the author of the Hindu
Avatamsaka Sutra likened the universe to a legendary network of pearls
said to hang over the palace of the god Indra and "so arranged that if
you look at one [pearl], you see all the others reflect in it."
As the author of the Sutra explained, "In the same way, each object in
the world is not merely itself, but involves every other object and, in
fact, is everything else." Fa-Tsang, the seventh-century founder of the
Hua-yen school of Buddhist thought, employed a remarkably similar
analogy when trying to communicate the ultimate interconnectedness and
interpenetration of all things. Fa-Tsang, who held that the whole
cosmos was implicit in each of its parts (and who also believed, that
every point in the cosmos was its center), likened the universe to a
multidimensional network of jewels, each one reflecting all others ad
infinitum. When the empress Wu announced, that she did not understand
what Fa-Tsang meant by this image and asked him for further
clarification, Fa-Tsang suspended a candle in the middle of a room full
of mirrors. This, he told the empress Wu, represented the relationship
of the One to the many. Then he took a polished crystal and placed it
in the center of the room so that it reflected everything around it.
This, he said, showed the relationship of the many to the One. However,
like Bohm, who stresses that the universe is not simply a hologram but
a holornovement, Fa-Tsang stressed that his model was static and did
not reflect the dynamism and constant movement of the cosmic
interrelatedness among all things in the universe. In short, long
before the invention of the hologram, numerous thinkers had already
glimpsed the nonlocal organization of the universe and had arrived at
their own unique ways to express this insight. It is worth noting that
these attempts, crude as they may seem to those of us who are more
technologically sophisticated, may have been far more important than we
realize. For instance, it appears that the seventeenth-century German
mathematician and philosopher Leibniz was familiar with the Hua-yen
school of Buddhist thought. Some have argued that this was why he
proposed that the universe is constituted out of fundamental entities
he called "monads, " each of which contains a reflection of the whole
universe. What is significant is that Leibniz also gave the world
integral calculus, and it was integral calculus that enabled Dennis
Gabor to invent the hologram.
The Future of the
Holographic Idea
And so an ancient idea, an idea that seems to find at least some
expression in virtually all of the world's philosophical and
metaphysical traditions, comes full circle. But if these ancient
understandings can lead to the invention of the hologram, and the
invention of the hologram can lead to Bohm and Pribram's formulation of
the holographic model, to what new advances and discoveries might the
holographic model lead? Already there are more possibilities on the
horizon.
HOLOPHONIC SOUND
Drawing on Pribram's holographic model of the brain, Argentinian
physiologist Hugo Zuccarelli recently developed a new recording
technique that allows one to create what amounts to holograms made out
of sound instead of light. Zuccarelli bases his technique on the
curious fact that the human ears actually emit sound. Realizing that
these naturally occurring sounds were the audio equivalent of the
"reference laser" used to recreate a holographic image, he used them as
the basis for a revolutionary new recording technique that reproduces
sounds that are even more realistic and three- dimensional than those
produced through the stereo process. He calls this new kind of sound
"holophonic sound." After listening to one of Zuccarelli's holophonic
recordings, a reporter for the Times of London wrote recently, "I stole
a look at the reassuring numbers on my watch to make sure where I was.
People approached from behind me where I knew there was only wall....
By the end of seven minutes I was getting the impression of figures,
the embodiment of the voices on the tape. It is a multidimensional
'picture' created by sound." Because Zuccarelli's technique is based on
the brain's own holographic way of processing sound, it appears to be
as successful at fooling the ear as light holograms are at fooling the
eyes. As a result, listeners often move their feet when they hear a
recording of someone walking in front of them, and move their heads
when they hear what sounds like a match being lit too near to their
face (some reportedly even smell the match). Remarkably, because a
holophonic recording has nothing to do with conventional stereophonic
sound, it maintains its eerie three-dimensionality even when one
listens to it through only one side of a headphone.
293
The holographic principles involved also appear to explain why people
who are deaf in one ear can still locate the source of a sound without
moving their heads.
A number of major recording artists, including Paul McCartney, Peter
Gabriel, and Vangelis, have approached Zuccarelli about his process,
but because of patent considerations he has not yet disclosed the
information necessary for a full understanding of his technique.
UNSOLVED PUZZLES IN
CHEMISTRY
Chemist Ilya Prigogine recently noted that Bohm's idea of the
implicate-explicate order may help explain certain anomalous phenomena
in chemistry. Science has long believed that one of the most absolute
rules in the universe is that things always tend toward a greater state
of disorder. If you drop a stereo off of the Empire State Building,
when it crashes into the sidewalk it doesn't become more ordered and
turn into a VCR. It becomes more disordered and turns into a pile of
splintered parts. Prigogine has discovered that this is not true for
all things in the universe. He points out that, when mixed together,
some chemicals develop into a more ordered arrangement, not a more
disordered one. He calls these spontaneously appearing ordered systems
"dissipative structures" and won a Nobel Prize for unraveling their
mysteries. But how can a new and more complex system just suddenly pop
into existence?
Put another way, where do dissipative structures come from? Prigogine
and others have suggested that, far from materializing out of nowhere,
they are an indication of a deeper level of order in the universe,
evidence of the implicate aspects of reality becoming explicate. If
this is true, it could have profound implications and, among other
things, lead to a deeper understanding of how new levels of
complexity— such as attitudes and new patterns of
behavior—pop into existence in the human consciousness and even
how that most intriguing complexity of all, life itself, appeared on
the earth several billion years ago.
NEW KINDS OF COMPUTERS
The holographic brain model has also recently been extended into the
world of computers. In the past, computer scientists thought that the
best way to build a better computer was simply to build a bigger
computer. But in the last half decade or so, researchers have developed
a new strategy, and instead of building single monolithic machines,
some have started connecting scores of little computers together in
"neural networks" that more closely resemble the biological structure
of the human brain. Recently, Marcus S. Cohen, a computer scientist at
New Mexico State University, pointed out that processors that rely on
interfering waves of light passing through "multiplexed holographic
gratings" might provide an even better analog of the brain's neural
structure. Similarly, physicist Dana Z. Anderson of the University of
Colorado has recently shown how holographic gratings could be used to
build an "optical memory" that exhibits associative recall. As exciting
as these developments are, they are still just further refinements of
the mechanistic approach to understanding the universe, advances that
take place only within the material framework of reality. But as we
have seen, the holographic idea's most extraordinary assertion is that
the materiality of the universe may be an illusion, and physical
reality may be only a small part of a vast and sentient nonphysical
cosmos. If this is true, what implications does it have for the future?
How do we begin to go about truly penetrating the mysteries of these
subtler dimensions?
The Need for a Basic
Restructuring of Science
Currently one of the best tools we have for exploring the unknown
aspects of reality is science. And yet when it comes to explaining the
psychic and spiritual dimensions of human existence, science in the
main has repeatedly fallen short of the mark. Clearly, if science is to
advance further in these areas, it needs to undergo a basic
restructuring, but what specifically might such a restructuring entail?
Obviously the first and most necessary step is to accept the existence
of psychic and spiritual phenomena. Willis Harman, the president of the
Institute of Noetic Sciences and a former senior social scientist at
Stanford Research Institute International, feels this acceptance is
crucial not only to science, but to the survival of human civilization.
295
Moreover, Harman, who has written extensively on the need for a basic
restructuring of science, is astonished that this acceptance has not
yet taken place. "Why don't we assume that any class of experiences or
phenomena that have been reported, through the ages and across
cultures, has a face validity that cannot be denied?" he asks. As has
been mentioned, at least part of the reason is the longstanding bias
Western science has against such phenomena, but the issue is not quite
so simple as this. Consider for example the past-life memories of
people under hypnosis. Whether these are actual memories of previous
lives or not has yet to be proved, but the fact remains, the human
unconscious has a natural propensity for generating at least apparent
memories of previous incarnations. In general, the orthodox psychiatric
community ignores this fact. Why? At first glance the answer would
appear to be because most psychiatrists just don't believe in such
things, but this is not necessarily the case. Florida psychiatrist
Brian L. Weiss, a graduate of the Yale School of Medicine and currently
chairman of psychiatry at Mount Sinai Medical Center in Miami, says
that since the publication of his best-selling book Many Lives, Many
Masters in 1988—in which he discusses how he turned from being a
skeptic to a believer in reincarnation after one of his patients
started talking spontaneously about her past lives while under
hypnosis—he has been deluged with letters and telephone calls
from psychiatrists who say that they, too, are secret believers. "I
think that is just the tip of the iceberg, " says Weiss. "There are
psychiatrists who write me they've been doing regression therapy for
ten to twenty years, in the privacy of their office, and 'please don't
tell anyone... Many are receptive to it, but they won't admit it."
Similarly, in a recent conversation with Whitton when I asked him if he
felt reincarnation would ever become an accepted scientific fact, he
replied, "I think it already is. My experience with scientists is
that if
they've read the literature, they believe in reincarnation. The
evidence is just so compelling that intellectual assent is virtually
natural." Weiss's and Whitton's opinions seem borne out by a recent
survey on psychic phenomena. After being assured that their replies
would remain anonymous, 58 percent of the 228 psychiatrists who
responded (many of them the heads of departments and the deans of
medical schools) said that they believed "an understanding of psychic
phenomena" was important to future graduates of psychiatry! Forty-four
percent admitted believing that psychic factors were important in the
healing process. So it appears that fear of ridicule may be as much if
not more of a stumbling block as disbelief in getting the scientific
establishment to begin to treat psychic research with the seriousness
it deserves. We need more trailblazers like Weiss and Whitton (and the
myriad other courageous researchers whose work has been discussed in
this book) to go public with their private beliefs and discoveries. In
brief, we need the parapsychological equivalent of a Rosa Parks.
Another feature that must be a part of the restructuring of science is
a broadening of the definition of what constitutes scientific evidence.
Psychic and spiritual phenomena have played a significant role in human
history and have helped shape some of the most fundamental aspects of
our culture. But because they are not easy to rope in and scrutinize in
a laboratory setting, science has tended to ignore them. Even worse,
when they are studied, it is often the least important aspects of the
phenomena that are isolated and catalogued. For instance, one of the
few discoveries regarding OBEs that is considered valid in a scientific
sense is that the brain waves change when an OBEer exits the body. And
yet, when one reads accounts like Monroe's, one realizes that if his
experiences are real, they involve discoveries that could arguably have
as much impact on human history as Columbus's discovery of the New
World or the invention of the atomic bomb. Indeed, those who have
watched a truly talented clairvoyant at work know immediately that they
have witnessed something far more profound than is conveyed in the dry
statistics of R. H. and Louisa Rhine. This is not to say that the
Rhines' work is not important. But when vast numbers of people start
reporting the same experiences, their anecdotal accounts should also be
viewed as important evidence. They should not be dismissed merely
because they cannot be documented as rigorously as other and often less
significant features of the same phenomenon can be documented. As
Stevenson states, "I believe it is better to learn what is probable
about important matters than to be certain about trivial ones."
It is worth noting that this rule of thumb is already applied to other
more accepted natural phenomena. The idea that the universe began in a
single, primordial explosion, or Big Bang, is accepted without question
by most scientists. And this is odd because, although there are
compelling reasons to believe that this is true, no one has ever proved
that it is true. On the other hand, if a near-death psychologist were
to state flatly that the realm of light NDEers travel to during their
experiences is an actual other level of reality, the psychologist would
be attacked for making a statement that cannot be proved. And this is
odd, for there are equally compelling reasons to believe this is true.
In other words, science already accepts what is probable about very
important matters if those matters fall into the category of
"fashionable things to believe" but not if they fall into the category
of "unfashionable things to believe." This double standard must be
eliminated before science can begin to make significant inroads into
the study of both psychic and spiritual phenomena. Most crucial of all,
science must replace its enamorment with objectivity— the idea
that the best way to study nature is to be detached, analytical, and
dispassionately objective—with a more participatory approach. The
importance of this shift has been stressed by numerous researchers,
including Harman. We have also seen evidence of its necessity
repeatedly throughout this book. In a universe in which the
consciousness of a physicist affects the reality of a subatomic
particle, the attitude of a doctor affects whether or not a placebo
works, the mind of an experimenter affects the way a machine operates,
and the imaginal can spill over into physical reality, we can no longer
pretend that we are separate from that which we are studying. In a
holographic and omnijective universe, a universe in which all things
are part of a seamless continuum, strict objectivity ceases to be
possible. This is especially true when studying psychic and spiritual
phenomena and appears to be why some laboratories are able to achieve
spectacular results when performing remote-viewing experiments, and
some fail miserably. Indeed, some researchers in the paranormal field
have already shifted from a strictly objective approach to a more
participatory approach. For example, Valerie Hunt discovered that her
experimental results were affected by the presence of individuals who
had been drinking alcohol and thus won't allow any such individuals in
her lab while she is taking measurements. In this same vein, Russian
parapsychologists Dubrov and Pushkin have found that they have more
success duplicating the findings of other parapsychologists if they
hypnotize all of the test subjects present. It appears that hypnosis
eliminates the interference caused by the conscious thoughts and
beliefs of the test subjects, and helps produce "cleaner" results.
Although such practices may seem odd in the extreme to us today, they
may become standard operating procedures as science unravels further
secrets of the holographic universe. A shift from objectivity to
participation will also most assuredly affect the role of the
scientist. As it becomes increasingly apparent that it is the
experience of observing that is important, and not just the act of
observation, it is logical to assume that scientists in turn will see
themselves less and less as observers and more and more as
experiencers. As Harman states, "A willingness to be transformed is an
essential characteristic of the participatory scientist." Again, there
is evidence that a few such transformations are already taking place.
For instance, instead of just observing what happened to the Conibo
after they consumed the soul-vine ayahuasca, Harner imbibed the
hallucinogen himself. It is obvious that not all anthropologists would
be willing to take such a risk, but it is also clear that by becoming a
participant instead of just an observer, he was able to learn much more
than he ever could have by just sitting on the sidelines and taking
notes. Harner's success suggests that instead of just interviewing
NDEers, OBEers, and other journeyers into the subtler realms,
participatory scientists of the future may devise methods of traveling
there themselves. Already lucid-dream researchers are exploring and
reporting back on their own lucid-dream experiences. Others may develop
different and even more novel techniques for exploring the inner
dimensions. For instance, although not a scientist in the strictest
definition of the term, Monroe has developed recordings of special
rhythmic sounds that he feels facilitate out-of-body experiences. He
has also founded a research center called the Monroe Institute of
Applied Sciences in the Blue Ridge Mountains and claims to have trained
hundreds of individuals to make the same out-of-body journeys he has
made. Are such developments harbingers of the future, foreshadowings of
a time when not only astronauts but "psychonauts" become the heroes we
watch on the evening news?
An Evolutionary Thrust
toward Higher Consciousness
299
Science may not be
the only force that offers us passage to the land of
nonwhere. In his book "Heading toward Omega" Ring points out that there
is compelling evidence that NDEs are on the increase. As we have seen,
in tribal cultures individuals who have NDEs are often so transformed
that they become shamans. Modern NDEers become spiritually transformed
as well, mutating from their pre-NDE personalities into more loving,
compassionate, and even more psychic individuals. From this Ring
concludes that perhaps what we are witnessing is "the shamanizing of
modern humanity." But if this is so, why are NDEs increasing? Ring
believes that the answer is as simple as it is profound; what we are
witnessing is "an evolutionary thrust toward higher consciousness for
all humanity. " And NDEs may not be the only transformative phenomenon
bubbling up from the collective human psyche. Grosso believes that the
increase in Marian visions during the last century has evolutionary
implications as well. Similarly, numerous researchers, including
Raschke and Vallee, feel that the explosion of UFO sightings in the
last several decades has evolutionary significance. Several
investigators, including Ring, have pointed out that UFO encounters
actually resemble shamanic initiations and may be further evidence of
the shamanizing of modern humanity. Strieber agrees. "I think it's
rather obvious that, whether [the UFO phenomenon is being] done by
somebody or [is happening] naturally, what we're dealing with is an
exponential leap from one species to another. I would suspect that what
we're looking at is the process of evolution in action." If such
speculations are true, what is the purpose of this evolutionary
transformation? There appears to be two answers. Numerous ancient
traditions speak of a time when the hologram of physical reality was
much more plastic than it is now, much more like the amorphous and
fluid reality of the afterlife dimension. For example, the Australian
aborigines say that there was a time when the entire world was
dreamtime. Edgar Cayce echoed this sentiment and asserted that the
earth was "at first merely in the nature of thoughtforms or
visualization made by pushing themselves out of themselves in whatever
manner desired.... Then came materiality as such into the earth,
through Spirit pushing itself into matter." The aborigines assert that
the day will come when the earth returns to the dreamtime. In the
spirit of pure speculation, one might wonder if, as we learn to
manipulate the hologram of reality more and more, we will see the
fulfillment of this prophecy. As we become more adept at tinkering with
what Jahn and Dunne call the interface between consciousness and its
environment, is it possible for us to experience a reality that is once
again malleable? If this is true, we will need to learn much more than
we presently know to manipulate such a plastic environment safely, and
perhaps that is one purpose of the evolutionary processes that seem to
be unfolding in our midst. Many ancient traditions also assert that
humanity did not originate on the earth, and that our true home is...
in a nonphysical and more paradisiacal realm of pure spirit. For
instance, there is a Hindu myth that human consciousness began as a
ripple that decided to leave the ocean of "consciousness as such,
timeless, spaceless, infinite and eternal," Awakening to itself, it
forgot that it was a part of this infinite ocean, and felt isolated and
separated. Loye has argued that Adam and Eve's expulsion from the
Garden of Eden may also be a version of this myth, an ancient memory of
how human consciousness, somewhere in its unfathomable past, left its
home in the implicate and forgot that it was a part of the cosmic
wholeness of all things. In this view the earth is a kind of playground
"in which one is free to experience all the pleasures of the flesh
provided one realizes that one is a holographic projection of a . . .
higher-order spatial dimension." If this is true, the evolutionary
fires that are beginning to flicker and dance through our collective
psyche may be our wake-up call, the trumpet note informing us that our
true home is elsewhere and we can return there if we wish. Strieber,
for one, believes this is precisely why UFOs are here: "I think that
they are probably midwifing our birth into the nonphysical
world—which is their origin. My impression is that the physical
world is only a small instant in a much larger context and that reality
is primarily unfolding in a non-physical way. I don't think that
physical reality is the original source of being.
I think that being, as consciousness, probably predates the physical."
Writer Terence McKenna, another longtime supporter of the holographic
model, agrees:
"What this seems to be about is that from the time of the awareness of
the existence of the soul until the resolution of the apocalyptic
potential, there are roughly fifty thousand years.
301
We are now, there can be no doubt, in the final historical seconds of
that crisis—a crisis which involves the end of history, our
departure from the planet, [and] the triumph over death. We are, in
fact, closing distance with the most profound event a planetary ecology
can encounter—the freeing of life from the dark chrysalis of
matter."' Of course these are only speculations. But whether we are on
the very brink of a transition, as Strieber and McKenna suggest, or
whether that watershed is still some ways off in the future, it is
apparent that we are following some track of spiritual evolution. Given
the holographic nature of the universe, it is also apparent that at
least something like the above two possibilities awaits us somewhere
and somewhen. And lest we be tempted to assume that freedom from the
physical is the end of human evolution, there is evidence that the more
plastic and imaginal realm of the hereafter is also a mere stepping
stone. For example, Swedenborg said that beyond the heaven he visited
was another heaven, one so brilliant and formless to his perceptions
that it appeared only as "a streaming of light". NDEers have also
occasionally described these even more unfathomably tenuous realms.
"There are many higher planes, and to get back to God (rather to the Source of All Suns, LM),
to reach the plane where ... spirit resides, you have to drop your
garment each time until your spirit is truly free, " states one of
Whitton's subjects.
"The learning process never stops.... Sometimes we are allowed glimpses
of the higher planes—each one is lighter and brighter than the
one before." It may be frightening to some that reality seems to become
increasingly frequency-like as one penetrates deeper into the
implicate. And this is understandable. It is obvious that we are still
like children who need the security of a coloring book, not yet ready
to draw free-form and without lines to guide our clumsy hands. To be
plunged into Swedenborg's realm of streaming light would be tantamount
to plunging us into a completely fluid LSD hallucination. And we are
not yet mature enough or in enough control of our emotions, attitudes,
and beliefs to deal with the monsters our psyches would create for
ourselves there. But perhaps that is why we are learning how to deal
with small doses of the omnijective here, in the form of the relatively
limited confrontations with the imaginal that UFOs and other similar
experiences provide. And perhaps that is why the beings of light tell
us again and again that the purpose of life is to learn. We are indeed
on a shaman's journey, mere children struggling to become technicians
of the sacred. We are learning how to deal with the plasticity that is
part and parcel of a universe in which mind and reality are a
continuum, and in this journey one lesson stands out above all others.
As long as the formlessness and breathtaking freedom of the beyond
remain frightening to us, we will continue to dream a hologram for
ourselves that is comfortably solid and well defined. But we must
always heed Bohm's warning that the conceptual pigeonholes we use to
parse out the universe are of our own making. They do not exist "out
there, " for "out there" is only the indivisible totality. Brahman. And
when we outgrow any given set of conceptual pigeonholes we must always
be prepared to move on, to advance from soul-state to soul-state, as
Sri Aurobindo put it, and from illumination to illumination. For our
purpose appears to be as simple as it is endless. We are, as the
aborigines say, just learning how to survive in infinity."
Some deep thoughts from
"The Holographic Universe" by Michael Talbot
In his 1987 book entitled Synchronicity: The Bridge Between Matter and
Mind, Dr. F. David Peat, a physicist at Queen's University in Canada,
asserted that synchronicities (coincidences that are so unusual and so
psychologically meaningful they don't seem to be the result of chance
alone) can be explained by the holographic model. Peat believes such
coincidences are actually "flaws in the fabric of reality."
Enfolded (wrapped up,
implicate) Orders and Unfolded Realities
One of Bohm's most startling assertions is that the tangible reality of
our everyday lives is really a kind of illusion, like a holographic
image. Underlying it is a deeper order of existence, a vast and more
primary level of reality that gives birth to all the objects and
appearances of our physical world in much the same way that a piece of
holographic film gives birth to a hologram. Bohm calls this deeper
level of reality the implicate (which means "enfolded") order, and he
refers to our own level of existence as the explicate, or unfolded,
order. He uses these terms because he sees the manifestation of all
forms in the universe as the result of countless enfoldings and
unfoldings between these two orders. For example, Bohm believes an
electron is not one thing, but a totality or ensemble enfolded
throughout the whole of space. Objective reality is impatial, unbiased,
detached; that others have also found reason to view the universe as
holographic, or at least to intuit its holographic qualities. For
example, Bohm's idea that the universe can be viewed as the compound of
two basic orders, the implicate and the explicate, can be found in many
other traditions. The Tibetan Buddhists call these two aspects the void
and nonvoid. The nonvoid is the reality of visible objects. The void,
like the implicate order, is the birthplace of all things in the
universe, which pour out of it in a "boundless flux. " However, only
the void is real and all forms in the objective world are illusory,
existing merely because of the unceasing flux between the two orders.
Bohm's assertion that thoughts are like vortices in a river. "That all
diseases might have their origin in the mind doesn't disturb Siegel. He
sees it rather as a sign of a tremendous hope, an indicator that if one
has the power to create sickness, one also has the power to create
wellness...it is just the tip of the iceberg, when it comes to the
control the holographic mind has over the physical body. And the
practical applications of such control are not limited strictly to
matters of health. Numerous studies conducted around the world have
shown that imagery also has an enormous on physical and athletic
performance."
"...the Soviets have incorporated sophisticated imagery techniques into
many of their athletic programs and that they believe mental images act
as precursors in the process of generating neuromuscular impulses.
Garfield believes imagery works because movement is recorded
holographically in the brain. In his book Peak Performance: Mental
Training Techniques of the World's Greatest Athletes, he states, "These
images are holographic and function primarily at the subliminal level.
The holographic imaging mechanism enables you to quickly solve spatial
problems such as assembling a complex machine, choreographing a dance
routine, or running visual images of plays through your mind."
"Physician Larry Dossey believes, that imagery is not the only tool the
holographic mind can use to effect changes in the body. Another is
simply the recognition of the unbroken wholeness of all things." As
Pribram states: "If indeed every part of our body is a reflection of
the whole, then there must be all kinds of mechanisms to control what's
going on...It is clear from this that even information received
subliminally can contribute greatly to the beliefs and mental images
that impact on our health... but because we are unaware that we possess
the power, we must be fooled into using it. This might almost be comic
if it were not for the tragedies that often result from our ignorance
of our own power. No incident better illustrates this than a now famous
case reported by psychologist Bruno Klopfer. Klopfer was treating a man
named Wright who had advanced cancer of the lymph nodes. All standard
treatments had been exhausted, and Wright appeared to have little time
left. His neck, armpits, chest, abdomen, and groin were filled with
tumors the size of oranges, and his spleen and liver were so enlarged
that two quarts of milky fluid had to be drained out of his chest every
day. But Wright did not want to die. He had heard about an exciting new
drug called Krebiozen, and he begged his doctor to let him try it. At
first his doctor refused because the drug was only being tried on
people with a life expectancy of at least three months. But Wright was
so unrelenting in his entreaties, his doctor finally gave in. He gave
Wright an injection of Krebiozen on Friday, but in his heart of hearts
he did not expect Wright to last the weekend. Then the doctor went
home. To his surprise, on the following Monday he found Wright out of
bed and walking around. Klopfer reported that his tumors had "melted
like snowballs on a hot stove" and were half their original size. This
was a far more rapid decrease in size than even the strongest X-ray
treatments could have accomplished. Ten days after Wright's first
Krebiozen treatment, he left the hospital and was, as far as his
doctors could tell, cancer free. When he had entered the hospital he
had needed an oxygen mask to breathe, but when he left he was well
enough to fly his own plane at 12, 000 feet with no discomfort. Wright
remained well for about two months, but then articles began to appear
asserting that Krebiozen actually had no effect on cancer of the lymph
nodes. Wright, who was rigidly logical and scientific in his thinking,
became very depressed, suffered a relapse, and was readmitted to the
hospital. This time his physician decided to try an experiment. He told
Wright that Krebiozen was every bit as effective as it had seemed, but
that some of the initial supplies of the drug had deteriorated during
shipping. He explained, however, that he had a new highly concentrated
version of the drug and could treat Wright with this. Of course the
physician did not have a new version of the drug and intended to inject
Wright with plain water. To create the proper atmosphere he even went
through an elaborate procedure before injecting Wright with the
placebo. Again the results were dramatic. Tumor masses melted, chest
fluid vanished, and Wright was quickly back on his feet and feeling
great. He remained symptom-free for another two months, but then the
American Medical Association announced that a nationwide study of
Krebiozen had found the drug worthless in the treatment of cancer. This
time Wright's faith was completely shattered. His cancer blossomed anew
and he died two days later. Wright's story is tragic, but it contains a
powerful message: When we are fortunate enough to bypass our disbelief
and tap the healing forces within us, we can cause tumors to melt away
overnight. In the case of Krebiozen only one person was involved, but
there are similar cases involving many more people...
The Health Implications
of Multiple Personality
...Another condition
that graphically illustrates the mind's power to affect the body is
MPD. In addition to possessing different brain-wave patterns, the
subpersonalities of a multiple (short for a patient with MPD) have a
strong psychological separation from one another. Each has his own
name, age, memories, and abilities. Often each also has his own style
of handwriting, announced gender, cultural and racial background,
artistic talents, foreign language fluency and IQ. Even more noteworthy
are the biological changes that take place in a multiple's body when
they switch personalities. Frequently a medical condition possessed by
one personality will mysteriously vanish when another personality takes
over. Dr. Bennett Braun of the International Society for the study of
Multiple Personality, in Chicago, has documented the case in which all
of a patient's subpersonalities (alters) were allergic to orange juice,
except one. If the man drank orange juice when one of his allergic
personalities was in control, he would break out in a terrible rash.
But if he switched to his nonallergic personality, the rash would
instantly start to fade and he could drink orange juice freely. Dr.
Francine Rowland, a Yale psychiatrist who specializes in treating
multiples, relates an even more striking incident concerning one
multiple's reaction to a wasp sting. On the occasion in question, the
man showed up for his scheduled appointment with Rowland with his eye
completely swollen shut from a wasp sting. Realizing he needed medical
attention, Rowland called an ophthalmologist. Unfortunately, the
soonest the opthalmologist could see the man was an hour later, and
because the man was in severe pain, Rowland decided to try something.
As it turned out, one of the man's alternates was an "anesthetic
personality" who felt absolutely no pain. Rowland had the anesthetic
personality take control of the body, and the pain ended. But something
else also happened. By the time the man arrived at his appointment with
the ophthalmologist, the swelling was gone and his eye had returned to
normal. Seeing no need to treat him, the ophthalmologist sent him home.
After a while, however, the anesthetic personality relinquished control
of the body, and the man's original personality returned, along with
all the pain and swelling of the wasp sting. The next day he went back
to the ophthalmologist to at last be treated. Neither Rowland nor her
patient had told the ophthalmologist that the man was a multiple, and
after treating him, the ophthalmologist telephoned Rowland. "He thought
time was playing tricks on him. " Rowland laughed. "He just wanted to
make sure that I had actually called him the day before and he had not
imagined it."
Allergies are not the only thing multiples can switch on and off. If
there was any doubt as to the control of the unconscious mind has over
drug effects, it's banished by the pharmacological wizardry of the
multiple. By changing personalities, a multiple who is drunk can
instantly become sober. Different personalities also respond
differently to different drugs. Braun records a case in which 5ml of
diazepam, a tranquilizer, sedated one personality , while 100ml had
little or no effect on another (Arizona
Wilder was saying, that she tried, but couldn't die from the sleeping
pills' overdose, she couldn't get drunk, when she tried, LM).
Often one or several of a multiple's personalities are children, and if
an adult personality is given a drug and then a child's personality
takes over, the adult dosage may be too much for the child and result
in an overdose. It's also difficult to anesthetize some multiples
waking up on the operating table after one of their "unanesthetizable"
subpersonalities has taken over (R.
Monroe also couldn't be anesthetize, LM).
Other conditions that can vary from personality to personality include
scars, burn marks, cysts, left- and right-handedness. Visual acuity can
differ, and some multiples have to carry two or three different pairs
of eyeglasses to accommodate their alternating personalities. One
personality can be color-blind and another not, and even eye color can
change. There are cases of women who have 2 or 3 menstrual periods each
month because each of their subpersonalities has it's own cycle. More
info from "The Holographic Universe": " Speech pathologist Christy
Ludlow has found that the voice pattern for each of a multiple's
personalities is different (not just the voice, but the frequency
coming from the Alter, LM), a feat that requires such a deep
psychological change that even the most accomplished actor cannot alter
his voice enough to disguise his voice pattern. One multiple , admitted
to a hospital for diabetes, baffled her doctors by showing no symptoms
when one of her non diabetic personalities was in control. There
accounts of epilepsy coming and going with changes in personality, and
psychologist Robert A. Phillips, Jr., reports that even tumors can
appear and disappear (although he does not specify what kind of
tumors). Multiples also tend to heal faster than normal individuals
(Andy Pero from "Project Superman, Andy Pero's Story" comes to mind,
LM). For example, there are several cases on record of third-degree
burns healing with extraordinary rapidity. Most eerie of all, at least
one researcher— Dr. Cornelia Wilbur, the therapist whose
pioneering treatment of Sybil Dorsett was portrayed in the book
Sybil—is convinced that multiples don't age as fast as other
people. How could such things be? At a recent symposium on the multiple
personality syndrome, a multiple named Cassandra provided a possible
answer, Cassandra attributes her own rapid healing ability both to the
visualization techniques she practices and to something she calls
parallel processing. As she explained, even when her alternate
personalities are not in control of her body, they are still aware (and
they watch what you are doing and help or sabotage, LM). This enables
her to "think" on a multitude of different channels at once, to do
things like work on several different term papers simultaneously, and
even "sleep" while other personalities prepare her dinner and clean her
house. Hence, whereas normal people only do healing imagery exercises
two or three times a day, Cassandra does them around the clock. She
even has a subpersonality named Celese who possesses a thorough
knowledge of anatomy and physiology, and whose sole function is to
spend twenty-four hours a day meditating and imaging the body's
well-being. According to Cassandra, it is this full-time attention to
her health that gives her an edge over normal people. Other multiples
have made similar claims. We are deeply attached to the inevitability
of things. If we have bad vision, we believe we will have bad vision
for life, and if we suffer from diabetes, we do not for a moment think
our condition might vanish with a change in mood or thought. But the
phenomenon of multiple personality challenges this belief and offers
further evidence of just how much our psychological states can affect
the body's biology. If the psyche of an individual with MPD is a kind
of multiple image hologram, it appears that the body is one as well,
and can switch from one biological state to another as rapidly as the
flutter of a deck of cards. The systems of control that must be in
place to account for such capacities is mind-boggling and makes our
ability to will away a wart look pale. Allergic reaction to a wasp
sting is a complex and multifaceted process and involves the organized
activity of antibodies, the production of histamine, the dilation and
rupture of blood vessels, the excessive release of immune substances,
and so on. What unknown pathways of influence enable the mind of a
multiple to freeze all these processes in their tracks? Or what allows
them to suspend the effects of alcohol and other drugs in the blood, or
turn diabetes on and off? At the moment we don't know and must console
ourselves with one simple fact. Once a multiple has undergone therapy
and in some way becomes whole again, he or she can still make these
switches at will. This suggests that somewhere in our psyches we all
have the ability to control these things. And still this is not all we
can do.
So it appears that through the use of images, the brain can tell the
body what to do, including telling it to make more images. Images
making images. Two mirrors reflecting each other infinitely. Such is
the nature of the mind/body relationship in a holographic universe...
immune cells have neuropeptide receptors. Neuropeptides are molecules
the brain uses to communicate, the brain's telegrams, if you will.
There was a time when it was believed that neuropeptides could only be
found in the brain. But the existence of receptors (telegram receivers)
on the cells in our immune system implies that the immune system is not
separate from but is an extension of the brain. Neuropeptides have also
been found in various other parts of the body, leading Pert to admit
that she can no longer tell where the brain leaves off and the body
begins... it is because the body is a hologram and each of its portions
contains an image of the whole... Why would the acupuncture points in
the ear be aligned in the shape of a miniature human? Oleson believes
it is because of the holographic nature of the mind and body. Just as
every portion of a hologram contains the image of the whole, every
portion of the body may also contain the image of the whole. "The ear
holograph is, logically, connected to the brain holograph which itself
is connected to the whole body," he states."The way we use the ear to
affect the rest of the body is by working through the brain
holograph... he has accumulated evidence of eighteen different
microacupuncture holograms in the body, including ones in the hands,
feet, arms, neck, tongue, and even the gums. Like Oleson, Dale feels
these microsystems are "holographic reiterations of the gross anatomy,
" and believes there are still other such systems waiting to be
discovered. In a notion reminiscent of Bohm's assertion that every
electron in some way contains the cosmos, Dale hypothesizes that every
finger, and even every cell, may contain its own acupuncture
microsystem. Richard Leviton, a contributing editor at East West
magazine, who has written about the holographic implications of
acupuncture microsystems, thinks that alternative medical
techniques—such as reflexology, a type of massage therapy that
involves accessing all points of the body through stimulation of the
feet, and iridology, a diagnostic technique that involves examining the
iris of the eye in order to determine the condition of the
body—may also be indications of the body's holographic nature. We
are all potential wonderworkers, dormant yogis, and it is clear from
the evidence presented in the preceding pages that it would behoove us
both as individuals and as a species to devote a good deal more effort
into exploring an harnessing these talents. The second message is that
elements that go into the making of these neural holograms are many and
subtle. They include the images upon which we meditate, our hopes and
fears, the attitudes of our doctors, our unconscious prejudices, our
individual and cultural beliefs, and our faith in things both spiritual
and technological. More than just facts, these are important clues,
signposts that point toward those things that we must become aware of
and acquire mastery over if we are to learn how to unleash and
manipulate these talents. There are, no doubt, other factors involved,
other influences that shape and circumscribe these abilities, for one
thing should now be obvious. In a holographic universe, a universe in
which a slight change in attitude can mean the difference between life
and death, in which things are so subtly interconnected... Bohm
believes viewing the universe as a holomovement does provide us with a
context (framework). Jahn and Dunne believe that since all known
physical processes possess a wave/particle duality, it is not
unreasonable to assume that consciousness does as well. When it is
particlelike, consciousness would appear to be localized in our heads,
but in its wavelike aspect, consciousness, like all wave phenomena,
could also produce remote influence effects. They believe one of these
remote influence effects is PK. But Jahn and Dunne do not stop here.
They believe that reality is itself the result of the interface
(boundary) between the wavelike aspects of consciousness and the wave
patterns of matter. In thinking that is again similar to Bohm's, Jahn
and Dunne propose that PK actually involves an exchange of information
between consciousness and physical reality, an exchange that should be
thought of less as a flow between the mental and the material, and more
as a resonance between the two. The importance of resonance was even
sensed and commented on by the volunteers in the PK experiments, in
that the most frequently mentioned factor associated with a successful
performance was the attainment of a feeling of "resonance" with the
machine.
"To the extent that we're talking about a rather basic reliance on wave
mechanical behavior, there is some commonality between what we're
postulating and the holographic idea, " says Jahn. "It gives to
consciousness the capacity to function in a wave mechanical sense and
thereby to avail itself (take advantage of it), one way or another, of
all of space and time." Dunne agrees: "In some sense the holographic
model could be perceived as addressing the mechanism whereby the
consciousness interacts with that wave mechanical, aboriginal, sensible
muchness, and somehow manages to convert it into usable information. In
another sense,
if you imagine that the individual consciousness has its own
characteristic wave patterns, you could view it—metaphorically,
of course—as the laser of a particular frequency that intersects
with a specific pattern in the cosmic hologram."
So far, PK effects produced in the lab have been limited to relatively
small objects, but the evidence suggests that some individuals at least
can use PK to bring about even greater changes in the physical world.
Some researchers believe this suggests that the consciousness may be
able to do much more than make a few psychokinetic changes in the
material world... Thus, not only could the conventionally recognized
rules of nature, such as inertia, be completely bypassed, but the mind
could alter and reshape the material world in ways far more dramatic
than even psychokinesis implies... Grof's proposal that altered states
of consciousness may be required in order to make such changes in the
implicate is also attested to by the frequency with which fire immunity
is associated with heightened faith and religious zeal. The pattern
that began to take shape in the last chapter continues, and its message
becomes increasingly clear—the deeper and more emotionally
charged our beliefs, the greater the changes we can make in both our
bodies and reality itself. Bohm admits to believing that the universe
is all "thought" and reality exists only in what we think ... Unlike
Bohm, Jahn and Dunne believe subatomic particles do not possess a
distinct reality until consciousness enters the picture... In stark
contrast to Pribram, he believes that the seemingly inexhaustible array
of "separate realities" Castaneda experienced under Don Juan's
tutelage—and indeed even the equally vast array of realities we
experience during ordinary dreaming—indicate that there are an
infinite number of potential realities enfolded in the implicate.
Moreover, because the holographic mechanisms the brain uses to
construct everyday reality are the same ones it uses to construct our
dreams and the realities we experience during Castaneda-esque (esque -
possession of a specified quality) altered states of consciousness, he
believes all three types of reality are fundamentally the same. N.
David Mermin, a physicist at Cornell University, points out, physicists
fall into three categories: a small minority is troubled by the
philosophical implications; a second group has elaborate reasons why
they are not troubled, but their explanations tend "to miss the point
entirely"; and a third group has no elaborate explanations but also
refuses to say why they aren't troubled. "Their position is
unassailable (not able to be challenged)," says Mermin.
Jahn and Dunne are not so timid. They believe that instead of
discovering particles, physicists may actually be creating them. As
evidence, they cite a recently discovered subatomic particle called an
anomalon, whose properties vary from laboratory to laboratory. Imagine
owning a car that had a different color and different features
depending on who drove it ! One explanation is that he was obtaining it
telepathically from someone else's mind, in this case, the hypnotist's.
The ability of hypnotized individuals to "tap" into the senses of other
people has been reported by other investigators... After hypnotizing
the girl he told her that she would taste everything he tasted.
"Standing behind the girl, whose eyes I had securely bandaged, I took
up some salt and put it in my mouth; instantly she sputtered and
exclaimed, 'What for are you putting salt in my mouth?' Then I tried
sugar; she said That's better'; asked what it was like, she said
'Sweet. ' Then mustard, pepper, ginger, et cetera were tried; each was
named and apparently tasted by the girl when I put them in my own
mouth... So it appears that we are deeply interconnected with each
other in yet another way, a situation that is not so strange in a
holographic universe. Moreover, these interconnections manifest even
when we are not consciously aware of them... Given both our deep
interconnectedness and our ability to construct entirely convincing
realities out of information received via this interconnectedness, such
as Tom did, what would happen if two or more hypnotized individuals
tried to construct the same imaginary reality? If consciousness plays a
role in the creation of subatomic particles, is it possible that our
observations of the subatomic world are also reality-fields of a kind?
If Jahn can perceive a suit of armor through the senses of a friend in
Paris, is it any more farfetched to believe that physicists all around
the world are unconsciously interconnecting with one another and using
a form of mutual hypnosis similar to that used by Tart's subjects to
create the consensus characteristics they observe in an electron?
Physiologically speaking, the mental state hypnosis most closely
resembles is our normal waking consciousness. Does this mean that
normal waking consciousness is itself a kind of hypnosis, and we are
all constantly tapping into reality-fields?
As bizarre as this sounds, it is not so strange when one remembers that
in a holographic universe, consciousness pervades (saturate) all
matter, and "meaning" has an active presence in both the mental and
physical worlds. Bohm believes the ubiquitousness (ever-present,
omnipresent, universal) of meaning offers a possible explanation for
both telepathy and remote viewing. He thinks both may actually be just
different forms of psychokinesis. Just as PK is a resonance of meaning
conveyed from a mind to an object, telepathy can be viewed as a
resonance of meaning conveyed from a mind to a mind, says Bohm. In like
manner, remote viewing can be looked at as a resonance of meaning
conveyed from an object to a mind... This leaves one with the
unsettling conclusion that Kamro's new blood must have materialized out
of thin air. The ability to create an infinitesimal particle or two
pales in comparison to the materialization of the ten to twelve pints
of blood necessary to replenish the average human body. And blood is
not the only thing we can create out of thin air... Since our
poltergeist left my family's home and followed me when I went away to
college, and since its activity very definitely seemed connected to my
moods - its antics becoming more malicious when I was angry or my
spirits were low, and more impish and whimsical (playful, fantastic)
when my mood was brighter—I have always accepted the idea that
poltergeists are manifestations of the unconscious psychokinetic
ability of the person around whom they are most active. This
connection to my emotions displayed itself frequently. If I was in a
good mood, I might wake up to find all of my socks draped over the
house plants. If I was in a darker frame of mind, the poltergeist might
manifest by hurling a small object across the room or occasionally even
by breaking something. Over the years both I and various family members
and friends witnessed a wide range of psychokinetic activity. My mother
tells me that even when I was a toddler pots and pans had already begun
to jump inexplicably from the middle of the kitchen table to the floor.
I have written about some of these experiences in my book "Beyond the
Quantum"... because we ourselves are so deeply programmed to see the
world in terms of parts. This implies that if we were not so inculcated
(to teach by constant repetition) in thinking in terms of parts,
if we viewed the world differently, miracles would also be different.
Rather than finding so many examples of miracles in which the parts of
reality had been transformed, we would find more instances in which the
whole of reality had been transformed... Watson provides one. While he
was in Indonesia he also encountered another young woman with power.
The woman's name was Tia, but unlike Alin's power, hers did not seem to
be an expression of an unconscious psychic gift. Instead it was
consciously controlled and stemmed from Tia's natural connection to
forces that lie dormant in most of us. Tia was, in short, a shaman in
the making. Watson witnessed many examples of her gifts. He saw her
perform miraculous healings, and once, when she was engaged in a power
struggle with the local Moslem religious leader, he saw her use the
power of her mind to set the minaret of the local mosque on fire. But
he witnessed one of Tia's most awesome displays when he accidentally
stumbled upon her talking with a little girl in a shady grove of kenari
trees. Even at a distance, Watson could tell from Tia's gestures that
she was trying to communicate something important to the child.
Although he could not hear their conversation, he could tell from her
air of frustration that she was not succeeding. Finally, she appeared
to get an idea and started an eerie dance. Entranced, Watson continued
to watch as she gestured toward the trees, and although she scarcely
seemed to move, there was something hypnotic about her subtle
gesticulations. Then she did something that both shocked and dismayed
Watson. She caused the entire grove of trees suddenly to blink out of
existence. As Watson states, "One moment Tia danced in a grove of shady
kenari; the next she was standing alone in the hard, bright light of
the sun." A few seconds later she caused the grove to reappear, and
from the way the little girl leapt to her feet and rushed around
touching the trees, Watson was certain that she had shared the
experience also. But Tia was not finished. She caused the grove to
blink on and off several times as both she and the little girl linked
hands, dancing and giggling at the wonder of it all. Watson simply
walked away, his head reeling... I was born with a great deal of native
psychic ability. As an adolescent I started having vivid and detailed
dreams about events that would later happen. I often knew things about
people I had no right knowing. When I was seventeen I spontaneously
developed the ability to see an energy field, or "aura, " around living
things, and to this day can often determine things about a person's
health by their pattern and colors of the mist of light that I see
surrounding them. Above and beyond that, all I can say is that we are
all gifted with different aptitudes and qualities. Some of us are
natural artists. Some dancers. I seem to have been born with the
chemistry necessary to trigger shifts in reality, to catalyze somehow
the forces required to precipitate paranormal events. I am grateful for
this capacity because it has taught me a great deal about the universe,
but I do not know why I have it... Is it a hologram that only seems
stable, but under special circumstances can be changed and reshaped in
virtually limitless ways, as the evidence of the miraculous suggests?
Some researchers who have embraced the holographic idea believe the
latter is the case. For example, Grof not only takes materialization
and other extreme paranormal phenomena seriously, but feels that
reality is indeed cloud-built and pliant to the subtle authority of
consciousness. "The world is not necessarily as solid as we perceive
it, " he says... Tiller thinks the universe is also a kind of holodeck
created by the "integration" of all living things. "We've created it as
a vehicle of experience, and we've created the laws that govern it, "
he asserts. "And when we get to the frontiers of our understanding, we
can in fact shift the laws so that we're also creating the physics as
we go along."
Given Ullman's assertion that our psyche is constantly trying to teach
us things we are unaware of in our waking state, our unconscious may
even be programmed to produce occasionally such miracles in order to
offer us glimpses of reality's true nature, to show us that the world
we create for ourselves is ultimately as creatively infinite as the
reality of our dreams. Saying that reality is created by the
integration of all living things is really no different from saying
that the universe is comprised of reality fields.
"We are perceivers. We are an awareness; we are not objects; we have no
solidity. We are boundless. The world of objects and solidity is a way
of making our passage on earth convenient. It is only a description
that was created to help us. We, or rather our reason, forget that the
description is only a description and thus
we entrap the totality of ourselves in a vicious circle from which we
rarely emerge in our lifetime."
Another phenomenon often associated with saints is bilocation, or the
ability to be in two places at once. According to Haraldsson, Sai Baba
does biolocation one better. Numerous witnesses have reported watching
him snap his fingers and vanish, instantly reappearing a hundred or
more yards away. Such incidents very much suggest that our bodies are
not objects, but holographic projections that can blink "off" in one
location and "on" in another with the same ease that an image might
vanish and reappear on a video screen. An incident that further
underscores the holographic and immaterial nature of the body can be
found in phenomena produced by an Icelandic medium named Indridi
Indridason. In 1905 several of Iceland's leading scientists decided to
investigate the paranormal and chose Indridason as one of their
subjects. At the time, Indridason was just a country bumpkin with no
previous experience with things psychic, but he quickly proved to be a
spectacularly talented medium. He could go into trance quickly and
produce dramatic displays of PK. But most bizarre of all, sometimes
while he was deep in trance, different parts of his body would
completely dematerialize. As the astonished scientists watched, an arm
or a hand would fade out of existence, only to rematerialize before he
awakened. Such events again offer us a tantalizing glimpse of the
enormous potentialities that may lie dormant in all of us. As we have
seen, our current scientific understanding of the universe is
completely incapable of explaining the various phenomena we have
examined in this chapter and therefore has no choice but to ignore
them. However, if researchers such as Grof and Tiller are correct and
the mind is able to intercede in the implicate order, the holographic
plate that gives birth to the hologram we call the universe, and thus
create any reality or laws of physics that it wants to, then not only
are such things possible, but virtually anything is possible. If this
is true, the apparent solidity of the world is only a small part of
what is available to our perception. Although most of us are indeed
entrapped in our current description of the universe, a few individuals
do have the ability to see beyond the world's solidity... Many cultures
believe the aura of an extremely spiritual individual is so bright it
is visible even to normal human perception, which is why so many
traditions, including Christian, Chinese, Japanese, Tibetan, and
Egyptian, depict saints as having halos or other circular symbols
around their heads. The great Sufi mystic Hazrat Inayat Khan, who died
in 1927, is said to have sometimes given off so much light that people
could actually read by it. Under normal circumstances, however, the
human energy field is visible only to individuals who have a specially
developed capacity to see it. Sometimes people are born with the
ability. Sometimes it develops spontaneously at a certain point in a
person's life, as it did in my case, and sometimes it develops as the
result of some practice or discipline, often of a spiritual nature. The
first time I saw the distinctive mist of light around my arm I thought
it was smoke and jerked my arm up to see if I had somehow caught my
sleeve on fire. Of course, I hadn't and quickly discovered that the
light surrounded my entire body and formed a nimbus (luminous mist,
cloud) around everyone else's as well. According to some schools of
thought the human energy field has a number of distinct layers. I do
not see layers in the field and have no personal basis to judge if this
is true or not. These layers are actually said to be three-dimensional
energy bodies that occupy the same space as the physical body but are
of increasingly larger size so that they only look like layers, or
strata, as they extend outward from the body. Many psychics assert that
there are seven main layers, or subtle bodies, each progressively less
dense than the one before it, and each increasingly more difficult to
see. Different schools of thought refer to these energy bodies by
different names. One common system of nomenclature refers to the first
four as the etheric body; the astral, or emotional body; the mental
body, and the causal, or intuitive body. It is generally believed that
the etheric body, the body that is closest in size to the physical
body, is a kind of energy blueprint and is involved in guiding and
shaping the growth of the physical body. As their names suggest, the
next three bodies are related to emotional, mental, and intuitive
processes. Virtually noone agrees on, what to call the remaining three
bodies, although it is commonly agreed, that they have to do with the
soul and higher spiritual functioning. According to Indian yogic
literature, and to many psychics as well, we also have special energy
centers in our body. These focal points of subtle energy are connected
to endocrine glands and major nerve centers in the physical body, but
also extend up and into the energy field.
Because
they resemble spinning vortices of energy, when they are looked at
head-on, yogic literature refers to them as chakras, from the Sanskrit
word for "wheel, " and this term is still used today. The crown chakra,
an important chakra, that originates in the uppermost tip of the brain
and is associated with spiritual awakening, is often described by
clairvoyants as looking like a little cyclone whirling in the energy
field on top of the head, and it is the only chakra I see clearly. (My
own abilities appear to be too rudimentary to permit me to see the
other chakras). It ranges from a few inches to a foot or more in
height. When people are in a joyous state, this whirlwind of energy
grows taller and brighter, and when they dance, it bobs and sways like
a candle flame... The human energy field is not always bluish white,
but can possess various colors. According to talented psychics, these
colors, their muddiness or intensity, and their location in the aura
are related to a person's mental state, emotional state, activity,
health, and assorted other factors.
"If I'm seeing the etheric, it's usually because it contains leaks or
rips that are keeping the aura from being whole. Thus I cannot see it
completely. There are only patches of it. It's kind of like a ripped
blanket or a torn curtain. Holes in the etheric field are usually the
result of trauma, injury, illness, or some other kind of devastating
experience. "But beyond seeing the etheric, Dryer says that instead of
seeing the layers of the aura like tiers of cake piled one on top of
the other,
she experiences them as changing textures and intensities of visual
sensation. She compares this to being immersed in the ocean and feeling
water of different temperatures wash by." Rather than getting into
rigid concepts like layers, I tend to see the energy field in terms of
movements and waves of energy, "she says."
It's as if my vision is telescoping through various levels and
dimensions of the energy field, but I don't actually see it neatly
arranged in various layers."
This does not mean that Dryer's perception of the human energy field is
in any way less detailed than Brennan's. She perceives a dazzling
amount of pattern and structure—kaleidoscopic clouds of color
shot through with light, complex images, glistening shapes, and
gossamer mists. However, not all energy fields are created equal.
According to Dryer, shallow people have shallow and humdrum (dull)
auras. Conversely, the more complex the person, the more complex and
interesting their energy field. "A person's energy field is as
individual as their fingerprint I've never really seen any two that
look alike, " she says. Like Brennan, Dryer can diagnose illnesses by
looking at a person's aura, and when she chooses she can adjust her
vision and see the chakras. But Dryer's special skill is the ability to
peer deep into a person's psyche and give them an eerily accurate
status report of the weaknesses, strengths, needs, and general health
of their emotional, psychological, and spiritual being. So profound are
her talents in this area that some have likened a session with Dryer to
six months of psychotherapy. Numerous clients have credited her with
completely transforming their lives, and her files are filled with
glowing letters of thanks. I, too, can attest to Dryer's abilities. In
my first reading with her, and although we were virtual strangers, she
proceeded to describe things about me that not even my closest friends
know. These were not just vague platitudes, but specific and detailed
assessments of my talents, vulnerabilities, and personality dynamics.
By the end of the two-hour session I was convinced that Dryer had not
been looking at my physical presence, but at the energy construct of my
psyche itself. I have also had the privilege of talking with and/or
listening to the session recordings of over two dozen of Dryer's
clients, and have discovered that, almost without exception, others
have found her as accurate and insightful as did I. Instead of seeing
the aura, Joy initially was only able to feel its presence with his
hands. "I was examining a healthy male in his early twenties, " he
says. "As my hand passed over the solar plexus area, the pit of the
stomach, I sensed something that felt like a warm cloud. It seemed to
radiate out three to four feet from the body, perpendicular to the
surface and to be shaped like a cylinder about four inches in
diameter." Joy went on to discover that all his patients had palpable
cylinderlike radiations emanating not only from their stomachs, but
from various other points on their bodies. It wasn't until he read an
ancient Hindu book about the human energy system that he found he had
discovered, or rather rediscovered, the chakras. Like Brennan, Joy
thinks the holographic model offers the best explanation for
understanding the human energy field. He also feels that the ability to
see auras is latent in all of us. I believe, that reaching expanded
states of consciousness is merely the attuning of our central nervous
system to perceptive states that have always existed in us but have
been blocked by our outer mental conditioning..."
Once Hunt confirmed the existence of the human energy field, she, too,
became convinced that the holographic idea offers one model for
understanding it. In addition to its frequency aspects, she points out
that the energy field, and indeed all of the body's electrical systems,
is holographic in another way. Like the information in a hologram,
these systems are distributed globally throughout the body. For
instance, the electrical activity measured by an electroencephalograph
is strongest in the brain, but an EEC reading can also be made by
attaching an electrode to the toe. Similarly, an EKG can be picked up
in the little finger. It's stronger and higher in amplitude in the
heart, but its frequency and pattern are the same everywhere in the
body. Hunt believes this is significant. Although every portion
of what she calls the "holographic field reality" of the aura contains
aspects of the whole energy field, different portions are not
absolutely identical to each other. These differing amplitudes keep the
energy field from being a static hologram, and instead allow it to be
dynamic and flowing, says Hunt. One of Hunt's most startling findings
is that certain talents and abilities seem to be related to the
presence of specific frequencies in a person's energy field. She has
found that when the main focus of a person's consciousness is on the
material world, the frequencies of their energy field tend to be in the
lower range and are not too far removed from the 250 cps of the body's
biological frequencies. In addition to these, people who are psychic or
who have healing abilities also have frequencies of roughly 400 to 800
cps in their field. People who can go into trance and apparently
channel other information sources through them, skip these "psychic"
frequencies entirely and operate in a narrow band between 800 and 900
cps. "They don't have any psychic breadth at all, " states Hunt.
"They're up there in their own field. It's narrow. It's pinpointed, and
they literally are almost out of it." People who have frequencies above
900 cps are what Hunt calls mystical personalities. Whereas psychics
and trance mediums are often just conduits of information, mystics
possess the wisdom to know what to do with the information, says Hunt.
They are aware of the cosmic interrelatedness of all things and are in
touch with every level of human experience. They are anchored in
ordinary reality, but often have both psychic and trance abilities.
However, their frequencies also extend way beyond the bands associated
with these capabilities. Recall Bohm's assertion that there is no such
thing as disorder, only orders of indefinitely high degree. Bohm also
believes that at a subquantum level beyond the atom there are many
subtle energies still unknown to science... But we still do not know
what an electric or a gravitational field really is. "The pattern is
never a repeatable one, but it's so dynamic and complex, I call it a
chaos holograph pattern," Hunt obtained a chaos pattern from three to
four seconds of data recorded by one electrode, suggesting that the
human energy field is far richer in information and possesses a far
more complex and dynamic organization than even the electrical activity
of the brain. Rich says she often sees what looks like a little
transparent movie going on around a client's head: "Sometimes I see a
small image of the person behind their head or shoulders doing various
things they do in life. My clients tell me that my descriptions are
very accurate and specific. I can see their offices and what their
bosses look like. I can see what they've thought of and what's happened
to them during the last six months. Recently I told a client that I
could see her home and she had masks and flutes hanging on her wall.
She said, 'No, no, no. ' I said yes, there are musical instruments
hanging on the wall, mostly flutes, and there are masks. And then she
said, 'Oh, that's my summer home.' Dryer says she also sees what look
like three-dimensional movies in a person's energy field. "Usually
they're in color, but they can also be brown, or look like tintypes.
Often they depict a story about the person that can take anywhere from
five minutes to an hour to unfold. The images are also incredibly
detailed. When I see a person sitting in a room I can tell them how
many plants are in the room, how many leaves are on each plant, and how
many bricks are in the wall... Dryer likens the images she sees to
holograms and says that when she chooses one and starts to watch it, it
seems to expand and fill the entire room. "If I see something going on
with a person's shoulder, such as an injury, suddenly the whole scene
widens. That's when I get the sense that it's a hologram because
sometimes I feel I can step right into it and be a part of it. It's not
happening to me, but around me. It's almost as if I'm in a
three-dimensional movie, a holographic movie, with the person." Dryer's
holographic vision is not limited to events from a person's life. She
sees visual representations of the operations of the unconscious mind
as well. As we all know, the unconscious mind speaks in a language of
symbols and metaphors. This is why dreams often seem so nonsensical and
mysterious. However, once one learns how to interpret the language of
the unconscious, the meanings of dreams become clear. Indeed, it is
clear from the work of psychics like Rich and Dryer that there is an
enormous amount of information in the energy field. One wonders if this
is perhaps why Hunt obtained such a pronounced chaos pattern when she
analyzed data from the aura... As Brennan puts it, "The aura not only
represents, but also contains, the whole. Instead of talking about the
etheric body and things like that, I chose to use the holographic model
as a way of explaining it and call it Holographic Body Assessment." In
the last chapter we explored the possibility that the body is not a
solid construct, but is itself a kind of holographic image. Another
faculty possessed by many clairvoyants seems to support this notion,
that is, the ability to literally look inside a person's body.
Individuals who are gifted at seeing the energy field can also often
adjust their vision and see through the flesh and bones of the body as
if they were no more than layers of colored mist. During the course of
her research, Karagulla discovered a number of people, both in and out
of the medical profession, who possessed this X-ray vision... Karagulla
wrote, "For me as a psychiatrist to be meeting somebody who was
reported to be able to 'see' right through me was a shattering reversal
of my usual procedures."
A few years back I started having trouble with my spleen. To try and
remedy the situation, I began performing daily visualization exercises,
seeing images of my spleen in a state of wholeness and health, seeing
it being bathed in healing light, and so on. Unfortunately, I am a very
impatient person, and when I did not have overnight success I got
angry. During my next meditation I mentally scolded my spleen and
warned it in no uncertain terms that it better start doing what I
wanted. This incident took place purely in the privacy of my own
thoughts, and I quickly forgot about it. A few days later I saw Dryer
and asked her if she could look into my body and tell me if there was
anything I should be aware of (I did not tell her about my health
problem). Nonetheless, she immediately described what was wrong with my
spleen and then paused, scowling as if she was confused. "Your spleen's
very upset about something, " she murmured. And then suddenly it hit
her. "Have you been yelling at your spleen?" I sheepishly admitted that
I had. Dryer all but threw her hands up. "You mustn't do that. Your
spleen became ill because it thought it was doing what you wanted. That
was because you were unconsciously giving it the wrong directions. Now
that you've yelled at it, it's really confused. " She shook her head
with concern. "Never, never get angry at your body or your internal
organs, " she advised. "Only send them positive messages. " The
incident not only revealed Dryer's skill at looking inside the human
body, but also seemed to suggest that my spleen has some sort of
mentality or consciousness all of its own. It reminded me not only of
Pert's assertion that she no longer knows where the brain leaves off
and the body begins, but made me wonder if perhaps all of the body's
subcomponents —glands, bones, organs, and cells—possess
their own intelligence? ...Because an illness can appear in the energy
field weeks and even months before it appears in the body, many
psychics believe that disease actually originates in the energy field.
This suggests that the field is in some way more primary than the
physical body and functions as a kind of blueprint from which the body
gets its structural cues... At present, medical science is at a loss to
explain how mental imagery could actually create an illness. But, as we
have seen, ideas that are prominent in our thoughts quickly appear as
images in the energy field. If the energy field is the blueprint that
guides and molds the body, it may be that by imaging an illness, even
unconsciously, and repeatedly reinforcing its presence in the field, we
are in effect programming the body to manifest the illness. Similarly,
this same dynamic linkage between mental images, the energy field, and
theother way around is Richard Gerber, a Detroit physician who has
spent the last twelve years investigating the medical implications of
the body's subtle energy fields.
"The etheric body is a holographic energy template, that guides the
growth and development of the physical body," says Gerber. Gerber
believes, that the distinct layers, some psychics see in the aura, also
play a factor in the dynamic relationship among thought, the energy
field, and the physical body. Just as the physical body is subordinate
to the etheric, the etheric body is subordinate to the astral/emotional
body, the astral/emotional to the mental, and so on, says Gerber, with
each body functioning as the template for the one before it. Thus the
subtler the layer of the energy field in which an image or thought
manifests, the greater its ability to heal and reshape the body.
"Because the mental body feeds energy into the astral/emotional body,
which then funnels down into the etheric and physical bodies, healing a
person at the mental level is stronger and produces longer lasting
results than healing from either the astral or etheric levels, " says
Gerber. Physicist Tiller agrees. "The thoughts that one creates
generate patterns at the mind level of nature. So we see that illness,
in fact, eventually becomes manifest from the altered mind patterns
through the rachet effect—first, to effect at the etheric level
and then, ultimately, at the physical level [where] we see it openly as
disease. " Tiller believes the reason illnesses often recur is that
medicine currently treats only the physical level. He feels that if
doctors could treat the energy field as well, they would bring about
longer lasting cures. Until then, many treatments "will not be
permanent because we have not altered the basic hologram at the mind
and spiritual levels,"... Tiller even suggests that the universe itself
started as a subtle energy field and gradually became dense and
material through a similar rachet effect... Like the image a
psychic sees floating in the human energy field, this divine pattern
functioned as a template, influencing and molding increasingly less
subtle levels of the cosmic energy field "on down the line via a series
of holograms, " until it eventually coalesced into a hologram of a
physical universe. If this is true, it suggests that the human body is
holographic in another way, for each of us truly would be a universe in
miniature. Furthermore, if our thoughts can cause ghostly holographic
images to form, not only in our own energy fields, but in the subtle
energetic levels of reality itself... Again, it may be that our
thoughts are constantly affecting the subtle energetic levels of the
holographic universe, but only emotionally powerful thoughts, such as
the ones that accompany moments of Crisis and transformation—the
kind of events that seem to engender synchronises—are potent
enough to manifest as a series of coincidences in physical reality. Of
course, these processes are not contingent (accidental) on the subtle
energy fields of the universe being stratified (arranged) into rigidly
defined layers. They could also work even if the subtle fields of the
universe are a smooth continuum. In fact, given how sensitive these
subtle fields are to our thoughts, we must be very careful when trying
to form set ideas about their organization and structure. What we
believe about them may in fact help mold and create their structure.
This is perhaps why psychics disagree about whether the human energy
field is divided into layers. Psychics who believe in clearly defined
layers may actually be causing the energy field to form itself into
layers. The individual whose energy field is being observed may also
participate in this process. Brennan is very frank about this and notes
that the more one of her clients understands the difference between the
layers, the clearer and more distinct the layers of their energy field
become. She admits that the structure she sees in the energy field is
thus but one system, and others have come up with other systems. For
example, the authors of the tantras, a collection of Hindu yogic texts
written during the fourth through sixth centuries A. D., perceived only
three layers in the energy field. There is evidence that the structures
clairvoyants inadvertently create in the energy field can be remarkably
long-lived. For centuries the ancient Hindus believed that each chakra
also had a Sanskrit letter written in its center. Japanese researcher
Hiroshi Motoyama, a clinical psychologist who has successfully
developed a technique for measuring the electrical presence of the
chakras, says that he first became interested in the chakras because
his mother, a simple woman with natural clairvoyant gifts, could see
them clearly. However, for years she was puzzled because she could see
what looked like an inverted sailboat in her heart chakra. It wasn't
until Motoyama began his own investigations that he discovered what his
mother was seeing was the Sanskrit letter yam, the letter the ancient
Hindus perceived in the heart chakra. Some psychics, such as Dryer, say
that they also see Sanskrit letters in the chakras. Others do not. The
only explanation appears to be that psychics who see the letters are
actually tuning into holographic structures long ago imposed on the
energy field by the beliefs of the ancient Hindus... At first
glance this notion may seem strange, but it does have a precedent
(previous incident). As we have seen, one of the basic tenets of
quantum physics is that we are not discovering reality, but
participating in its creation. It may be that as we probe deeper into
the levels of reality beyond the atom, the levels where the subtle
energies of the human aura appear to lie, the participatory nature of
reality becomes even more pronounced.Thus we must be extremely cautious
about saying that we have discovered a particular structure or pattern
in the human energy field, when we may have actually created what we
have found. Somehow their brains were creating the comforting delusion
that they had consciously controlled the action even though they had
not. This has caused some researchers to, wonder if free will is an
illusion. Later studies have shown that one and a half seconds before
we "decide" to move one of our muscles, such as lift a finger, our
brain has already started to generate the signals necessary to
accomplish the movement. Again, who is making the decision, the
conscious mind or the unconscious mind? Valarie Hunt does such findings
one better. She has discovered that the human energy field responds to
stimuli even before the brain does. She has taken EMG readings of the
energy field and EEC readings of the brain simultaneously and
discovered that when she makes a loud sound or flashes a bright light,
the EMG of the energy field registers the stimulus before it ever shows
up on the EEC. What does it mean? "I think we have way overrated the
brain as the active ingredient in the relationship of a human to the
world, " says Hunt. "It's just a real good computer. But the aspects of
the mind that have to do with creativity, imagination, spirituality,
and all those things, I don't see them in the brain at all. The mind's
not in the brain. It's in that darn field... Dryer has also
noticed that the energy field responds before a person consciously
registers a response. As a consequence, instead of trying to judge her
client's reactions by watching their facial expressions, she keeps her
eyes closed and watches how their energy fields react. "As I speak I
can see the colors change in their energy field. I can see how they
feel about what I'm saying without having to ask them. For instance, if
their field becomes foggy I know they're not understanding what I'm
telling them, " she states. If the mind is not in the brain, but in the
energy field that permeates both the brain and the physical body, this
may explain why psychics such as Dryer see so much of the content of a
person's psyche in the field. It may also explain how my spleen, an
organ not normally associated with thought, managed to have its own
rudimentary form of intelligence. Indeed, if the mind is in the field,
it suggests that our awareness, the thinking, feeling part of
ourselves, may not even be confined to the physical body, and as we
will see, there is considerable evidence to support this idea as well.
But first we must turn our attention to another issue. The solidity of
the body is not the only thing, that is illusory in a holographic
universe. As we have seen, Bohm believes that even time itself is not
absolute, but unfolds out of the implicate order. This suggests that
the linear division of time into past, present, and future is also just
another construct of the mind...as the present enfolds and becomes part
of the past, it does not cease to exist, but simply returns to the
cosmic storehouse of the implicate. Or as Bohm puts it, "The past is
active in the present as a kind of implicate order." If, as Bohm
suggests, consciousness also has its source in the implicate, this
means that the human mind and the holographic record of the past
already exist in the same domain, are, in a manner of speaking, already
neighbors. Thus, a shift in the focus of one's attention may be all
that is needed to access the past. A person, who is unfamiliar with
holograms might mistakenly assume that the various stages in the
blowing of the soap bubble are transitory and once perceived can never
be viewed again, but this is not true. The entire activity is always
recorded in the hologram, and it is the viewer's changing perspective
that provides the illusion that it is unfolding in time. The
holographic theory suggests that the same is true of our own past.
Instead of fading into oblivion, it too remains recorded in the cosmic
hologram and can always be accessed once again. Another suggestively
hologramlike feature of the retrocognitive experience is the
three-dimensionality of the scenes that are accessed. For instance,
psychic Rich, who can also psychometrize (say about their past)
objects, says she knows what Ossowiecki meant when he said that the
images he saw were as three-dimensional and real, even more real, than
the room in which he was sitting. "It's as if the scene takes over, "
says Rich. "It's dominant, and once it starts to unfold I actually
become a part of it. It's like being in two places at once. I'm aware
that I'm sitting in a room, but I'm also in the scene." Similarly
holographic is the nonlocal nature of the ability. Psychics are able to
access the past of a particular archaeological site both when they are
at the site and when they are many miles removed. In other words, the
record of the past does not appear to be stored at any one location,
but like the information in a hologram, it is nonlocal and can be
accessed from any point in the space-time framework. Put another way,
the past may be just one more thing that is encoded in Pribram's
frequency domain, a portion of the cosmic interference patterns that
most of us edit out and only a few tune into and convert into
hologramlike images. The notion that some events leave stronger
imprints in the holographic record than others is also supported by the
tendency of hauntings to occur at locations, where some terrible act of
violence or other unusually powerful emotional occurence has taken
place. The literature is filled with apparitions appearing at the sites
of murders, military battles and other kinds of mayhem. This suggests
that in addition to images and sounds, the emotions being felt during
an event are also recorded in the cosmic hologram. Again it appears
that it is the emotional intensity of such events that makes them more
prominent in the holographic record, and that allows normal individuals
to unwittingly tap into them. As Evans-Wentz went from village to
village interviewing the usually elderly stalwarts of the faith, he
descovered that not all of the fairies people encountered in the glens
and the moon-dappled meadows were small. Some were tall and looked like
normal human beings except they were luminous and translucent and had
the curious habit of wearing the clothing of earlier historical
periods. Moreover, these "fairies" often appeared in or around
archeological ruins -burial mounds, standing stones, crumbling
sixth-century fortresses, and so on—and participated in
activities associated with bygone times. Evans-Wentz interviewed
witnesses who had seen fairies that looked like men in Elizabethan
dress engaging in hunts, fairies that walked in ghostly processions to
and from the remains of old forts, and fairies that rang bells while
standing in the ruins of ancient churches. One activity of which the
fairies seemed inordinately fond was waging war. In his book "The
Fairy-Faith in Celtic Countries" Evans-Wentz presents the testimony of
dozens of individuals who claimed to see these spectral conflicts,
moonlit meadows thronged with men battling in medieval armor, or
desolate fens (a marsh) covered with soldiers in colored uniforms.
Sometimes these frays (fights, arguments) were eerily silent. Sometimes
they were full-fledged dins (continueing and unpleasant noise); and,
perhaps most haunting of all, sometimes they could only be heard but
not seen. From this, Evans-Wentz concluded that at least some of the
phenomena his witnesses were interpreting as fairies were actually some
kind of afterimage of events that had taken place in the past. "Nature
herself has a memory, " he theorized. "There is some indefinable
psychic element in the earth's atmosphere upon which all human and
physical actions or phenomena are photographed or impressed. Under
certain inexplicable conditions, normal persons who are not seers may
observe Nature's mental records like pictures cast upon a screenoften
like moving pictures. As for why encounters with fairies were becoming
less frequent, a remark made by one of Evans-Wentz's respondents
provides a clue. The respondent was an elderly gentleman named John
Davies living on the Isle of Man, and after describing numerous
sightings of the good people, he stated, "Before education came into
the island more people could see the fairies; now very few people can
see them." Since "education" no doubt included an anathema against
believing in fairies, Davies's remark suggests that it was a change in
attitude that caused the widespread retrocognitive abilities of the
Manx people to atrophy. Once again this underscores the enormous power
our beliefs have in determining which of our extraordinary potentials
we manifest and which we do not. But whether our beliefs allow us to
see these hologramlike movies of the past or cause our brains to edit
them out, the evidence suggests that they exist nonetheless. Nor are
such experiences limited to Celtic countries. There are reports of
witnesses seeing phantom soldiers dressed in ancient Hindu costumes in
India. In Hawaii, such ghostly splays are well known and books on the
islands are filled with accounts of individuals who have seen phantom
processions of Hawaiian warriors in feather cloaks marching along with
war clubs and torches... we must not forget that contained within the
shimmering holographic record of the past are all the joys of the human
race as well. It is, in essence, a library of all that ever was, and
learning to tap into this dazzling and infinite treasure-trove on a
more massive and systematic scale could expand our knowledge of both
ourselves and the universe in ways we have not yet dared dream."
Bohm's assertion, that every human consciousness has its source in the
implicate implies that we all possess the ability to access the future,
and this is also supported by the evidence. Jahn and Dunne's discovery
that even normal individuals do well in precognitive remote-viewing
tests is one indication of the widespread nature of the ability...
Similarly, surveys conducted by Louisa Rhine revealed that
precognitions occur more frequently than any other kind of psychic
experience. Studies also show that precognitive visions tend to be of
tragedies, with premonitions of unhappy events outnumbering happy ones
by a ratio of 4 to 1 ... Tribal cultures are well aware of this fact,
and shamanic traditions almost universally stress how important
dreaming is in divining the future. Even our most ancient writings pay
homage to the premonitory power of dreams... The antiquity of such
traditions indicates that the tendency of premonitions to occur in
dreams is due to more than just our current skeptical attitude toward
precognition. The proximity the unconscious mind has to the atemporal
realm of the implicate may also play a role. Because our dreaming self
is deeper in the psyche than our conscious self—and thus closer
to the primal ocean in which past, present, and future become
one—it may be easier for it to access information about the
future... Such incidents strongly suggest that the future is not
set, but is plastic and can be changed... Loye provides a possible
answer. He believes that reality is a giant hologram, and in it the
past, present, and future are indeed fixed, at least up to a point. The
rub is that it is not the only hologram. There are many such
holographic entities floating in the timeless and spaceless waters of
the implicate, jostling and swimming around one another like so many
amoebas. "Such holographic entities could also be visualized as
parallel worlds, parallel universes, " says Loye. Thus, the future of
any given holographic universe is predetermined, and when a person has
a precognitive glimpse of the future, they are tuning into the future
of that particular hologram only. But like amoebas, these holograms
also occasionally swallow and engulf each other, melding and
bifurcating like the protoplasmic globs of energy that they really are.
Sometimes these jostlings jolt us and are responsible for the
premonitions that from time to time engulf us. And when we act upon a
premonition and appear to alter the future, what we are really doing is
leaping from one hologram to another. Loye calls these intra
holographic leaps "hololeaps" and feels that they are what provides us
with our true capacity for both insight and freedom. Bohm's and Loye's
descriptions seem to be two different ways of trying to express the
same thing—a view of the future as a hologram that is substantive
enough for us to perceive it, but malleable enough to be susceptible to
change. Others have used still different words to sum up what appears
to be the same basic thought. Cordero describes the future as a
hurricane that is beginning to form and gather momentum, becoming more
concrete and unavoidable as it approaches... The Hawaiian kahunas,
widely esteemed for their precognitive powers, also speak of the future
as fluid, but in the process of "crystallizing and believe that great
world events are crystallized furthest in advance, as are the most
important events in a person's life, such as marriage, accidents, and
death... Loye's notion that there are many separate holographic futures
and we choose which events are going to manifest and which are not by
leaping from one hologram to another carries with it another
implication. Choosing one holographic future over another is
essentially the same as creating the future. As we have seen, there is
a good deal of evidence suggesting that consciousness plays a
significant role in creating the here and now. But if the mind can
stray beyond the boundaries of the present and occasionally stalk the
misty landscape of the future, do we have a hand in creating future
events as well? Put another way, are the vagaries of life truly random,
or do we play a role in literally sculpting our own destiny?
Remarkably, there is some intriguing evidence that the latter may be
the case. Drawing on Pribram's holographic model of the brain,
Argentinian physiologist Hugo Zuccarelli recently developed a new
recording technique that allows one to create what amounts to holograms
made out of sound instead of light. Zuccarelli bases his technique on
the curious fact that the human ears actually emit sound. Realizing
that these naturally occurring sounds were the audio equivalent of the
"reference laser" used to recreate a holographic image, he used them as
the basis for a revolutionary new recording technique that reproduces
sounds that are even more realistic and three- dimensional than those
produced through the stereo process. He calls this new kind of sound
"holophonic sound." After listening to one of Zuccarelli's holophonic
recordings, a reporter for the Times of London wrote recently,
"I stole a look at the reassuring numbers on my watch to make sure
where I was. People approached from behind me where I knew there was
only wall.... By the end of seven minutes I was getting the impression
of figures, the embodiment of the voices on the tape. It is a
multidimensional 'picture' created by sound." Because Zuccarelli's
technique is based on the brain's own holographic way of processing
sound, it appears to be as successful at fooling the ear as light
holograms are at fooling the eyes. As a result, listeners often move
their feet when they hear a recording of someone walking in front of
them, and move their heads when they hear what sounds like a match
being lit too near to their face (some reportedly even smell the
match). Remarkably, because a holophonic recording has nothing to do
with conventional stereophonic sound, it maintains its eerie
three-dimensionality even when one listens to it through only one side
of a headphone. The idea, that the universe began in a single,
primordial explosion, or Big Bang, is accepted without question by most
scientists. And this is odd because, although there are compelling
reasons to believe that this is true, no one has ever proved that it is
true. On the other hand, if a near-death psychologist were to state
flatly that the realm of light NDEers travel to during their
experiences is an actual other level of reality, the psychologist would
be attacked for making a statement that cannot be proved. And this is
odd, for there are equally compelling reasons to believe this is true.
In other words, science already accepts what is probable about very
important matters if those matters fall into the category of
"fashionable things to believe" but not if they fall into the category
of "unfashionable things to believe." This double standard must be
eliminated before science can begin to make significant inroads into
the study of both psychic and spiritual phenomena. Most crucial of all,
science must replace its enamorment with objectivity— the idea
that the best way to study nature is to be detached, analytical, and
dispassionately objective—with a more participatory approach. The
importance of this shift has been stressed by numerous researchers,
including Harman. We have also seen evidence of its necessity
repeatedly throughout this book. In a universe in which the
consciousness of a physicist affects the reality of a subatomic
particle, the attitude of a doctor affects whether or not a placebo
works, the mind of an experimenter affects the way a machine operates,
and the imaginal can spill over into physical reality, we can no longer
pretend that we are separate from that which we are studying. In a
holographic and omnijective universe, a universe in which all things
are part of a seamless continuum, strict objectivity ceases to be
possible...We are now, there can be no doubt, in the final historical
seconds of that crisis—a crisis which involves the end of
history, our departure from the planet, [and] the triumph over death.
We are, in fact, closing distance with the most profound event a
planetary ecology can encounter—the freeing of life from the dark
chrysalis of matter."' Of course these are only speculations. But
whether we are on the very brink of a transition, as Strieber and
McKenna suggest, or whether that watershed is still some ways off in
the future, it is apparent that we are following some track of
spiritual evolution. Given the holographic nature of the universe, it
is also apparent that at least something like the above two
possibilities awaits us somewhere and somewhen. And lest we be tempted
to assume that freedom from the physical is the end of human evolution,
there is evidence that the more plastic and imaginal realm of the
hereafter is also a mere stepping stone. For example, Swedenborg said
that beyond the heaven he visited was another heaven, one so brilliant
and formless to his perceptions that it appeared only as "a streaming
of light". NDEers have also occasionally described these even more
unfathomably tenuous realms. "There are many higher planes, and to get
back to God (rather Creative Force, LM), to reach the plane where ...
spirit resides, you have to drop your garment each time until your
spirit is truly free, " states one of Whitton's subjects. "The learning
process never stops.... Sometimes we are allowed glimpses of the higher
planes—each one is lighter and brighter than the one before." It
may be frightening to some that reality seems to become increasingly
frequency-like as one penetrates deeper into the implicate."
And perhaps that is why the beings of light tell us again and again
that the purpose of life is to learn. We are indeed on a shaman's
journey, mere children struggling to become technicians of the sacred.
We are learning how to deal with the plasticity that is part and parcel
of a universe in which mind and reality are a continuum, and in this
journey one lesson stands out above all others. As long as the
formlessness and breathtaking freedom of the beyond remain frightening
to us, we will continue to dream a hologram for ourselves that is
comfortably solid and well defined. But we must always heed Bohm's
warning that the conceptual pigeonholes we use to parse out the
universe are of our own making. They do not exist "out there, " for
"out there" is only the indivisible totality. Brahman. And when we
outgrow any given set of conceptual pigeonholes we must always be
prepared to move on, to advance from soul-state to soul-state, as Sri
Aurobindo put it, and from illumination to illumination. For our
purpose appears to be as simple as it is endless. We are, as the
aborigines say, just learning how to survive in infinity."
Perhaps most astonishing of all is, that there is compelling evidence,
that the only time quanta ever manifest as Particles, is when we are
looking at them. For instance, when an electron isn't being looked at,
experimental findings suggest that it is always a Wave. Physicists are
able to draw this conclusion because they have devised clever
strategies for deducing how an electron behaves when it is not being
observed (it should be noted that this is only one interpretation of
the evidence and is not the conclusion of all physicists; as we will
see, Bohm himself has a different interpretation)...quanta coalesce
(turn) into particles only when they are being observed..."Likewise
humans can never experience the true texture of quantum reality," says
Herbert, "because everything we touch turns to matter"...One physicist,
who was troubled by Bohr's assertions was Einstein (a Jew). Despite the
role Einstein had played in the founding of quantum theory, he was not
at all happy with the course the fledgling science had taken. He found
Bohr's conclusion, that a particle's properties don't exist until they
are observed, particularly objectionable because, when combined with
another of quantum physics's findings, it implied, that subatomic
particles were interconnected in a way Einstein simply didn't believe
was possible...Consider an extremely unstable atom physicists call
positronium. The positronium atom is composed of an electron and a
positron (a positron is an electron with a positive charge). Because a
positron is the electron's antiparticle opposite, the two eventually
annihilate each other and turn into two quanta of Light (or the Energy
of Balance) or "photons", traveling in opposite directions (the
capacity to shape-shift from one kind of particle to another is just
another of a quantum's abilities)...In 1935 Einstein and his colleagues
Boris Podolsky and Nathan Rosen published a now famous paper entitled
"Can Quantum-Mechanical Description of Physical Reality Be Considered
Complete?"
The problem is that according to Einstein's special theory of
relativity, nothing can travel faster, than the speed of light, let
alone travel instantaneously, for that would be tantamount to breaking
the time barrier and would open the door on all kinds of unacceptable
paradoxes. ('Positronium decay is not the subatomic process Einstein
and his colleagues employed in their thought experiment, but is used
here, because it is easy to visualize.) Einstein and his colleagues
were convinced, that no "reasonable definition" of reality would permit
such faster-than-light interconnections to exist, and therefore Bohr
had to be wrong. Their argument is now known as the
Einstein-Podolsky-Rosen paradox, or EPR paradox for short. Bohr
remained unperturbed by Einstein's argument. Rather, than believing,
that some kind of faster-than-light communication was taking place, he
offered another explanation. If subatomic particles do not exist until
they are observed, then one could no longer think of them as
independent "things". Thus Einstein was basing his argument on an error
when he viewed twin particles as separate. They were part of an
indivisible (incapable of being divided) system, and it was meaningless
to think of them otherwise. In time most physicists sided with Bohr and
became content, that his interpretation was correct. One factor, that
contributed to Bohr's triumph was, that quantum physics had proved so
spectacularly successful in predicting phenomena, few physicists were
willing even to consider the possibility, that it might be faulty in
some way. In addition, when Einstein and his colleagues first made
their proposal about twin particles, technical and other reasons
prevented such an experiment from actually being performed. This made
it even easier to put out of mind. This was curious, for although Bohr
had designed his argument to counter Einstein's attack on quantum
theory, as we will see, Bohr's view, that subatomic systems are
indivisible has equally profound implications for the nature of
reality. Ironically, these implications were also ignored, and once
again the potential importance of interconnectedness was swept under
the carpet...
A
Plasma is a gas containing a high density of electrons and positive
ions, atoms, that have a positive charge. To his (Bohm) amazement he
found, that once they were in a Plasma, electrons stopped behaving like
individuals and started behaving, as if they were part of a larger and
Interconnected Whole. Although their individual movements appeared
random, vast numbers of electrons were able to produce effects, that
were surprisingly well-organized. Like some Amoeboid Creature, the
Plasma constantly regenerated itself and enclosed all impurities in a
wall in the same way, that a biological organism might encase a foreign
substance in a cyst.
So
struck was Bohm by these organic qualities, that he later remarked,
he'd frequently had the impression the Electron Sea was "Alive."
In 1947 Bohm accepted an assistant professorship at Princeton
University, an indication of how highly he was regarded, and there he
extended his Berkeley research to the study of electrons in metals.
Once again he found, that the seemingly haphazard movements of
individual electrons managed to produce highly organized overall
effects. Like the Plasmas he had studied at Berkeley, these were no
longer situations involving two particles, each behaving as if it knew
what the other was doing, but entire oceans of particles, each behaving
as if it knew what untold trillions of others were doing. Bohm called
such collective movements of electrons plasmons...
Существует ли реальность
или всё вокруг лишь голограмма? (прекрасная
статья, ЛМ)
http://earth-chronicles.ru/news/2015-07-21-82153
В 1982 годy пpоизошло замечательное событие. Исследовательская гpyппа
под pyководством Alain Aspect пpи yнивеpситете в Паpиже пpедставила
экспеpимент, котоpый стал одним из самых значительных в 20 веке.
Aspect и его гpyппа обнаpyжили, что в опpеделенных yсловиях
элементаpные частицы, напpимеp, электpоны, способны мгновенно
сообщаться дpyг с дpyгом независимо от pасстояния междy ними. Hе имеет
значения, 10 фyтов междy ними или 10 миллиаpдов миль. Каким-то обpазом
каждая частица всегда знает, что делает дpyгая. Пpоблема этого откpытия
в том, что оно наpyшает постyлат Эйнштейна о пpедельной скоpости
pаспpостpанения взаимодействия, pавной скоpости света. Физик
лондонского yнивеpситета David Bohm считает, что согласно откpытию
Aspect, pеальная действительность не сyществyет, и что несмотpя на ее
очевиднyю плотность, вселенная в своей основе — фикция,
гигантская, pоскошно детализиpованная гологpамма. Гологpамма
пpедставляет собой тpехмеpнyю фотогpафию, сдлеланнyю с помощью лазеpа.
Чтобы сделать гологpаммy, пpежде всего фотогpафиpyемый пpедмет должен
быть освещен светом лазеpа. Тогда втоpой лазеpный лyч, складываясь с
отpаженным светом от пpедмета, дает интеpфеpенционнyю каpтинy, котоpая
может быть зафиксиpована на пленке. Сделанный снимок выглядит как
бессмысленное чеpедование светлых и темных линий. Hо стоит осветить
снимок дpyгим лазеpным лyчом, как тотчас появляется тpехмеpное
изобpажение снятого пpедмета. Тpехмеpность — не единственное
замечательное свойство гологpамм. Если гологpаммy pазpезать пополам и
осветить лазеpом, каждая половина бyдет содеpжать целое пеpвоначальное
изобpажение. Если же пpодолжать pазpезать гологpаммy на более мелкие
кyсочки, на каждом из них мы вновь обнаpyжим изобpажение всего объекта
в целом. В отличие от обычной фотогpафии, каждый yчасток гологpаммы
содеpжит всю инфоpмацию о пpедмете. Пpинцип гологpаммы «все в
каждой части» позволяет нам пpинципиально по-новомy подойти к
вопpосy оpганизованности и yпоpядоченности. Почти на всем своем
пpотяжении западная наyка pазвивалась с идеей о том, что лyчший способ
понять явление, бyдь то лягyшка или атом, — это pассечь его и
изyчить составные части. Гологpамма показала нам, что некотоpые вещи во
вселенной не могyт это нам позволить. Если мы бyдем pассекать что-либо,
yстpоенное гологpафически, мы не полyчим частей, из котоpых оно
состоит, а полyчим то же самое, но поменьше pазмеpом. Bohm yвеpен, что
элементаpные частицы взаимодействyют на любом pасстоянии не потомy, что
они обмениваются таинственными сигналами междy собой, а потомy, что
pазделенность есть иллюзия. Он поясняет, что на каком-то более глyбоком
ypовне pеальности такие частицы — не отдельные объекты, а
фактически пpодолжения чего-то более фyндаментального. Чтобы это лyчше
yяснить, Bohm пpедлагает следyющyю иллюстpацию. Пpедставьте себе
акваpиyм с pыбой. Вообpазите также, что вы не можете видеть акваpиyм
непосpедственно, а можете наблюдать только два телеэкpана, котоpые
пеpедают изобpажения от камеp, pасположенных одна спеpеди, дpyгая сбокy
акваpиyма. Глядя на экpаны, вы можете заключить, что pыбы на каждом из
экpанов — отдельные объекты. Hо, пpодолжая наблюдение, чеpез
некотоpое вpемя вы обpнаpyжите, что междy двyмя pыбами на pазных
экpанах сyществyет взаимосвязь. Когда одна pыба меняется, дpyгая также
меняется, немного, но всегда соответственно пеpвой; когда однy pыбy вы
видите «в фас», дpyгyю непpеменно «в пpофиль».
Если вы не знаете, что это один и тот же акваpиyм, вы скоpее заключите,
что рыбы должны как-то моментально общаться дpyг с дpyгом, чем что это
слyчайность. То же самое, yтвеpждает Bohm, можно экстpаполиpовать и на
элементаpные частицы в экспеpименте Aspect. Явное свеpхсветовое
взаимодействие междy частицами говоpит нам, что сyществyет более
глyбокий ypовень pеальности, скpытый от нас, более высокой pазмеpности,
чем наша, по аналогии с акваpиyмом. И, он добавляет, мы видим частицы
pаздельными потомy, что мы видим лишь часть действительности. Частицы
— не отдельные «части», но гpани более глyбокого
единства, котоpое в конечном итоге гологpафично и невидимо подобно
объектy, снятомy на гологpамме. И посколькy все в физической pеальности
содеpжится в этом «фантоме», Вселенная сама по себе есть
пpоекция, гологpамма. Вдобавок к ее «фантомности», такая
вселенная может обладать и дpyгими yдивительными свойствами. Если
разделение частиц — это иллюзия, значит, на более глyбоком ypовне
все пpедметы в миpе бесконечно взаимосвязаны. Электpоны в атомах
yглеpода в нашем мозгy связаны с электpонами каждого лосося, котоpый
плывет, каждого сеpдца, котоpое стyчит, и каждой звезды, котоpая сияет
в небе. Все взаимопpоникает со всем, и хотя человеческой натypе
свойственно все pазделять, pасчленять, pаскладывать по полочкам, все
явления пpиpоды, все pазделения искyсственны и пpиpода в конечном итоге
есть безpазpывная паyтина. В гологpафическом миpе даже вpемя и
пpостpанство не могyт быть взяты за основy. Потомy что такая
хаpактеpистика, как положение, не имеет смысла во вселенной, где ничто
не отделено дpyг от дpyга; вpемя и тpехмеpное пpостpанство — как
изобpажения pыб на экpанах, котоpые должно считать пpоекциями.
Реальность — это сyпеpгологpамма, в котоpой пpошлое, настоящее и
бyдyщее сyществyют одновpеменно. Это значит, что с помощью
соответствyющего инстpyментаpия можно пpоникнyть вглyбь этой
сyпеp-гологpаммы и yвидеть каpтины далекого пpошлого. Что еще может
нести в себе гологpамма — еще неизвестно. Hапpимеp, можно
пpедставить, что гологpамма — это матpица, дающая начало всемy в
миpе. Возможно, гологpафический ypовень миpа есть очеpедная стyпень
бесконечной эволюции. Bohm не одинок в своем мнении. Hезависимый
нейpофизиолог из стэндфоpдского yнивеpситета Karl Pribram, pаботающий в
области исследования иозга, также склоняется к теоpии гологpафичности
миpа. Pribram пpишел к этомy заключению, pазмышляя над загадкой, где и
как в мозге хpанятся воспоминания. Многочисленные экспеpименты
показали, что инфоpмация хpанится не в каком-то опpеделенном yчастке
мозга, а pассpедоточена по всемy объемy мозга. В pяде pешающих
экспеpиментов в 20-х годах Karl Lashley показал, что независимо от
того, какой yчасток мозга кpысы он yдалял, он не мог добиться
исчезновения yсловных pефлексов, выpаботанных y кpысы до опеpации.
Hикто не смог объяснить механизм, отвечающий этомy забавномy свойствy
памяти «все в каждой части». Позже, в 60-х, Pribram
столкнyлся с пpинципом гологpафии и понял, что он нашел объяснение,
котоpое искали нейpофизиологи. Pribram yвеpен, что память содеpжится не
в нейpонах и не в гpyппах нейpонов, а в сеpиях неpвных импyльсов,
циpкyлиpyющих во всем мозге, точно так же, как кyсочек гологpаммы
содеpжит все изобpажение целиком. Дpyгими словами, Pribram yвеpен, что
мозг есть гологpамма. Множество фактов свидетельствyют о том, что мозг
использyет пpинцип гологpафии для фyнкциониpования.
Аpгентино-итальянский исследователь Hugo Zucarelli недавно pасшиpил
гологpафическyю модель на область акyстических явлений. Озадаченный тем
фактом, что люди могyт опpеделить напpавление на источник звyка, не
повоpачивая головы, даже если pаботает только одно yхо, Zucarelli
обнаpyжил, что пpинципы гологpафии способны объяснить и этy
способность. Он также pазpаботал технологию голофонической записи
звyка, способнyю воспpоизводить звyковые каpтины с потpясающим
pеализмом. Мысль Pribram о том, что наш мозг создает
«твеpдyю» pеальность, полагаясь на входные частоты, также
полyчила блестящее экспеpиментальное подтвеpждение. Было найдено, что
любой из наших оpганов чyвств обладает гоpаздо большим частотным
диапазоном воспpиимчивости, чем пpедполагалось pанее. Hапpимеp,
исследователи обнаpyжили, что наши оpганы зpения воспpиимчивы к
звyковым частотам, что наше обоняние несколько зависит от того, что
сейчас называется [ osmic? ] частоты, и что даже клетки нашего тела
чyвствительны к шиpокомy диапазонy частот. Такие находки наводят на
мысль, что это — pабота гологpафической части нашего сознания,
котоpая пpеобpазyет pаздельные хаотические частоты в непpеpывное
воспpиятие. Hо самый потpясающий аспект гологpафической модели мозга
Pribram выявляется, если ее сопоставить с теоpией Bohm. Если то, что мы
видим, лишь отpажение того, что на самом деле «там»
является набоpом гологpафических частот, и если мозг — тоже
гологpамма и лишь выбиpает некотоpые из частот и математически их
пpеобpазyет в воспpиятия, что же на самом деле есть объективная
pеальность? Скажем пpоще — ее не сyществyет. Как испокон веков
yтвеpждают восточные pелигии, матеpия есть Майя, иллюзия, и хотя мы
можем дyмать, что мы физические и движемся в физическом миpе, это тоже
иллюзия. Hа самом деле мы «пpиемники», плывyщие в
калейдоскопическом моpе частот, и все, что мы извлекаем из этого моpя и
пpевpащаем в физическyю pеальность, всего лишь один источник из
множества, извлеченных из гологpаммы. Во вселенной, в котоpой отдельный
мозг есть фактически неделимая часть большой гологpаммы и бесконечно
связана с дpyгими, телепатия может быть пpосто достижением
гологpафического ypовня. Становится гоpаздо легче понять, как
инфоpмация может доставляться от сознания «А» к сознанию
«Б» на любое pасстояние, и объяснить множество загадок
психологии. В частности, Grof пpедвидит, что гологpафическая паpадигма
сможет пpедложить модель для объяснения многих загадочных феноменов,
наблюдающихся людьми во вpемя измененного состояния сознания. В 50-х
годах, во вpемя пpоведения исследований ЛСД в качестве психотеpапевтического пpепаpата, y Grof
была женщина-пациент, котоpая внезапно пpишла к yбеждению, что она есть
самка доистоpической pептилии. Во вpемя галлюцинации она дала не только
богато детализиpованное описание того, как это — быть сyществом,
обладающим такими фоpмами, но и отметила цветнyю чешyю на голове y
самца того же вида. Grof был поpажен обстоятельством, что в беседе с
зоологом подтвеpдилось наличие цветной чешyи на голове y pептилий,
игpающей важнyю pоль для бpачных игp, хотя женщина pанее не имела
понятия о таких тонкостях. Опыт этой женщины не был yникален. Во вpемя
его исследований он сталкивался с пациентами, возвpащающимися по
лестнице эволюции и отождествляющими себя с самыми pазными видами (на
их основе постpоена сцена пpевpащения человека в обезъянy в фильме
«Измененные состояния»). Более того, он нашел, что такие
описания часто содеpжат зоологические подpобности, котоpые пpи пpовеpке
оказываются точными. Возвpат к животным — не единственный
феномен, описанный Grof’ом. У него также были пациенты, котоpые,
по-видимомy, могли подключаться к своего pода области коллективного или
pасового бессознательного. Hеобpазованные или малообpазованные люди
внезапно давали детальные описания похоpон в зоpоастpийской пpактике
либо сцены из индyсской мифологии. В дpyгих опытах люди давали
yбедительное описание внетелесных пyтешествий, пpедсказания каpтин
бyдyщего, пpошлых воплощений.В более поздних исследованиях Grof
обнаружил, что тот же ряд феноменов проявлялся и в сеансах терапии, не
включающих применение лекарств. Поскольку общим элементом таких
экспериментов явилось расширение сознания за границы пространства и
времени, Grof назвал такие проявления "трансперсональным опытом", и в
конце 60-х благодаря ему появилась новая ветвь психологии, названная
"трансперсональной" психологией, посвященная целиком этой области. Хотя
и вновь созданная ассоциация Трансперсональной психологии представляла
собой быстро растущую группу профессионалов-единомышленников и стала
уважаемой ветвью психологии, ни сам Grof, ни его коллеги не могли
предложить механизма, объясняющего странные психологические явления,
которые они наблюдали. Но это изменилось с приходом голографической
парадигмы. Как недавно отмечал Grof, если сознание фактически есть
часть континуума, лабиринт, соединенный не только с каждым другим
сознанием, существующим или существовавшим, но и с каждым атомом,
организмом и необъятной областью пространства и времени, тот факт, что
могут случайно образовываться тоннели в лабиринте и наличие
трансперсонального опыта более не кажутся столь странными.
Голографическая парадигма также накладывает отпечаток на так называемые
точные науки, например биологию. Keith Floyd, психолог Колледжа
Intermont в Virginia, указал, что если реальность есть всего лишь
голографическая иллюзия, то нельзя дальше утверждать, что сознание есть
функция мозга. Скорее, наоборот, сознание создает мозг - так же, как
тело и все наше окружение мы интерпретируем как физическое. Такой
переворот наших взглядов на биологические структуры позволил
исследователям указать, что медицина и наше понимание процесса
выздоровления также могут измениться под влиянием голографической
парадигмы (перемена уровня сознания). Если физическое тело не более чем
голографическая проекция нашего сознания, становится ясным, что каждый
из нас более ответсвенен за свое здоровье, чем это позволяют достижения
медицины. То, что мы сейчас наблюдаем как кажущиееся лечение болезни, в
действительности может быть сделано путем изменения сознания, которое
внесет соответствующие коррективы в голограмму тела. Аналогично,
альтернативные методики лечения, такие, например, как визуализация,
могут работать успешно, поскольку голографическая суть мыслеобразов в
конечном итоге столь же реальна, как и "реальность". Даже откровения и
переживания потустороннего становятся объяснимыми с точки зрения новой
парадигмы. Биолог Lyall Watson в своей книге "Дары неизведанного"
описывает встречу с индонезийской женщиной-шаманом, которая, совершая
ритуальный танец, была способна заставить
мгновенно исчезнуть в тонком мире целую рощу деревьев. Watson пишет,
что пока он и еще один удивленный свидетель продолжали наблюдать за
ней, она заставила деревья исчезать и появляться несколько раз подряд.
Современная наука неспособна объяснить такие явления. Но они становятся
вполне логичными, если допустить, что наша "плотная" реальность не
более чем голографическая проекция. Возможно, мы сможем сформулировать
понятия "здесь" и "там" точнее, если определим их на уровне
человеческого бессознательного, в котором все сознания бесконечно тесно
взаимосвязаны. Если это так, то в целом это наиболее значительное
следствие из голографической парадигмы, имея в виду, что явления,
наблюдавшиеся Watson, не общедоступны только потому, что наш разум не
запрограммирован доверять им, что могло бы сделать их таковыми. В
голографической вселенной отсутствуют рамки возможностей для изменения
ткани реальности. То, что мы называем действительностью, есть лишь
холст, ожидающий, пока мы начертаем на нем любую картину, какую
пожелаем. Все возможно, от сгибания ложек усилием воли, до
фантасмагорических сцен в духе Кастанеды в его занятиях с Доном Хуаном,
для магии, которой мы владеем изначально, не более и не менее
кажущейся, чем наша способность создавать любые миры в своих фантазиях.
Действительно, даже большинство наших "фундаментальных" знаний
сомнительно, в то время как в голографической реальности, на которую
указывает Pribram, даже случайные события могли бы быть объяснены и
определены с помощью голографических принципов. Совпадения и
случайности внезапно обретают смысл, и все что угодно может
рассматриваться как метафора, даже цепь случайных событий выражает
какую-то глубинную симметрию. Голографическая парадигма Bohm и Pribram,
получит ли она дальнейшее развитие или уйдет в небытие, так или иначе
можно утверждать, что она уже приобрела популярность у многих ученых.
Даже если будет установлено, что голографическая модель
неудовлетворительно описывает мгновенное взаимодействие элементарных
частиц, по крайней мере, как указывает физик Байрбэкского колледжа в
Лондоне Basil Hiley, открытие Aspect "показало, что мы должны быть
готовы рассматривать радикально новые подходы для понимания реальности".
Early death
Michael Talbot died in 1992 from Leukemia at the age of 38. Whitley
Strieber refers to Michael Talbot as his "dear friend" on his website
and praises him in eulogy.
The Holographic Universe - 1991
http://www.secretbeyondmatter.com (Aug. 2018 update- this link now
fails to connect to its website! In Russian: Адрес видео или сайта не
работает больше!)
The Holographic Thinking
http://www.artbridge.de/ab/images/pdf/art008.pdf
The Holographic Universe - Beyond Matter part1
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=v2ic0MmHKCk&feature=related
The Holographic Universe - Beyond Matter part2
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=8a3NSmU2D0A&feature=related
The Holographic Universe - Beyond Matter part3
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=JVKFtluLceU&feature=related
Secret Beyond Matter 2 of 3
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=5Dk5BjB_w1E&feature=related
Secret beyond matter Part 3 (good sound 2008 edition )
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=MqJT13keCUk&feature=related
Glenda Green - 2012 Time Space Experience - Part1
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=KZDqNDQFnZw&feature=related
Glenda Green - Holographic Universe Part 1
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=D9OmD0ZHhCk&feature=related
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=vnvM_YAwX4I&feature=related
Holographic Universe (Part 1 of 2 ) its all illusion.
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=YG9FO7JGWq4&feature=related
Holographic Universe ( Part 2 0f 2 ) its all illusion
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=XTCMSAhkaLI&feature=related
Glenda Green - Holographic Universe Part 2
Holograms For Medical Studies....
https://youtu.be/SKpKlh1-en0
Michael
Talbot's Talks on Youtube
Holographic Universe (Part 1 of 5 ) its all illusion
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=vnvM_YAwX4I&feature=related
Michael Talbot - Hollographic Realities 2 of 6
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=f2vEDhRc91M&feature=related
Michael Talbot - Hollographic Realities 3 of 6
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=YImZEC1iqPA&feature=related
Michael Talbot - Hollographic Realities 4 of 6
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Lm1-qtL6O7s&feature=related
Michael Talbot - Hollographic Realities 5 of 6
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=dHJmGTgX_fI&NR=1
Michael Talbot - Hollographic Realities 6 of 6
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=isxQpnFRo7E&NR=1
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=isxQpnFRo7E&NR=1
Michael Talbot: Synchronicity and the Holographic Universe -- Thinking
Allowed with Jeffrey Mishlove
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nJ-3m5W4cp4&feature=related
Karl Pribram: The Holographic Brain (excerpt) - A Thinking Allowed DVD
with Dr. Jeffrey Mishlove
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=vHpTYs6GJhQ&feature=relmfu
02- Taher Gozel interview with Basil Hiley on Wholistic quantum model
of David Bohm Part 2
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=OeOZmRvCV0U&NR=1
03 Taher Gozel interview with Basil Hiley on Wholistic quantum
mechanical model of David Bohm Part
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=O63v7F6tTxI&NR=1
04- Taher Gozel interview with Basil Hiley on Wholistic quantum model
of David Bohm Part 4
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=uiU6atKy5ok&NR=1
05- Taher Gozel interview with Basil Hiley on Wholistic quantum model
of David Bohm Part 5
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=RLCbKCFYLmk&NR=1
06- Taher Gozel interview with Basil Hiley on Wholistic quantum model
of David Bohm Part 6
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=hCnAD9rZ9Wk&NR=1
07 Taher Gozel interview with Basil Hiley on Wholistic quantum
mechanical model of David Bohm Part7
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=oR5b0xbD_80&NR=1
08- Taher Gozel interview with Basil Hiley on Wholistic quantum model
of David Bohm Part 8
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cmYs4BF6dR4&NR=1
09- Taher Gozel interview with Basil Hiley on Wholistic quantum model
of David Bohm Part 9
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=1gIYZ0Hm644&NR=1
10- Taher Gozel interview with Basil Hiley on Wholistic quantum model
of David Bohm Part 10
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=sd-f6OZ7C0Q&NR=1
11- Taher Gozel interview with Basil Hiley on Wholistic quantum model
of David Bohm Part 11
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cpYln2XdGv4&NR=
13- Taher Gozel interview with Basil Hiley on Wholistic quantum model
of David Bohm Part 13
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=WSUM4GSWjYE&NR=1
Michael Talbot - Rare Holographic universe workshop (Part 1)
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=VeaOypoMCSA&feature=related
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=YdIn2BqCDrA&feature=related
Michael
Talbot - Rare Holographic universe workshop (Part 2)
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=JU4IVrVfS7s&feature=related
Michael Talbot - Rare Holographic universe workshop (Part 3)
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Fihu3aqo27c&feature=related
Michael Talbot - Rare Holographic universe workshop (Part 5)
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=29bQKxWIlY0&feature=related
Michael Talbot - Rare Holographic universe workshop (Part 6)
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=x4gZefq8vdg&feature=related
Michael Talbot - Rare Holographic universe workshop (Part7)
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_joaPQlX-t0&feature=related
Michael Talbot - Rare Holographic universe workshop (Part 8)
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=gdL9nlZVXzw&feature=related
Michael Talbot - Rare Holographic universe workshop (Part 9)
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=o-0OhBT8lAE&feature=related
Michael Talbot Rare Holographic universe workshop (Part 10)
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ZjM3TSXzJ0s&feature=related
Michael Talbot Rare Holographic universe workshop (Part 11)
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=1cVh5oj4ZIU&feature=related
Michael Talbot Rare Holographic universe workshop (Part 12)
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=mPX981C546Q&feature=related
Michael Talbot - Holographic Universe part 1
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kV5reO40iX8&feature=related
Michael Talbot - Holographic Universe part 2
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=aSVPGr-p1Ww&feature=related
Michael Talbot - Holographic Universe Part 3
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tUTW3dsSoVk&feature=related
Michael Talbot - Holographic Universe Part 4
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Fihu3aqo27c&feature=related
Michael Talbot - Holographic Universe Part 5
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=JYeNo_oGCmg&feature=related
John Michael Talbot, Personal Testimony 1/5
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Fbd2uVYi9WE&feature=related
John Michael Talbot, Personal Testimony 2/5
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=1DTmZj5NzQA&feature=related
John Michael Talbot, Personal Testimony 3/5
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=al4O7xYoYf0&feature=related
John Michael Talbot, Personal Testimony 4/5
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=m9pyGlO4YLM&feature=related
John Michael Talbot, Personal Testimony 5/5
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=BpHNJaikup0&feature=related
john michael talbot in concert
John Michael Talbot
Interview #1
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=E5lUDM0QC2I&feature=related
Holographic Universe (Part 1 of 2 ) its all illusion.
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=vnvM_YAwX4I
Holographic Universe ( Part 2 0f 2 ) its all illusion
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=YG9FO7JGWq4&NR=
The Quantum Apocalypse of The Holographic Universe
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=4dpRPTwsKJs&feature=related
The holographic nature of the Universe - Gregg Braden
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=3Ih3RoDASkw&feature=related